Jvc Get0602 001A Users Manual CoverRear_KW ADV792[J]f

GET0602-001A to the manual b729d2d8-838d-4521-b19a-a47b84b634e3

2015-01-26

: Jvc Jvc-Get0602-001A-Users-Manual-320825 jvc-get0602-001a-users-manual-320825 jvc pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 362

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Still having trouble??
USA ONLY

Call 1-800-252-5722

ENGLISH

RECEPTOR DVD CON MONITOR

KW-ADV792/KW-AVX720

ESPAÑOL

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

KW-ADV792/KW-AVX720

RÉCEPTEUR DVD ET MONITEUR KW-ADV792/KW-AVX720

FRANÇAIS

Instructions

Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

http://www.jvc.com
We can help you!

CoverRear_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 1

KW-ADV792/KW-AVX720

EN, SP, FR
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 12.
Para cancelar la demonstración en pantalla, consulte la página 12.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 12.

0109DTSMDTJEIN

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.

INSTRUCTIONS
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS

For customer Use:
Enter below the Model
No. and Serial No. which
are located on the top or
bottom of the cabinet. Retain
this information for future
reference.
Model No.
Serial No.

GET0602-001A
[J]

1/6/09 9:26:03 AM

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.

INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Caution:
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: (For U.S.A.) Visible and/or invisible class II laser radiation when open. Do not stare into beam.
(For Canada) Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with
optical instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

For safety...
[European Union only]

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.

Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.

2
EN02-11_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 2

12/22/08 9:56:04 AM

How to read this manual

This product has a fluorescent lamp that contains
mercury. Disposal of these materials may be
regulated in your community due to environmental
considerations. For disposal or recycling
information, please contact your local authorities or
for USA, the Electronic Industries Alliance:

• < > is used to indicate the variable screens/
menus/operations/settings that appear on the
touch panel.
• [ ] is used to indicate the buttons on the touch
panel.
page number) is used to indicate the
•(
reference page number of the related topics/
operations/settings.
• Operation index: To locate easily the desired
63)
operations/functions. (
• Indication language: English indications
are used for the purpose of explanation. You
can select the indication language from the
. (
15)

Cautions on the monitor:
• The monitor built in this unit has been produced
with high precision, but it may have some
ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not
malfunction.
• Do not expose the monitor to direct sunlight.
• Do not operate the touch panel using a ball-point
pen or similar tool with the sharp tip.
Touch the buttons on the touch panel with your
finger directly (if you are wearing a glove, take it
off).
• When the temperature is very cold or very hot...
– Chemical changes occur inside, causing
malfunction.
– Pictures may not appear clearly or may move
slowly. Pictures may not be synchronized with
the sound or picture quality may decline in such
environments.

ENGLISH

Caution:

How to reset your unit

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased (except the
registered Bluetooth device). (
27, 38)

How to forcibly eject a disc

WARNINGS:
(To prevent accidents and damage)
• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a
location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift
lever operations.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices
such as air bags.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate the unit while driving.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while
driving.

Back

• You can forcibly eject the loaded disc even if the disc is
locked. To lock/unlock the disc,
30.
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.

3
EN02-11_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 3

12/22/08 9:56:06 AM

ENGLISH

Playable disc type
Disc type
DVD
• DTS sound cannot be
reproduced.

Recording format, file type, etc

Playable

DVD-Video (Region Code: 1) *

DVD-Audio/DVD-ROM
DVD Recordable/Rewritable
(DVD-R/-RW *2, +R/+RW *3)
• DVD Video: UDF bridge
• DVD-VR
• MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/
WMA/WAV: ISO 9660 level 1,
level 2, Romeo, Joliet

DVD-Video
DVD-VR
MPEG1/MPEG2
JPEG
MP3/WMA/WAV
AAC/DivX/MPEG4/DVD+VR/DVD-RAM

Dual Disc

DVD side

CD/VCD

Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA)

Non-DVD side
VCD (Video CD)
DTS-CD/SVCD (Super Video CD)/CD-ROM/
CD-I (CD-I Ready)
CD Recordable/Rewritable
CD-DA
(CD-R/-RW)
VCD (Video CD)
• ISO 9660 level 1, level 2, Romeo,
MPEG1/MPEG2
Joliet
JPEG
MP3/WMA/WAV
AAC/DivX/MPEG4
1

* If you insert a DVD Video disc of an incorrect Region Code, “Region code error” appears on the screen.
*2 DVD-R recorded in multi-border format is also playable (except for dual layer discs). DVD-RW dual layer discs are not
playable.
*3 It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (Video format only) discs. “DVD” is selected as its disc type when a
+R/+RW disc is loaded. +RW double layer discs are not playable.

Caution for DualDisc playback
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore, the
use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.

4
EN02-11_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 4

1/12/09 4:14:10 PM

How to read this manual ..............................
How to reset your unit .................................
How to forcibly eject a disc...........................
Playable disc type ........................................

3
3
3
4

INTRODUCTIONS
Basic operations .................................................
• Using the monitor panel/touch panel .........
• Using the remote controller (RM-RK252)....

6
6
9

Preparation .................................................. 12
AV MENU
AV Menu operations .................................... 13
OPERATIONS
Listening to the radio ................................... 29
Disc operations............................................. 30
• Operation buttons on the screen ................
• Operations using the remote controller
(RM-RK252) ................................................

32
33

USB operations ............................................ 37

EXTERNAL DEVICES
Using the Bluetooth® devices....................... 38
• Connecting a new Bluetooth device ...........
• Using the Bluetooth cellular phone ............
• Using the Bluetooth audio player ...............

38
39
41

ENGLISH

CONTENTS

Listening to the CD changer ......................... 41
Listening to the satellite radio ..................... 42
• Tuning in to a channel you want.................

Listening to the HD Radio™ Broadcast ......... 44
Listening to the iPod/iPhone ....................... 45
• When connected with the USB cable ..........
• When connected with the interface
adapter .......................................................

45
46

Using other external components ................ 47
• AV-INPUT ....................................................
• EXT-INPUT ..................................................

47
48

REFERENCES
More about this unit ....................................
Maintenance ................................................
Troubleshooting...........................................
Specifications ...............................................
Operation index ...........................................

48
55
56
61
63

5
EN02-11_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 5

12/22/08 9:56:08 AM

ENGLISH

Basic operations
Using the monitor panel/touch panel
Display screen, (

USB cable from the rear of the unit, (

13)

Display the screen, (

37)

Display/exit the Short Cut icons, (

SOURCE

MP3
FLAT

3:00

5
6

0:02:26

Folder Name
File Name
Track Title
Artist Name
Disc Title

1 Resets the unit (
3).
2 • Turns on the power.

3
4

• Attenuates the sound (if the power is on).
• Turns off the power. (Hold)
Changes the display information. *1
• Adjusts the volume.
• Bluetooth PHONE : Adjusts the volume of
the incoming calls. *2
Remote sensor
Touch panel (see the following pages).
• Most of the operations are explained using the
touch panel unless mentioned otherwise.
• The screen will turn off if no operation is
done for about 10 seconds (depends on the
setting). (
18)

7 Motion sensor
8 Displays screen.
9 • Selects the source. *3
TUNER/HD Radio = SAT = DISC
(DVD/VCD/CD) = USB/ iPod =
CD-CH/iPod/EXT-IN = Bluetooth
PHONE = Bluetooth AUDIO = AV-IN
= (back to the beginning)

• Bluetooth PHONE : Displays the
screen. (Hold) *4
p • Selects “USB/ iPod” as the source.
• Switches the setting between “HEAD MODE” and
“iPod MODE” (Hold)
*1 – *4 :

6
EN02-11_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 6

1/22/09 10:03:30 AM

[Open] : Opens the monitor panel.
[Eject] : Ejects the disc.
[Close] : Closes the monitor panel.
[Tilt +] : Tilts open the monitor panel.
[Tilt –] : Tilts close the monitor panel.
• Ejects the disc and display
screen. (Hold)
• Closes the monitor panel when the panel is
opened.
w Monitor panel
*1 Available display information varies among the
playback sources. (
53)
*2 This adjustment does not affect the volume level of
other sources.
*3 Available sources depend on the external components
you have connected, media you have attached, and
the settings you have made. ( 17, 18)
*4 Only when Bluetooth phone is connected.
*5 Shaded items cannot be used.
You can also adjust the
volume by moving your
finger on the touch panel
as illustrated.

When you drag your finger on the touch panel, it
functions in the same way as touching [5 / ∞ /
4 / ¢].

screen
You can also select the source using the touch
panel.

ENGLISH

q • Displays screen. *5

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

3:00

87. 5 MHz

ABC Radio

FLAT
ST

AM
BAND

Source Menu

Current source

Exit

Touch panel and button illumination
Dependable on the setting.
(

18)

• Turned off:
When no operation is done for about 10 seconds.
• Turned on again:
– When you touch the touch panel or move your
hand nearby.
– When you use the remote controller.
– When a call/SMS comes in (for Bluetooth
cellular phone).
– When the signal from the rear view camera
comes in
• Always turned on:
– When screen is displayed.
– When screen is displayed.
– When screen is displayed.
– When is set to .

Caution on volume setting:
Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise
compared with other sources. Lower the volume before
playing these digital sources to avoid damaging the
speakers by sudden increase of the output level.
Continued on the next page

INTRODUCTIONS
EN02-11_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 7

1/23/09 9:51:28 AM

ENGLISH

Short Cut icons
You can easily access some frequently used functions by using the Short Cut icons.
Available icons vary among the sources.

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

87. 5 MHz

Displays menu.

ABC Radio

FLAT
ST

(

18)

Changes the sound mode. (
3:00

19)

AM
BAND

Short Cut window appears.
• To exit from the window, press the button again.

Turns on or off Track/Chapter Repeat.
(

22)

Displays menu.
(

15)

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

Activates function.

87. 5 MHz

(

FLAT
ST

26)

Displays menu. (
3:00

26)

AM
BAND

Displays menu. (

17)

Press a Short Cut icon.

Displays menu.
(

Setup
Beep
Telephone Muting
Illumination
Motion Sensitiv.
Initialize

21)

Normal
Proximity/Motion
Proxi/Motion-LCD
Touch Panel
Touch Panel - LCD

Back

The corresponding screen is displayed.

8
EN02-11_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 8

1/12/09 4:14:15 PM

Using the remote controller (RM-RK252)
ENGLISH

Installing the batteries

R03/LR03/AAA

Insert the batteries into the remote controller by
matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

Caution:
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire, or the like.
If the effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace the batteries.
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

The following describes all the available operations
for all the sources.
• To easily locate the available operations between
different type of files,
33, 34.

button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 5/∞ buttons

• TUNER: Selects the preset stations.
• HD Radio: Selects a multicast channel.
• SAT: Selects the categories.

Continued on the next page

INTRODUCTIONS
EN02-11_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 9

12/22/08 9:56:11 AM

ENGLISH

• DISC/USB:
– DVD-Video: Selects the title.
– DVD-VR: Selects the program/Playlist.
– USB/CD-CH/MP3/WMA/WAV: Selects the
folders if included.
• iPod:
– 5 : Enters the main menu (then 5 / ∞ /
4 / ¢ work as menu
selecting buttons.)
5 : Returns to the previous menu.
∞ : Confirms the selection.
– ∞ : Pauses or resumes playback.
4 / ¢ buttons
• TUNER/HD Radio:
– Searches for stations automatically if pressed
briefly.
– Searches for stations manually if pressed and
held.
• SAT:
– Selects a channel if pressed briefly.
– Selects a channel rapidly if pressed and held.
• DISC/USB/CD-CH:
– Reverse skip/forward skip if pressed briefly.
– Reverse search/forward search if pressed and
held.
• iPod:
– Reverse skip/forward skip if pressed briefly.
– Reverse search/forward search if pressed and
held.
• iPod:
– Reverse skip/forward skip if pressed briefly.
– Reverse search/forward search if pressed and
held.
In menu selecting mode:
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
∞ to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
• Bluetooth AUDIO:
– Reverse skip/forward skip if pressed briefly.

3 VOL (volume) + / – buttons

• Adjusts the volume level.
• Bluetooth PHONE:
– Adjusts the volume of the incoming calls.
2nd VOL (volume) buttons
• Not applicable for this unit.
4 * ASPECT button

• Changes the aspect ratio of the playback
pictures.
5

PHONE button
Applicable only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected.
• Displays screen.
• Displays menu if pressed and held.
• Answers incoming calls.

6 * SETUP button

• Not applicable for this unit.
7 * TOP M (menu) button

• DVD-Video: Shows the disc menu.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Original Program screen.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
8 OSD (on-screen display) button

• Shows the on-screen bar.
• Does not function as “*.”
9 SHIFT button

• Functions with other buttons.
p DISP (display) button

• Changes the display information.
q 1 / ¡ buttons

• MP3/WMA/WAV/USB/ iPod: Reverse search/
forward search.

10
EN02-11_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 10

12/22/08 9:56:11 AM

• Selects the source.
e 3 (play) / 8 (pause) button

• DISC/USB/ iPod: Starts playback/pauses.
• Bluetooth PHONE: Answers incoming calls.
• Bluetooth AUDIO: Starts playback.
r

(end call) button
• Bluetooth PHONE: Ends the call.
BAND button
• TUNER/HD Radio/SAT: Selects the bands.
7 (stop) button

• DISC/USB/ iPod: Stops playback.
• Bluetooth AUDIO: Pauses.
t * RETURN button

• VCD: Returns to the PBC menu.

o DIRECT button

• DISC/USB: Enters direct search mode for
chapter/title/program/playlist/folder/track
when pressed with SHIFT button (
34).
CLR (clear) button
• DISC/USB: Erases the misentry when pressed
with SHIFT button.

ENGLISH

w SOURCE button

SURROUND button
• Not applicable for this unit.
* Functions as number buttons when pressed with SHIFT
button.
– DISC/USB : Enters chapter/title/program/playlist/
folder/track number after entering search mode by
pressing SHIFT and DIRECT. ( 34)
– TUNER/HD Radio/SAT : (Number 1 to 6) :
Enters preset station/channel number.

y * MENU button

• DVD-Video: Shows the disc menu.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Playlist screen.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
u * % / ﬁ buttons

• DVD-Video: Makes selection/settings.
• CD-CH: Changes discs in the magazine.

This unit is equipped with the steering wheel
remote control function.
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate
volume) for connection.
• Some of the operations might be different with
the steering wheel remote control function.

@ / # buttons

• DVD-Video: Makes selection/settings.
• MPEG Video: Skips back or forward by about
5 minutes.
ENT (enter) button
• Confirms selection.
i DUAL button

• Not applicable for this unit.
• Does not function as “#.”

INTRODUCTIONS 11
EN02-11_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 11

1/12/09 4:16:55 PM

ENGLISH

Preparation
Canceling the display demonstration and setting the clock

~ Turn on the power.

@ Set the clock.
Setup
Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer

Ÿ Display screen.

Bright
Blue
Once
Auto
6 PM

Dimmer Time Set

Auto
7 AM

Back

Setup

or
BAND

! Display screen.

Time Set
Time Format
OSD Clock
Clock Adjust
Time Zone
DST

1
12Hours
Off

00 AM
24Hours

45 PM

Back

AV Menu

Setup
Time Set
Time Format
OSD Clock
Clock Adjust
Time Zone
DST
Back

⁄ Cancel the demonstration.

¤ Finish the procedure.

Select [Off].
Setup

Back

Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer
Dimmer Time Set

Metal
Blue
Once
Auto
6 PM

Auto
7 AM

Back

12 INTRODUCTIONS
EN12-19_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 12

1/13/09 11:24:12 AM

You can use the for most of the
operations and settings. The available menu items
shown on the touch panel, depends on the selected
source.
• Non-available items will be shaded.
The following steps are one of the fundamental
procedures.
• You can perform the operations/change the settings
by following these steps unless mentioned otherwise.

! Press the desired icon/item to perform
the desired operations/settings.
Moves to the preceding
menu page

Indicates the next hierarchy
level/setting item exists

Setup
Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer
Dimmer Time Set

~ Turn on the power.

ENGLISH

AV Menu operations

Bright
Blue
Once
Auto
6 PM

Auto
7 AM

Back

Returns to the previous
screen.

Ÿ Display screen.

Indicates the remaining
time before the current
screen exit automatically.

Moves to the succeeding
menu page

• Some of the settings do not open the sub-setting
screen, but just selecting an option will change the
setting.
• To exit from the setting, press [Exit].

or
BAND

AV Menu

Setup
:
Equalizer :
Sound
:
Mode
:
List
:
Bluetooth :

14 – 18
19
20
21 – 23
24 – 25
26 – 28

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN12-19_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 13

12/22/08 9:57:13 AM

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

Menu item
Demonstration

Wall Paper

Selectable setting/item
♦ Off
♦ On

: Cancels.
: Activates the demonstration on the screen. To stop it
temporarily, touch the screen. (
12)

You can select the background picture of the screen.
♦ Bright, Future, Horizon, Plain

You can select the color of the background picture.
♦ Blue, Light-Blue, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Purple, Dark-Blue,
Dark-Green, Brown, Light-Brown, Black

Scroll

♦ Off
♦ Once
♦ Auto

: Cancels.
: Scrolls the displayed information once.
: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
• Touching the information bar scrolls the text regardless of the setting.

Dimmer

♦ Off
♦ On
♦ Auto
♦ Dimmer Time Set

Dimmer Time Set

Sets the Dimmer On (

Dimmer Level

You can select the brightness for dimmer.
♦ 01 (bright), 02 (middle), 03 (dark)

Bright

You can adjust the brightness of the screen.
♦ –15 to +15; Initial 00

Picture Adjust *2

You can adjust the following to make the screen clear and legible for watching
the playback picture. The setting will be stored—one for “DISC/USB/
iPod” (common) and the other for “AV-IN.”
Press [5] or [∞] to adjust. (–15 to +15; Initial 00)

Display

Color

♦ Bright
♦ Contrast
♦ Color
♦ Tint

:
:
:
:

Cancels.
Activates dimmer.
Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights. *1
Activates the Dimmer Time setting (see below).
)/Off (

:
:
:
:

) times.

Adjust if the picture is too bright or too dark.
Adjust the contrast.
Adjust the color of the picture—lighter or darker.
Adjust the tint if the human skin color is unnatural.

*1 The ILLUMINATION CONTROL lead connection is required. (See the Installation/Connection Manual.)
*2 Adjustable only when the source is “ DISC/USB/ iPod” (the media must contain pictures or videos) or “AV-IN.”

14
EN12-19_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 14

1/6/09 9:32:15 AM

Menu item

You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.

ENGLISH

Aspect *3

Selectable setting/item

Aspect ratio of the incoming signal
4:3

16:9

Regular:
For 4:3 original pictures
Full:
For 16:9 original pictures

Display

Panorama:
For viewing 4:3 pictures
naturally on the wide screen
Auto:

• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is automatically
selected to match the incoming signals.
• For the other video sources: Aspect ratio is
fixed to .

Language *4

Select the indication language shown on the screen.
♦ English, Español, Français, Deutsch, Italiano, Nederlands, Svenska,
Dansk, Руccĸий, Português
• The characters you can enter for assigning the titles also change according to
the language selected. (
52)

Time Set

Initial 1:00AM (

Time Format

Select either 12-hour system or 24-hour system. (
♦ 12 Hours, 24 Hours

OSD Clock

♦ Off
♦ On

12)
12)

: Cancels.
: The clock time is displayed on the playback picture.

♦ Off
♦ Auto

Time Zone *5, *6

Select your residential area from one of the following time zones for clock
adjustment.
Alaska, Pacific, Mountain, Central, Eastern, Atlantic, Newfoundland

Clock

Clock Adjust *5

: Cancels.
: The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the clock
time data provided via the satellite radio channel.

DST (Daylight Saving Activates this if your residential area is subject to DST.
♦ Off
: Cancels.
Time) *5, *6
♦ On
: Activates daylight saving time.
*3
*4
*5
*6

Not adjustable when no picture is shown.
Turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.
Appears only when SIRIUS Satellite Radio or XM Satellite Radio is connected.
Appears only when is set to .

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN12-19_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 15

12/22/08 9:57:14 AM

ENGLISH

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

Menu Language *7

Select the menu language; Initial English (

54)

Select the audio language; Initial English (

54)

Audio Language *
Subtitle *7

Select the subtitle language or erase the subtitle .; Initial Off
(
54)

Monitor Type *7
16:9

4:3PS

4:3LB

Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture on the external
monitor.
♦ 16:9
: Select when the aspect ratio of the external
monitor is 16:9.
♦ 4:3LB
: Select when the aspect ratio of the external
(Letterbox)/
monitor is 4:3.
4:3PS
(Pan Scan)
Select the position of the on-screen bar. (
♦1
: Higher position.
♦2
: Lower position.

File Type *7

Select the playback file type when a disc/USB contains different types of
files. You can store this setting separately for each source—
“DISC/USB.”
♦ Audio
: Plays back audio files.
♦ Still Picture
: Plays back JPEG files.
♦ Video
: Plays back MPEG1/MPEG2 files.
♦ Audio&Video : Plays back audio files and MPEG1/MPEG2 files.

iPod Artwork *8

While playing back a track (in “HEAD MODE”), Artwork recorded for the
track is displayed on the monitor.
♦ Off
: Cancels.
♦ On
: Activates Artwork display. To display the artwork,
press DISP repeatedly.
• It takes 5 seconds or more to display an
Artwork and no operations are available while
loading it.

Disc

OSD Position *7

36)

D. (Digital) Audio Output *7 Select the signal format emitted through the DIGITAL OUT (optical)
terminal. (
53)
♦ PCM
: Select this when connecting an amplifier or a
decoder incompatible with Dolby Digital or MPEG
Audio, or when connecting to a recording device.
♦ Dolby D
: Select this when connecting an amplifier or a
decoder compatible with Dolby Digital.
♦ Stream
: Select this when connecting an amplifier or a
decoder compatible with Dolby Digital or MPEG
Audio.
*7 Selectable only for “DISC/USB.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
*8 Skip the track so that your setting takes effect.

16
EN12-19_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 16

1/12/09 4:34:31 PM

Disc

Selectable setting/item

Down Mix *9

When playing back a multi-channel disc, this setting affects the signals
reproduced through the LINE OUT jacks.
♦ Dolby Surr.
: Select this to enjoy multi-channel surround audio by
connecting an amplifier compatible with Dolby Surround.
♦ Stereo
: Normally select this.

D. (Dynamic)
Range Compres.
(Compression) *9

You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing Dolby Digital
software.
♦ Auto
: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded
software.
♦ On
: Select to always use this function.

IF Band Width

♦ Auto

Tuner

♦ Wide

Area Setting

♦ US
♦ Europe
♦ SA

: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
: Subject to the interference from adjacent stations, but
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect
will remain.
: When using in North/Central/South America. FM/AM
intervals are set to 200 kHz/10 kHz.
: When using in any other areas. FM/AM intervals are set to
50 kHz (100 kHz during auto search)/9 kHz.
: When using in South American countries where FM interval
is 100 kHz. AM interval is set to 10 kHz.

Sirius ID *10

Your SIRIUS identification number appears on the monitor.

AV Input *11

You can determine the use of LINE IN and VIDEO IN jacks. (
47)
♦ Off
: Select when no component is connected (“AV-IN” is
skipped while selecting the source).
♦ iPod (Off)
: Select when connecting the iPod/iPhone using the USB
Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone. (
45)
♦ Audio&Video : Select when connecting an AV component such as a VCR.
♦ Audio
: Select when connecting an audio component such as a
portable audio player.
♦ Camera *12
: Select when connecting a rear view camera to display the
picture (as it is taken).
♦ Navigation
: Select when connecting a Navigation System. (
47)

Input

ENGLISH

Menu item

*9 Selectable only for “DISC/USB.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
*10 Appears only when a SIRIUS Satellite Radio is connected.
*11 Not selectable when “AV-IN” is selected as the source.
*12 The REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual. The rear view through
the camera appears on the screen in aspect ratio (regardless of the aspect ratio setting) when you shift the
gear to the reverse (R) position. When you press DISP on the monitor panel, or when you shift the gear to another
position other than the reverse (R) position, the rear view screen is cleared.
Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN12-19_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 17

1/13/09 9:19:42 AM

Input

ENGLISH

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

External Input *13, *14 For connecting an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear.
♦ Changer/iPod *15 : CD changer, (
41), iPod, (
45).
♦ External
: Any other than the above, (
48).

Beep

♦ Off
♦ On

: Cancels.
: Activates the key-touch tone.

Telephone Muting *16

♦ Off
♦ Muting1,

: Cancels.
: Select either one which mutes the sounds while
using the cellular phone.

Muting2
Illumination

You can turn off the screen and the light of the buttons on the monitor panel
while turning on the unit. (
7)

Others

Buttons on the
monitor panel

Motion Sensitiv.

Screen

Normal:

Always lights.

Proximity/Motion:

Lights up when your
hand moves close to
the buttons.

Always lights.

Proxi/Motion-LCD:

Lights up when your
hand moves close to
the buttons.

Touch Panel:

Lights up when your
Always lights.
finger touches the
buttons or touch panel.

Touch Panel-LCD:

Lights up when your
Lights up when your
finger touches the
finger touches the
buttons or touch panel. buttons or touch panel.

Change the sensitivity of the sensor for above.
♦ Low, Mid, High

Initialize

Initialize all settings you have made in . Press and hold [Enter]
to initialize the settings, then reset the unit. (
3)

*13 Not required for Bluetooth, Satellite radio interface, and XMDirect™ Tuner Box. They are automatically detected.
*14 Not selectable when the component connected to the CD changer jack is selected as the source.
*15 The name of the component detected through the CD changer jack is shown.
*16 The TEL MUTING lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual.

18
EN12-19_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 18

1/12/09 4:34:34 PM

ENGLISH

Selects a preset sound mode suitable to the music
genre.
♦ Flat (Initial), Hard Rock, R&B, Pop, Jazz, Dance,
Country, Reggae, Classic, User1, User2, User3

Adjust the settings, then store.
Equalizer

Display screen.
Back

Edit

or
Make adjustments by moving each bar directly.

BAND

User Store

User1
User2
User3

Display screen.
AV Menu

Back

Ex.: When storing into

Preset equalizing values

Flat
Back

Edit

Moves to the other 6 sound modes.
Ex.: When is selected

Storing your own adjustments
You can store your adjustments into ,
, and .

Perform steps 1 and 2 above to enter the
screen.

15 kHz

00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Hard Rock

+03 +03 +01 00 00 +02 +01

R&B

+03 +02 +02 00 +01 +01 +03

Pop

00 +02 00 00 +01 +01 +02

Jazz

+03 +02 +01 +01 +01 +03 +02

Dance

+04 +02 00 –02 –01 +01 +01

Country

+02 +01 00 00 00 +01 +02

Reggae

+03 00 00 +01 +02 +02 +03

Classic

+02 +03 +01 00 00 +02 00

User1/2/3

00 00 00 00 00 00 00

AV MENU
EN12-19_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 19

6.3 kHz

2.5 kHz

1 kHz

400 Hz

Sound
mode

Equalizer

150 Hz

Select a sound mode.
60 Hz

12/22/08 9:57:18 AM

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

Menu item
Fader/Balance

Selectable setting/item
Fader : Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.
• When using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “0.”
♦ F6 to R6; Initial 0
Balance : Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.
♦ L6 to R6; Initial 0
Press [ 5/∞/2/3 ] to adjust.
Fader/Balance

Reset
Fader
0
Balance 0

Back

Volume Adjust *1

Subwoofer Level

Adjust and store the auto-adjustment volume level for each source, comparing
to the FM volume level. The volume level will automatically increase or decrease
when you change the source.
• appears if “ TUNER/Bluetooth PHONE” is selected as the source.
♦ –12 to +12; Initial 00
Adjust the subwoofer output level.
♦ –06 to +08; Initial 00

High Pass Filter

♦ Through
♦ On

Crossover

Select the crossover frequency between the front/rear speakers and the
subwoofer.
♦ 80Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz

Amplifier Gain *2

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
♦ Off
: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
♦ Low
: VOL 00 to 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the
speakers is less than 50 W.)
♦ High
: VOL 00 to 50

: Select when the subwoofer is not connected.
: Select when the subwoofer is connected.

*1 For “DISC/USB”: You can make the adjustments separately depending on the audio format—Dolby digital, MPEG
Audio, and the others.
*2 The volume level automatically changes to “VOL 30” if you change to with the volume level set higher than
“VOL 30.”

20
EN20-29_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 20

1/12/09 4:39:08 PM

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined
Selectable items when the source is:
• TUNER
: Mono, SSM, Title Entry
• HD Radio
: Mono, SSM, DX/Local, Blend Hold
• DISC, USB, CD-CH, iPod : Repeat, Random
• iPod *1
: Repeat, Random, Audiobooks
• AV-IN, EXT-IN
: Title Entry

Menu item
2

Mono *

DX/Local

Selectable setting/item
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive, activate monaural mode for better
reception. The MONO indicator lights up.
♦ ON
: Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo effect
will be lost. The MONO indicator lights up.
♦ OFF
: Restore the stereo effect.
Only for FM station of the HD Radio.
: Activate to improve FM reception, but stereo effect will be lost. The LO
indicator lights up.
♦ DX
: Restore the stereo effect.
♦ Local

SSM (Strongstation Sequential
Memory) *3

You can automatically preset 6 stations for each FM band.
Mode
Mono
SSM
Title Entry

Start
Enter

• Local FM stations with the
strongest signals are searched
and stored automatically in
the FM band.

Back

Blend Hold *4

*1
*2
*3
*4

While receiving an HD Radio broadcast, the unit tunes to digital or analog audio
automatically due to the receiving condition. You can change the HD Radio reception mode
manually.
♦ Analog
: Tuning to analog audio only.
♦ Digital
: Tuning to digital audio only.
♦ Auto
: Switch between digital and analog audio automatically.

Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” (
45)
Only works for FM station and FM station of the HD Radio.
Also available for AM when an HD Radio tuner box is connected.
– Appears only when an HD Radio tuner box is connected.
– If no sound can be heard from the selected setting, change the setting to or .
– The setting automatically changes to if you tuned in to or change to another station, or if you turned off
the power.
– This setting cannot take effect for the conventional FM/AM stations.
– If the radio station forces the reception mode to digital, the DIGITAL indicator flashes.
Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN20-29_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 21

1/21/09 2:44:16 PM

ENGLISH

Menu item
Title Entry *5

Selectable setting/item
You can assign titles (up to 16 characters) to 30 station frequencies (FM and AM), AV-IN, and
EXT-IN. (For available characters,
52.)
Press [Enter] to show the screen.

@
;
/
Back

[Store]
[2/3]
[BS]
[Del]
[Cap]
[A = 0 = Ä]
[Space]
Repeat *6

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Confirm the entry.
Move the cursor.
Erase the character before the cursor.
Erase the character on the cursor.
Change the letter case (upper/lower).
Change the character set.
Enter a space.

Available items depend on the loaded disc type and playback file.
DISC

Source
Disc/file type
DVDVideo

Repeat

MPEG/
MP3/
DVD-VR
WMA/
WAV

USB
JPEG

MPEG/
MP3/
VCD/CD
WMA/
WAV

CD-CH
JPEG

MP3

iPod
—

Chapter
Title
Program
Disc
Folder
Track
One
All
Off

♦ Chapter
♦ Title
♦ Program
♦ Disc
♦ Folder
♦ Track
♦ One
♦ All
♦ Off

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Repeats current chapter.
Repeats current title.
Repeats current program (for DVD-VR, not available during Playlist playback).
Repeats all tracks of the current disc.
Repeats all tracks of the current folder.
Repeats current track. (For VCD: When PBC is not in used.)
Functions the same as “Repeat One” of the iPod.
Functions the same as “Repeat All” of the iPod.
Cancels.

*5 Unavailable for AM/FM stations when an HD Radio tuner box is connected.
*6 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” (
45)

22
EN20-29_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 22

1/12/09 4:39:11 PM

Random *7

Selectable setting/item
Available items depend on the loaded disc type and playback file.
DISC

Source

USB

CD-CH

iPod *8

iPod

Disc/file type
Random

MPEG/MP3/
WMA/WAV

VCD/CD

MPEG/MP3/
WMA/WAV

—

MP3

—

ENGLISH

Menu item

Folder
Disc/USB (All)
All
Song
Album
Off

♦ Folder

: Randomly plays all tracks of the current folder, then tracks of the next
folders.
♦ Disc/USB (All) : Randomly plays all tracks. (For VCD: When PBC is not in used.)
♦ All
: Randomly plays all tracks of all loaded discs.
♦ Song
: Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” *9 of the iPod.
♦ Album
: Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of the iPod.
♦ Off
: Cancels.
Audiobooks

You can select the playback speed of the “Audiobook” sound file in your iPod.
♦ Normal
: Plays at normal speed.
♦ Faster
: Plays faster.
♦ Slower
: Plays slower.

45)
*7 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” (
*8 Not applicable for video file.
*9 You can activate <Shuffle Songs> in <Search Mode> menu. (

25)

AV MENU
EN20-29_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 23

1/12/09 4:39:11 PM

ENGLISH

Source
TUNER/
HD Radio

Operation/setting
• Storing a preset station manually
1 Press [BAND], then [ / ] to tune in to the station you want to preset.
2 Select <List> from the <AV Menu>.
3 Press and hold a preset number.
List
FM1
FM2
FM3

The station selected in step 1 is now
stored in preset number 4.

Back

• Selecting a preset station on the list
List
FM1
FM2
FM3

Back

SAT

• Storing a preset channel manually
1 Press [BAND], then [5 CATEGORY / ∞ CATEGORY], then [
channel you want to preset.
2 Select <List> from the <AV Menu>.
3 Press and hold a preset number.

] to tune in to the

List
SR1
SR2
SR3
Category

Category Name 1
Category Name 2
Category Name 3
Category Name 4
Category Name 5
Category Name 6

The channel selected in step 1 is
now stored in preset number 4.

Back

• Selecting a preset category/channel on the list
List
C
A
T
C
A
T
C
A
T
C
A
T
C
A
T
C
A
T

Pop
Rock
Country
Hip-Hop
R&B/Urban
Dance/Electronic

SIRIUS HITS 1
STARLITE
SIRIUS LOVE
MOVIN’ EASY
SIRIUS GOLD
’60s VIBRATIONS

* Press: Skips the list up or down.
Drag: Scrolls the list up or down.

Back

24
EN20-29_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 24

1/12/09 4:39:12 PM

DISC/USB

Operation/setting
Selecting a track on the list
If the device contains folders, you can display the Folder/Track (File) Lists, then start playback.
0005/0035

List

0003/0099

Folder 01
Folder 02
Folder 03
Folder 04
Folder 05
Folder 06

Track001.mp3
Track002.mp3
Track003.mp3
Track004.mp3
Track005.mp3
Track006.mp3

Back

Bluetooth
PHONE

1 Current folder list number/total

ENGLISH

Source

folder list number
2 Current track list number/total track

list number of the current folder
* Press: Skips the list up or down.
Drag: Scrolls the list up or down.

Selecting a preset phone number on the list to make a call
List
Phone Number

Back

CD-CH

Selecting a disc on the list
Disc List
Disc 01

Disc 04

Disc 02

MP3 Disc

Disc 03

Disc 06

If an MP3 disc is selected, Folder/Track
List appear. Select a track to start
playback.

Back

To go to the other list

iPod

Selecting a track/video from <Search Mode>
• Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” (
45)
♦ Music : Playlists, Artists, Albums,

Search Mode
Music
Videos
Shuffle Songs

Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres

Back

List
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres

0003/0099
Track 01
Track 02
Track 03
Track 04
Track 05
Track 06

Songs, Podcasts, Genres, Composers,
Audiobooks
♦ Videos : Video Playlists, Movies, Music
Videos, TV shows, Video Podcasts
♦ Shuffle Songs : Playback starts if this
is selected.
Current track (video) number/total track (video)
number

Back

AV MENU
EN20-29_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 25

12/22/08 9:56:26 AM

ENGLISH

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO” as the source for operations.
• Firstly, use <Open> or <Search> to register and establish the connection with a device.

Menu item
Dial Menu *1

Selectable setting/item
Select the method to make a call.
♦ Redial
: Shows the list of the phone numbers you have dialed.
♦ Received Calls
: Shows the list of the received calls.
♦ Phonebook
: Shows the phone book of the connected cellular phone.
♦ Missed Calls
: Shows the list of the missed calls.
♦ Phone Number
: Shows the phone number entry screen.
Phone Number

Back

♦ Voice Dialing

Message *2

[BS]
: Erase the character before the cursor.
[Del]
: Erase the character on the cursor.
[Preset] : Goes to Preset List. You can preset the entered
number by selecting a preset number.
[Dial] : Calls the entered number.
: Only when the connected cellular phone has the voice
recognition system: = Speak the name you want to call.

If <Message Info> is set to <Manual>... (
28)
Access the message list to read messages.
♦ Unread
: Messages you have not read.
♦ Read
: Messages you have read.
♦ Unsent
: Messages you have not sent.
♦ Sent
: Messages you have sent.
• The number of messages in each history is also shown.

*1 Only for the device connected for “ Bluetooth PHONE.”
*2 Selectable only when the source is “ Bluetooth PHONE” and the connected cellular phone is compatible with SMS
(Short Message Service).

26
EN20-29_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 26

12/22/08 9:56:27 AM

Menu item

Preparation:
• Operate the Bluetooth device to turn on its Bluetooth function.
• Make sure “NEW DEVICE” is selected. If not, press [ 5 ] or [ ∞ ] to select it.

ENGLISH

Open

Selectable setting/item

1 Press <Open> on the <Bluetooth> menu.
2 Enter a PIN (Personal Identification Number) *3.

• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to 16-digit number).
PIN Code

Back

You can enter [0] – [9] only.
[BS] : Erases the character
before the cursor.
[Del] : Erases the character on
the cursor.
[Enter] : Confirms the entry.

3 Operate the Bluetooth device to connect while “Open...” is displayed on the screen.

Enter the same PIN code (as entered in the above step) on the device to be connected.
Now connection is established and you can use the device through the unit.
• The device remains registered even after you disconnect the device. Use <Connect> or
activate <Auto Connect> to connect the same device the next time.
Search

Preparation:
• Make sure “NEW DEVICE” is selected. If not, press [ 5 ] or [ ∞ ] to select it.
1 Press <Search> on the <Bluetooth> menu.

The unit searches for available devices and displays the list of them. (If no available
device is detected, “Device Unfound” appears.)
2 Select a device you want to connect.
3 Enter the specific PIN code of the device to the unit.
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the device to check the PIN code.
4 Operate the Bluetooth device to connect while “Connecting...” is displayed on the
screen.
Now connection is established and you can use the device through the unit.
*3 Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the specified PIN code to the unit.

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN20-29_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 27

12/22/08 9:56:27 AM

ENGLISH

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

Special Device

Only for “NEW DEVICE.”
Select a device you want to connect from the list of Bluetooth devices which require
some special procedure to establish the Bluetooth connection. Then, use <Open> or
<Search> to connect.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You can connect the unit
and the device by using <Connect> the next time.

Connect

Only for the registered devices.
Select a device from the list of registered devices, establish the connection with it.

Disconnect

Only for the connected devices.
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device.

Delete Pairing

Only for the registered devices.
Press <Yes> to confirm delete the registered devices.

Settings
Initial: Underlined

Auto Connect *4

When the unit is turned on, the connection is established
automatically with...
♦ Off
: No Bluetooth device.
♦ Last
: The last connected Bluetooth device.
♦ Order
: The available registered Bluetooth device found
first.

Auto Answer *5

♦ Off
♦ On
♦ Reject

Message Info *

♦ Auto

♦ Manual

: The unit does not answer the calls automatically.
Answer the calls manually.
: The unit answers the incoming calls
automatically.
: The unit rejects all incoming calls.
: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message
by ringing and displaying “Receiving Message.”
To read the message,
40.
: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a
message.

MIC Setting *5

Adjust the volume of the microphone connected to the Bluetooth
adapter.
♦ 01/02/03

Version

The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are shown.

*4 Selectable only for “ Bluetooth PHONE.”
*5 Only for the cellular phone connected for “ Bluetooth PHONE.” Not selectable when “NEW DEVICE” is selected.

AV MENU

EN20-29_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 28

12/22/08 9:56:28 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the radio
Preset number
SOURCE

TUNER

Band
Sound mode

FM1

87. 5 MHz
Assigned station name

ABC Radio

FLAT
ST

(

3:00

22)

• If no name is
assigned, “No Name”
appears.

Tuner indicator
AM
BAND

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [TUNER].
Ÿ Press [BAND].
! Press [ ] or [ ] to search for a station—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [ ]or [ ] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it
repeatedly.
• The ST indicator lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

Selecting a preset station

Changing the display information

• Directly from the touch panel

(

53)

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

3:00

87. 5 MHz

ABC Radio

FLAT
ST

• To improve the FM reception,
21.
• To automatically preset stations into memory,
21.
• To manually preset stations into memory,
24.
• To assignning titles to stations,
22.

AM
BAND

You can also select a preset station using the remote
9) and from the Preset List
controller (
(
24).

You can display the Preset List by pressing [
holding [5/∞].

] or

OPERATIONS
EN20-29_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 29

1/12/09 4:41:30 PM

ENGLISH

Disc operations
The disc type is automatically detected, then playback starts (for some discs, the top menu of the disc appears).
If a disc does not have any disc menu, all tracks on it will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject
the disc.
If “ ” appears on the screen, the unit cannot accept the operation you have tried to do.
• In some cases, without showing “ ,” operations will not be accepted.

~ Open the monitor panel.

! Insert a disc.
Label side

<Open/Tilt> menu is displayed.
• By pressing and holding the button, you can
open the monitor panel and eject the disc.

Open/Tilt

Monitor panel closes automatically.
If not, press [Close].

Caution:
Do not place your finger behind the monitor panel.

Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

When playing back a multi-channel encoded disc,
the multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• You can fully enjoy multi-channel sound by
connecting an amplifier or a decoder compatible
53)
with these multi-channel sources. (

• To select the playback mode,
22, 23.
• To select tracks on the list,
25.

Back

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure to select <EJECT OK?>.
• Discs can be forcibly ejected. (
3)

30
EN30-37_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 30

12/22/08 9:55:31 AM

Changing the display information

ENGLISH

Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different
information. (
53)

Ex.: While playing a DVD Video

SOURCE

DVD
FLAT
CHAP. RPT

3:00

1 Audio format—Dolby Digital, MP3, WMA, WAV
2 Disc type—DVD, DVD-VR, VCD, CD
3 Video format—MPEG, VR-PRG (program), VR-

PLAY (playlist), PBC
4 [5 / ∞]

6
7
8
9

• DVD Video/DVD-VR: Selects title/program/
playlist.
• MPEG/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV:
– Selects folder
– Displays Folder/Track List (Hold)
• DVD Video: Title no./Chapter no./Playing time
• DVD-VR: Program no. (or Playlist no.)/Chapter
no./Playing time
• MPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV: Folder no./Track no./
Playing time
• JPEG: Folder no./Track no.
• VCD/CD: Track no./Playing time
[6 ]
Starts playback/pauses
Indicates the button pressed ( / 8 / 7 )
Sound mode (
19)
Playback mode (
22, 23)

p Disc/track information

• DVD Video/DVD-VR: Sampling frequency/Bit
rate/Recorded signal channel no.
• MPEG/JPEG: Folder name/file name
• CD Text: Title/artist name/album name
– “No Name” appears for conventional CDs or if
not recorded
• MP3/WMA/WAV: Current folder name/current
file name/tag data (current track title/artist
name/album title) if it is recorded
q Stops playback
w [4 / ¢]
• DVD Video/DVD-VR: Selects chapter.
• MPEG/JPEG/VCD/CD/MP3/WMA/WAV: Selects
track.
• DVD Video/DVD-VR/MPEG/VCD/CD/MP3/WMA/
WAV: Reverse/forward search (Hold)

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 31

1/12/09 5:49:32 PM

ENGLISH

Operation buttons on the screen
You can display the following operation buttons while watching the playback pictures on the screen.
• If no operation is done after awhile, the operation buttons disappear (except when a disc menu is displayed).
A

[SOURCE]
[5 ∞]
[3 / 8]
[4 ¢]
Touch the screen (center portion).

Displays <Source Menu> screen
31
Starts playback/pause
• Selects tracks
• Reverse/forward search (Hold)
[
]
Displays <AV Menu> screen
[7]
Stops playback
• The above buttons also work when they are not
shown on the screen (while watching the playback
picture).
B

Touch [KEY].

For DVD/VCD menu operation playback
[5 ∞ 2 3] Selects the menu items
[ENTER]
Confirms the selection
[TOP MENU] Displays the disc menu
[MENU]
Displays the disc menu
[RETURN]
Returns to the previous menu or
displays the menu (only for VCD with
PBC)
C

Touch [KEY].

For entering the numbers
[0]–[9]=[ENTER] Enters numbers
[Direct/CLR]
• Switches between chapter/track
entry and title/folder entry
• Erases the last entry when you
enter a wrong number
Ex.: To enter “105,” press [1], [0], [5], then [ENTER]
*1 While a disc menu is played back for DVD, [KEY] is
automatically displayed. On the disc menu, you can
select a menu item directly by touching it on the
screen
*2 Displays Short Cut icons. (
8)
*3 Playback time. (
31)

To end the operations, touch the screen again.

32
EN30-37_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 32

1/12/09 5:49:34 PM

Operations using the remote controller (RM-RK252)
ENGLISH

Button
Stop play

Stop play

Start play/Pause (if pressed during play)

• MPEG: Start play/Pause (if pressed during
play)
• JPEG: • Start play (Slide show: Each file is
shown for a few seconds.)
• Pause (if pressed during play).
• MPEG: Reverse/forward track search *4 (No
sound can be heard.)

• Reverse/forward chapter search *1 (No sound
can be heard.)
• Slow motion *2 during pause (No sound can
be heard.)
– DVD-VR: Reverse slow motion does not work.

• MPEG: • Select track
• Reverse/fast-forward track search *5
(No sound can be heard.) (Hold)
• JPEG: Select file
• DVD-Video: Select title (during play or pause) Select folder
• DVD-VR: • Select program
• Select playlist (during play or pause)
• Select chapter (during play or pause)
• Reverse/fast-forward chapter search *3 (No
sound can be heard.) (Hold)

• MPEG: Skip back or forward the scenes by
about 5 minutes

—
Select aspect ratio
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5

Select aspect ratio

Search speed:
Slow motion speed:
Search speed:
Search speed:
Search speed:

Using menu driven features... (DVD-Video)

Canceling the PBC playback... (VCD)

1 Enter the menu screen.

During stop...

or
2 Select an item you want to start play.

Number buttons
(0 – 9)

• To resume PBC, press TOP M/MENU.
Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 33

1/12/09 5:49:34 PM

ENGLISH

Button
Stop play

Stop play

Start play/Pause (if pressed
during play)

Reverse/forward track search *6 Reverse/forward track search *6 Reverse/forward track search *6
• Forward slow motion *7
during pause. (No sound can
be heard.)
– Reverse slow motion does not
work.
• Select track
• Reverse/fast-forward track
search *8 (No sound can be
heard.) (Hold)

• Select track
• Reverse/fast-forward track
search *8 (Hold)

Select folder
—
Select aspect ratio

—

*6 Search speed:
*7 Slow motion speed:
*8 Search speed:

Searching for an item directly
1 While holding SHIFT, press DIRECT repeatedly to

select the desired search mode.
DVD-Video:
DVD-VR:
MPEG:
JPEG:
MP3/WMA/
WAV:

2 While holding SHIFT, press the number buttons

(0 – 9) to enter the desired number.
3 Press ENT (enter) to confirm.

• For MPEG/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV, track is searched
within the same folder.
• For DVD-VR, program/playlist search is possible
during Original program playback (PG)/Playlist
playback (PL).
• To erase a misentry, press CLR (clear) while holding
SHIFT.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

VCD/CD:

34
EN30-37_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 34

1/21/09 10:33:50 AM

Operations using the
on-screen bar

1 Display the Original Program screen.

Display the Playlist screen.

2 Select an item you want to start play.

(DVD/DVD-VR/MPEG/JPEG/VCD)
These operations are possible on the monitor using the
remote controller.

Show the on-screen bar (

ENGLISH

Using the list screens... (DVD-VR)

36).

(twice)

Select an item.

Make a selection.

Original Program/Playlist screen
• Original Program

If pop-up menu appears...

• To cancel pop-up menu, press RETURN.
• For entering time/numbers, see the following.
• Playlist

Entering time/numbers
Press % / ﬁ to change the number, then press @ / # to
move to the next entry.
• Each time you press % / ﬁ, the number increases/
decreases by one value.
• After entering the numbers, press ENT (enter).
• It is not required to enter the zero and tailing zeros
(the last two digits in the example below).

1 Original Program/Playlist number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of
4
5
6
7
8
9

the recording equipment, etc.)
Start time of recording
Title of the program/playlist *
Highlight bar (current selection)
Creating date of playlist
Total number of chapters included in the playlist
Playback time

Ex.: Time search
DVD: _:_ _:_ _ (Ex.: 1:02:00)
Press % once, then # twice to go to the third entry, %
twice, then press ENT (enter).

Removing the on-screen bar

* The title of the original program or playlist may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.
Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 35

1/12/09 5:49:37 PM

ENGLISH

On-screen bar
Ex.: DVD-Video

Information
Operation

1 Disc type
2 • DVD-Video: Audio signal format type and

channel
• VCD: PBC
3 Playback mode *1
DVD-Video:
T. RPT: Title repeat
C. RPT: Chapter repeat
DVD-VR:
C. RPT: Chapter repeat
PG. RPT: Program repeat
MPEG Video:
T. RPT: Track repeat
F. RPT: Folder repeat
A. RND: All (Disc) random
F. RND: Folder random
JPEG:
F. RPT: Folder repeat
VCD *2:
T. RPT: Track repeat
A. RND: All (Disc) random
4 Playback information
Current title/chapter
Current program/chapter
Current playlist/chapter
Current track
Current folder/track
Current folder/file
5 Time indication
Elapsed playing time of the disc
(For DVD-Video, elapsed playing
time of the current title/program/
playlist.)
DVD-Video/DVD-VR: Remaining
title/program/playlist time
VCD: Remaining disc time

Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track *3
Remaining time of the current
chapter/track *3
6 Playback status
Play
Forward/reverse search
Forward/reverse slow-motion
Pause
Stop
7 Operation icons
Change time indication (see 5)
Time Search (Enter the elapsed
playing time of the current title/
program/playlist or of the disc.)
Title Search (by its number)
Chapter Search (by its number)
Track Search (by its number)
Repeat play *1
Random play *1
Change the audio language, audio
stream, or audio channel
Change or turn off the subtitle
language
Change the view angle
*1 For repeat play/random play,
*2 While PBC is not in use.
*3 Not applicable for DVD-VR.

22, 23.

36
EN30-37_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 36

1/12/09 5:49:37 PM

You can connect a USB mass storage class device such as a USB memory, Digital Audio Player, portable HDD, etc. to
the unit.
• You can also connect the iPod to the USB terminal of the unit. For details of the operations,
45 – 46.

ENGLISH

USB operations

USB cable from the rear of the unit

This unit can play JPEG/MPEG1/MPEG2/MP3/WMA/
WAV files stored in USB mass storage class device.
• You can operate the USB device in the same way you
operate the files on discs.
• All tracks in the USB device will be played repeatedly
until you change the source.
• Playback starts from where it has been stopped
previously when you reconnect the same USB device
again.
• To select the playback mode,
22, 23.
• To select tracks on the list,
25.

Changing the display information
(

53)

Cautions:
• Avoid using the USB device if it might hinder your
safety driving.
• Do not pull out and attach the USB device repeatedly
while “Now Reading” is shown on the screen.
• Do not start the car engine if a USB device is
connected.
• This unit may not be able to play the files depending
on the type of USB device.
• Operation and power supply may not work as
intended for some USB devices.
• You cannot connect a computer to the USB input
terminal of the unit.
• Make sure all important data has been backed up to
avoid losing the data.
• Do not leave a USB device in the car, expose to direct
sunlight, or high temperature to avoid deformation
or cause damages to the device.
• Some USB devices may not work immediately after
you turn on the power.
• For more details about USB operations,
50.

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 37

1/12/09 5:49:38 PM

ENGLISH

Using the Bluetooth® devices
For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect the Bluetooth adapter, KS-BTA200 (not supplied) to the CD
changer jack on the rear of this unit.
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth device.
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to check the countries where you may use the Bluetooth ® function.
To use a Bluetooth device through the unit (“ Bluetooth PHONE” and “ Bluetooth AUDIO”) for the first time,
you need to establish Bluetooth wireless connection between the unit and the device.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit even if you reset your unit. Up to five devices can be
registered in total.
• Only one device can be connected at a time for each source (“ Bluetooth PHONE” and “ Bluetooth AUDIO”).

Connecting a new Bluetooth device
Registration (Pairing) methods
Use either of the following items in <Bluetooth> menu to register and establish the connection with a device.
• Select “ Bluetooth PHONE” or “ Bluetooth AUDIO” as the source to operate <Bluetooth> menu.
Open

Make the unit ready to establish a new Bluetooth connection. The connection is established by
operating the Bluetooth device.

Make the unit ready to establish a new Bluetooth connection. The connection is established by
operating this unit.

• To register a device using <Open> or <Search>,
• To connect a special device,
28.
• To connect/disconnect/delete a device,
28.

27.

Changing the display information
(

53)

Bluetooth Information:
If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/> (English website only).

38
EN38-49_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 38

12/22/08 9:56:39 AM

Status of the device
• Signal strength/Battery remainder (only when
the information comes from the device).

[5 / ∞]: Selects the
other registered device.

Connected device name
• When a cellular phone with audio function
is registered/connected, appears.

SOURCE

Connected Device Name

FLAT

3:00

Activates <Voice Dialing>
function. (Hold)

ENGLISH

Using the Bluetooth cellular phone

Display <Dial Menu> screen.
• Appears on any source information screen
when the Bluetooth adapter is connected.

Bluetooth icon
• Lights up when the Bluetooth adapter
is connected.

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth PHONE].
Ÿ Press [ ].
! Press [Bluetooth].
⁄ Establish the connection with a device, then make a call (or settings using <Bluetooth>
menu). (

26 – 28)

When a call comes in...
The source is changed to “ Bluetooth PHONE”
automatically.

To end the call
• Hold the message displayed on the touch panel.
• Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or VOL +/–).
• You can adjust the microphone volume,

28.

Name and phone number (if acquired)

When <Auto Answer> is activated...
The unit answers the incoming call automatically.
(
28)

To make a call, use <Dial Menu>. (

26)

When <Auto Answer> is deactivated...
To answer the incoming call
• Press the message displayed on the touch panel.
• Press any button on the monitor panel (except
or VOL +/–).
Continued on the next page

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 39

12/22/08 9:56:41 AM

ENGLISH

When an SMS comes in...
If the cellular phone is compatible with SMS (Short
Message Service), you can read the messages on the
screen.
• You cannot edit or send a message through the unit.

Presetting the phone
numbers
You can preset up to 6 phone numbers.

When <Message Info> is set to <Auto>...
The unit rings and the following screen is displayed to
inform you of a message arrival. (
28)

Select the phone number you want to
preset from <Phonebook>, <Redial>,
<Received Calls>, or <Missed Calls>.
(

2
Device Name
Receiving Message
Jack

26)

Select a telephone number to store.
Dial Menu

Read ?
Yes

No
Back

To read the message, press [Yes].
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE.”
To read the message later, press [No].
• The message is stored into <Message> =
<Unread>. (
26)
When <Message Info> is set to <Manual>...
Access the message list to read messages,
28.

Select a preset number.
Dial Menu

Back

Now “Tom” is stored into preset no. 1.

To stop ringing (canceling the outgoing call)

To call a preset number,

25.

Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or VOL +/–).

40
EN38-49_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 40

12/22/08 9:56:41 AM

Indicates the button pressed.
• It may be different from the operation status.

Starts playback/pause
SOURCE

Connected Device Name

FLAT

3:00

ENGLISH

Using the Bluetooth audio player

[4 / ¢]: Reverse/forward
search

[5 / ∞]: Selects the
other registered device.

Stops playback

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth AUDIO].
Ÿ Start playback.
If playback does not start automatically, operate the Bluetooth audio player to start playback.

Listening to the CD changer
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can play only CDs (CD-DA) and MP3 discs.
Preparation:
Make sure <Changer> is selected for <External Input>. (

18)

Ex.: While playing an MP3 disc
• [4 / ¢]: Selects track
• [4 / ¢]: Reverse/forward search (Hold) [5 / ∞]: Displays Disc List.
DISC 1

SOURCE

CD-CH
FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

Current Folder Name
Current File Name.mp3
Current Track Title
Artist Name
Album Title

Tag data (if it is recorded)

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [CD-CH].
Ÿ Press [ ].
! Press [List].

Folder no./Track no./Playing time

⁄ Select a disc to start playing.
To select the playback mode,

22, 23.

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 41

12/22/08 9:56:42 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the satellite radio
Before operating, connect either one of the following (not supplied) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this unit.
• JVC SIRIUS satellite radio System, SC-C1 and KS-SRA100, PnP, SC-VDOC1 and KS-SRA100, for listening to the
SIRIUS Satellite radio.
• XM satellite radio System, JVC Smart Digital Adapter–XMDJVC100, CNP2000UC and CNPJVC1 for listening to
the XM Satellite radio.

GCI (Global Control Information) update
• If channels are updated after subscription, updating starts automatically, and no sound can be heard:
– For SIRIUS Satellite radio: “Channel is updating XX% completed” appears.
– For XM Satellite radio: “UPDATING” appears.
• Update takes a few minutes to complete.
• Do not press any buttons or perform any operations until updating is completed.

For SIRIUS Radio

For XM Radio

Activate your subscription after connection:
1 Turn on the power.

Activate your subscription after connection:
• Only Channel 0, 1, and 247 are available before
activation.
1 Turn on the power.

2 Select “SAT” for the source.
2 Select “SAT” for the source.
The SIRIUS Satellite radio starts updating all the
SIRIUS channels. (
“GCI update” above.)
• Once completed, SIRIUS Satellite radio tunes in
to the preset channel, CH184.
3 Check your SIRIUS ID. (

17)

4 Contact SIRIUS on the internet at <http://
activate.siriusradio.com/> to activate your
subscription, or you can call SIRIUS toll-free
at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).
“Subscription updated Press Any Key to Continue”
appears on the monitor once subscription has been
completed.

The XMDirect ™ Universal Tuner Box starts updating
all the XM channels. “Channel 1” is tuned in
automatically. (
“GCI update” above.)
3 Check your XM Satellite radio ID labelled on
the casing of the XMDirectTM Universal Tuner
Box, or tune in to “Channel 0.” (
43)
4 Contact XM Satellite radio on the internet
at <http://xmradio.com/activation/> to
activate your subscription, or you can call 1800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346).
Once completed, the unit tunes in to one of the
available channels (Channel 4 or higher).

42
EN38-49_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 42

1/12/09 4:55:21 PM

Tuning in to a channel you want
SOURCE

Band

CATEGORY

SAT

Sound mode
Signal Reception
indicator

ENGLISH

Preset number

SR1
C
A
T

FLAT

LEVEL

3:00

Channel number

Category Name
Channel Name
Song Title
Artist Name
Composer Name

Only for SIRIUS
CATEGORY BAND

For SIRIUS Radio

For XM Radio

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [SAT].
Ÿ Press [BAND].
! Press [5 CATEGORY] or [CATEGORY ∞] to

select a category.

• To select a channel from all categories, select
<All>.

• To select a channel from all categories
(including non-categorised channels), skip this
step.
• If you do not select a channel within
15 seconds, the category selected is canceled.
You can select a channel from all categories
now.

⁄ Press [

] or [ ] to select a channel to

listen to.
• Holding either button changes the channel
rapidly.
• While searching, invalid and unsubscribed
channels are skipped.

⁄ Press [

] or [ ] to make a channel to

listen to.
• Holding either button changes the channel
rapidly.
• While searching, invalid and unsubscribed
channels are skipped.

You can display the Preset List by pressing [
holding [5/∞].

] or

• To store channels in memory,
24.
• To select preset category/channel from the list,
24.

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 43

1/13/09 8:59:44 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the HD Radio™ Broadcast
Before operating, connect HD Radio tuner box, KT-HD300 (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear
of the unit.

What is HD Radio Technology?
HD Radio Technology can deliver high-quality digital sound—AM digital will have FM-like quality (in stereo) and FM
digital will have CD-like quality—with static-free and clear reception. Furthermore, stations can offer text and data,
such as artist names and song titles.
• When the HD Radio tuner box is connected, it can also receive conventional analog broadcasts.
• Many HD Radio stations also offer more than one channel of programming. This service is called multicasting.
• To find HD Radio stations in your area, visit www.hdradio.com <http://www.hdradio.com/>.
Band

Preset number
SOURCE

Flashes first then lights
up when a digital audio
broadcast is tuned in.

CHANNEL

HD RADIO

Signal Reception
indicator
HD Radio reception
mode

HD SEARCH

FM1

FLAT
ST
DX
HD AUTO

WXYZ-HD1
Genre

LEVEL

Song Title
Artist Name
Album Title

3:00

HD SEARCH

87.5 MHz
Station Call Sign and
channel number

CHANNEL

BAND

Refer to page 29 for basic radio operations.

When receiving HD Radio Multicast channels...

~ Press [5 CHANNEL] or [CHANNEL ∞] to select a desired channel.
• “LINKING” appears while linking to a multicast channel.

Searching for HD Radio stations only

~ Press [HD SEARCH].
• The HD SEARCH indicator appears.

Ÿ Press [

] or [ ] to search for a station—Auto Search.

• To change the HD Radio reception mode,
21.
• To improve the reception,

21.

44
EN38-49_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 44

1/22/09 10:03:56 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the iPod/iPhone
You can connect the iPod/iPhone using the following cable or adapter:

Cable/adapter

Listen to the
music

Watch the video

To operate

USB 2.0 cable (accessory of the iPod/iPhone) to the
USB cable from the rear of the unit.

See “When connected with the USB
cable” below.

Interface Adapter for iPod, KS-PD100 (not supplied)
to the CD changer jack on the rear of the unit.

See “When connected with the
interface adapter” on page 46.

USB Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone, KS-U30
(not supplied) to the USB cable from the rear of the
unit.

See “When connected with the USB
cable” below.
• Make sure <iPod (Off)> is selected
17.
for <AV Input>,

When connected with the USB cable
There are 2 control modes in ” iPod “ source.
• “HEAD MODE” : Control by this unit.
• “iPod MODE” : Control by the connected iPod/iPhone.
Make sure <iPod (Off)> is selected for <AV Input> when using KS-U30 to connect. (

17)

to switch between “HEAD MODE” and “iPod MODE.”
• Press and hold
The operation explained below are under “HEAD MODE.”
• [5 / ∞]: Moves to the previous/next item of a category *1
• Enters <Search Mode> menu (Hold) *2 (
25 )

Starts playback/pause

SOURCE

Indicates the
controlling unit for
playback

HEAD MODE

*1 [5 / ∞] may not
function depending
on how you select the
current track/video.
*2 Not applicable in “iPod
MODE.”

iPod

FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

Current Track Title
Artist Name
Album Title

Track no./Playing time
• [4 / ¢]: Selects a track/video
• [4 / ¢]: Reverse/forward search (Hold)

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [

iPod].

Playback starts automatically.
• When you connect the iPod to the USB
terminal, “ iPod” is selected as the source
and playback starts automatically.

Stops playback

Ÿ Press [4] or [¢] to select a track/
video.
You cannot resume playback for video sources.

Continued on the next page

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 45

1/12/09 5:47:52 PM

ENGLISH

The following operations/settings are only available in “HEAD MODE.”
• To display the <iPod Artwork>,
16.
• To select track/video from <Search Mode>,
25.
• To select the playback mode,
22, 23.
• To change the play speed of the audio books,
23.

When connected with the interface adapter
Enters main menu

Track no./Playing time

SOURCE

iPod
FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

Song Name
Artist Name
Album Title

• [4 / ¢]: Selects tracks
• [4 / ¢]: Reverse/forward search (Hold)

Starts playback/pause

Preparation:
Make sure <iPod> is selected for <External Input>. (

18)

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod].

Ÿ Press [4] or [¢] to select a track.

Playback starts automatically.

Selecting a track from the main
menu

Press [SEARCH] to enter the main menu.
“SEARCH” flashes on the screen during menu
operations.
• This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about 5 seconds.

Press [4] or [¢] to select the desired
item.
• Skips 10 items at a time if there are more than
10 items. (Hold)

3
4

Press [3 / 8] to confirm the selection.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a track.
• When a track is selected finally, playback starts.
• To return to the previous menu, press [SEARCH].

To select the playback mode,

22, 23.

Changing the display information
(

53)

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs
Ô Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the
beginning)

46
EN38-49_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 46

1/12/09 5:47:53 PM

ENGLISH

Using other external components
AV-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN/VIDEO IN jacks.
Assigned title (
22)
SOURCE

AV-IN
FLAT

3:00

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN].
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
To display the operation buttons while watching the playback picture,

32.

Navigation screen
You can also connect a Navigation System to the LINEIN/VIDEO IN jack so that you can watch the navigation screen.
Preparation:
Make sure <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>. (

17)

To view the navigation screen
Press DISP on the monitor panel repeatedly. (

53)

• The aspect ratio of the navigation screen is fixed to <Full> regardless of the <Aspect> setting. (

15)

When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input> (
17)
• You can use the source “AV-IN” for listening to an audio source connected to the LINE IN jacks.

Continued on the next page

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 47

1/12/09 5:47:54 PM

ENGLISH

EXT-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter, KS-U57 (not
supplied) or AUX Input Adapter, KS-U58 (not supplied).
Assigned title (

22)

Preparation:
Make sure <External> is selected for <External Input>. (

18)

SOURCE

EXT-IN
FLAT

3:00

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [EXT-IN].
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and

Changing the display information
(

53)

start playing the source.

More about this unit
General
Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the monitor panel, you
can also turn on the power. If the source is ready,
playback starts.

Tuner (FM only)
Storing stations in memory
• When SSM is over, received stations are preset in no.
1 (lowest frequency) to no. 6 (highest frequency).

Disc
General
• In this manual, words “track” and “file” are
interchangeably used.
• This unit can only play back audio CD (CD-DA) files
if different type of audio files (MP3/WMA/WAV) are
recorded on the same disc.

Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down or has no
playable files, “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen. Eject the disc.

Ejecting a disc
• If “No Disc“ appears after removing a disc, insert a
disc or select another playback source.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust.

Playing Recordable/Rewritable discs
• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files and 250
folders (a maximum of 999 files per folder).
• Use only “finalized” discs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.

48
EN38-49_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 48

12/22/08 9:56:45 AM

Playing DVD-VR
• For details about DVD-VR format and playlist, refer
to the instructions supplied with the recording
equipment.

File playback
Playing MPEG1/MPEG2 files
• This unit can play back MPEG1/MPEG2 files with the
extension code <.mpg>, <.mpeg>, or <.mod>*.
* <.mod> is an extension code used for the MPEG2 files
recorded by JVC Everio camcorders. The MPEG2 files
with the <.mod> extension code cannot be played
back when stored on a USB mass storage class device.
• The stream format should conform to MPEG system/
program stream.
The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at
Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple Profile at Main Level)/
MP@LL (Main Profile at Low Level).
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio
Layer-2 or Dolby Digital.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is
4 Mbps.

Playing JPEG files
• This unit can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg>, or <.jpeg>.
• This unit can play back JPEG files that are at 32 × 32
to 8 192 × 7 680 resolution.
It may take time to display the file depending on its
resolution.
• This unit can play back baseline JPEG files.
Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be
played.

Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files
• This unit can play back files with the extension code
<.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.wav> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can play back the files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate:
MP3/WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG2)
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 22.05 kHz (for WMA)
44.1 kHz (for WAV)
• This unit can show ID3 Tag Version
1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4 (for MP3).
• This unit can also show WAV/WMA Tag.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
• Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time indication.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,
etc.

ENGLISH

• This unit can recognize a total of 25 characters for
file/folder names.
• Some discs or files may not be played back due to
their characteristics or recording conditions.

Disc/file information shown on the
external monitor
The following screens appear only on the external
monitor.
• CD
T. RPT

Track Information
Album
Four seasons
Artist
Robert M. Smith
Title
Rain

TIME

00:14

Track : 6 / 14
Cloudy
Fair
Fog
Hail
Indian summer
Rain
Shower
Snow
Thunder
Typhoon
Wind
Winter sky

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES 49
EN38-49_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 49

1/12/09 5:02:47 PM

ENGLISH

1
2
3
4

Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks on the
disc
5 Track information
6 Track list
7 Current track (highlighted bar)
• MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV

* If tag data includes “Jacket Picture” (baseline JPEG), it
will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
p

Current folder (highlighted bar)
Current folder number/total folder number
Folder list
Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track (not
displayed for JPEG)
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks in the
current folder (total number of tracks on the disc)
Track information (only for MP3/WMA/WAV)
Track list
Current track (highlighted)

USB
• If “No USB Device“ appears after removing a device,
reattach a device or select another playback source.

• When the USB device has no playable files, or has not
been formatted correctly, “Cannot play this device
Check the device” appears on the screen.
• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating
is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.
• While playing from a USB device, the playback order
may differ from other players.
• This unit may be unable to play back some USB
devices or some files due to their characteristics or
recording conditions.
• USB devices equipped with special functions such as
data security functions cannot be used with the unit.
• Do not use a USB device with two or more partitions.
• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and
connection ports, some USB devices may not be
attached properly or the connection might be loose.
• When connecting a USB device, refer also to its
instructions.
• Connect only one USB device to the unit at a time. Do
not use a USB hub.
• This unit may not recognize a USB device connected
through a USB card reader.
• When connecting with a USB cable, use the USB 2.0
cable.
• This unit may not play back files in a USB device
properly when using a USB extension cord.
• This unit cannot assure proper functions or supply
power to all types of the devices.
• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files and 250
folders (a maximum of 999 files per folder).
• This unit can recognize a total of 25 characters for
file/folder names.
• For MPEG1/2 files: The maximum bit rate for video
signals (average) is 2 Mbps.

50
EN50-55_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 50

1/12/09 5:03:24 PM

Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• Connection Error:
The device is registered but the connection has failed.
Use <Connect> to connect the device again.
( 28)
• Error:
Try the operation again. If “Error” appears again,
check if the device supports the function you have
tried.
• Device Unfound:
No available Bluetooth device is detected by
<Search>.
• Loading:
The unit is updating the phone book or SMS.
• Please Wait...:
The unit is preparing to use the Bluetooth function. If
the message does not disappear, turn off and turn on
the unit, then connect the device again (or reset the
unit).
• Reset08:
Check the connection between the adapter and this
unit.

Icons for phone types
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the device.
: Cellular phone
: Household phone
: Office
: General
: Other than above

CD changer
• If you select a folder, which does not include any
25), you will hear a beep.
music files, on the list (
Select another folder including music files.

Satellite radio operations
• To know more about SIRIUS Satellite radio or to sign
up, visit <http://www.sirius.com>.
• For the latest channel listings and programming
information, or to sign up for XM Satellite radio, visit
<http://www.xmradio.com>.

iPod/iPhone operations
• You can control the following types of iPod/iPhone:
(A) Connected with the USB cable:
– iPod with video (5th Generation) *1, *2, *3
– iPod classic *1, *2
– iPod nano *2, *3
– iPod nano (2nd Generation) *2
– iPod nano (3rd Generation) *1, *2
– iPod nano (4th Generation) *1, *2
– iPod Touch *1, *2
– iPod Touch (2nd Generation) *1, *2
– iPhone/iPhone 3G *1, *2
(B) Connected with the interface adapter:
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
– iPod photo
– iPod with video (5th Generation)
– iPod classic
– iPod nano
– iPod nano (2nd Generation)
– iPod nano (3rd Generation)
– iPod nano (4th Generation) *4
*1 To watch the video with its audio, connect the iPod/
iPhone using USB Audio and Video cable (KS-U30, not
supplied).
*2 “iPod MODE” is available,
45.
*3 To listen to the sound in “iPod MODE,” connect
the iPod/iPhone using USB Audio and Video cable
(KS-U30, not supplied).
*4 It is not possible to charge the battery through this
unit.
Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN50-55_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 51

ENGLISH

• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on
circumstances around you.
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.

1/12/09 5:03:26 PM

ENGLISH

• If the iPod does not play correctly, update your iPod
software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through the unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• The text information scrolls on the monitor. This
unit can display up to 40 characters when using the
interface adapter and up to 128 characters when
using the USB 2.0 cable or USB Audio and Video cable
(KS-U30).

Characters you can enter for titles
In addition to the roman alphabet (A – Z, a – z), you
can use the following characters to assign titles. (
22)
• When <Руccĸий> is selected for <Language>.
15)
(
Upper and lower cases

Notice:
When operating an iPod/iPhone, some operations
may not be performed correctly or as intended. In
this case, visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/> (English
website only)
For the USB connection:
When <iPod Artwork> is set to <On>:
Do not press any keys during the first 5 seconds
or more of playing back any track containing an
Artwork*. It takes 5 seconds or more to display
an Artwork and no operations are available while
loading it.
* The picture displayed on the iPod’s/iPhone’s screen
while playing back a track.

Numbers and symbols

• When any language other than <Руccĸий> is
selected for <Language>. (
15)
Upper and lower cases

Menu settings
• If you change the <Amplifier Gain> setting from
<High> to <Low> while the volume level is set
higher than “30,” the unit automatically changes the
volume level to “VOL 30.”
• After you change any of <Menu Language/Audio
Language/Subtitle> settings, turn off then on the
power, and re-insert the disc (or insert another disc)
so that your setting takes effect.
• When you select <16:9> for a picture whose aspect
ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the
process for converting the picture width.
• Even if <4:3PS> is selected, the screen size may
become <4:3LB> for some discs.

Numbers and symbols

52
EN50-55_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 52

1/6/09 9:38:19 AM

Sound signals emitted through the rear terminals
ENGLISH

Through the analog terminals (Speaker out/LINE OUT)
2-channel signal is emitted. When playing multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced.

Through the DIGITAL OUT terminal
Digital signals (Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, MPEG Audio) are emitted.
• DTS sound cannot be emitted.
• To reproduce the multi-channel sounds such as Dolby Digital and MPEG Audio, connect an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with these multi-channel sources to this terminal, and set <D. Audio Output> correctly. (
16)

Output signals

<D. Audio Output>

Playback disc

<PCM>

48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM
96 kHz, Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM
DVD
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
with Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital bitstream
Linear PCM
with MPEG Audio
MPEG bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM /
Audio CD, Video CD
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
with Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital bitstream
Linear PCM
MPEG
with MPEG Audio
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM
MP3/WMA
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM
WAV
44.1 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM
* Digital signals may be emitted at 20 or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs
are not copy-protected.

Display information
• Available display information varies among the
playback sources.
Each time you press DISP, the
display changes to show the
various information.
*1 When the source is “ iPod,” the Artwork of the
song is shown if the song has an Artwork data. (
16) While MP3/WMA file is played, “Jacket picture”
is shown if the file has the tag data including “Jacket
picture.”
*2 When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>.
(
17)

Ex.: When the playback source is a DVD video disc

Navigation screen *2

Playback picture screen
(only for video sources)
SOURCE

SOURCE

DVD

DVD
FLAT

FLAT

CHAP. RPT

3:00

Source information screen

3:00

Playback picture and source
information screen *1

REFERENCES
EN50-55_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 53

1/21/09 10:34:52 AM

ENGLISH

Language codes (for DVD language selection)
Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque

FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA

Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian

KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE

Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali

NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
QU
RM
RN
RO
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS

Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati

ST
SU
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU

Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation registered in the US, Japan and other countries.
HD Radio ™ and the HD Radio Ready logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo are registered trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
XM and its corresponding logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
“SAT Radio,” the SAT Radio logo and all related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc., and XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Victor Company of
Japan, Limited (JVC) is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
“Made for iPod” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod and has been certified by
the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
“Works with iPhone” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPhone and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

54
EN50-55_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 54

12/22/08 9:56:59 AM

Caution on cleaning the unit
Do not use any solvent (for example, thinner, benzine,
etc.), detergent, or insecticide. This may damage the
monitor or the unit.

To keep discs clean
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.

ENGLISH

Maintenance

To play new discs
Recommended cleaning method:
Gently wipe the panel with a soft, dry cloth.

Moisture condensation
Center holder
Moisture may condense on the lens
inside the unit in the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the
car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.

How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its case, press down the
center holder of the case and lift the disc out, holding it
by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.

New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:
Single CD
—8 cm (3-3/16”) disc

Warped disc

Sticker and sticker residue

Stick-on label

Unusual shape

C-thru Disc (semitransparent disc)

Transparent or semitransparent parts on its
recording area

REFERENCES
EN50-55_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 55

12/22/08 9:57:00 AM

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
• For operations with the external components, refer also to the instructions supplied with the adapters used for the
connections (as well as the instructions supplied with the external components).
• Messages (enclosed in “ ”) in the tables below are shown in the language selected on <Language>. (
15)
Messages described here are in the language of this manual.

TUNER

General

Symptom

Remedy/Cause

• No sound comes out of the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The screen is not clear and legible.
Sunshine from the windshield may cause this symptom.
Adjust <Bright>. (
14)
• “Position Error Push Open Key”
The monitor panel angle has been forcibly adjusted, or its
appears on the screen.
adjustment has been interrupted while opening or closing.
Press [OPEN/TILT].
• “Mecha Error Push Reset” appears on Reset the unit. (
3)
the screen, and the panel does not
move.
• “No Signal” appears.
• Change the source.
• Start the playback on the external component connected to
VIDEO IN jack.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Signal input is too weak.
• The buttons on the monitor panel do When the monitor panel is open, only VOL +/– and
work. The other buttons do not function.
not work.
• The unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit. (
3)
• The touch panel does not respond
• Keep your hands and the touch panel clean and dry.
properly.
• Eliminate static electricity and do not place magnetic items
• <Illumination> function does not
near the unit.
work properly.
• Leave the unit until the temperature becomes stable in the
car.
• A rubber mat on the floor may cause this symptom. In this
case, do not use the rubber mat.
• SSM automatic presetting does not Store stations manually. (
24)
work.
• Static noise while listening to the
Connect the antenna firmly.
radio.

56
EN56-63_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 56

12/22/08 9:55:50 AM

Disc in general

•
•
•

MPEG1/MPEG2/MP3/WMA/WAV

•

•
•
•
•

Remedy/Cause
Eject the disc forcibly. (

ENGLISH

Symptom
• Disc can be neither recognized nor
played back.
• Disc cannot be ejected.
• Recordable/Rewritable discs cannot
be played back.
• Tracks on the Recordable/Rewritable
discs cannot be skipped.
• Playback does not start.

Unlock the disc. (
30)
• Insert a finalized disc.
• Finalize the discs with the component which you used for
recording.

• Insert the disc correctly again.
• The format of files is not supported by the unit.
The playback picture is not clear and Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (
14)
legible.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
Sound and pictures are sometimes
interrupted or distorted.
• Change the disc.
No playback picture is shown and
Parking brake lead is not connected properly.
“Parking Brake” appears on the
See Installation/Connection Manual.
screen, even when the parking brake
is engaged.
No picture appears on the external • Connect the video cord correctly.
monitor.
• Select the correct input on the external monitor.
“Eject Error” or “Loading Error”
Change the source by pressing SOURCE.
appears on the screen.
“Region code error” appears on the Region code is not correct. (
4)
screen when you insert a DVD Video.
Disc cannot be played back.
• Change the disc.
• Record the tracks using a compliant application on the
appropriate discs. (
4)
• Add appropriate extension codes to the file names.
Noise is generated.
The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to
another file.
Tracks are not played back as you
Playback order may differ from the one played back using other
have intended them to play.
players.
Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how
the tracks are recorded.
“Not Support” appears on the screen The track is unplayable.
and track skips.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN56-63_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 57

1/12/09 5:26:36 PM

Symptom

ENGLISH

• Noise is generated.

USB

• Tracks cannot play back as you have
intended them to play.
• “Now Reading...” keeps flashing on
the screen.

Bluetooth

• “Cannot play this device Check the
device” appears on the screen.
• Correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
• While playing a track, sound is
sometimes interrupted.
• Bluetooth device does not detect the
unit.

Remedy/Cause
The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to
another file.
Playback order may differ from the one played back using other
players.
• Readout time varies depending on the USB device.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.
No tracks are stored. Copy tracks to the USB device.
For available characters,

52.

The tracks are not properly copied into the USB device. Copy
tracks again, and try again.
This unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular phone
and one Bluetooth audio player at a time.
While connected to a device, this unit cannot be detected from
another device. Disconnect currently connected device and
search again.
• The unit does not detect the
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
Bluetooth device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device.
• The unit does not make pairing with • Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target
the Bluetooth device.
device. If the PIN code of the device is not indicated on its
instructions, try “0000” or “1234.”
• Select the device name from <Special Device>, then try to
connect again. (
28)
• Echo or noise occurs.
Adjust the microphone unit (supplied with Bluetooth Adapter)
position.
• Phone sound quality is poor.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
cellular phone.
• Move the car to place where you can get a better signal
reception.
• The sound is interrupted or skipped • Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
while using a Bluetooth audio player. audio player.
• Disconnect the device connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the player
again.
• “NEW DEVICE” cannot be selected for Bluetooth audio player is already connected. To select “NEW
“Bluetooth AUDIO.”
DEVICE,” disconnect it. (
27)
• The connected audio player cannot Check whether the connected audio player supports AVRCP
be controlled.
(Audio Video Remote Control Profile).

58
EN56-63_KW-ADV792[J]3.indd 58

12/22/08 9:55:53 AM

•
•
•
•
•
•

Satellite radio

Remedy/Cause

•

•
•
•

Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
Current disc does not include playable files. Replace
the disc with one including playable files.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and
press the reset button of the CD changer.
“Reset01” – “Reset07” appears on the screen. Press the reset button of the CD changer.
The CD changer does not work at all.
Reset the unit. (
3)
“CALL 1-888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE”
Starts subscribing SIRIUS Satellite radio. (
42)
appears on the screen.
“Acquiring Signal” or “NO SIGNAL” appears on Move to an area with stronger signals.
the screen.
“No Antenna” or “ANTENNA” appears on the Connect the antenna firmly.
screen.
“No CH” appears on the screen for about 5
No broadcast on the selected channel.
seconds, then returns to the previous display Select another channel or continue listening to the
previous channel.
when listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio.
“CH–––” appears on the screen for about 2
Selected channel is no longer available or is
seconds, then returns to the previous channel unauthorized. Select another channel or continue
while listening to the XM Satellite radio.
listening to the previous channel.
“NO NAME” appears on the screen.
No text information for the selected channel.
“UPDATING” appears on the screen and no
The receiver is updating the channel information and
sound can be heard.
it takes a few minutes to complete.
“OFF AIR” appears on the screen while
Selected channel is not broadcasting at this time.
listening to the XM Satellite radio.
Select another channel or continue listening to the
previous channel.
“LOADING” appears on the screen while
The unit is loading the channel information and audio.
listening to the XM Satellite radio.
Text information is temporarily unavailable.
“Reset08” appears on the screen.
Reconnect this unit and the Satellite radio correctly
and reset the unit.
Satellite radio does not work at all.
Reconnect the Satellite radio after a few seconds.

ENGLISH

CD changer

Symptom
• “No Disc” appears on the screen.
• “No Magazine” appears on the screen.
• “Cannot play this disc Check the disc” appears
on the screen.
• “Reset08” appears on the screen.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN56-63_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 59

1/12/09 5:26:41 PM

HD Radio reception
iPod /iPhone

ENGLISH

Symptom

Remedy/Cause

• Sound quality changes when receiving HD
Radio stations.

Fix the reception mode either to <Digital> or
<Analog>. (
21)

• No sound can be heard.

• “Analog” is selected when receiving all digital
broadcast of HD Radio station. Select <Digital> or
21)
<Auto>. (
• <Digital> is selected when receiving weak digital
signals or receiving conventional radio broadcast.
Select <Analog> or <Auto>. (
21)

• “Reset08” appears on the screen.

Reconnect this unit and the HD Radio tuner box
correctly, then reset the unit.

• The iPod/iPhone does not turn on or does not
work.

•
•
•
•

Check the connecting cable and its connection.
Update the firmware version of the iPod/iPhone.
Charge the battery of the iPod/iPhone.
Check whether “HEAD MODE” or “iPod MODE” is
correctly selected. (
45)
• Reset the iPod/iPhone.

• Sound is distorted.

Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.

• “Disconnect” appears on the screen.

Check the connection.

• Playback stops.

The headphones are disconnected during playback.
Restart playback.

• “Cannot play this device Check the device”
appears on the screen.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod/iPhone.

• No operations are available when playing back Operate the unit after the Artwork is loaded. (
a track containing Artwork.

16)

AV-IN

• “Reset01” – “Reset07” appears on the screen. Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod.
Then, connect them again.
• “Reset08” appears on the screen.

Check the connection between the adapter and this
unit.

• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.

Reset the iPod.

• “Restricted Device” appears on the screen.

Check whether the connected iPod is compatible with
this unit. (
51)

• No picture appears on the screen.

• Turn on the video component if it is not on.
• Connect the video component correctly.

• Playback picture is not clear and legible.

Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (

14)

JVC bears no responsibility for any loss of data in an iPod/iPhone and/or USB mass storage class
device while using this unit.

60
EN56-63_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 60

1/6/09 9:39:38 AM

Power Output:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4 Ω and ≤ 1%
THD+N
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)

AMPLIFIER

Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control Range:

TUNER SECTION

FM Tuner:

AM Tuner:
Signal Detection System:
Frequency Response:

DVD/CD

Frequencies:

Audio Output Level:
• LINE OUT (REAR)
• SUBWOOFER
Color System:
Video Output (composite):
Other Terminals:
Input:

Frequency Range:

Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Wow and Flutter:

ENGLISH

Specifications

Level:
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:

4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5
kHz, 6.3 kHz, 15 kHz
±10 dB
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ

NTSC
1 Vp-p/75 Ω
LINE IN, VIDEO IN, Antenna input, USB input, Steering wheel remote
input
Output: VIDEO OUT
Others: CD changer, DIGITAL OUT (optical)
FM:
with channel interval set to
87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
100 kHz or 200 kHz
with channel interval set to 50 kHz 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
AM:
with channel interval set to 10 kHz 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
with channel interval set to 9 kHz: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
Usable Sensitivity:
9.3 dBf (0.8 μV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):
65 dB
Frequency Response:
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
40 dB
Sensitivity:
20 μV
Selectivity:
40 dB
Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)
DVD, fs=48 kHz/96 kHz:
16 Hz to 22 000 Hz
VCD/CD:
16 Hz to 20 000 Hz
96 dB
98 dB
Less than measurable limit

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN56-63_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 61

1/12/09 5:27:42 PM

USB
GENERAL

MONITOR

ENGLISH

USB Standards:
Data Transfer Rate

USB 2.0 Full Speed
Full Speed:
Maximum 12 Mbps
Low Speed:
Maximum 1.5 Mbps
Compatible Device:
Mass storage class
Compatible File System:
FAT 32/16/12
Max. Current:
DC 5 V 500 mA
Screen Size:
7 inch wide liquid crystal display
Number of Pixel:
336 960 pixels: 480 × 3 (horizontal) × 234 (vertical)
Drive Method:
TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix format
Color System:
NTSC/PAL
Aspect Ratio:
16:9 (wide)
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Grounding System:
Negative ground
Allowable Storage Temperature:
–10°C to +60°C (14°F to 140°F)
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Dimensions (W × H × D):
Installation Size (approx.):
182 mm × 111 mm × 161 mm
• With trim plate and sleeve
(7-3/16” × 4-3/8” × 6-3/8”)
attached
Panel Size (approx.):
188 mm × 117 mm × 22 mm
(7-7/16” × 4-5/8” × 7/8”)
Mass (approx.):
3.3 kg (7.3 lbs) (including trim plate
and sleeve)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone directory for the nearest car audio speciality shop.

Required space for installation and the monitor ejection
Dashboard

111 (4-3/8)

4 (3/16)

20 (13/16)

CAUTION: When ejecting the monitor, leave an
open space for the monitor to come out. If you
do not, the monitor may obstruct the steering
wheel and gearshift lever operations, and this
may result in a traffic accident.
Unit: mm (inch)

161 (6-3/8)

91.3 (3-5/8)

62
EN56-63_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 62

1/6/09 9:39:40 AM

General
Reset ..................................................................3, 6
Volume ................................................6, 7, 10, 20
AV Menu ........................................................ 6, 13
Source..................................................6, 7, 11, 32
Short Cut ...................................................6, 8, 32
RM-RK252 ................................... 9 – 11, 33 – 36
Clock .............................................................12, 15
Display demonstration ...........................12, 14

Tuner
Listen to the radio (FM/AM) ...............6, 9, 29
Auto/manual search................................10, 29
Select preset station ........................... 9, 24, 29
Store station
(automatically/manually) ...................21, 24
Improve FM reception ...................................21
Assign title .........................................................22

Disc
Open/close ................................................... 7, 30
Eject ....................................................................3, 7
Lock/unlock disc ..............................................30
Playable disc type ............................................. 4
Display information ........................................31
Repeat/random play ........................22, 23, 36
Select track/folder ................... 11, 25, 31 – 34
Select title/program/
playlist ...................................... 10, 11, 31 – 33
Start/stop/pause/resume
playback ......................................... 11, 32 – 34
Search/skip ....................................... 10, 32 – 34
OSD .................................................10, 16, 35, 36
PBC playback ......................................10, 11, 33

USB

CD changer
Start playback ............................................25, 41
Repeat/random play ...............................22, 23

ENGLISH

Operation index

Satellite radio
Activate subscription .....................................42
Listen to a channel..........................................43
Store channel ....................................................24
Preset channel ..................................................24

HD Radio operation
Listen to a channel..........................................44
Change the HD Radio reception mode ...21
Improve reception ..........................................21

Bluetooth
Connect/disconnect/delete ..........27, 28, 38
Make a call ..................................................26, 39
Answer/end call ........................................28, 39
Read SMS .....................................................26, 40
Microphone volume.......................................28
Preset phone number....................................25

iPod
Connect .......................................................45, 46
Start/pause playback ..............................45, 46
Head Mode/iPod Mode.................................45
Repeat/random play ...............................22, 23
Audiobooks .......................................................23
Select track ..........................................25, 45, 46

External component
AV-INPUT ............................................................47
EXT-INPUT ..........................................................48

Attach/detach...................................................37
Start/pause playback ..............................11, 37
Repeat/random play ...............................22, 23

REFERENCES
EN56-63_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 63

1/22/09 4:46:31 PM

Still having trouble??
USA ONLY

Call 1-800-252-5722

ENGLISH

RECEPTOR DVD CON MONITOR

KW-ADV792/KW-AVX720

ESPAÑOL

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

KW-ADV792/KW-AVX720

RÉCEPTEUR DVD ET MONITEUR KW-ADV792/KW-AVX720

FRANÇAIS

Instructions

Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

http://www.jvc.com
We can help you!

CoverRear_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 1

KW-ADV792/KW-AVX720

EN, SP, FR
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 12.
Para cancelar la demonstración en pantalla, consulte la página 12.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 12.

0109DTSMDTJEIN

INSTRUCTIONS
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS

For customer Use:
Enter below the Model
No. and Serial No. which
are located on the top or
bottom of the cabinet. Retain
this information for future
reference.
Model No.
Serial No.

GET0602-001A
[J]

1/6/09 9:26:03 AM

KW-ADV792/KW-AVX720
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual de instalación/conexión
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
GET0602-002A

0109DTSMDTJEIN

[J]

EN, SP, FR
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

FRANÇAIS

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio
dealers.

Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC, con
sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo no posee
este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser
adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para
automóviles.

Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant
continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce
type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous
pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.

WARNINGS

ADVERTENCIAS

AVERTISSEMENTS

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift lever operations,
as this may result in a traffic accident.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices such as air bags, as
this may result in a fatal accident.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate any unit while manipulating the steering wheel, as
this may result in a traffic accident.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while driving. It may lead to
carelessness and cause an accident.
• If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look around
carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.
• If the parking brake is not engaged, “Parking Brake” appears on the
monitor, and no playback picture will be shown.
– This warning appears only when the parking brake wire is
connected to the parking brake system built in the car.

• NO instale ningún receptor o tienda ningún cable en una ubicación
donde;
– Donde pueda obstruir la maniobra del volante de dirección y del
cambio de engranajes, con el consiguiente riesgo de accidentes
de tráfico.
– Donde pueda obstruir el funcionamiento de dispositivos de
seguridad tales como bolsas de aire, pues podría resultar en un
accidente fatal.
– Donde pueda obstruir la visibilidad.
• NO OPERE la unidad mientras está maniobrando el volante de
dirección, pues podría producirse un accidente de tráfico.
• El conductor no debe mirar el monitor mientras conduce. Podría
producirse un descuido, y causar un accidente.
• Si necesita operar la unidad mientras conduce, asegúrese de mirar
atentamente a su alrededor pues de lo contrario, se podría producir
un accidente de tráfico.
• Si el freno de mano no está en uso, aparecerá “Parking Brake (Freno
de Mano)” en la pantalla y no se mostrará ninguna secuencia de
imagen.
– Esta advertencia aparece únicamente cuando el cable del freno de
estacionamiento se encuentra conectado al sistema del freno de
estacionamiento incorporado al automóvil.

• N’INSTALLEZ aucun appareil ni aucun câble dans un endroit où:
– où il peut gêner l’accès au volant ou au levier de vitesse car cela
peut entraîner un accident de la circulation.
– où il peut gêner la manipulation de dispositifs de sécurité tels que
les airbags car cela peut entraîner un accident fatal.
– où il peut gêner la visibilité.
• NE COMMANDEZ pas l’appareil lors de la manipulation du volant
car cela peut entraîner un accident de la circulation.
• Le conducteur ne doit pas regarder le moniteur lorsqu’il conduit. Cela
peut lui faire perdre sa concentration et causer un accident.
• Si vous souhaitez opérer l’appareil pendant que vous conduisez,
assurez-vous de bien regarder autour de vous afin de ne pas causer un
accident de la circulation.
• Si le frein à main n’est pas engagé, “Parking Brake (Frein à Main)”
s’affiche sur le moniteur et aucune image de lecture n’apparaît.
– Cet avertissement apparaît uniquement quand le fil du frein de
stationnement est connecté au système de frein de stationnement
intégré à la voiture.

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before
installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.
Notes on electrical connections:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows
frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with maximum power
of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change <Amplifier Gain>
setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 20 of
the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads
with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it
when removing this unit.

Heat sink
Sumidero térmico
Dissipateur de chaleur

Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal
negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas
antes de instalar la unidad.
• Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis
del automóvil después de la instalación.
Notas sobre las conexiones eléctricas:
• Reemplace el fusible por otro del régimen especificado. Si el fusible
se funde frecuentemente, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de
equipos de audio para automóviles.
• Se recomienda conectar los altavoces con una potencia máxima de
más de 50 W (tanto atrás como adelante, con una impedancia de
4 Ω a 8 Ω).
Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50 W, cambie <Amplifier
Gain> para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte la página 20 de
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).
• Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los terminales de los cables NO
UTILIZADOS con cinta aislante.
• La unidad estará muy caliente después del uso. Tenga la precaución
de no quemarse al efectuar su desmontaje.

Parts list for installation and connection

Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión

If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.

Si hay algún elemento faltante, consulte inmediatamente con su
concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.

Main unit
Unidad principal
Appareil principal

Flat head screws *1 (M5 × 8 mm/M5 × 3/8")
Tornillos de cabeza plana *1 (M5 × 8 mm/M5 × 3/8 pulgada)
Vis à tête plate *1 (M5 × 8 mm/M5 × 3/8 pouces)

Trim plate
Placa de guarnición
Plaque d’assemblage

Sleeve *1
Cubierta*1
Manchon *1

Crimp connector
Conector de engarce
Raccord à sertir

*1 Fitted to the main unit when shipped.

Remarques sur les connexions électriques:
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute
souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de
plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant, avec une
impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω).
Si la puissance maximum est inférieure à 50 W, changez <Amplifier
Gain> pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 20 du
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont
PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire
attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.

Liste des pièces pour l’installation et
raccordement
Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio JVC
immédiatement.

Brackets *1
Ménsulas *1
Supports *1

Use these screws when installing the unit without the supplied sleeve.
Utilice estos tornillos cuando instale la unidad sin la funda suministrada.
Utilisez ces vis lors de l’installation de l’appareil sans le manchon fourni.

Round head screws *1 (M2.6 × 3 mm/M2.6 × 1/8")
Tornillos de cabeza esférica *1 (M2,6 × 3 mm/M2,6 × 1/8 pulgada)
Vis à tête ronde *1 (M2,6 × 3 mm/M2,6 × 1/8 pouces)

Power cord
Cable de alimentación
Cordon d’alimentation

Remote controller
Control remoto
Télécommande

Batteries
Pilas
Piles

*1 Fijado a la unidad principal cuando se expide de fábrica.

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm/M5 × 3/8")
Tornillos de cabeza plana (M5 × 8 mm/
M5 × 3/8 pulgada)
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm/M5 × 3/8 pouces)
Round head screws (M5 × 8 mm/M5 × 3/8")
Tornillos de cabeza esférica (M5 × 8 mm/
M5 × 3/8 pulgada)
Vis à tête ronde (M5 × 8 mm/M5 × 3/8 pouces)

*1 Fixé à l’appareil lors de l’expédition.

Install1_KW-ADV792[J]2.indd 1

12/12/08 12:41:17 PM

INSTALLATION
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)

INSTALACION (MONTAJE EN EL
TABLERO DE INSTRUMENTOS)

INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE
TABLEAU DE BORD)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. However, you
should make adjustments corresponding to your specific car. If you
have any questions or require information regarding installation kits,
consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed
by a qualified technician.

La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Sin embargo
usted deberá efectuar los ajustes correspondientes a su automóvil.
Si tiene alguna pregunta o necesita información acerca de las
herramientas para instalación, consulte con su concesionario de
JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles o a una compañía que
suministra tales herramientas.
• Si no está seguro de poder instalar la unidad correctamente, déjela
en manos de un técnico cualificado.

L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique.
Cependant, vous devez faire les ajustements correspondant à votre
voiture. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des
kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une
compagnie d’approvisionnement.
• Si vous n’êtes pas sûr de pouvoir installer l’appareil correctement,
faite-le installer par un technicien qualifié.

Antes de instalar la unidad

Avant d’installer l’appareil

Before installing the unit
• When mounting the unit, be sure to use the screws provided, as
instructed. If other screws are used, parts could become loose or
damaged.
• When tightening screws or bolts, be careful not to pinch any
connection cord.
• Make sure not to block the fan on the rear to maintain proper
ventilation when installing the unit.

• Al instalar la unidad, asegúrese de usar los tornillos suministrados,
de acuerdo con las instrucciones. Si emplea otros tipos de tornillos,
corre el riesgo de que las piezas se aflojen o se dañen.
• Al apretar los tornillos o los pernos, asegúrese de que ningún cable
de conexión quede pillado.
• Al efectuar la instalación, asegúrese de no bloquear el ventilador del
panel trasero a fin de mantener una ventilación correcta.

• Lors du montage de l’appareil, assurez-vous d’utiliser les vis fournies,
de la façon indiquée. Si vous utilisez d’autres vis, certaines pièces
peuvent être perdues ou endommagées.
• Lorsque vous serrez des vis ou des boulons, faites attention de ne pas
pincer un cordon de connexion.
• Assurez-vous de ne pas bloquer le ventilateur sur le panneau arrière
lors de l’installation afin de permettre une ventilation correcte.

Remove the audio system originally installed in the car, together
with its mounting brackets.
Note: Be sure to keep all the screws and parts removed from
your car for future use.

Desmonte el sistema de audio instalado originalmente en el coche,
junto con los ménsulas de montaje.
Nota: Asegúrese de guardar todos los tornillos y piezas quitados
de su vehículo para poderlos usar en el futuro.

2
3

Install the sleeve in the dashboard of the car.

2
3

Instale la cubierta en el cubretablero del automóvil.

2
3

Installez le manchon dans le tableau de bord de la voiture.

Do the required electrical connections.
• See pages 3 – 6.

Realice todas las conexiones eléctricas necesarias.
• Consulte las páginas 3 – 6.

Réalisez les connexions électriques requises.
• Référez-vous aux pages 3 – 6.

Install the main unit in the sleeve.

5
6

Coloque la unidad principal en la cubierta.

5
6

Installez l’appareil principal dans le manchon.

4
5
6

Attach the brackets to the main unit.
• Make sure to use the supplied flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm/
M5 × 3/8"). If longer screws are used, they could damage the
unit.

Attach the trim plate.

Fije los ménsulas a la unidad principal.
• Asegúrese de usar los tornillos de cabeza plana suministrados
(M5 × 8 mm/M5 × 3/8 pulgada). El uso de tornillos más largos
producir daños a la unidad.

Fije la placa de guarnición.

Attachez les supports à l’appareil principal.
• Assurez-vous d’utiliser les vis à tête plate fournis—
(M5 × 8 mm/M5 × 3/8 pouces). Vous risquez d’endommager
l’appareil si vous utilisez des vis plus longues.

Fixez la plaque d’assemblage.
Sleeve
Cubierta
Manchon

Brackets / Ménsulas / Supports

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm/M5 × 3/8")
Tornillos de cabeza plana (M5 × 8 mm/M5 × 3/8 pulgada)
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm/M5 × 3/8 pouces)

Trim plate
Placa de guarnición
Plaque d’assemblage

Round head screws (M2.6 × 3 mm/M2.6 × 1/8")
Tornillos de cabeza esférica (M2,6 × 3 mm/M2,6 × 1/8 pulgada)
Vis à tête ronde (M2,6 × 3 mm/M2,6 × 1/8 pouces)

Required space for installation and the monitor ejection
Espacio requerido para la instalación y la expulsión del monitor
Espace nécessaire pour l’installation et l’éjection du moniteur
Dashboard
Tablero
Tableau de bord

111 (4-3/8)

4 (3/16)

20 (13/16)

161 (6-3/8)

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚, taking it into account that the monitor would eject
when in use.
Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30°, teniendo en cuenta que el monitor debe extraerse
para su uso.
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30°, en tenant compte du fait que le moniteur doit être
déployé lors de son utilisation.

30˚
Unit: mm (inch)
Unidad: mm (pulgada)
Unité: mm (pouces)

91.3 (3-5/8)

Install1_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 2

1/21/09 12:18:49 PM

CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES

Typical connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car
body may be different in color.

1
2
3

Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order
specified in the illustration below.

Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del
vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en la
unidad.
Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector
procedentes de la carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes
en color.

Connect the antenna cord.

2
3

Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en el
orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo.
Conecte el cable de antena.
Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.

/ véase diagrama

/ voir le diagramme

)

Rear ground terminal / Terminal de tierra posterior /
Borne arrière de masse
(see diagram / véase diagrama
voir le diagramme )

(see diagram / véase diagrama
voir le diagramme )

1
2
3

Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre
spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.
Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.

If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate
this unit using the controller. For connection, an exclusive remote adapter (not
supplied) which matches your car is required. For details, consult the same car
audio dealer as where the unit is purchased.
Si su automóvil está equipado con control remoto en el volante de dirección, podrá
controlar este receptor utilizando el control remoto. Para la conexión, se requiere un
adaptador remoto exclusivo (no suministrado) que sea adecuado para su automóvil.
Para los detalles, consulte con el concesionario car audio donde compró el receptor.
Si votre voiture est équipée d’une télécommande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet
autoradio en utilisant cette télécommande. Pour la connexion, vous avez besoin d’un
adaptateur de télécommande spécialisé (non fourni) correspondant à votre voiture. Pour
en savoir plus, consultez le revendeur autoradio où vous avez acheté votre autoradio.

Antenna terminal / Terminal de la antena / Borne de l’antenne
DIGITAL OUT
(see diagram

SUBWOOFER
(see diagram / véase diagrama
voir le diagramme )

Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Control remoto del volante de dirección (equipado en
el vehículo)
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)

Fan / Ventilador / Ventilateur
Steering wheel remote input
Entrada del control remoto del
volante de dirección
Entrée de la télécommande de volant

15 A fuse
Fusible de 15 A
Fusible 15 A

Black
Negro
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture

Yellow *3
Amarillo *3
Jaune *3
Red
Rojo
Rouge

VIDEO OUT
(see diagram /
véase diagrama /
voir le diagramme )

Ignition switch
Interruptor de encendido
Interrupteur d’allumage

Noir

To external components
(see diagram )
A un componente externo
(véase diagrama )
Pour connecter un appareil
extérieur (véase diagrama )

Remote adapter *2
Adaptador para remoto exclusivo *2
Adaptateur pour télécommande spécialisé *2

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del
automóvil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture
(en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible

Blue
Azul

VIDEO IN
(see diagram /
véase diagrama /
voir le diagramme )

To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
A la antena automática, si hubiere (250 mA máx.)
À l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une (250 mA max.)

Bleu

LINE IN
(see diagram /
véase diagrama /
voir le diagramme )

Blue with white stripe
Azul con rayas blancas
Bleu avec bande blanche

REAR OUT
(see diagram /
véase diagrama /
voir le diagramme )

Fuse block
Bloque de fusibles
Porte-fusible

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
Al conductor remoto del otro equipo (200 mA máx.)
Au fil de télécommande d’un autre appareil (200 mA max.)

Orange with white stripe
Naranja con rayas blancas
Orange avec bande blanche

To car light control switch
Al interruptor de control de las luces del automóvil
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture

Brown
Marrón
Marron

To cellular phone system
Al sistema de teléfono celular
À un système de téléphone cellulaire

Light green
Verde claro
Vert clair

To parking brake (see diagram )
Al freno de estacionamiento (véase diagrama )
Au frein de stationnement (voir le diagramme )
Crimp connector
Conector de sujeción
Raccord à sertir

White with black stripe
Blanco con rayas negras
Blanc avec bande noire

White
Blanco
Blanc

Gray with black stripe
Gris con rayas negras
Gris avec bande noire

Left speaker (front)
Altavoz izquierdo (frontal)
Enceinte gauche (avant)

*2 Not supplied for this unit.
*3 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead
must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.

Gray
Gris
Gris

Green with black stripe
Verde con rayas negras
Vert avec bande noire

Right speaker (front)
Altavoz derecho (frontal)
Enceinte droit (avant)

Green
Verde
Vert

Purple with black stripe
Púrpura con rayas negras
Violet avec bande noire

Left speaker (rear)
Altavoz izquierdo (trasero)
Enceinte gauche (arrière)

*2 No suministrado con esta unidad.
*3 Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad previa a de la
instalación, es necesario conectar este cable, de lo contrario no se podrá
conectar la alimentación.

Purple
Púrpura
Violet

Right speaker (rear)
Altavoz derecho (trasero)
Enceinte droit (arrière)

*2 Non fourni avec cet appareil.
*3 Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil
doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut pas être mis sous tension.

Install1_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 3

1/22/09 2:09:13 PM

ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

FRANÇAIS
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des
enceintes:
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon
d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait
sérieusement endommagé.
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation
aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.

PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la fuente de
alimentación y de los altavoces:
• NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de
alimentación a la batería de automóvil, pues podrían
producirse graves daños en las unidades.
• ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del
cable de alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su
automóvil.

Connecting the parking brake lead / Conexión del cable del freno de estacionamiento / Connexion du fil de frein de stationnement
Parking brake lead (light green)
Cable del freno de estacionamiento (verde claro)
Fil du frein de stationnement (vert clair)

Crimp connector
Conector de engarce
Raccord à sertir

Parking brake
Freno de estacionamiento
Frein de stationnement

To metallic body or chassis of the car
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture

Parking brake switch (inside the car)
Interruptor del freno de estacionamiento
(dentro del automóvil)
Commutateur de frein de stationnement
(intérieur de la voiture)

Connecting the reverse gear signal lead (for rear view camera) / Conexión del cable de señal del engranaje de marcha atrás (para cámara de
retrovisión) / Connexion du fil de signal de marche arrière (pour la caméra du rétroviseur)

Locate the reverse lamp lead in the trunk.

Localisez le fil des feux de recul dans le coffre.

Localice el conductor de la luz de marcha atrás en el portaequipajes.
lead *1

Extension
Cable prolongador *1
Fil prolongateur *1
Purple with white stripe
Púrpura con rayas blancas
Violet avec bande blanche

REVERSE
GEAR
SIGNAL

Crimp connector *1
Conector de sujeción *1
Raccord à sertir *1
To reverse lamp
A la luz de marcha atrás
Aux feux de recul

To car battery
A la batería del automóvil
À la batterie de la voiture

Reverse lamp lead
Conductor de la luz de marcha atrás
Fil des feux de recul

*1 Not supplied for this unit.

Reverse lamps
Luz de marcha atrás
Feux de recul

*1 No suministrado con esta unidad

*1 Non fourni avec cet autoradio.

TROUBLESHOOTING

LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS

EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES

• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• El fusible se quema.
* ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?

• Le fusible saute.
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?

• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?

• No es posible conectar la alimentación.
* ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?

• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?

• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• No sale sonido de los altavoces.
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?

• Pas de son des enceintes.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?

• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• El sonido presenta distorsión.
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una
masa común?

• Le son est déformé.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble
à la masse?

• Perturbación de ruido.
* ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil
utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso?

• Interférence avec les sons.
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la
voiture avec un cordon court et épais?

• Esta unidad se calienta.
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una
masa común?

• Cet appareil devient chaud.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble
à la masse?

• Esta unidad no funciona en absoluto.
* ¿Reinicializó la unidad?

• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?

• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using
shorter and thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?

Install2_KW-ADV792[J]1.indd 4

12/5/08 9:23:55 AM

Connecting the external amplifier and/or subwoofer / Conexión del amplificador y/o subwoofer exterior / Connexion d’amplificateurs
extérieurs et/ou d’un caisson de grave

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through
this unit.
• For amplifier only:
– Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to
the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.
– You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio
signals only to the external amplifier(s) to get clear sounds and
to prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit. See page 20 of
the INSTRUCTIONS (separate volume).

Usted podrá conectar un amplificador para mejorar el sistema estéreo
de su automóvil.
• Conecte el conductor remoto (azul con rayas blancas) al conductor
remoto del otro equipo para poderlo controlar a través de esta unidad.
• Sólo para el amplificador:
– Desconecte los altavoces de esta unidad y conéctelos al
amplificador. Los cables de los altavoces de esta unidad
quedan sin usar.
– Podrá desconectar el amplificador incorporado y enviar las
señales de audio solamente al(los) amplificador(es) externo(s) para
obtener sonidos nítidos y evitar que se caliente el interior de la
unidad. Consulte la página 20 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
(volumen separado).

Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre
système autoradio.
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)
au fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il
puisse être commandé via cet appareil.
• Pour l’amplificateur seulement:
– Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectezles à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet
appareil inutilisés.
– Vous pouvez mettre hors service l’amplificateur intégré et
envoyer les signaux audio uniquement sur un ou plusieurs
amplificateurs extérieurs afin d’obtenir un son clair et d’éviter
tout échauffement interne de l’autoradio. Voir page 20 du
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS (volume séparé).

Y-connector *2 / Conector en Y*2 / Connecteur Y *2

Remote lead *2 / Cable remoto *2 / Fil d’alimentation à distance *2

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il
y en a une

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Cable remoto (Azul con rayas blancas)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)

JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur
Rear speakers
Altavoces traseros
Enceintes arrière
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Caisson de grave

JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur

Front speakers
Altavoces delanteros
Enceintes avant

Connecting the external components / Conexión de otros componentes externos / Connexion des appareils extérieurs
AV amplifier or decoder
Amplificador o decodificador AV
Amplificateur AV ou décodeur

External monitor
Monitor externo
Moniteur extérieur

Digital optical cable *2
Cable óptico digital*2
Câble optique numérique *2

Video cord *2
Cable de video *2
Cordon vidéo *2

External component
Componente exterior
Appareil extérieur

KV-CM1 *2
Rear view camera
Cámara de reprovisión
Caméra de recul

*3
Video cord *2
Cable de video *2
Cordon vidéo *2

USB devices / Dispositivos USB / Périphériques USB
USB cable, approx. 1.2 m (4 feet)
Cable USB, aprox. 1,2 m (4 pie)
Câble USB, environ 1,2 m (4 pieds)

USB device
Dispositivo USB
Périphérique USB

Connecting the iPod/iPhone to the USB terminal / Conectar el iPod/iPhone
al termina USB / Connexion du iPod/iPhone à la prise USB
You can connect the iPod/iPhone to the USB terminal using the following cables:
• To listen to the music: USB 2.0 cable (supplied for the iPod/iPhone)
• To watch the video: USB Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (not supplied) *6
Puede conectar el iPod/iPhone al terminal USB utilizado los siguientes cables:
• Para escuchar la música: Cable USB 2.0 (suministrado con el iPod/iPhone)
• Para ver vídeo: Cable USB audio y video para iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (no suministrado) *6
Vous pouvez connecter le iPod/iPhone à la prise USB en utilisant les câbles suivants:
• Pour écouter la musique: Câble USB 2.0 (fourni pour le iPod/iPhone)
• Pour regarder une séquence vidéo: Câble USB Audio et Vidéo pour iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (non fourni) *6
USB 2.0 cable
Cable USB 2.0
Câble USB 2.0

Apple iPod/iPhone
Apple iPod/iPhone
iPod Apple/iPhone

You cannot connect a computer to the USB (
) terminal of the unit.
No se puede conectar un ordenador al terminal USB (
) de la unidad.
Vous ne pouvez pas connecter un ordinateur à la prise USB (
) de l’appareil.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod es una marca comercial de Apple Inc., registrada en los EE.UU. y otros países.
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans les autres pays.
KS-U30
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone es una marca comercial de Apple Inc.
iPhone est une marque de commerce de Apple Inc.
*2
*3
*4
*5

Not supplied for this unit.
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).
Audio cord (not supplied for this unit).
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of
the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove
the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage
to the unit.
*6 When using the cable, make sure <iPod (Off)> is selected for
<AV Input> (see page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

*2
*3
*4
*5

No suministrado con esta unidad.
Cable de señal (no suministrado con esta unidad).
Cable de audio (no suministrado con esta unidad).
Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a
un lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela
antes de fijar el cable). De lo contrario, se podrían producir daños en la
unidad.
*6 Cuando utilice el cable, asegúrese de haber seleccionado
<iPod (Off)> para <AV Input> (consulte la página 17 del MANUAL DE
INSTRUCCIONES).

*2
*3
*4
*5

Non fourni avec cet appareil.
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil).
Cordon audio (non fourni avec cet appareil).
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de
la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est
recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil).
L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.
*6 Lors de l’utilisation de ce câble, assurez-vous que <iPod (Off)> est choisi
pour <AV Input> (voir page 17 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).

Install2_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd 5

1/21/09 2:48:24 PM

Connecting the external components to the CD changer jack / Conexión de los componentes externos al jack del cambiador de CD /
Connexion des appareils extérieurs au changeur de CD

When connecting the external components, refer also to the
manuals supplied for the components and adapter.

Cuando conecte componentes externos, consulte, también, los
manuales suministrados con los componentes y el adaptador.

Lors de la connexion des appareils extérieurs, référez-vous aussi aux
manuels fournis avec les appareils et les adaptateurs.

CAUTION:

PRECAUCION:

PRECAUTION:

Before connecting the external components, make sure that the
unit is turned off.

Antes de conectar los componentes externos, asegúrese de que la
unidad esté apagada.

Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs, assurez-vous que
l’appareil est hors tension.

You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer
jack.

Puede conectar los siguientes componentes JVC al jack del cambiador
de CD.
Nombre del
modelo

JVC component

Model name

Componente JVC

CD changer (CD-CH)
HD Radio TM tuner box

CH-X1500, etc.
KT-HD300

Cambiador de CD (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

Sintonizador HD Radio TM

KT-HD300

You can also connect the following components through the various También puede conectar los siguientes componentes a través de los
JVC adapters or system.
diversos adaptadores o sistema JVC.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.
• Puede ser necesario comprar los cables de conexión por separado.

Nombre del
modelo

Componente

Adaptador/Sistema

Bluetooth adapter
KS-BTA200
Interface adapter for KS-PD100
iPod
XMDirect TM Tuner Box Smart Digital Adapter XMDJVC100

Dispositivo Bluetooth

Adaptador Bluetooth

KS-BTA200

iPod

Adaptador de interfaz
para iPod

KS-PD100

XMDirect TM Tuner Box

Adaptador digital
inteligente

XMDJVC100

XMDirect2 Tuner
System
SIRIUS satellite radio

Component

Adapter/System

Model name

Bluetooth device
iPod

XM satellite radio
System
SIRIUS satellite radio
System
SIRIUS satellite radio
System

CNP2000UC and
CNPJVC1
SC-C1 and
KS-SRA100
PnP, SC-VDOC1
and KS-SRA100

Sistema de sintonizador
XMDirect2

Sistema de radio XM
Satellite

CNP2000UC y
CNPJVC1

Radio por satélite SIRIUS

Sistema de radio
satelital SIRIUS

SC-C1 y
KS-SRA100

Radio por satélite SIRIUS

Sistema de radio
satelital SIRIUS

PnP, SC-VDOC1
y KS-SRA100

Portable audio player
with line output jacks

Line input adapter

KS-U57

Reproductor de audio
portátil con jacks de
salida de línea

Adaptador de entrada
por línea

KS-U57

Portable audio player
with 3.5 mm (3/16")
stereo mini jack

AUX input adapter

KS-U58

Reproductor de audio
portátil con jack mini
estéreo de 3,5 mm
(3/16 pulgada)

Adaptador de entrada
AUX

KS-U58

SIRIUS satellite radio

When connecting more than one component (maximum: three),
it is recommended that you connect the components in series as
explained below.
• XM Radio and SIRIUS satellite radio cannot be used together.

Cuando conecte más de un componente (máximo: tres), se
recomienda que conecte los componentes en serie, como se explica a
continuación.
• No puede utilizar juntas la radio XM y la radio satelital SIRIUS.

When connecting two components in series /
Cuando conecta dos componentes en serie /
Lors de la connexion de deux appareils en série

Vous pouvez connecter les appareils JVC suivants à la prise de
changeur de CD.

Appareil JVC

Nom du
modèle

Changeur de CD (CD-CH)
Tuner HD Radio TM

CH-X1500, etc.
KT-HD300

Vous pouvez aussi connecter les appareils suivants en utilisant divers
adaptateurs JVC ou systèmes.
• Vous pouvez avoir besoin d’acheter certains cordons de connexion
séparément.

Appareil

Adaptateur/
Système

Périphérique Bluetooth Adaptateur Bluetooth
iPod
Adaptateur d’interface
pour iPod
XMDirect TM Tuner Box Adaptateur numérique
intelligent
XMDirect2 Tuner
Système radio satellite
System
XM
Radio satellite SIRIUS Système radio satellite
SIRIUS
Radio satellite SIRIUS Système radio satellite
SIRIUS
Lecteur audio portable Adaptateur d’entrée
avec prises de sortie de de ligne
ligne
Lecteur audio portable
avec mini fiche stéréo
de 3,5 mm (3/16
pouces)

Adaptateur d’entrée
auxiliaire

Nom du
modèle
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100
XMDJVC100
CNP2000UC et
CNPJVC1
SC-C1 et
KS-SRA100
PnP, SC-VDOC1
et KS-SRA100
KS-U57

KS-U58

Lors de la connexion de plus d’un appareil (maximum: trois), il est
recommandé que vous connectiez les appareils en série comme nous
l’expliquons ci-dessous.
• La radio XM et SIRIUS ne peuvent pas être utilisées en même
temps.

When connecting three components in series / Cuando conecta tres componentes en
serie / Lors de la connexion de trois appareils en série

CD changer jack / Jack para el cambiador de CD / Prise du changeur CD

KT-HD300 *8 / KS-SRA100 *8, *9 / KS-BTA200 / XMDJVC100 / CNP2000UC *10

B *7 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

KT-HD300 *8 / KS-SRA100 *8, *9 / XMDJVC100 / CNP2000UC *10
KS-BTA200
C *7 KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58
B

To disconnect the connector / Para desconectar el cable / Pour déconnecter le
connecteur

It is not recommended to connect KS-U57/KS-U58 at C in series with XMDJVC100, CNP2000UC and KS-BTA200.
No se recomienda conectar el KS-U57/KSU58 en C, en serie con XMDJVC100, CNP2000UC y KS-BTA200.
Il n’est pas recommandé de connecter le KS-U57/KS-U58 en série à C in avec le XMDJVC100, CNP2000UC et le
KS-BTA200.

Hold the connector top tightly ( 1 ), then pull it out ( 2 ).
Sujete firmemente la parte superior del conector ( 1 ) y
seguidamente, extráigalo ( 2 ).
Tenez fermement le connecteur par-dessus ( 1 ) et tirez
vers l’extérieur ( 2 ).

HD Radio TM is a proprietary trademark of iBiquity Digital Corp.

*7 To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see
page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
*8 Power cannot be supplied to the component through the CD changer
jack. You need to connect the power cord supplied for the component
separately.
*9 This model is a component of SIRIUS satellite radio System.
*10 This model is a component of XM satellite radio System.

HD Radio TM es una marca comercial de iBiquity Digital Corp.

HD Radio TM est une marque de commerce d’iBiquity Digital Corp.

*7 Para utilizar estos componentes, configure el ajuste de entrada externa

*7 Pour utiliser ces appareils, réglez l’entrée extérieure correctement (voir

correctamente (consulte la página 18 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).
*8 No puede suministrar energía eléctrica al componente a través del
jack del cambiador de CD. Es necesario conectar, aparte, el cable de
alimentación suministrado con el componente.
*9 Este modelo es un componente del sistema de radio satelital SIRIUS.
*10 Este modelo es un componente del sistema de radio XM Satellite.

page 18 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).

*8 L’alimentation ne peut pas être fournie à l’appareil par la prise
de changeur de CD. Vous devez connecter séparément le cordon
d’alimentation fourni pour l’appareil.
*9 Ce modèle est un composant du système radio satellite SIRIUS.
*10 Ce modèle est un composant du système radio satellite XM.

Install2_KW-ADV792[J]2.indd 6

12/12/08 12:48:47 PM

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724/
KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625/KW-AVX624
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 10.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS
EN
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

CoverRear_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 1

GET0605-001A
0109DTSMDTJEIN

[U/UN/UT/A/UI]

12/30/08 9:20:28 AM

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to read this manual
[European Union only]

• < > is used to indicate the variable screens/
menus/operations/settings that appear on the
touch panel.
• [ ] is used to indicate the buttons on the touch
panel.
page number) is used to indicate the
•(
reference page number of the related topics/
operations/settings.
• Operation index: To locate easily the desired
operations/functions. (
59)
• Indication language: English indications
are used for the purpose of explanation. You
can select the indication language from the
<AV Menu>. (
13)

For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.

Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.

2
EN02-09_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 2

12/10/08 9:17:56 AM

How to reset your unit

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased (except the
registered Bluetooth device). (
24, 35)

How to forcibly eject a disc

Back

• You can forcibly eject the loaded disc even if the disc is
locked. To lock/unlock the disc,
27.
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.

CONTENTS
How to read this manual ..............................
How to reset your unit .................................
How to forcibly eject a disc...........................
INTRODUCTIONS
Playable disc type ........................................
Basic operations ...........................................

2
3
3

• Using the monitor panel/touch panel .........
• Using the remote controller (RM-RK252)....

5
7

Preparation ..................................................
AV MENU
AV Menu operations ....................................
OPERATIONS
Listening to the radio ...................................
Disc operations.............................................

4
5

11
26
27

• Operation buttons on the screen ................ 29
• Operations using the remote controller
(RM-RK252) ................................................ 30
USB operations (for KW-AVX726/
KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724) ....................... 34

EXTERNAL DEVICES
Using the Bluetooth® devices....................... 35
• Connecting a new Bluetooth device ........... 35
• Using the Bluetooth cellular phone ............ 36
• Using the Bluetooth audio player ............... 38

Listening to the CD changer ......................... 38
Listening to the iPod/iPhone ....................... 39
• When connected with the USB cable .......... 39
• When connected with the interface
adapter ....................................................... 40

Using other external components ................ 41
• AV-INPUT .................................................... 41
• EXT-INPUT .................................................. 42

REFERENCES
Maintenance ................................................
More about this unit ....................................
Troubleshooting...........................................
Specifications ...............................................
Operation index ...........................................

43
44
52
56
59

3
EN02-09_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 3

12/10/08 9:17:58 AM

Playable disc type
Disc type
DVD
• DTS sound cannot be
reproduced.

Recording format, file type, etc

Playable

DVD-Video *1
Region Code: South East Asia, Hong Kong region: 3
Australia: 4
India: 5
Ex.:

DVD-Audio/DVD-ROM
DVD Recordable/Rewritable
DVD-Video
(DVD-R/-RW *2, +R/+RW *3)
DVD-VR
• DVD Video: UDF bridge
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
• DVD-VR
JPEG
• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/
MP3/WMA/WAV: ISO 9660 level MP3/WMA/WAV
AAC/MPEG4/DVD+VR/DVD-RAM
1, level 2, Romeo, Joliet
Dual Disc
DVD side
Non-DVD side
CD/VCD
Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA)
VCD (Video CD)
DTS-CD/SVCD (Super Video CD)/CD-ROM/
CD-I (CD-I Ready)
CD Recordable/Rewritable
CD-DA
(CD-R/-RW)
VCD (Video CD)
• ISO 9660 level 1, level 2, Romeo, DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
Joliet
JPEG
MP3/WMA/WAV
AAC/MPEG4
*1 If you insert a DVD Video disc of an incorrect Region Code, “Region code error” appears on the screen.
*2 DVD-R recorded in multi-border format is also playable (except for dual layer discs). DVD-RW dual layer discs are not
playable.
*3 It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (Video format only) discs. “DVD” is selected as its disc type when a
+R/+RW disc is loaded. +RW double layer discs are not playable.

4
EN02-09_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 4

12/10/08 9:17:58 AM

Basic operations
Using the monitor panel/touch panel
Display <AV Menu> screen, (

USB cable from the rear of the unit, (

11)

Display the <Source Menu> screen, (

34) *1

Display/exit the Short Cut icons, (

SOURCE

MP3
FLAT

3:00

5
6

7
8

0:02:26

Folder Name
File Name
Track Title
Artist Name
Disc Title

1 Resets the unit (
3).
2 • Turns on the power.

3
4

• Attenuates the sound (if the power is on).
• Turns off the power. (Hold)
Changes the display information. *2
• Adjusts the volume.
• Bluetooth PHONE : Adjusts the volume of
the incoming calls. *3
Remote sensor
Touch panel (see the following pages).
• Most of the touch panel operations are explained
unless mentioned otherwise.
• The screen will turn off if no operation is
done for about 10 seconds (depends on the
<Illumination> setting). (
16)
Motion sensor
Displays <AV Menu> screen.

9 • Selects the source. *4
TUNER = DISC (DVD/VCD/CD) =
USB *1/ iPod *1 = CD-CH/iPod/EXT-IN
= Bluetooth PHONE = Bluetooth
AUDIO = AV-IN = (back to the beginning)

• Bluetooth PHONE : Displays the
<Dial Menu> screen. *5 (Hold)
p • KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724:
:
– Selects “USB/ iPod ” as the source.
– Switches the setting between “HEAD MODE”
and “iPod MODE” (Hold)
• KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625/KW-AVX624:
AV-IN : Selects “AV-IN” as the source.
* 1 – *5 :

Continued on the next page

INTRODUCTIONS
EN02-09_KW-AVX726_001A_5.indd 5

12/16/08 12:58:54 PM

q • Displays <Open/Tilt> screen. *6

[Open] : Opens the monitor panel.
[Eject] : Ejects the disc.
[Close] : Closes the monitor panel.
[Tilt +] : Tilts open the monitor panel.
[Tilt –] : Tilts close the monitor panel.
• Ejects the disc and display <Open/Tilt>
screen. (Hold)
• Closes the monitor panel when the panel is
opened.
w Monitor panel
*1 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724.
*2 Available display information varies among the
50)
playback sources. (
*3 This adjustment does not affect the volume level of
other sources.
*4 Available sources depend on the external components
you have connected, media you have attached, and
the <Input> settings you have made. ( 15, 16)
*5 Only when Bluetooth phone is connected.
*6 Shaded items cannot be used.
You can also adjust the
volume by moving your
finger on the touch panel
as illustrated.

<Source Menu> screen
You can also select the source using the touch
panel.
SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

3:00

87. 5 MHz

ABC Radio

FLAT
ST

AM
BAND

Source Menu

Current source

Exit

Touch panel and button illumination
Dependable on the <Illumination> setting.
(
16)
• Turned off:
When no operation is done for about 10 seconds.
• Turned on again:
– When you touch the touch panel or move your
hand nearby.
– When you use the remote controller.
– When a call/SMS comes in (for Bluetooth
cellular phone).
– When the signal from the rear view camera
comes in.
• Always turned on:
– When <AV Menu> screen is displayed.
– When <Source Menu> screen is displayed.
– When <Open/Tilt> screen is displayed.
– When <Illumination> is set to <Normal>.

When you drag your finger on the touch panel, it
functions in the same way as touching [5 / ∞ /
4 / ¢].

6
EN02-09_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 6

12/24/08 5:09:24 PM

Using the remote controller
(RM-RK252)

Short Cut icons
You can easily access some frequently used
functions by using the Short Cut icons.

Installing the batteries

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

3:00

87. 5 MHz

ABC Radio

FLAT
ST

AM
BAND

R03/LR03/AAA

Short Cut window appears.
• To exit from the window, press the button again.
SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

87. 5 MHz

FLAT
ST

3:00

Insert the batteries into the remote controller by
matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

AM
BAND

Caution:

Press a Short Cut icon.

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire, or the like.

Setup
Beep
Telephone Muting
Illumination
Motion Sensitiv.
Initialize

Normal
Proximity/Motion
Proxi/Motion-LCD
Touch Panel
Touch Panel - LCD

If the effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace the batteries.

Back

The corresponding screen is displayed.

Available icons vary among the sources.
Displays <Illumination> menu.
(

16)

Changes the sound mode. (
Turns on or off Track/Chapter
Repeat. ( 20)
Displays <Aspect> menu.
(

13)

Activates <Voice Dialing>
function. ( 23)

17)

Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

The following describes all the available operations
for all the sources.
• USB/ iPod operations are only applicable for
KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724.
• To easily locate the available operations between
different type of files,
30, 31.

Displays <Redial> menu. (
23)

Continued on the next page

INTRODUCTIONS
EN02-09_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 7

12/19/08 12:57:05 PM

• iPod:
– 5 : Enters the main menu (then 5 / ∞ /
4 / ¢ work as menu
selecting buttons.)
5 : Returns to the previous menu.
∞ : Confirms the selection.
– ∞ : Pauses or resumes playback.

button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 5/∞ buttons

• TUNER: Selects the preset stations.
• DISC/USB:
– DVD-Video: Selects the title.
– DVD-VR: Selects the program/Playlist.
– USB/other discs (except VCD/CD): Selects the
folders if included.
• CD-CH:
– Selects the folders if included.

4 / ¢ buttons
• TUNER:
– Searches for stations automatically if pressed
briefly.
– Searches for stations manually if pressed and
held.
• DISC/USB/CD-CH:
– Reverse skip/forward skip if pressed briefly.
– Reverse search/forward search if pressed and
held.
• iPod:
– Reverse skip/forward skip if pressed briefly.
– Reverse search/forward search if pressed and
held.
• iPod:
– Reverse skip/forward skip if pressed briefly.
– Reverse search/forward search if pressed and
held.
In menu selecting mode:
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
∞ to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
• Bluetooth AUDIO:
– Reverse skip/forward skip if pressed briefly.
3 VOL (volume) + / – buttons

• Adjusts the volume level.
• Bluetooth PHONE:
– Adjusts the volume of the incoming calls.
2nd VOL (volume) buttons
• Not applicable for this unit.
4 * ASPECT button

• Changes the aspect ratio of the playback
pictures.

8
EN02-09_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 8

12/10/08 9:18:01 AM

PHONE button
Applicable only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected.
• Displays <Dial Menu> screen.
• Displays <Redial> menu if pressed and held.
• Answers incoming calls.

6 * SETUP button

• Not applicable for this unit.
7 * TOP M (menu) button

• DVD-Video: Shows the disc menu.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Original Program screen.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
8 OSD (on-screen display) button

• Shows the on-screen bar.
• Does not function as “*.”
9 SHIFT button

• Functions with other buttons.
p DISP (display) button

• Changes the display information.
q 1 / ¡ buttons

• DISC/USB/ iPod: Reverse search/forward
search.
w SOURCE button

• Selects the source.
e 3 (play) / 8 (pause) button

• DISC/USB/ iPod: Starts playback/pauses.
• Bluetooth PHONE: Answers incoming calls.
• Bluetooth AUDIO: Starts playback.
r

(end call) button
• Bluetooth PHONE: Ends the call.
BAND button
• TUNER: Selects the bands.
7 (stop) button
• DISC/USB/ iPod: Stops playback.
• Bluetooth AUDIO: Pauses.

t * RETURN button

• VCD: Returns to the PBC menu.
y * MENU button

• DVD-Video: Shows the disc menu.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Playlist screen.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
u * % / ﬁ buttons

• DVD-Video: Makes selection/settings.
• CD-CH: Changes discs in the magazine.
@ / # buttons

• DVD-Video: Makes selection/settings.
• DivX/MPEG Video: Skips back or forward by
about 5 minutes.
ENT (enter) button
• Confirms selection.
i DUAL button

• Not applicable for this unit.
• Does not function as “#.”
o DIRECT button

• DISC/USB: Enters direct search mode for
chapter/title/program/playlist/folder/track
when pressed with SHIFT button (
31).
CLR (clear) button
• DISC/USB: Erases the misentry when pressed
with SHIFT button.
SURROUND button
• Not applicable for this unit.
* Functions as number buttons when pressed with SHIFT
button.
– DISC/USB : Enters chapter/title/program/playlist/
folder/track number after entering search mode by
pressing SHIFT and DIRECT. (
31)
– TUNER : (Number 1 to 6) : Enters preset station
number.

INTRODUCTIONS
EN02-09_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 9

12/12/08 9:23:54 AM

Preparation
Canceling the display demonstration and setting the clock

~ Turn on the power.

@ Set the clock.
Setup
Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer

Ÿ Display <AV Menu> screen.

Bright
Blue
Once
Auto
6 PM

Dimmer Time Set

Auto
7 AM

Back

Setup

Time Set
Time Format
OSD Clock

1
12Hours
Off

00 AM
24Hours

45 PM

BAND

Back

! Display <Setup> screen.
Setup
AV Menu

Time Set
Time Format
OSD Clock

Back

¤ Finish the procedure.

⁄ Cancel the demonstration.
Select [Off].

Back

Setup
Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer
Dimmer Time Set

Metal
Blue
Once
Auto
6 PM

Auto
7 AM

Back

10 INTRODUCTIONS
EN10-17_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 10

12/10/08 11:32:54 AM

AV Menu operations
You can use the <AV Menu> for most of the
operations and settings. The available menu items
shown on the touch panel, depends on the selected
source.
• Non-available items will be shaded.
The following steps are one of the fundamental
procedures.
• You can perform the operations/change the settings
by following these steps unless mentioned otherwise.

! Press the desired icon/item to perform
the desired operations/settings.
Moves to the preceding
menu page
Setup
Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer
Dimmer Time Set

~ Turn on the power.

Indicates the next hierarchy
level/setting item exists

Bright
Blue
Once
Auto
6 PM

Auto
7 AM

Back

Returns to the previous
screen.

Ÿ Display <AV Menu> screen.

Indicates the remaining
time before the current
screen exit automatically.

Moves to the succeeding
menu page

• Some of the settings do not open the sub-setting
screen, but just selecting an option will change the
setting.
• To exit from the setting, press [Exit].

or
BAND

AV Menu

Setup
:
Equalizer :
Sound
:
Mode
:
List
:
Bluetooth :

12 – 16
17
18
19 – 21
21 – 22
23 – 25

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN10-17_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 11

12/11/08 3:09:57 PM

Initial: Underlined

Menu item
Demonstration

Wall Paper

Selectable setting/item
♦ Off
♦ On

: Cancels.
: Activates the demonstration on the screen. To stop it
temporarily, touch the screen. (
10)

You can select the background picture of the screen.

Display

♦ Bright, Future, Horizon, Plain

Color

You can select the color of the background picture.
♦ Blue, Light-Blue, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Purple, Dark-Blue,
Dark-Green, Brown, Light-Brown, Black

Scroll

♦ Off
♦ Once
♦ Auto

: Cancels.
: Scrolls the displayed information once.
: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
• Touching the information bar scrolls the text regardless of the setting.

Dimmer

♦ Off
♦ On
♦ Auto
♦ Dimmer Time Set

Dimmer Time Set

Sets the Dimmer On (

Dimmer Level

You can select the brightness for dimmer.
♦ 01 (bright), 02 (middle), 03 (dark)

Bright

You can adjust the brightness of the screen.
♦ –15 to +15; Initial 00

Picture Adjust *2

:
:
:
:

Cancels.
Activates dimmer.
Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights. *1
Activates the Dimmer Time setting (see below).
)/Off (

:
:
:
:

) times.

Adjust if the picture is too bright or too dark.
Adjust the contrast.
Adjust the color of the picture—lighter or darker.
Adjust the tint if the human skin color is unnatural,
only when color system setting is <NTSC>.
13)
(

12
EN10-17_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 12

12/24/08 5:13:14 PM

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

Aspect *3

You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.
Aspect ratio of the incoming signal
4:3

16:9

Regular:
For 4:3 original pictures
Full:
For 16:9 original pictures

Clock

Display

Panorama:
For viewing 4:3 pictures
naturally on the wide screen
Auto:

• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is automatically
selected to match the incoming signals.
• For the other video sources: Aspect ratio is
fixed to <Regular>.

Language *4

Select the indication language shown on the screen.
♦ English, Español, Français, Deutsch, Italiano, Nederlands, Svenska,
Dansk, Руccĸий, Português,
,
,
,
, Türkçe,
,
• The characters you can enter for assigning the titles also change according to
48)
the language selected. (

NTSC/PAL *4

Select the color system of the external monitor connected.
♦ NTSC, PAL

Time Set

Initial 1:00AM (

Time Format

Select either 12-hour system or 24-hour system. (
♦ 12 Hours, 24 Hours

OSD Clock

♦ Off
♦ On

10)

: Cancels.
: The clock time is displayed on the playback picture.

Disc

Menu Language *5 Select the menu language; Initial English (
5

10)

50)

Audio Language *

Select the audio language; Initial English (

Subtitle *5

Select the subtitle language or erase the subtitle <Off>.; Initial English
(
50)

50)

*3 Not adjustable when no picture is shown.
*4 Turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.
*5 Selectable only for “DISC/USB” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN10-17_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 13

12/10/08 11:33:00 AM

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

Monitor Type *6
16:9

4:3LB

Disc

4:3PS

OSD Position *6

Select the position of the on-screen bar. (
♦1
: Higher position.
♦2
: Lower position.

File Type *6

Select the playback file type when a disc/USB contains different types of
files. You can store this setting separately for each source—
“DISC/USB.” *7
♦ Audio
: Plays back audio files.
♦ Still Picture
: Plays back JPEG files.
♦ Video
: Plays back DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.
♦ Audio&Video : Plays back audio files and DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.

DivX Regist.
(Registration) *6

This unit has its own Registration Code. Once you have played back a file
with which the Registration Code recorded, this unit’s Registration Code
is overwritten for copyright protection.

iPod Artwork *7, *8

33)

D. (Digital) Audio Output *6 Select the signal format emitted through the DIGITAL OUT (optical)
terminal. (
49)
♦ PCM
: Select this when connecting an amplifier or a
decoder incompatible with Dolby Digital or MPEG
Audio, or when connecting to a recording device.
♦ Dolby D
: Select this when connecting an amplifier or a
decoder compatible with Dolby Digital.
♦ Stream
: Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital or MPEG Audio.
*6 Selectable only for “DISC/USB.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
*7 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724.
*8 Skip the track so that your setting takes effect.

14
EN10-17_KW-AVX726_001A_6.indd 14

12/16/08 3:46:37 PM

Menu item

Selectable setting/item
When playing back a multi-channel disc, this setting affects the signals
reproduced through the LINE OUT jacks.
♦ Dolby Surr.
: Select this to enjoy multi-channel surround audio
by connecting an amplifier compatible with Dolby
Surround.
♦ Stereo
: Normally select this.

D. (Dynamic)
Range Compres.
(Compression) *9

You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing Dolby
Digital software.
♦ Auto
: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded
software.
♦ On
: Select to always use this function.

IF Band Width

♦ Auto

Tuner

Disc

Down Mix *9

♦ Wide

Input

AV Input *10

You can determine the use of LINE IN and VIDEO IN jacks. (
41)
♦ Off
: Select when no component is connected (“AV-IN” is
skipped while selecting the source).
♦ iPod (Off) *11 : Select when connecting the iPod/iPhone using the USB
Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone. (
39)
♦ Audio&Video : Select when connecting an AV component such as a VCR.
♦ Audio
: Select when connecting an audio component such as a
portable audio player.
♦ Camera *12
: Select when connecting a rear view camera to display
the picture (as it is taken).
♦ Navigation
: Select when connecting a Navigation System. (
42)

*9 Selectable only for “DISC/USB.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
*10 Not selectable when “AV-IN” is selected as the source.
*11 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724.
*12 The REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual. The rear view through
the camera appears on the screen in <Full> aspect ratio (regardless of the aspect ratio setting) when you shift the
gear to the reverse (R) position. When you press DISP on the monitor panel, or when you shift the gear to another
position other than the reverse (R) position, the rear view screen is cleared.

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN10-17_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 15

12/10/08 11:33:02 AM

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

External Input *13, *14 For connecting an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear.
♦ Changer/iPod *15

38), iPod, (
40).
: CD changer, (
: Any other than the above, (
42).

Beep

♦ Off
♦ On

: Cancels.
: Activates the key-touch tone.

Telephone Muting *16

♦ Off
♦ Muting1,

: Cancels.
: Select either one which mutes the sounds while
using the cellular phone.

Illumination

You can turn off the screen and the light of the buttons on the monitor panel
while turning on the unit. (
6)

Input

♦ External

Muting2

Others

Buttons on the
monitor panel

Motion Sensitiv.

Screen

Normal:

Always lights.

Proximity/Motion:

Lights up when your
hand moves close to
the buttons.

Always lights.

Proxi/Motion-LCD:

Lights up when your
hand moves close to
the buttons.

Touch Panel:

Lights up when your
Always lights.
finger touches the
buttons or touch panel.

Touch Panel-LCD:

Lights up when your
Lights up when your
finger touches the
finger touches the
buttons or touch panel. buttons or touch panel.

Change the sensitivity of the sensor for <Illumination> above.
♦ Low, Mid, High

Initialize

Initialize all settings you have made in <AV Menu>. Press and hold [Enter]
to initialize the settings, then reset the unit. (
3)

*13 Not required for Bluetooth. They are automatically detected.
*14 Not selectable when the component connected to the CD changer jack is selected as the source.
*15 The name of the component detected through the CD changer jack is shown.
*16 The TEL MUTING lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual.

16
EN10-17_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 16

12/19/08 12:57:40 PM

Selects a preset sound mode suitable to the music
genre.
♦ Flat (Initial), Hard Rock, R&B, Pop, Jazz, Dance,
Country, Reggae, Classic, User1, User2, User3

Adjust the settings, then store.
Equalizer

Display <AV Menu> screen.
Back

Edit

or
Makes adjustments by moving each bar directly.

BAND

User Store

Display <Equalizer> screen.

User1
User2
User3

AV Menu
Back

Ex.: When storing into <User2>.

Preset equalizing values

Storing your own adjustments
You can store your adjustments into <User1>,
<User2>, and <User3>.

Perform steps 1 and 2 above to enter the
<Equalizer> screen.

15 kHz

Ex.: When <Hard Rock> is selected

6.3 kHz

Moves to the other 6 sound modes.

2.5 kHz

Edit

1 kHz

Back

Sound
mode

400 Hz

Equalizer

150 Hz

Select a sound mode.
60 Hz

Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
Classic
User1/2/3

00
+03
+03
00
+03
+04
+02
+03
+02
00

00
+03
+02
+02
+02
+02
+01
00
+03
00

00
+01
+02
00
+01
00
00
00
+01
00

00
00
00
00
+01
–02
00
+01
00
00

00
00
+01
+01
+01
–01
00
+02
00
00

00
+02
+01
+01
+03
+01
+01
+02
+02
00

00
+01
+03
+02
+02
+01
+02
+03
00
00

AV MENU
EN10-17_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 17

12/10/08 3:42:41 PM

Initial: Underlined

Menu item
Fader/Balance

Reset
Fader
0
Balance 0

Back

Volume Adjust *1

Adjust and store the auto-adjustment volume level for each source, comparing
to the FM volume level. The volume level will automatically increase or decrease
when you change the source.
• <Fix> appears if “ TUNER/Bluetooth PHONE” is selected as the source.
♦ –12 to +12; Initial 00

Subwoofer Level *2

Adjust the subwoofer output level.
♦ –06 to +08; Initial 00

High Pass Filter *2

♦ Through
♦ On

Crossover *2

Select the crossover frequency between the front/rear speakers and the
subwoofer.
♦ 80Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz

Amplifier Gain *3

: Select when the subwoofer is not connected.
: Select when the subwoofer is connected.

*1 For “DISC/USB”: You can make the adjustments separately depending on the audio format—Dolby digital/MPEG
Audio and the others.
*2 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724.
*3 The volume level automatically changes to “VOL 30” if you change to <Low> with the volume level set higher than
“VOL 30.”

18
EN18-25_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 18

12/19/08 12:57:59 PM

Initial: Underlined
Selectable items when the source is:
• TUNER
: Mono, SSM, Title Entry
• DISC, USB, CD-CH, iPod : Repeat, Random
• iPod *1, *2
: Repeat, Random, Audiobooks
• AV-IN, EXT-IN
: Title Entry

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

Mono

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive, activate monaural mode for better
reception. The MONO indicator lights up.
♦ ON
: Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo effect
will be lost. The MONO indicator lights up.
♦ OFF
: Restore the stereo effect.

SSM (Strong-station
Sequential Memory)

You can automatically preset 6 stations for each FM band.
• Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the
FM band.
Mode
Mono
SSM
Title Entry

Start
Enter

Back

Title Entry

You can assign titles (up to 16 characters) to 30 station frequencies (FM and AM), AV-IN,
48.)
and EXT-IN. (For available characters,
Press [Enter] to show the <Title Entry> screen.

@
;
/
Back

[Store]
[2/3]
[BS]
[Del]
[Cap]
[A = 0 = Ä]
[Space]

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Confirm the entry.
Move the cursor.
Erase the character before the cursor.
Erase the character on the cursor.
Change the letter case (upper/lower).
Change the character set.
Enter a space.

*1 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724.
*2 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” ( 39)
Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN18-25_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 19

12/10/08 10:08:23 AM

Menu item

Available items depend on the loaded disc type and playback file.
iPod *4

—

iPod

MP3

MPEG/MP3/
WMA/WAV

VCD/CD

JPEG

DVD-VR

DVD-Video

Repeat

CD-CH

—

USB *4

DISC
Disc/file type

JPEG

Source

DivX/MPEG/
MP3/WMA/
WAV

Repeat*3

Selectable setting/item

Chapter
Title
Program
Disc
Folder
Track
One
All
Off

♦ Chapter
♦ Title
♦ Program
♦ Disc
♦ Folder
♦ Track
♦ One
♦ All
♦ Off

Available items depend on the loaded disc type and playback file.
iPod *4, *5

—

iPod

MP3

VCD/CD

Random

CD-CH

—

USB *4

DISC
Disc/file type

MPEG/MP3/
WMA/WAV

Source

DivX/MPEG/
MP3/WMA/
WAV

Random*3

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Folder
Disc/USB (All)
All
Song
Album
Off

♦ Folder
♦ Disc/USB

: Randomly plays all tracks of the current folder, then tracks of the next folders.
: Randomly plays all tracks. (For VCD: When PBC is not in used.)

(All)
♦ All
♦ Song
♦ Albums
♦ Off

*3
*4
*5
*6

:
:
:
:

Randomly plays all tracks of all loaded discs.
Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” *6 of the iPod.
Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of the iPod.
Cancels.

Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” ( 39)
For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724.
Not applicable for video file.
You can activate <Shuffle Songs> in <Search Mode> menu. (

22)

20
EN18-25_KW-AVX726_001A_5.indd 20

12/16/08 1:39:44 PM

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

Audiobooks*7, *8 You can select the playback speed of the “Audiobook” audio file in your iPod.
♦ Normal
: Plays at normal speed.
♦ Faster
: Plays faster.
♦ Slower
: Plays slower.
*7 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724.
*8 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” ( 39)

Source
TUNER

The station selected in step
1 is now stored in preset

number 4.
Back

• Selecting a preset station on the list
List
FM1
FM2
FM3

Back

DISC/USB *1

Selecting a track on the list
If the device contains folders, you can display the Folder/Track (File) Lists, then start playback.
1 Current folder list number/
List

0005/0035

Folder 01
Folder 02
Folder 03
Folder 04
Folder 05
Folder 06
Back

0003/0099
Track001.mp3
Track002.mp3
Track003.mp3
Track004.mp3
Track005.mp3
Track006.mp3

total folder list number
2 Current track list number/total

track list number of the
current folder
* Press: Skips the list up or down.
Drag: Scrolls the list up or down.

*1 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724.
Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN18-25_KW-AVX726_001A_6.indd 21

12/17/08 11:13:48 AM

Source
Bluetooth PHONE

Operation/setting
Selecting a preset phone number on the list to make a call
List
Phone Number

Back

CD-CH

Selecting a disc on the list
Disc List
Disc 01

Disc 04

Disc 02

MP3 Disc

Disc 03

Disc 06

If an MP3 disc is selected, Folder/
Track List appear. Select a track to
start playback.

Back

To go to the other list

iPod *2, *3

Selecting a track/video from <Search Mode>
♦ Music : Playlists, Artists, Albums,

Search Mode
Music
Videos
Shuffle Songs

Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres

Songs, Podcasts, Genres, Composers,
Audiobooks
♦ Videos : Video Playlists, Movies,
Music Videos, TV shows, Video
Podcasts
♦ Shuffle Songs : Playback starts if
this is selected.

0003/0099

Current track (video) number/total track
(video) number

Back

List
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres

Track 01
Track 02
Track 03
Track 04
Track 05
Track 06

Back

*2 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724.
*3 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” ( 39)

22
EN18-25_KW-AVX726_001A_5.indd 22

12/16/08 1:01:48 PM

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO” as the source for operations.
• Firstly, use <Open> or <Search> to register and establish the connection with a device.

Menu item
Dial Menu *1

Back

♦ Voice Dialing

Message *2

If <Message Info> is set to <Manual>... (
25)
Access the message list to read messages.
♦ Unread
: Messages you have not read.
♦ Read
: Messages you have read.
♦ Unsent
: Messages you have not sent.
♦ Sent
: Messages you have sent.
• The number of messages in each history is also shown.

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN18-25_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 23

12/10/08 12:00:45 PM

Menu item
Open

Selectable setting/item
Preparation:
• Operate the Bluetooth device to turn on its Bluetooth function.
• Make sure “NEW DEVICE” is selected. If not, press [ 5 ] or [ ∞ ] to select it.
1 Press <Open> on the <Bluetooth> menu.
2 Enter a PIN (Personal Identification Number) *3.

• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to 16-digit number).
PIN Code

Back

You can enter [0] – [9] only.
[BS] : Erases the character
before the cursor.
[Del] : Erases the character on
the cursor.
[Enter] : Confirms the entry.

3 Operate the Bluetooth device to connect while “Open...” is displayed on the screen.

Preparation:
• Make sure “NEW DEVICE” is selected. If not, press [ 5 ] or [ ∞ ] to select it.
1 Press <Search> on the <Bluetooth> menu.

24
EN18-25_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 24

12/10/08 10:08:26 AM

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

Special Device

Connect

Only for the registered devices.
Select a device from the list of registered devices, establish the connection with it.

Disconnect

Only for the connected devices.
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device.

Delete Pairing

Only for the registered devices.
Press <Yes> to confirm delete the registered devices.

Settings
Initial: Underlined

Auto Connect *4

Auto Answer *5

♦ Off
♦ On
♦ Reject

Message Info *

♦ Auto

♦ Manual

: The unit does not answer the calls automatically.
Answer the calls manually.
: The unit answers the incoming calls
automatically.
: The unit rejects all incoming calls.
: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message
by ringing and displaying “Receiving Message.”
To read the message,
37.
: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a
message.

MIC Setting *5

Adjust the volume of the microphone connected to the Bluetooth
adapter.
♦ 01/02/03

Version

The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are shown.

*4 Selectable only for “ Bluetooth PHONE.”
*5 Only for the cellular phone connected for “ Bluetooth PHONE.” Not selectable when “NEW DEVICE” is selected.

AV MENU
EN18-25_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 25

12/10/08 10:08:26 AM

Listening to the radio
Preset number
SOURCE

TUNER

Band
Sound mode

FM1

87. 5 MHz
Assigned station name

ABC Radio

FLAT
ST

(

3:00

19)

• If no name is
assigned, “No Name”
appears.

Tuner indicator
AM
BAND

Selecting a preset station

Changing the display information

• Directly from the touch panel

(

50)

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

3:00

87. 5 MHz

ABC Radio

FLAT
ST

• To improve the FM reception,
19.
• To automatically preset stations into memory,
19.
• To manually preset stations into memory,
21.
• To assignning titles to stations,
19.

AM
BAND

You can also select a preset station using the remote
8, 9) and from the Preset List (
21).
controller (

You can display the Preset List by pressing [
holding [5/∞].

] or

26
EN26-33_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 26

12/10/08 10:40:00 AM

~ Open the monitor panel.

! Insert a disc.
Label side

<Open/Tilt> menu is displayed.
• By pressing and holding the button, you can
open the monitor panel and eject the disc.

Open/Tilt

Monitor panel closes automatically.
If not, press [Close].

Caution:
Do not place your finger behind the monitor panel.

Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

• To select the playback mode,
20.
21.
• To select tracks on the list,

Back

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure to select <EJECT OK?>.
• Discs can be forcibly ejected. (
3)

Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS
EN26-33_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 27

12/10/08 10:40:02 AM

Changing the display information
Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different
information. (
50)

Ex.: While playing a DVD Video

SOURCE

DVD
FLAT
CHAP. RPT

3:00

1 Audio format—Dolby Digital, MP3, WMA, WAV
2 Disc type—DVD, DVD-VR, VCD, CD
3 Video format—DivX, MPEG, VR-PRG (program),

VR-PLAY (playlist), PBC
4 [5 / ∞]

6
7
8
9

• DVD Video/DVD-VR: Selects title/program/
playlist.
• DivX/MPEG/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV:
– Selects folder
– Displays Folder/Track List (Hold)
• DVD Video: Title no./Chapter no./Playing time
• DVD-VR: Program no. (or Playlist no.)/
Chapter no./Playing time
• DivX/MPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV: Folder no./Track
no./Playing time
• JPEG: Folder no./Track no.
• VCD/CD: Track no./Playing time
[6 ]
Starts playback/pauses
Indicates the button pressed ( / 8 / 7 )
Sound mode (
17)
Playback mode (
20)

p Disc/track information

• DVD Video/DVD-VR: Sampling frequency/Bit
rate/Recorded signal channel no.
• DivX/MPEG/JPEG: Folder name/file name
• CD Text: Title/artist name/album name
– “No Name” appears for conventional CDs or if
not recorded
• MP3/WMA/WAV: Current folder name/current
file name/tag data (current track title/artist
name/album title) if it is recorded
q Stops playback
w [4 / ¢]
• DVD Video/DVD-VR: Selects chapter.
• DivX/MPEG/JPEG/VCD/CD/MP3/WMA/WAV:
Selects track.
• DVD Video/DVD-VR/DivX/MPEG/VCD/CD/MP3/
WMA/WAV: Reverse/forward search (Hold)

28
EN26-33_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 28

12/10/08 12:01:20 PM

Operation buttons on the screen
You can display the following operation buttons while watching the playback pictures on the screen.
• If no operation is done for about 5 seconds, the operation buttons disappear (except when a disc menu is
displayed).
A

[SOURCE]
[5 ∞]
[3 / 8 ]
[4 ¢]

Touch the screen (center portion).

Displays <Source Menu> screen
28
Starts playback/pause
• Selects tracks
• Reverse/forward search (Hold)
[
]
Displays <AV Menu> screen
[7]
Stops playback
• The above buttons also work when they are not
shown on the screen (while watching the playback
picture).
B

Touch [KEY].

To end the operations, touch the screen again.

OPERATIONS
EN26-33_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 29

1/9/09 10:15:32 AM

Operations using the remote controller (RM-RK252)

Button
Stop play

Stop play

Start play/Pause (if pressed during play)

• DivX/MPEG: Start play/Pause (if pressed
during play)
• JPEG: • Start play (Slide show: Each file is
shown for a few seconds.)
• Pause (if pressed during play).
• Reverse/forward chapter search *1 (No sound • DivX/MPEG: Reverse/forward track search *4
can be heard.)
(No sound can be heard.)
• Slow motion *2 during pause (No sound can
be heard.)
– DVD-VR: Reverse slow motion does not work.
• DivX/MPEG: • Select track
• Select chapter (during play or pause)
• Reverse/fast-forward track
• Reverse/fast-forward chapter search *3 (No
sound can be heard.) (Hold)
search *5 (No sound can be
heard.) (Hold)
• JPEG:
Select file
• DVD-Video: Select title (during play or pause) Select folder
• DVD-VR: • Select program
• Select playlist (during play or
pause)
• DivX/MPEG: Skip back or forward the scenes
—
by about 5 minutes
Select aspect ratio
Select aspect ratio
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5

Search speed:
Slow motion speed:
Search speed:
Search speed:
Search speed:

Using menu driven features... (DVD-Video)

Canceling the PBC playback... (VCD)

1 Enter the menu screen.

During stop...

2 Select an item you want to start play.
2

Number buttons
(0 – 9)

• To resume PBC, press TOP M/MENU.

30
EN26-33_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 30

12/10/08 10:40:04 AM

Button
Stop play

Stop play

Start play/Pause (if pressed
during play)
Reverse/forward track search *6
• Forward slow motion *7
during pause. (No sound can
be heard.)
– Reverse slow motion does not
work.
• Select track
• Reverse/fast-forward track
search *8 (No sound can be
heard.) (Hold)

Start play/Pause (if pressed
Start play/Pause (if pressed
during play)
during play)
Reverse/forward track search *6 Reverse/forward track search *6

• Select track
• Reverse/fast-forward track
search *8 (Hold)

Select folder
—
Select aspect ratio

—
—

—

* Search speed:
*7 Slow motion speed:
*8 Search speed:
6

Searching for an item directly
1 While holding SHIFT, press DIRECT repeatedly to

select the desired search mode.
DVD-Video:
DVD-VR:
DivX/MPEG:
JPEG:
MP3/WMA/
WAV:

2 While holding SHIFT, press the number buttons (0

– 9) to enter the desired number.
3 Press ENT (enter) to confirm.

• For DivX/MPEG/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV, track is
searched within the same folder.
• For DVD-VR, program/playlist search is possible
during Original program playback (PG)/Playlist
playback (PL).
• To erase a misentry, press CLR (clear) while holding
SHIFT.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

VCD/CD:
Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS
EN26-33_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 31

12/10/08 10:40:04 AM

Using the list screens... (DVD-VR)

Operations using the
on-screen bar

1 Display the Original Program screen.

Display the Playlist screen.

2 Select an item you want to start play.

(DVD/DVD-VR/DivX/MPEG/JPEG/VCD)
These operations are possible on the monitor using the
remote controller.

Show the on-screen bar (

33).

(twice)

Select an item.

Original Program/Playlist screen
• Original Program

Make a selection.
If pop-up menu appears...

• To cancel pop-up menu, press RETURN.
• For entering time/numbers, see the following.
• Playlist

1 Original Program/Playlist number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of
4
5
6
7
8
9

Removing the on-screen bar

* The title of the original program or playlist may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.

32
EN26-33_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 32

12/10/08 10:40:05 AM

On-screen bar
Ex.: DVD-Video

Information
Operation

1 Disc type
2 • DVD-Video: Audio signal format type and

channel
• VCD: PBC
3 Playback mode *1
DVD-Video:
T. RPT: Title repeat
C. RPT: Chapter repeat
DVD-VR:
C. RPT: Chapter repeat
PG. RPT: Program repeat
DivX/MPEG Video: T. RPT: Track repeat
F. RPT: Folder repeat
A. RND: All (Disc) random
F. RND: Folder random
JPEG:
F. RPT: Folder repeat
VCD *2:
T. RPT: Track repeat
A. RND: All (Disc) random
4 Playback information
Current title/chapter
Current program/chapter
Current playlist/chapter
Current track
Current folder/track
Current folder/file
5 Time indication
Elapsed playing time of the disc
(For DVD-Video, elapsed playing
time of the current title/program/
playlist.)
DVD-Video/DVD-VR: Remaining
title/program/playlist time
VCD: Remaining disc time

20.

OPERATIONS
EN26-33_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 33

12/10/08 10:40:05 AM

USB operations (for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724)
You can connect a USB mass storage class device such as a USB memory, Digital Audio Player, portable HDD, etc. to
the unit.
• You can also connect the iPod to the USB terminal of the unit. For details of the operations,
39, 40.

USB cable from the rear of the unit

Changing the display information
(

50)

OPERATIONS

EN34-43_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 34

12/10/08 11:33:33 AM

Make the unit ready to establish a new Bluetooth connection. The connection is established by
operating the Bluetooth device.

Make the unit ready to establish a new Bluetooth connection. The connection is established by
operating this unit.

• To register a device using <Open> or <Search>,
• To connect a special device,
25.
• To connect/disconnect/delete a device,
25.

24.

Changing the display information
(

50)

Bluetooth Information:
If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/> (English website only).

Continued on the next page

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN34-43_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 35

12/10/08 11:33:35 AM

Using the Bluetooth cellular phone
Status of the device
• Signal strength/Battery remainder (only when
the information comes from the device).

[5 / ∞]: Selects the
other registered device.

Connected device name
• When a cellular phone with audio function is
registered/connected, appears.

SOURCE

Connected Device Name

FLAT

3:00

Activates <Voice Dialing>
function. (Hold)

Display <Dial Menu> screen.
• Appears on any source information screen
when the Bluetooth adapter is connected.

Bluetooth icon
• Lights up when the Bluetooth adapter
is connected.

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth PHONE].
Ÿ Press [ ].
! Press [Bluetooth].
⁄ Establish the connection with a device, then make a call (or settings using <Bluetooth>
menu). (

23 – 25)

When a call comes in...
The source is changed to “ Bluetooth PHONE”
automatically.

To end the call
• Hold the message displayed on the touch panel.
• Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or VOL +/–).
• You can adjust the microphone volume,

25.

Name and phone number (if acquired)

When <Auto Answer> is activated...
The unit answers the incoming call automatically.
(
25)

To make a call, use <Dial Menu>. (

23)

When <Auto Answer> is deactivated...
To answer the incoming call
• Press the message displayed on the touch panel.
• Press any button on the monitor panel (except
or VOL +/–).

36
EN34-43_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 36

12/10/08 11:33:35 AM

When an SMS comes in...
If the cellular phone is compatible with SMS (Short
Message Service), you can read the messages on the
screen.
• You cannot edit or send a message through the unit.

Presetting the phone
numbers
You can preset up to 6 phone numbers.

When <Message Info> is set to <Auto>...
The unit rings and the following screen is displayed to
inform you of a message arrival. (
25)

Select the phone number you want to
preset from <Phonebook>, <Redial>,
<Received Calls>, or <Missed Calls>.
(

2
Device Name
Receiving Message
Jack

23)

Select a telephone number to store.
Dial Menu

Read ?
Yes

No
Back

To read the message, press [Yes].
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE.”
To read the message later, press [No].
• The message is stored into <Message> =
<Unread>. (
23)
When <Message Info> is set to <Manual>...
Access the message list to read messages,
23.

Select a preset number.
Dial Menu

Back

Now “Tom” is stored into preset no. 1.

To stop ringing (canceling the outgoing call)

To call a preset number,

22.

Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or VOL +/–).

Continued on the next page

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN34-43_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 37

12/10/08 11:33:36 AM

Using the Bluetooth audio player
Indicates the button pressed.
• It may be different from the operation status.

Starts playback/pause
SOURCE

Connected Device Name

FLAT

3:00

[4 / ¢]: Reverse/forward search

[5 / ∞]: Selects the other registered device.

Stops playback

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth AUDIO].
Ÿ Start playback.
If playback does not start automatically, operate the Bluetooth audio player to start playback.

16)

Ex.: While playing an MP3 disc
• [4 / ¢]: Selects track
• [4 / ¢]: Reverse/forward search (Hold) [5 / ∞]: Displays Disc List.
DISC 1

SOURCE

CD-CH
FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

Current Folder Name
Current File Name.mp3
Current Track Title
Artist Name
Album Title

Tag data (if it is recorded)

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [CD-CH].
Ÿ Press [ ].
! Press [List].

Folder no./Track no./Playing time

⁄ Select a disc to start playing.
To select the playback mode,

20.

38
EN34-43_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 38

12/11/08 3:16:17 PM

Listening to the iPod/iPhone
You can connect the iPod/iPhone using the following cable or adapter:

To
Listen to the
music

Cable/adapter

To operate

KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724:
USB 2.0 cable (accessory of the iPod/iPhone) to the
USB cable from the rear of the unit.

See “When connected with the USB
cable” below.

Interface Adapter for iPod, KS-PD100 (not supplied) to See “When connected with the
the CD changer jack on the rear of the unit.
interface adapter” on page 40.
Watch the video KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724:
USB Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone, KS-U30
(not supplied) to the USB cable from the rear of the
unit.

See “When connected with the USB
cable” below.
• Make sure <iPod (Off)> is selected
for <AV Input>,
15.

When connected with the USB cable
There are 2 control modes in ” iPod “ source.
• “HEAD MODE” : Control by this unit.
• “iPod MODE” : Control by the connected iPod/iPhone.
KS-U30: Make sure <iPod (Off)> is selected for <AV Input>,

15.

• Press and hold
to switch between “HEAD MODE” and “iPod MODE.”
The operation explained below are under “HEAD MODE.”
• [5 / ∞]: Moves to the previous/next item of a category *1
• Enters <Search Mode> menu (Hold) *2 (
22 )

Starts playback/pause

SOURCE

Indicates the controlling
unit for playback

HEAD MODE

iPod

FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

Current Track Title
Artist Name
Album Title

• [4 / ¢]: Selects a track/video
• [4 / ¢]:Reverse/forward search (Hold)

Track no./Playing time Stops playback

*1 [5 / ∞] may not function depending on how you select the current track/video.
*2 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.”

Continued on the next page

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN34-43_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 39

12/31/08 12:11:05 PM

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod

The following operations/settings are only
available in “HEAD MODE.”
14.
• To display the <iPod Artwork>,
• To select track/video from <Search Mode>,
22.
• To select the playback mode,
20.
• To change the play speed of the audio books,
21.

Playback starts automatically.
• When you connect the iPod to the USB
terminal, “ iPod” is selected as the source
and playback starts automatically.

Ÿ Press [4] or [¢] to select a track/
video.
You cannot resume playback for video sources.

When connected with the interface adapter
Enters main menu

Track no./Playing time

SOURCE

iPod
FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

• [4 / ¢]: Selects tracks
• [4 / ¢]: Reverse/forward search (Hold)

Song Name
Artist Name
Album Title

Starts playback/pause

Preparation:
Make sure <iPod> is selected for <External Input>. (

16)

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod].
Playback starts automatically.

Press [4] or [¢] to select a track.

40
EN34-43_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 40

12/12/08 6:10:12 PM

Selecting a track from the main
menu

Press [4] or [¢] to select the desired
item.

Press [3 / 8] to confirm the selection.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a track.
• When a track is selected finally, playback starts.
• To return to the previous menu, press [SEARCH].

Press [SEARCH] to enter the main menu.
“SEARCH” flashes on the screen during menu
operations.
• This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about 5 seconds.

3
4

20.

To select the playback mode,

Changing the display information

• Skips 10 items at a time if there are more than
10 items. (Hold)

(

50)

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs
Ô Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the
beginning)

Using other external components
AV-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN/VIDEO IN jacks.
Assigned title (

19)

SOURCE

AV-IN
FLAT

3:00

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN].
For KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625/KW-AVX624: You can also press AV-IN on the monitor panel.

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

To display the operation buttons while watching the playback picture,

29.
Continued on the next page

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN34-43_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 41

12/24/08 4:52:46 PM

Navigation screen
You can also connect a Navigation System to the VIDEO IN jack so that you can watch the navigation screen.
Preparation:
Make sure <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>. (

15)

To view the navigation screen
Press DISP on the monitor panel repeatedly. (

50)

• The aspect ratio of the navigation screen is fixed to <Full> regardless of the <Aspect> setting. (

13)

When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input> (
15)
• You can use the source “AV-IN” for listening to an audio source connected to the LINE IN jacks.

EXT-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter, KS-U57 (not
supplied) or AUX Input Adapter, KS-U58 (not supplied).
Assigned title (
19)
SOURCE

EXT-IN
FLAT

3:00

Preparation:
Make sure <External> is selected for <External Input>. (

16)

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [EXT-IN].
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
Changing the display information
(

50)

EXTERNAL DEVICES

EN34-43_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 42

12/10/08 11:33:38 AM

Maintenance
Caution on cleaning the unit
Do not use any solvent (for example, thinner, benzine,
etc.), detergent, or insecticide. This may damage the
monitor or the unit.

To play new discs
Recommended cleaning method:
Gently wipe the panel with a soft, dry cloth.

Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)

Warped disc

Sticker and sticker residue

Stick-on label

Unusual shape

C-thru Disc (semitransparent disc)

Transparent or semitransparent parts on its
recording area

REFERENCES 43
EN34-43_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 43

12/10/08 11:33:38 AM

More about this unit
General
Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the monitor panel, you
can also turn on the power. If the source is ready,
playback starts.

Tuner (FM only)
Storing stations in memory
• When SSM is over, received stations are preset in no.
1 (lowest frequency) to no. 6 (highest frequency).

Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down or has no
playable files, “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen. Eject the disc.

• This unit can recognize a total of 25 characters for
file/folder names.
• Some discs or files may not be played back due to
their characteristics or recording conditions.

Playing DVD-VR
• For details about DVD-VR format and playlist, refer
to the instructions supplied with the recording
equipment.

File playback
Playing DivX files
• This unit can play back DivX files with the extension
code <.divx>, <.div>, or <.avi> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• Audio stream should conform to MP3 or Dolby Digital.
• The file encoded in the interlaced scanning mode
may not be played back correctly.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is
4 Mbps.

Playing MPEG1/MPEG2 files
• This unit can play back MPEG1/MPEG2 files with the
extension code <.mpg>, <.mpeg>, or <.mod>*.
* <.mod> is an extension code used for the MPEG2 files
recorded by JVC Everio camcorders. The MPEG2 files
with the <.mod> extension code cannot be played
back when stored on a USB mass storage class device.
• The stream format should conform to MPEG system/
program stream.
The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at
Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple Profile at Main Level)/
MP@LL (Main Profile at Low Level).
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio
Layer-2 or Dolby Digital.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is
4 Mbps.

44
EN44-51_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 44

12/10/08 11:13:04 AM

Disc/file information shown on the
external monitor
The following screens appear only on the external
monitor.
• CD
T. RPT

Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files
• This unit can play back files with the extension code
<.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.wav> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can play back the files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate:
MP3/WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG2)
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 22.05 kHz (for WMA)
44.1 kHz (for WAV)
• This unit can show ID3 Tag Version
1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4 (for MP3).
• This unit can also show WAV/WMA Tag.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
• Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time indication.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,
etc.

Track Information
Album
Four seasons
Artist
Robert M. Smith
Title
Rain

TIME

00:14

Track : 6 / 14
Cloudy
Fair
Fog
Hail
Indian summer
Rain
Shower
Snow
Thunder
Typhoon
Wind
Winter sky

1
2
3
4

Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks on
the disc
5 Track information
6 Track list
7 Current track (highlighted bar)

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN44-51_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 45

12/12/08 6:11:44 PM

• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
p

* If tag data includes “Jacket Picture” (baseline JPEG), it
will be displayed.

USB operations
•
•

•
•

(for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724)
If “No USB Device“ appears after removing a device,
reattach a device or select another playback source.
When the USB device has no playable files, or has not
been formatted correctly, “Cannot play this device
Check the device” appears on the screen.
This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating
is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.
While playing from a USB device, the playback order
may differ from other players.

• This unit may be unable to play back some USB
devices or some files due to their characteristics or
recording conditions.
• USB devices equipped with special functions such as
data security functions cannot be used with the unit.
• Do not use a USB device with two or more partitions.
• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and
connection ports, some USB devices may not be
attached properly or the connection might be loose.
• When connecting a USB device, refer also to its
instructions.
• Connect only one USB device to the unit at a time. Do
not use a USB hub.
• This unit may not recognize a USB device connected
through a USB card reader.
• When connecting with a USB cable, use the USB 2.0
cable.
• This unit may not play back files in a USB device
properly when using a USB extension cord.
• This unit cannot assure proper functions or supply
power to all types of the devices.
• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files and 250
folders (a maximum of 999 files per folder).
• This unit can recognize a total of 25 characters for
file/folder names.
• For MPEG1/2 files: The maximum bit rate for video
signals (average) is 2 Mbps.

Bluetooth operations
General
• While driving, do not perform complicated operation
such as dialing the numbers, using phone book, etc.
When you perform these operations, stop your car in
a safe place.
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on
circumstances around you.
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.

46
EN44-51_KW-AVX726_001A_6.indd 46

12/16/08 3:46:02 PM

Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• Connection Error:
The device is registered but the connection has failed.
Use <Connect> to connect the device again.
( 25)
• Error:
Try the operation again. If “Error” appears again,
check if the device supports the function you have
tried.
• Device Unfound:
No available Bluetooth device is detected by
<Search>.
• Loading:
The unit is updating the phone book or SMS.
• Please Wait...:
The unit is preparing to use the Bluetooth function. If
the message does not disappear, turn off and turn on
the unit, then connect the device again (or reset the
unit).
• Reset08:
Check the connection between the adapter and this
unit.

Icons for phone types
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the device.
: Cellular phone
: Household phone
: Office
: General

iPod/iPhone operations
• You can control the following types of iPod/iPhone:
(A) Connected with the USB cable:
(for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724)
– iPod with video (5th Generation) *1, *2, *3
– iPod classic *1, *2
– iPod nano *2, *3
– iPod nano (2nd Generation) *2
– iPod nano (3rd Generation) *1, *2
– iPod nano (4th Generation) *1, *2
– iPod Touch *1, *2
– iPod Touch (2nd Generation) *1, *2
– iPhone/iPhone 3G *1, *2
(B) Connected with the interface adapter:
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
– iPod photo
– iPod with video (5th Generation)
– iPod classic
– iPod nano
– iPod nano (2nd Generation)
– iPod nano (3rd Generation)
– iPod nano (4th Generation) *4
*1 To watch the video with its audio, connect the iPod/
iPhone using USB Audio and Video cable (KS-U30, not
supplied).
*2 “iPod MODE” is available,
39.
*3 To listen to the sound in “iPod MODE,” connect
the iPod/iPhone using USB Audio and Video cable
(KS-U30, not supplied).
*4 It is not possible to charge the battery through this
unit.

: Other than above

CD changer
• If you select a folder, which does not include any
22), you will hear a beep.
music files, on the list (
Select another folder including music files.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN44-51_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 47

12/24/08 4:53:10 PM

• The text information scrolls on the monitor. This
unit can display up to 40 characters when using the
interface adapter and up to 128 characters when
using the USB 2.0 cable or USB Audio and Video
cable, KS-U30.

Characters you can enter for titles
In addition to the roman alphabet (A – Z, a – z), you
can use the following characters to assign titles. (
19)
• When <Руccĸий> is selected for <Language>.
(
13)
Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

• When any language other than <Руccĸий> is
13)
selected for <Language>. (
Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

JVC bears no responsibility for any loss of data
in an iPod/iPhone and/or USB mass storage
class device while using this unit.

48
EN44-51_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 48

12/24/08 5:14:34 PM

Sound signals emitted through the rear terminals
Through the analog terminals (Speaker out/LINE OUT)
2-channel signal is emitted. When playing multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced.

Output signals

<D. Audio Output>

Playback disc

DVD

<PCM>

48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*

96 kHz, Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

with Dolby Digital
with MPEG Audio

Audio CD, Video CD
DivX/ with Dolby Digital
MPEG
with MPEG Audio
MP3/WMA
WAV

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream
MPEG bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM /
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

* Digital signals may be emitted at 20 or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs
are not copy-protected.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN44-51_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 49

12/10/08 11:13:07 AM

Language codes (for DVD/DivX language selection)
Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU

FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA

KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE

NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
QU
RM
RN
RO
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS

Norwegian ST
Occitan
SU
(Afan) Oromo SW
Oriya
TA
Panjabi
TE
Polish
TG
Pashto, Pushto TH
Quechua
TI
Rhaeto-Romance TK
Kirundi
TL
Rumanian
TN
Kinyarwanda TO
Sanskrit
TR
Sindhi
TS
Sangho
TT
Serbo-Croatian TW
Singhalese
UK
Slovak
UR
Slovenian
UZ
Samoan
VI
Shona
VO
Somali
WO
Albanian
XH
Serbian
YO
Siswati
ZU

Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu

Display information
• Available display information varies among the playback sources.
Each time you press DISP, the display changes to show the various information.

Ex.: When the playback source is a DVD video disc
SOURCE

SOURCE

DVD

DVD
FLAT

FLAT

CHAP. RPT

3:00

Playback picture screen
(only for video sources)

Source information screen

3:00

Playback picture and source
information screen *1

Navigation screen *2

14)
*1 When the source is “ iPod,” the Artwork of the song is shown if the song has an Artwork data. (
While MP3/WMA file is played, “Jacket picture” is shown if the file has the tag data including “Jacket picture.”
*2 When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>. (
15)

50
EN44-51_KW-AVX726_001A_6.indd 50

12/16/08 4:06:47 PM

• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
• “DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation registered in the US, Japan and other
countries.
• DivX® is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under license.
• Plays DivX® video:
• ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified or DivX Ultra
Certified device that plays DivX video.
• ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX® Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) content. First generate the DivX VOD registration code for your device and submit it during the
registration process. [Important: DivX VOD content is protected by a DivX DRM (Digital Rights Management)
system that restricts playback to registered DivX Certified devices. If you try to play DivX VOD content not
authorized for your device, the message “Authorization Error” will be displayed and your content will not play.]
Learn more at www.divx.com/vod.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Victor
Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
• “Made for iPod” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
• “Works with iPhone” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPhone and
has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
• Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.

REFERENCES
EN44-51_KW-AVX726_001A_6.indd 51

12/16/08 3:55:01 PM

Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
• For operations with the external components, refer also to the instructions supplied with the adapters used for the
connections (as well as the instructions supplied with the external components).
• Messages (enclosed in “ ”) in the tables below are shown in the language selected on <Language>. (
13)
Messages described here are in the language of this manual.

Symptom

Remedy/Cause

• No sound comes out of the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The screen is not clear and legible.

Sunshine from the windshield may cause this symptom.
Adjust <Bright>. (
12)

• “Position Error Push Open Key”
appears on the screen.

The monitor panel angle has been forcibly adjusted, or its
adjustment has been interrupted while opening or closing.
Press [OPEN/TILT].

• “Mecha Error Push Reset” appears on Reset the unit. (
the screen, and the panel does not
move.
General

• “No Signal” appears.

• Change the source.
• Start the playback on the external component connected to
VIDEO IN jack.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Signal input is too weak.

• The buttons on the monitor panel do When the monitor panel is open, only VOL +/– and
work. The other buttons do not function.
not work.
• The unit does not work at all.

Reset the unit. (

TUNER

• The touch panel does not respond
• Keep your hands and the touch panel clean and dry.
properly.
• Eliminate static electricity and do not place magnetic items
• <Illumination> function does not
near the unit.
work properly.
• Leave the unit until the temperature becomes stable in the
car.
• A rubber mat on the floor may cause this symptom. In this
case, do not use the rubber mat.
• SSM automatic presetting does not
work.

Store stations manually. (

• Static noise while listening to the
radio.

Connect the antenna firmly.

21)

52
EN52-59_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 52

12/10/08 11:34:01 AM

Symptom

Remedy/Cause

• Disc can be neither recognized nor
played back.

Eject the disc forcibly. (

• Disc cannot be ejected.

Unlock the disc. (

27)

• Recordable/Rewritable discs cannot • Insert a finalized disc.
be played back.
• Finalize the discs with the component which you used for
• Tracks on the Recordable/Rewritable
recording.
discs cannot be skipped.

Disc in general

• Playback does not start.

• Insert the disc correctly again.
• The format of files is not supported by the unit.

• The playback picture is not clear and Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (
legible.
• Sound and pictures are sometimes
interrupted or distorted.

12)

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.

• No playback picture is shown and
Parking brake lead is not connected properly.
“Parking Brake” appears on the
See Installation/Connection Manual.
screen, even when the parking brake
is engaged.
• No picture appears on the external
monitor.

• Connect the video cord correctly.
• Select the correct input on the external monitor.

• “Eject Error” or “Loading Error”
appears on the screen.

Change the source by pressing SOURCE.

DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/MP3/WMA/WAV

• “Region code error” appears on the Region code is not correct. (
screen when you insert a DVD Video.

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Change the disc.
• Record the tracks using a compliant application on the
appropriate discs. (
4)
• Add appropriate extension codes to the file names.

• Noise is generated.

The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to
another file.

• Tracks are not played back as you
have intended them to play.

Playback order may differ from the one played back using other
players.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how
the tracks are recorded.

• “Not Support” appears on the screen The track is unplayable.
and track skips.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN52-59_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 53

12/10/08 11:34:03 AM

Bluetooth

USB (for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724)

Symptom

Remedy/Cause

• Noise is generated.

The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to another
file.

• Tracks cannot play back as you
have intended them to play.

Playback order may differ from the one played back using other
players.

• “Now Reading...” keeps flashing
on the screen.

• Readout time varies depending on the USB device.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.

• “Cannot play this device Check the No tracks are stored. Copy tracks to the USB device.
device” appears on the screen.
• Correct characters are not
displayed (e.g. album name).

For available characters,

• While playing a track, sound is
sometimes interrupted.

The tracks are not properly copied into the USB device. Copy tracks
again, and try again.

• Bluetooth device does not detect
the unit.

This unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular phone and
one Bluetooth audio player at a time.
While connected to a device, this unit cannot be detected from
another device. Disconnect currently connected device and search
again.

• The unit does not detect the
Bluetooth device.

• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device.

• The unit does not make pairing
with the Bluetooth device.

• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target device. If
the PIN code of the device is not indicated on its instructions,
try “0000” or “1234.”
• Select the device name from <Special Device>, then try to
connect again. (
25)

• Echo or noise occurs.

Adjust the microphone unit (supplied with Bluetooth Adapter)
position.

• Phone sound quality is poor.

• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
cellular phone.
• Move the car to place where you can get a better signal reception.

• The sound is interrupted or
skipped while using a Bluetooth
audio player.

• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth audio
player.
• Disconnect the device connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the player again.

48.

• “NEW DEVICE” cannot be selected Bluetooth audio player is already connected. To select “NEW
DEVICE,” disconnect it. (
25)
for “Bluetooth AUDIO.”
• The connected audio player
cannot be controlled.

Check whether the connected audio player supports AVRCP (Audio
Video Remote Control Profile).

54
EN52-59_KW-AVX726_001A_5.indd 54

12/16/08 1:05:43 PM

CD changer

Symptom

Remedy/Cause

• “No Disc” appears on the screen.

Insert a disc into the magazine.

• “No Magazine” appears on the screen.

Insert the magazine.

• “Cannot play this disc Check the disc” appears Current disc does not include playable files. Replace
on the screen.
the disc with one including playable files.
• “Reset08” appears on the screen.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and
press the reset button of the CD changer.

iPod/iPhone

• “Reset01” – “Reset07” appears on the screen. Press the reset button of the CD changer.
• The CD changer does not work at all.

Reset the unit. (

• The iPod/iPhone does not turn on or does not
work.

•
•
•
•

• Sound is distorted.

Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the
iPod/iPhone.

• “Disconnect” appears on the screen.

Check the connection.

• Playback stops.

The headphones are disconnected during playback.
Restart playback.

• “Cannot play this device Check the device”
appears on the screen.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod/iPhone.

• No operations are available when playing back Operate the unit after the Artwork is loaded. (
a track containing Artwork.

14)

AV-IN

• “Reset01” – “Reset07” appears on the screen. Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod.
Then, connect them again.
• “Reset08” appears on the screen.

Check the connection between the adapter and this
unit.

• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.

Reset the iPod.

• “Restricted Device” appears on the screen.

Check whether the connected iPod is compatible with
this unit. (
47)

• No picture appears on the screen.

• Turn on the video component if it is not on.
• Connect the video component correctly.

• Playback picture is not clear and legible.

Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (

REFERENCES
EN52-59_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 55

12)

12/10/08 11:34:04 AM

Specifications
AMPLIFIER
Maximum Power Output:

Front/Rear:

50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output
(RMS):

Front/Rear:

20 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to
20 000 Hz at no more than 1.0% total
harmonic distortion

Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control Range:

4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Frequencies:

60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 6.3 kHz,
15 kHz

Level:

±10 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

70 dB

Audio Output Level:
• LINE OUT (REAR)
• SUBWOOFER (for KW-AVX726/
KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724)

Line-Out Level/
Impedance:

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

Output Impedance:

1 kΩ

Color System:

NTSC/PAL

Video Output (composite):

1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Other Terminals:

Input:

• LINE IN, VIDEO IN, Antenna input
• USB input (for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/
KW-AVX724)

Output:

VIDEO OUT

Others:

CD changer, DIGITAL OUT (optical), POSITION
OUT

56
EN52-59_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 56

1/6/09 11:25:47 AM

FM/AM TUNER
Frequency Range:

FM Tuner:

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM:

531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

Usable Sensitivity:

9.3 dBf (0.8 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

AM Tuner:

Frequency Response:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation:

40 dB

Sensitivity/Selectivity:

20 μV/40 dB

DVD/CD
Signal Detection System:

Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Frequency Response:

DVD, fs=48 kHz/96 kHz:

16 Hz to 22 000 Hz

VCD/CD:

16 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Dynamic Range:

96 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

98 dB

Wow and Flutter:

Less than measurable limit

USB (for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724)
USB Standards:

USB 2.0 Full Speed

Data Transfer Rate

Full Speed:

Maximum 12 Mbps

Low Speed:

Maximum 1.5 Mbps

Compatible Device:

Mass storage class

Compatible File System:

FAT 32/16/12

Max. Current:

DC 5 V

500 mA

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN52-59_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 57

1/6/09 11:25:49 AM

MONITOR
Screen Size:

7 inch wide liquid crystal display

Number of Pixel:

336 960 pixels: 480 × 3 (horizontal) × 234 (vertical)

Drive Method:

TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix format

Color System:

NTSC/PAL

Aspect Ratio:

16:9 (wide)

GENERAL
Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System:

Negative ground

Allowable Storage Temperature:

–10°C to +60°C

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Dimensions (W × H × D):

Installation Size (approx.):

178 mm × 100 mm × 160 mm

Panel Size (approx.):

184 mm × 112 mm × 23 mm

Mass (approx.):

2.7 kg

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Required space for installation and the monitor ejection
Dashboard

100

160

91.3

58
EN52-59_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 58

1/6/09 11:25:49 AM

Operation index
General
Reset ..................................................................3, 5
Volume ..............................................................5, 6
AV Menu ........................................................ 5, 11
Source................................................................5, 6
Short Cut .............................................................. 7
RM-RK252 ...................................... 7, 8, 9, 30, 31
Clock .............................................................10, 13
Display demonstration ...........................10, 12

Tuner
Listen to the radio (FM/AM) ...............5, 9, 26
Auto/manual search.................................. 8, 26
Select preset station ........................... 8, 21, 26
Store station
(automatically/manually) ...................19, 21
Improve FM reception ...................................19
Assign title .........................................................19

USB
Attach/detach...................................................34
Start/pause playback ..............................13, 34
Repeat/random play ......................................20

Bluetooth
Connect/disconnect/delete ..........24, 25, 35
Make a call ..................................................22, 23
Answer/end call ................................... 9, 25, 36
Read SMS .....................................................23, 37
Microphone volume.......................................25
Preset phone number....................................37

CD changer
Start playback ............................................22, 38
Repeat/random play ......................................20

iPod
Disc
Open/close ................................................... 6, 27
Eject ....................................................................3, 6
Lock/unlock disc ..............................................27
Playable disc type ............................................. 4
Display information ........................................28
Repeat/random play ......................................20
Select track/folder ........................ 8, 21, 30, 31
Select title/program/playlist .................. 8, 30
Start/stop/pause/resume
playback .............................................. 9, 30, 31
Search/skip ........................................8, 9, 30, 31
OSD ...............................................................32, 33
PBC playback ............................................... 9, 30

Connect .......................................................39, 40
Start/pause playback ................................ 9, 39
Head Mode/iPod Mode............................ 5, 39
Repeat/random play ......................................20
Audiobooks .......................................................21
Select track ..................................... 8, 22, 39, 40

External component
AV-INPUT ............................................................41
EXT-INPUT ..........................................................42

REFERENCES
EN52-59_KW-AVX726_001A_3.indd 59

12/12/08 6:13:51 PM

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX724/
KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625/KW-AVX624
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 10.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS
EN
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

CoverRear_KW-AVX726_001A_f.indd 1

GET0605-001A
0109DTSMDTJEIN

[U/UN/UT/A/UI]

12/30/08 9:20:28 AM

KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/
KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625
GET0605-007A

Installation/Connection Manual
安裝/連接手冊

0109DTSMDTJEIN

EN, CT
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

[U/UT]

ENGLISH

中文

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

本機僅可使用直流 12 V 、負極接地的電源系統。如果您的車輛沒有這一電源系統，則需要一個電
壓變換器，可以在 JVC 汽車音響分銷商處買到。.

WARNINGS

警告

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift lever operations, as this may result in a traffic accident.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices such as air bags, as this may result in a fatal accident.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate any unit while manipulating the steering wheel, as this may result in a traffic accident.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while driving. It may lead to carelessness and cause an accident.
• If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look around carefully or you may be involved in
a traffic accident.
• If the parking brake is not engaged, “Parking Brake” appears on the monitor, and no playback picture
will be shown.
– This warning appears only when the parking brake wire is connected to the parking brake system built
in the car.

• 切勿在以下位置安裝本機或連接電纜；
– 可能會妨礙操作方向盤和變速排檔桿的位置，否則可能引發交通事故。
– 可能會妨礙操作安全裝置，如安全氣袋等的位置，否則可能引發致命的交通事故。
– 可能會妨礙視野的位置。
• 切勿在操作方向盤的過程中操作本機，否則可能引發交通事故。
• 駕駛時，駕駛員切勿緊盯顯示器。這可能會導致疏忽並引發事故。
• 在駕駛過程中若需要操作本機，切記要密切注意前方，否則可能引發交通事故。
• 若手剎車末嚙合，“Parking Brake”字樣在顯示器上出現，且無法播放圖片。
– 僅當手剎車導線與汽車內置的手剎車系統相連接時此警告信息才會出現。

為防止短路，建議在安裝本機之前，拔開電池的負極，並把所有電路都連接好。
• 安裝完畢後務必將本機的地線重新接至車身。

Notes on electrical connections:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change <Amplifier Gain> setting to prevent the speakers from
being damaged (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

進行電路連接時注意：
• 把保險絲更換為額定負荷值的保險絲。如果保險絲經常燒壞，請向 JVC 汽車音響分銷商詢問。
• 後置和前置揚聲器的最大輸入功率應大於 50 W，其阻抗為 4 Ω – 8 Ω。
如果最大功率少於 50 W，請調校 <Amplifier Gain> 設定值，以防止揚聲器損壞。(參閱使用說明
書的第 18 頁)。
• 為防止電源短路，請用絕緣帶包住未使用電線的端子。
• 本機使用後，散熱片會很熱。因此，在移出本機時，小心不要觸摸散熱片。

Heat sink
散熱片

Parts list for installation and connection

用於安裝和連接的零件清單

If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.

若發現缺少任何一件零件，請即刻聯絡您的 JVC 汽車音響分銷商。

Main unit
主機

Power cord
電路連接用的配線束

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
平頭螺絲（M5 × 8 mm）

Round head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
圓頭螺絲（M5 × 8 mm）

Crimp connector
夾子接頭

Plate for use with a Nissan car
用於日產汽車的框

Remote controller
遙控器

Batteries
電池

Install1-3_KW-AVX726[UT]2.indd 1

08/12/25 17:55:11

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

安裝（裝設、固定在儀表板內）

The following illustration shows a typical installation. However, you should make adjustments
corresponding to your specific car. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation
kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

下面的圖解表示了典型的安裝程序。但是在實際安裝時，您應該根據您的汽車作適當的調整。如果
您有問題，或需要有關配套元件的資料，請向 JVC 汽車音響分銷商或配套元件供應公司詢問。
• 如果您不能確定如何正確地安裝本機，應請合格的技術人員來安裝。

Before installing the unit

安裝本機之前

• When mounting the unit, be sure to use the screws provided, as instructed. If other screws are used,
parts could become loose or damaged.
• When tightening screws or bolts, be careful not to pinch any connection cord.
• Make sure not to block the fan on the rear to maintain proper ventilation when installing the unit.

• 當裝上本機時，必須按照指示使用配備的螺絲釘。如果使用其它的螺絲釘，相關零件可能會鬆
脫或損壞。
• 當鎖緊螺絲釘或螺栓時，切記不要壓擠到任何連接電線。
• 當安裝上後，切記不要阻擋到後面板的風扇以維持適當的通風。

Remove the audio system originally installed in the car, together with its mounting brackets.
Note: Be sure to keep all the screws and parts removed from your car for future use.

拆卸原本安裝在汽車內的音響系統，以及其裝配架。
注意：請務必保留所有從您汽車拆卸的螺絲和零件做日後使用。

2
3

Attach the mounting brackets (removed from the car), to this unit (see below).

2
3

將 (從汽車拆卸的) 裝配架安上本機 (參閱下圖)。

Install this unit using the screws removed in step 1.

使用在步驟 1 拆卸的螺絲安裝本機。

Do the required electrical connections.
• See pages 3 – 6.

The following example is for installation in a Toyota car. For more details, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.

執行必要的電路連接。
• 參閱第 3 至 6 頁。

以下以豐田（Toyota）汽車安裝為例。請聯絡您的 JVC 汽車音響分銷商有關更多細節。

Supplied screws
配備螺絲

Mounting bracket removed from the car
從汽車拆卸的裝配架

Screws removed from the car in step 1
在步驟 1從汽車拆卸的螺絲

Supplied screws
配備螺絲

If necessary, restore the protruding tabs.
若有必要，請重新裝上凸緣。
Select the appropriate type fitting to your audio
system space.

選擇適合您的音響系統安裝空間的型號。

Note :
注意：

When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the supplied screws
(M5 × 8 mm). If longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.
安裝本機進裝配架時，請務必使用配備的螺絲（M5 × 8 mm）。若使用比較長的螺絲，
有關螺絲可能會損壞本機。.

When installing the unit in a Nissan car
當安裝本機於日產汽車時

Plate for use with a Nissan car
用於日產汽車的框

Required space for installation and the monitor ejection
安裝和顯示器退出所需的空間
20

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚, taking it into account that the monitor would eject
when in use.
將本機安裝在少於 30˚ 的角度，您必須考慮到屏幕可以在使用時退出。

100

Dashboard
儀表盤

30˚
Unit: mm
單位：mm（毫米）
160

91.3

CT_Instal_KW-AVX726[UT]2.indb 2

08/12/25 16:33:12

電路連接

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Typical connections / 典型的接線方法

接線前：仔細檢查汽車內的線路。不正確的接線會導致本機嚴重損壞。
電力線的引線和車身的連接器引線在顏色上可能有所不同。

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1
2
3

Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
Connect the antenna cord.

依照下圖所示之次序連接電源線的顏色導線。
將天線的電線連接起來。
最後，把配線束的插頭插在本機上。

Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

Antenna terminal
天線端子
DIGITAL OUT
（see diagram

/ 參閱圖表

）

Rear ground terminal
本機後背接地端子
Position data output / 位置數據輸出
（see diagram

/ 參閱圖表

）

SUBWOOFER—Only for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725 / 僅對應 KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725
（see diagram / 參閱圖表 ）

Fan
風扇

15 A fuse
15 A 保險絲
To external components
(see diagram )
接至外接裝置
（參閱圖表 ）

VIDEO OUT
（see diagram /
參閱圖表 ）

To metallic body or chassis of the car
接至金屬體或汽車底盤

Yellow *2
黃色 *2

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
接至保險絲單元內的帶電端子，保險絲單元與車裝電池相連接（用於
旁路點火開關）（恆定 12 V）

Red
紅色

VIDEO IN
（see diagram /
參閱圖表 ）

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
接至保險絲單元內的附屬端子

Blue
藍色

LINE IN
（see diagram /
參閱圖表 ）
REAR OUT
（see diagram
參閱圖表 ）

Ignition switch
點火開關

Black
黑色

Fuse block
保險絲單元

To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
接至自動天線（若有裝設）（最大 250 mA）

Blue with white stripe
藍色帶有白色條紋

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
連接至其他裝置的遙控導線（最大 200 mA）

Orange with white stripe
橙色帶有白色條紋

To car light control switch
連接至汽車車燈控制開關

Brown
褐色

To cellular phone system
連接至流動電話系統

To parking brake (see diagram )
接至手剎車導線（參閱圖表 ）

Light green
淺綠色
Crimp connector
夾子接頭

White with black stripe
白色帶有黑色條紋

White
白色

Left speaker (front)
左揚聲器 (前置)

Gray with black stripe
灰色帶有黑色條紋

Gray
灰色

Green with black stripe
綠色帶有黑色條紋

Right speaker (front)
右揚聲器 (前置)

Green
綠色

Left speaker (rear)
左揚聲器 (後置)

Purple with black stripe
紫色帶有黑色條紋

Purple
紫色

Right speaker (rear)
右揚聲器 (後置)

*1 不隨本機提供。
*2 本機未安裝時，進行工作狀況檢查之前，必須把這導線接上，否則不能開啟電源。

*1 Not supplied for this unit.
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power
cannot be turned on.

CT_Instal_KW-AVX726[UT]2.indb 3

08/12/25 16:33:17

ENGLISH

中文
電源和揚聲器接線注意事項：
• 切勿把揚聲器導線接頭接至電池，否則本機將會嚴重損壞。
• 在把揚聲器導線接頭接至揚聲器之前，檢查您汽車上的揚聲器線路。

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.

Connecting the parking brake lead / 連接至手剎車導線

Parking brake lead (light green)
手剎車導線（淺綠色）

Parking brake
手剎車

Crimp connector
夾子接頭

To metallic body or chassis of the car
接至金屬體或汽車底盤

Parking brake switch (inside the car)
手剎車開關（位於車內）

Connecting the reverse gear signal lead (for rear view camera) / 連接反向變速器信號導線（對應後視照相機）

Locate the reverse lamp lead in the trunk.
找出後車箱的倒車信號燈導線。
Extension lead *1
延長線 *1

Purple with white stripe
紫色帶有白色條紋

Crimp connector *1
夾子接頭 *1

To reverse lamp
連接至倒車信號燈

To car battery
連接至汽車電池

Reverse lamp lead
倒車信號燈導線

*1 Not supplied for this unit.

Reverse lamps
倒車信號燈

*1 不隨本機提供。

Install4-6_KW-AVX726[UT]3.indd 4

09/1/8 15:09:45

Connecting the external amplifier and/or subwoofer / 連接至外接功率放大器和 / 或重低音揚聲器

您可以連接功率放大器以提昇尊車的音響系統。
• 將遙控導線（藍色帶有白色條紋）和其他裝置上的遙控導線連接起來，以便可以從本機進行遙
控。
• 將揚聲器和本機拔開，再接上功率放大器。將本機的揚聲器接線放置不用。

Remote lead *2
遙控導線 *2

Y-connector *2
Y-型連接導線 *2

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
連接至其他裝置上的遙控導線或自動天線（若有裝設）

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
遙控導線（藍色帶有白色條紋）

Only for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725 / 僅對應 KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725

JVC Amplifier
JVC 功率放大器
Rear speakers
後置揚聲器

Subwoofer
重低音揚聲器

JVC Amplifier
JVC 功率放大器

Front speakers
前置揚聲器

Connecting the external components / 連接其他外接裝置

AV amplifier or decoder
AV 功率放大器或譯碼器

Digital optical cable *2
數位光纜 *2

Video cord *2

影像線 *2
External monitor
外接顯示器

External component
外接裝置

Video cord *2

KV-CM1*2

影像線*2

Rear view camera
後視照相機

Only for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725 / 僅對應 KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725
Connecting the USB devices / 連接 USB 裝置

Connecting the iPod/iPhone to the USB terminal / 連接 iPod/iPhone 至 USB 端子

USB device
USB 裝置
USB cable (approx. 1.2 m)
USB 電纜（大約 1.2 m）

You can connect the iPod/iPhone to the USB terminal using the following cables:
• To listen to the music: USB 2.0 cable (supplied with the iPod/iPhone)
• To watch the video: USB Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (not supplied) *6
您可以使用下列電纜連接 iPod/iPhone 至 USB 端子：
• 想要聆聽音樂： USB 2.0 電纜（隨 iPod/iPhone 附帶）
• 想要觀看視訊：iPod/iPhone 的 USB 聲音和影像電纜—KS-U30（另購）*6
Apple iPod/iPhone
Apple iPod/iPhone
USB 2.0 cable
USB 2.0 電纜

Apple iPod/iPhone
Apple iPod/iPhone

KS-U30

You cannot connect a computer to the USB (
) terminal of the unit.
您無法將電腦連接至本機的 USB（
）端子。

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod 是 Apple Inc.（蘋果公司）在美國及其他國家註冊的商標。

*2
*3
*4
*5

iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone 是 Apple Inc.（蘋果公司）的商標。

*2
*3
*4
*5

Not supplied for this unit.
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).
Audio cord (not supplied for this unit).
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the
unit.
*6 When using the cable, make sure <iPod (Off)> is selected for <AV Input> (see page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

不隨本機提供。
信號導線（不隨本機提供）。
聲音導線（不隨本機提供）。
將地線與金屬車體或者汽車底盤緊密連接，連接處應該沒有被油漆覆蓋（如果已塗上油漆，在連接電線
前，將油漆刮去）。如果不這樣做，可能會損壞本機。
*6 當使用電纜時，確定為 <AV Input> 選擇 <iPod (Off)>（參閱使用說明書的第 15 頁）。

Install4-6_KW-AVX726[UT]3.indd 5

09/1/8 15:09:53

Connecting the external components to the CD changer jack / 連接外接裝置至 CD 換碟器插孔

When connecting the external components, refer also to the manuals supplied for the components and
adapter.

連接外接裝置時，另請參閱裝置及轉換器之使用手冊。

CAUTION:
Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

小心：
連接外接裝置之前，請確定關閉本機。

You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer jack.

您可以將以下 JVC 裝置連接到 CD 換碟器插孔。

JVC component

Model name

JVC 裝置

型號名稱

CD changer (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

CD 換碟器（CD-CH）

CH-X1500，等

You can also connect the following components through the various JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.

您也可透過各種 JVC 轉換器連接以下裝置。
• 連接線可能需要單獨購置。

Component

Adapter

Model name

裝置

轉換器

型號名稱

Bluetooth device

Bluetooth adapter

KS-BTA200

藍牙裝置

藍牙轉換器

KS-BTA200

iPod

Interface adapter for iPod

KS-PD100

iPod

iPod 介面轉換器

KS-PD100

Portable audio player with line output jacks

Line input adapter

KS-U57

帶線性輸出插孔的手提式音頻播放器

線性輸入轉換器

KS-U57

Portable audio player with 3.5 mm stereo mini jack

AUX input adapter

KS-U58

帶 3.5 mm 立體聲迷你型插孔的手提式音頻播放器

AUX 輸入轉換器

KS-U58

When connecting more than one component (maximum: two), it is recommended that you connect the
components in series as explained below.

當連接多個裝置時（最多︰2），建議您依下方所示串聯裝置。

When connecting two components in series
當串聯兩個裝置時

To disconnect the connector / 拆開連接器

Hold the connector top tightly ( 1 ), then pull it out ( 2 ).
抓緊連接器上部（ 1），然後將之拉出（ 2 ）。
*7

CD changer jack / CD 換碟器插孔
A KS-BTA200
B*7 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

*7 To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

*7 要使用這些裝置，請正確設定外接輸入（參閱使用說明書的第 16 頁）。

TROUBLESHOOTING

故障排除

• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• 保險絲燒斷。
* 檢查紅色導線接頭和黑色導線接頭是否接觸正確？

• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?

• 電源不能接通。
* 檢查黃色導線接頭是否接上？

• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• 揚聲器沒有聲訊。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出導線接頭是否短路？

• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• 聲訊失真。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地？
* 檢查揚聲器的左（L），右（R）端子的負極“–”是否共同接地？

• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

• 噪音干擾音響。
* 後接地端子與車身是否使用較短和較厚的電線連接？

• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• 本機發熱。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地？
* 檢查揚聲器的左（L），右（R）端子的負極“–”是否共同接地？

• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?

• 本機完全不能正確操作。
* 您有沒有重置本機？

CT_Instal_KW-AVX726[UT]2.indb 6

08/12/25 16:33:31

KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/
KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625
GET0605-009A

Installation/Connection Manual
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan

0109DTSMDTJEIN

EN, IN
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

[UN]

ENGLISH

INDONESIA

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

Unit ini didesain untuk beroperasi hanya pada sistem listrik 12 V DC yang di-ground NEGATIVE. Jika
kendaraan Anda tidak dilengkapi sistem ini, maka diperlukan alat pembalik tegangan yang dapat dibeli di
penyalur-penyalur audio mobil JVC.

WARNINGS

PERINGATAN

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift lever operations, as this may result in a traffic accident.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices such as air bags, as this may result in a fatal accident.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate any unit while manipulating the steering wheel, as this may result in a traffic accident.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while driving. It may lead to carelessness and cause an accident.
• If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look around carefully or you may be involved in
a traffic accident.
• If the parking brake is not engaged, “Parking Brake” appears on the monitor, and no playback picture
will be shown.
– This warning appears only when the parking brake wire is connected to the parking brake system built
in the car.

• JANGAN menginstal unit apa pun atau menjalin kabel apa pun pada lokasi di mana;
– unit dapat menghalangi pengoperasian roda kemudi dan tuas persneling, karena dapat mengakibatkan
kecelakaan lalu lintas.
– unit dapat menghalangi pengoperasian alat keselamatan seperti kantung udara, karena hal ini dapat
mengakibatkan kecelakaan yang fatal.
– ini dapat menghalangi pandangan.
• JANGAN mengoperasikan unit apa pun sewaktu mengendalikan roda kemudi, karena hal ini dapat
mengakibatkan kecelakaan lalu lintas.
• Pengemudi tidak boleh menonton ke monitor sewaktu mengemudi. Ini dapat mengakibatkan kecerobohan
dan menyebabkan kecelakaan.
• Jika Anda harus mengoperasikan unit selagi mengemudi, pastikan Anda melihat ke sekeliling dengan
cermat, karena kalau tidak, Anda bisa terlibat kecelakaan lalu lintas.
• Jika rem parkir tidak bekerja, terlihat tulisan “Parking Brake” muncul pada monitor dan tidak ada
pemutaran gambar yang akan ditunjukkan.
– Peringatan ini hanya muncul apabila kabel rem parkir terhubung ke sistem rem parkir yang terpasang
dalam mobil.

Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif baterai
dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang unit.
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan unit ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.

Notes on electrical connections:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change <Amplifier Gain> setting to prevent the speakers from
being damaged (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

Catatan mengenai sambungan listrik:
• Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada
penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.
• Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya
di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 Ω sampai 8 Ω).
Jika maksimum power kurang dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan <Amplifier Gain> (“PENAMBAH
PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 18 dari BUKU
PETUNJUK).
• Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan
pita isolasi.
• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika
memindahkan unit ini.

Heat sink
Endapan panas

Parts list for installation and connection

Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan

If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.

Jika ada item yang hilang, segera hubungi dealer audio mobil JVC anda.

Main unit
Unit utama

Power cord
Kabel listrik

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Sekrup-sekrup kepala datar (M5 × 8 mm)

Round head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Sekrup-sekrup kepala bulat (M5 × 8 mm)

Crimp connector
Konektor kerut

Plate for use with a Nissan car
Pelat untuk digunakan dengan mobil Nissan

Remote controller
Remote kontrol

Batteries
Baterai

Install1_KW-AVX726_009A_2.indd 1

12/4/08 4:50:18 PM

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

PEMASANGAN (DALAM BINGKAI TEMPATNYA)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. However, you should make adjustments
corresponding to your specific car. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation
kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan pemasangan yang khas. Namun, Anda harus melakukan penyesuaian pada mobil
tertentu. Jika ada pertanyaan atau perlu informasi mengenai kit pemasangan, tanyakan kepada penyalur audio
mobil JVC atau perusahaan yang menyediakannya.
• Jika Anda tidak tahu pasti cara memasang unit ini dengan benar, serahkan pemasangan kepada teknisi
yang memenuhi syarat.

Before installing the unit

Sebelum memasang unit

• Apabila memasang unit, pastikan Anda menggunakan sekrup-sekrup yang tersedia sebagaimana yang
diinstruksikan. Jika menggunakan sekrup lain, komponen bisa menjadi longgar atau rusak.
• Sewaktu mengencangkan sekrup-sekrup atau baut, hati-hati, jangan sampai menjepit kabel sambungan
yang manapun.
• Pastikan tidak ada yang menghalangi kipas pada panel belakang untuk menjaga aliran udara yang baik
apabila kipas ini dipasang.

Remove the audio system originally installed in the car, together with its mounting brackets.
Note: Be sure to keep all the screws and parts removed from your car for future use.

2
3

Attach the mounting brackets (removed from the car), to this unit (see below).

Install this unit using the screws removed in step 1.

Do the required electrical connections.
• See pages 3 – 6.

The following example is for installation in a Toyota car. For more details, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.

Copot sistem audio yang aslinya terpasang dalam mobil berikut braket montasi.
Catatan: Pastikan Anda menyimpan semua sekrup-sekrup dan komponen yang dilepaskan dari mobil
untuk penggunaan di kemudian hari.

2
3

Pasangkan braket montasi (yang dilepaskan dari mobil) ke unit ini (lihat di bawah).

Pasang unit ini dengan menggunakan sekrup-sekrup yang dilepaskan pada langkah 1.

Lakukan koneksi listrik yang diperlukan.
• Lihat halaman 3 – 6.

Berikut adalah contoh pemasangan pada mobil Toyota. Untuk rincian lebih lanjut, tanyakan kepada penyalur
audio mobil JVC.

Supplied screws
Sekrup-sekrup yang disediakan

Mounting bracket removed from the car
Braket montasi dilepaskan dari mobil

Screws removed from the car in step 1
Sekrup-sekrup yang dilepaskan dari mobil pada langkah 1

Supplied screws
Sekrup-sekrup yang disediakan

If necessary, restore the protruding tabs.
Jika perlu, pasang kembali tab yang menonjol keluar.
Select the appropriate type fitting to your audio
system space.
Pilih tipe sambungan yang sesuai untuk ruang
sistem audio Anda.

Note :

When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the supplied screws
(M5 × 8 mm). If longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.
Catatan : Apabila memasang unit pada braket montasi, pastikan Anda menggunakan sekrup-sekrup yang
disediakan (M5 × 8 mm). Jika menggunakan sekrup-sekrup yang lebih panjang, bisa merusak
unit.

When installing the unit in a Nissan car
Apabila memasang unit dalam mobil Nissan

Plate for use with a Nissan car
Pelat untuk digunakan dengan mobil Nissan

Required space for installation and the monitor ejection
Diperlukan ruang untuk penginstalan dan pengeluaran monitor

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚, taking it into account that the monitor would eject
when in use.
Pasang unit tersebut pada sudut kurang dari 30˚, perhitungkan bahwa monitor akan keluar ketika
sedang digunakan.

100

Dashboard
Dashboard

30˚
Unit: mm
Unit: mm
160

91.3

Install1_KW-AVX726_009A_2.indd 2

12/4/08 4:50:22 PM

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK

Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak benar
mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada unit.
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.

1
2
3

Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
Connect the antenna cord.
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

/ lihat diagram

Sambungkan kabel antena.
Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke unit.

Antenna terminal
Terminal antena
DIGITAL OUT
(see diagram

Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.

)

Rear ground terminal
Terminal tanah belakang
Position data output / Keluaran data posisi
(see diagram

/ lihat diagram

)

SUBWOOFER—Only for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725 / Hanya untuk KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725
(see diagram / lihat diagram )

Fan
Kipas

15 A fuse
Sekring 15 A
To external components
(see diagram )
Ke komponen eksternal
(lihat diagram )

VIDEO OUT
(see diagram
lihat diagram
VIDEO IN
(see diagram
lihat diagram

LINE IN
(see diagram
lihat diagram
REAR OUT
(see diagram
lihat diagram

/
)

Ignition switch
Saklar kontak

Black
Hitam

To metallic body or chassis of the car
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut

Yellow *2
Kuning *2

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Ke terminal aktif dalam blok sekring yang menghubungkan ke baterai mobil
(tanpa melalui kunci kontak) (konstant 12 V)

Red
Merah

/
)

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Ke terminal aksesori dalam blok sekring

Blue
Biru

/
)

Fuse block
Blok sekring

To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA.)

Blue with white stripe
Biru dengan strip putih

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA.)

/
)
Orange with white stripe
Oranye dengan strip putih

To car light control switch
Ke saklar kontrol lampu mobil

Brown
Cokelat

To cellular phone system
Ke sistem telepon selular

To parking brake (see diagram )
Ke rem parkir (lihat diagram )

Light green
Hijau muda
Crimp connector
Konektor kerut

White with black stripe
Putih dengan strip hitam

White
Putih

Gray with black stripe
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam

Left speaker (front)
Speaker kiri (depan)

Gray
Abu-abu

Green with black stripe
Hijau den gan strip hitam

Right speaker (front)
Speaker kanan (depan)

Green
Hijau

Purple with black stripe
Ungu dengan strip hitam

Left speaker (rear)
Speaker kiri (belakang)

Purple
Ungu

Right speaker (rear)
Speaker kanan (belakang)

*1 Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.
*2 Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari unit ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah dihubungkan, selain

*1 Not supplied for this unit.
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power

itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.

cannot be turned on.

Install1_KW-AVX726_009A_f.indd 3

1/8/09 9:21:27 AM

ENGLISH

INDONESIA
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan sambungan-sambungan
speaker:
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,
unit tersebut akan secara serius rusak.
• SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan
speaker dalam mobil Anda.

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.

Connecting the parking brake lead / Menyambung kabel rem parkir

Parking brake lead (light green)
Kabel rem parkir (hijau muda)

Crimp connector
Konektor kerut

Parking brake
Rem parkir

To metallic body or chassis of the car
Ke logam body atau casis mobil

Parking brake switch (inside the car)
Saklar rem parkir (di dalam mobil)

Connecting the reverse gear signal lead (for rear view camera) / Menghubungkan timbal sinyal persneling mundur (untuk kamera tampilan
belakang)

Locate the reverse lamp lead in the trunk.
Tempatkan kabel kamera belakang ke dalam bagasi mobil.
Extension lead *1
Kabel sambungan *1

Purple with white stripe
Ungu dengan strip putih

Crimp connector *1
Konektor kerut *1

To car battery
Ke baterai

To reverse lamp
Ke lampu mundur

Reverse lamp lead
Ujung lampu mundur

*1 Not supplied for this unit.

Reverse lamps
Lampu mundur

*1 Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.

Install2_KW-AVX726_009A_f.indd 4

1/8/09 9:22:19 AM

Connecting the external amplifier and/or subwoofer / Penyambungan penguat eksternal dan/atau subwoofer
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.
• Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat
dikontrol melalui unit ini.
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari unit ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat. Biarkan
ujung speaker dari unit ini tidak digunakan.

Y-connector *2
Konektor Y *2

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih)

Only for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725 / Hanya untuk KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725

JVC Amplifier
Penguat JVC
Rear speakers
Speaker-speaker belakang

Subwoofer
Subwoofer

JVC Amplifier
Penguat JVC

Front speakers
Speaker-speaker depan

Connecting the external components / Menyambung komponen eksternal
AV amplifier or decoder
Amplifier AV atau decoder

Digital optical cable *2
Kabel optik digital *2

Video cord *2
Kabel video *2

External monitor
External monitor

External component
Komponen eksternal

Video cord *2
Kabel video *2

KV-CM1 *2
Rear view camera
Kamera tampilan belakang

Only for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725 / Hanya untuk KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725
Connecting the USB devices / Menghubungkan
Connecting the iPod/iPhone to the USB terminal / Menghubungkan iPod/iPhone ke
Perangkat USB
terminal USB

USB device
Perangkat USB

You can connect the iPod/iPhone to the USB terminal using the following cables:
• To listen to the music: USB 2.0 cable (supplied with the iPod/iPhone)
• To watch the video: USB Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (not supplied) *6
Anda dapat menghubungkan iPod/iPhone ke terminal USB dengan menggunakan kabel berikut ini:
• Untuk mendengarkan musik: Kabel USB 2.0 (disediakan untuk iPod/iPhone)
• Untuk menonton video: Kabel Audio dan Video USB untuk iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (tidak disediakan) *6

USB cable (approx. 1.2 m)
Kabel USB (kira-kira 1,2 m)

USB 2.0 cable
Kabel USB 2.0

Apple iPod/iPhone
Apple iPod/iPhone

KS-U30

You cannot connect a computer to the USB (
) terminal of the unit.
Anda tidak dapat menghubungkan komputer ke terminal USB (
) pada
unit.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod adalah merek dagang dari Apple Inc., terdaftar di Amerika Serikat dan di
negara-negara lain.

*2
*3
*4
*5

iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone adalah merek dagang dari Apple Inc.

*2
*3
*4
*5

Not supplied for this unit.
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).
Audio cord (not supplied for this unit).
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the
unit.
*6 When using the cable, make sure <iPod (Off)> is selected for <AV Input> (see page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini).
Kabel audio (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini).
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat
(jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan
kerusakan pada alat penerima tersebut.
*6 Bila menggunakan kabel, pastikan <iPod (Off)> yang dipilih untuk <AV Input> (lihat halaman 15 dari BUKU
PETUNJUK).

Install2_KW-AVX726_009A_2.indd 5

12/12/08 12:19:02 PM

Connecting the external components to the CD changer jack / Menghubungkan komponen eksternal ke jack CD changer

When connecting the external components, refer also to the manuals supplied for the components and
adapter.

Bila menghubungkan komponen eksternal, rujuk juga buku petunjuk yang dibekalkan untuk komponen dan
adaptor.

CAUTION:
Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

PERINGATAN:
Sebelum menyambungkan komponen eksternal, pastikan bahwa unit sudah dimatikan.

You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer jack.

Anda dapat menghubungkan komponen JVC berikut ini ke jack CD changer.

JVC component

Model name

Komponen JVC

Nama model

CD changer (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

CD changer (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, dsb.

You can also connect the following components through the various JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.

Anda juga dapat menghubungkan komponen berikut ini melalui berbagai adaptor JVC.
• Kabel koneksi mungkin harus dibeli secara terpisah.

Component

Adapter

Model name

Komponen

Adaptor

Nama model

Bluetooth device

Bluetooth adapter

KS-BTA200

Perangkat Bluetooth

Adaptor Bluetooth

KS-BTA200

iPod

Interface adapter for iPod

KS-PD100

iPod

Adaptor interface untuk iPod

KS-PD100

Portable audio player with line output jacks

Line input adapter

KS-U57

Audio player portabel dengan jack line output

Adaptor line input

KS-U57

Portable audio player with 3.5 mm stereo mini jack

AUX input adapter

KS-U58

Audio player portabel dengan jack stereo mini 3,5 mm

Adaptor AUX input

KS-U58

When connecting more than one component (maximum: two), it is recommended that you connect the
components in series as explained below.

Bila menghubungkan beberapa komponen (maksimum: dua), dianjurkan agar anda menghubungkan
komponen dalam rangkaian seperti dijelaskan di bawah.

When connecting two components in series
Bila menghubungkan dua komponen dalam rangkaian

To disconnect the connector / Untuk memutuskan konektor

Hold the connector top tightly ( 1 ), then pull it out ( 2 ).
Pegang erat konektor ( 1 ) lalu tarik keluar ( 2 ).
*7

CD changer jack / Konector CD changer
A KS-BTA200
B*7 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

*7 To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

*7 Untuk menggunakan komponen ini, lakukan pengaturan masukan eksternal yang benar (lihat halaman 16
dari BUKU PETUNJUK).

TROUBLESHOOTING

PEMECAHAN MASALAH

• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• Sekring meledak.
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?

• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?

• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?

• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?

• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• Suara terdistorsi.
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?

• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan
tertebal?

• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• Unit menjadi panas.
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?

• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?

• Unit ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) unit anda?

Install2_KW-AVX726_009A_2.indd 6

12/4/08 4:54:04 PM

KW-AVX726/KW-AVX724/
KW-AVX626/KW-AVX624
Installation/Connection Manual
GET0605-010A

0109DTSMDTJEIN

[A/UI]

EN
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

WARNINGS
• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift lever operations, as this may result in a traffic accident.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices such as air bags, as this may result in a fatal accident.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate any unit while manipulating the steering wheel, as this may result in a traffic accident.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while driving. It may lead to carelessness and cause an accident.
• If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look around carefully or you may be involved in
a traffic accident.
• If the parking brake is not engaged, “Parking Brake” appears on the monitor, and no playback picture
will be shown.
– This warning appears only when the parking brake wire is connected to the parking brake system built
in the car.

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Notes on electrical connections:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change <Amplifier Gain> setting to prevent the speakers from
being damaged (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the
terminals of the UNUSED leads with
insulating tape.
Heat sink
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use.
Be careful not to touch it when removing
this unit.

Parts list for installation and connection
If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.
Main unit

Power cord

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)

Crimp connector

Plate for use with a Nissan car

Remote controller

Round head screws (M5 × 8 mm)

Batteries

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. However, you should make adjustments
corresponding to your specific car. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation
kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

Remove the audio system originally installed in the car, together with its mounting brackets.
Note: Be sure to keep all the screws and parts removed from your car for future use.

2
3

Attach the mounting brackets (removed from the car), to this unit (see below).

Install this unit using the screws removed in step 1.

Before installing the unit
• When mounting the unit, be sure to use the screws provided, as instructed. If other screws are used,
parts could become loose or damaged.
• When tightening screws or bolts, be careful not to pinch any connection cord.
• Make sure not to block the fan on the rear to maintain proper ventilation when installing the unit.

When installing the unit in a Nissan car

Do the required electrical connections.
• See pages 2 – 4.

Plate for use with a Nissan car

The following example is for installation in a Toyota car. For more details, consult your JVC car audio dealer.
Supplied screws
Mounting bracket removed from the car

Required space for installation and the
monitor ejection
20

Dashboard

100

Mounting bracket removed from the car

Supplied screws

Screws removed from the car in step 1

Select the appropriate
type fitting to your
audio system space.

160

91.3

Unit: mm

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚, taking it into
account that the monitor would eject when in use.
If necessary, restore the protruding tabs.

30˚
Note :

When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the supplied
screws (M5 × 8 mm). If longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.
1

Install1_KW-AVX726_010A_f.indd 1

12/23/08 12:33:01 PM

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

Typical connections
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1
2
3

Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
Connect the antenna cord.
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

Antenna terminal
This terminal is used for controlling an external device by using the touch panel of this unit. This unit outputs the positional
information detected on the touch panel through the POSITION OUT terminal. Refer to the instruction manual of the external
device for details. JVC does not guarantee proper operations for the external device connected to the POSITION OUT terminal.

)

DIGITAL OUT (see diagram

Rear ground terminal
Position data output
(see diagram

)
SUBWOOFER—Only for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX724 (see diagram

)

Fan

15 A fuse
Ignition switch
To external components
(see diagram )

Black

To metallic body or chassis of the car

Yellow *2
VIDEO OUT
(see diagram

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

)
Red

VIDEO IN
(see diagram

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

Fuse block

)
Blue
To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)

LINE IN
(see diagram

)
Blue with white stripe
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)

REAR OUT
(see diagram

)
Orange with white stripe
To car light control switch

Brown

To cellular phone system

To parking brake (see diagram

Light green

)

Crimp connector

White with black stripe

White

Left speaker (front)

Gray with black stripe

Gray

Green with black stripe

Right speaker (front)

Green

Left speaker (rear)

Purple with black stripe

Purple

Right speaker (rear)

*1 Not supplied for this unit.
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.
2

Install1_KW-AVX726_010A_f.indd 2

12/24/08 5:34:15 PM

Connecting the parking brake lead

Parking brake lead (light green)

Crimp connector

Parking brake

To metallic body or chassis of the car
Parking brake switch (inside the car)

Connecting the reverse gear signal lead (for rear view camera)

Locate the reverse lamp lead in the trunk.
Extension lead *1

Purple with white stripe
Crimp connector *1

To reverse lamp

To car battery

Reverse lamp lead

Reverse lamps

Connecting the external amplifier and/or subwoofer

Y-connector *1

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any

Only for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX724
Audio cord *1

JVC Amplifier
Rear speakers
Signal cord *1

Subwoofer

JVC Amplifier

Front speakers

*1 Not supplied for this unit.
*2 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
3

Install2_KW-AVX726_010A_f.indd 3

12/30/08 9:45:31 AM

Connecting the external components
AV amplifier or decoder

Digital optical cable *3
Video cord *3

External monitor

External component
Signal cord *3

KV-CM1 *3

Video cord *3

Rear view camera

Only for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX724
Connecting the USB devices

Connecting the iPod/iPhone to the USB terminal
You can connect the iPod/iPhone to the USB terminal using the following cables:
• To listen to the music: USB 2.0 cable (supplied with the iPod/iPhone)
• To watch the video: USB Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (not supplied) *4
USB device

USB cable (approx. 1.2 m)
Apple iPod/iPhone

USB 2.0 cable

Apple iPod/iPhone

You cannot connect a computer to the USB (

) terminal of the unit.
KS-U30

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Connecting the external components to the CD changer jack

When connecting the external components, refer also to the manuals supplied for the components and
adapter.

When connecting more than one component (maximum: two), it is recommended that you connect the
components in series as explained below.

CAUTION:
Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

When connecting two components in series

You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer jack.
JVC component

Model name

CD changer (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

CD changer jack

You can also connect the following components through the various JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.

A KS-BTA200
B*5 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

Component

Adapter

Model name

Bluetooth device

Bluetooth adapter

KS-BTA200

iPod

Interface adapter for iPod

KS-PD100

Portable audio player with line output jacks

Line input adapter

KS-U57

Portable audio player with 3.5 mm stereo mini jack

AUX input adapter

KS-U58

To disconnect the connector

Hold the connector top tightly ( 1 ), then pull it out ( 2 ).

*3 Not supplied for this unit.
*4 When using the cable, make sure <iPod (Off)> is selected for <AV Input> (see page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
*5 To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

Install2_KW-AVX726_010A_f.indd 4

12/23/08 12:34:42 PM

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de
fonctionnement?
Réinitialisez votre appareil
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil

Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства
обратитесь на соответствующую страницу

EN, FR, RU
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

CoverRear_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 1

0109DTSMDTJEIN

KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625

Затруднения при эксплуатации?

ENGLISH
FRANÇAIS

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

Please reset your unit

KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/
KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625

РУCCKИЙ

Instructions

Having TROUBLE with operation?

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR
RÉCEPTEUR DVD ET MONITEUR
ПРИЙМАЧ ТА ПРОГРАВАЧ DVD-ДИСКІВ ІЗ МОНІТОРОМ

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 12.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 12.
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 12.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.

INSTRUCTIONS
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

GET0605-005A
[EU]

12/30/08 9:31:20 AM

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

WARNINGS:
(To prevent accidents and damage)
[European Union only]

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a
location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift
lever operations.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices
such as air bags.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate the unit while driving.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while
driving.

For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.

Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.

2
EN02-11_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 2

12/10/08 12:58:28 PM

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased (except the
registered Bluetooth device). (
28, 40)

How to forcibly eject a disc

How to read this manual
• < > is used to indicate the variable screens/
menus/operations/settings that appear on the
touch panel.
• [ ] is used to indicate the buttons on the touch
panel.
page number) is used to indicate the
•(
reference page number of the related topics/
operations/settings.
• The operations below are only for KW-AVX726/
KW-AVX725:
– Radio Data System
– DAB tuner
– USB
– USB iPod
• Operation index: To locate easily the desired
65)
operations/functions. (
• Indication language: English indications
are used for the purpose of explanation. You
can select the indication language from the
<AV Menu>. (
15)

ENGLISH

How to reset your unit

Back

• You can forcibly eject the loaded disc even if the disc is
locked. To lock/unlock the disc,
32.
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.

3
EN02-11_KW-AVX726_005A_5.indd 3

12/16/08 12:02:05 PM

ENGLISH

Playable disc type
Disc type
DVD
• DTS sound cannot be
reproduced.

Recording format, file type, etc

Playable

DVD-Video (Region Code: 2) *

DVD-Audio/DVD-ROM
DVD Recordable/Rewritable
(DVD-R/-RW *2, +R/+RW *3)
• DVD Video: UDF bridge
• DVD-VR
• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/
MP3/WMA/WAV: ISO 9660 level
1, level 2, Romeo, Joliet

DVD-Video
DVD-VR
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
JPEG
MP3/WMA/WAV
AAC/MPEG4/DVD+VR/DVD-RAM

Dual Disc

DVD side

CD/VCD

Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA)

Non-DVD side
VCD (Video CD)
DTS-CD/SVCD (Super Video CD)/CD-ROM/
CD-I (CD-I Ready)
CD Recordable/Rewritable
CD-DA
(CD-R/-RW)
VCD (Video CD)
• ISO 9660 level 1, level 2, Romeo,
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
Joliet
JPEG
MP3/WMA/WAV
AAC/MPEG4
1

Caution for DualDisc playback

Caution on volume setting:

The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product
may not be recommended.

Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise
compared with other sources. Lower the volume before
playing these digital sources to avoid damaging the
speakers by sudden increase of the output level.

4
EN02-11_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 4

12/10/08 12:58:30 PM

How to read this manual ....................................................................................................................
How to reset your unit .......................................................................................................................
How to forcibly eject a disc.................................................................................................................
Playable disc type ..............................................................................................................................

3
3
3
4

INTRODUCTIONS
Basic operations .................................................................................................................................

• Using the monitor panel/touch panel ........................................................................................................
• Using the remote controller (RM-RK252)...................................................................................................

6
9

ENGLISH

CONTENTS

Preparation ........................................................................................................................................ 12
AV MENU
AV Menu operations .......................................................................................................................... 13
OPERATIONS
Listening to the radio ......................................................................................................................... 30
Disc operations................................................................................................................................... 32
• Operation buttons on the screen ............................................................................................................... 34
• Operations using the remote controller (RM-RK252) ................................................................................. 35
USB operations (for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725) ................................................................................. 39

EXTERNAL DEVICES
Using the Bluetooth® devices............................................................................................................. 40
• Connecting a new Bluetooth device .......................................................................................................... 40
• Using the Bluetooth cellular phone ........................................................................................................... 41
• Using the Bluetooth audio player .............................................................................................................. 43

Listening to the CD changer ............................................................................................................... 43
Listening to the DAB tuner (for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725) ............................................................... 44
Listening to the iPod/iPhone ............................................................................................................. 45
• When connected with the USB cable ......................................................................................................... 45
• When connected with the interface adapter ............................................................................................. 46

Using other external components ...................................................................................................... 47
• AV-INPUT ................................................................................................................................................... 47
• EXT-INPUT ................................................................................................................................................. 48

REFERENCES
Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................
More about this unit ..........................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................
Specifications .....................................................................................................................................
Operation index .................................................................................................................................

49
50
59
63
65

5
EN02-11_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 5

12/10/08 12:58:31 PM

ENGLISH

Basic operations
Using the monitor panel/touch panel
Display <AV Menu> screen, (

USB cable from the rear of the unit, (

13)

Display the <Source Menu> screen, (

39) *1

Display/exit the Short Cut icons, (

SOURCE

MP3
FLAT

3:00

5
6

0:02:26

Folder Name
File Name
Track Title
Artist Name
Disc Title

1 Resets the unit (
3).
2 • Turns on the power.

3
4

8 • KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725:

TP/PTY :
– Activates/deactivates TA Standby
Reception. *4
– Displays <PTy Search> menu. (Hold)
• KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625:
MENU : Displays <AV Menu> screen.
9 • Selects the source. *5
TUNER = DAB *1 = DISC (DVD/VCD/
CD) = USB *1/ iPod *1 = CD-CH/
iPod/EXT-IN = Bluetooth PHONE =
Bluetooth AUDIO = AV-IN = (back to
the beginning)
• Bluetooth PHONE : Displays the
<Dial Menu> screen. *6 (Hold)
*1 – *6 :

6
EN02-11_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 6

12/19/08 2:59:13 PM

p • KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725:

*1 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.
*2 Available display information varies among the
56)
playback sources. (
*3 This adjustment does not affect the volume level of
other sources.
*4 The TP indicator lights up when activated; flashes
when the unit tune into another station providing
Radio Data System signals.
When a DAB tuner is connected, TA Standby Reception
also searches for DAB services.
*5 Available sources depend on the external components
you have connected, media you have attached, and
the <Input> settings you have made. ( 18)
*6 Only when Bluetooth phone is connected.
*7 Shaded items cannot be used.

You can also adjust the
volume by moving your
finger on the touch panel
as illustrated.

ENGLISH

:
– Selects “USB/ iPod” as the source.
– Switches the setting between “HEAD MODE”
and “iPod MODE” (Hold)
• KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625:
AV-IN : Selects “AV-IN” as the source.
q • Displays <Open/Tilt> screen. *7
[Open] : Opens the monitor panel.
[Eject] : Ejects the disc.
[Close] : Closes the monitor panel.
[Tilt +] : Tilts open the monitor panel.
[Tilt –] : Tilts close the monitor panel.
• Ejects the disc and display <Open/Tilt>
screen. (Hold)
• Closes the monitor panel if the panel is opened.
w Monitor panel

When you drag your finger on the touch panel, it
functions in the same way as touching [5 / ∞ /
4 / ¢].
Touch panel and button illumination
Dependable on the <Illumination> setting.
19)
(
• Turned off:
When no operation is done for about 10 seconds.
• Turned on again:
– When you touch the touch panel or move your
hand nearby.
– When you use the remote controller.
– When a call/SMS comes in (for Bluetooth
cellular phone).
– When the source automatically changed by
receiving the Traffic Announcement /PTY
programme.
– When the signal from the rear view camera
comes in.
• Always turned on:
– When <AV Menu> screen is displayed.
– When <Source Menu> screen is displayed.
– When <Open/Tilt> screen is displayed.
– When <Illumination> is set to <Normal>.

Continued on the next page

INTRODUCTIONS
EN02-11_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 7

12/26/08 5:04:52 PM

ENGLISH

<Source Menu> screen
You can also select the source using the touch panel.
SOURCE

Source Menu

TUNER

FM1

87. 5 MHz

Bayern Radio

FLAT
ST

Pop Music

3:00

AM
BAND

Current source

Exit

Short Cut icons
You can easily access some frequently used functions by using the Short Cut icons.
Available icons vary among the sources.

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

87. 5 MHz

Displays <Illumination> menu.

Bayern Radio

FLAT
ST

(

Pop Music

3:00

19)

Changes the sound mode. (

20)

AM
BAND

Short Cut window appears.
• To exit from the window, press the button again.

Turns on or off Track/Chapter Repeat.
(

24)

Displays <Aspect> menu. (

15)

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

Activates PTY Standby Reception.

87. 5 MHz

(

FLAT
ST

3:00

23)

Activates Announcement Standby
Reception. ( 23)
AM
BAND

Displays <PTy Search> menu.
(

Press a Short Cut icon.

31)

Activates <Voice Dialing> function.
(

Setup
Beep
Telephone Muting
Illumination
Motion Sensitiv.
Initialize

Normal
Proximity/Motion
Proxi/Motion-LCD
Touch Panel
Touch Panel - LCD

27)

Displays <Redial> menu. (

27)

Back

The corresponding screen is displayed.

8
EN02-11_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 8

12/19/08 10:56:48 AM

Using the remote controller (RM-RK252)
ENGLISH

Installing the batteries

R03/LR03/AAA

Insert the batteries into the remote controller by
matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

The following describes all the available operations
for all the sources.
• USB/ iPod/DAB/Radio Data System operations
are only applicable for KW-AVX726/
KW-AVX725.
• To easily locate the available operations between
different type of files,
35, 36.

button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 5/∞ buttons

• TUNER/DAB: Selects the preset stations/
services.

Continued on the next page

INTRODUCTIONS
EN02-11_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 9

12/19/08 2:14:35 PM

ENGLISH

• DISC/USB:
– DVD-Video: Selects the title.
– DVD-VR: Selects the program/Playlist.
– USB/other discs (except VCD/CD): Selects the
folders if included.
• CD-CH:
– Selects the folders if included.
• iPod:
– 5 : Enters the main menu (then 5 / ∞ /
4 / ¢ work as menu
selecting buttons.)
5 : Returns to the previous menu.
∞ : Confirms the selection.
– ∞ : Pauses or resumes playback.
4 / ¢ buttons
• TUNER/DAB:
– Searches for stations/ensembles automatically
if pressed briefly.
– Searches for stations/ensembles manually if
pressed and held.
• DISC/USB/CD-CH:
– Reverse skip/forward skip if pressed briefly.
– Reverse search/forward search if pressed and
held.
• iPod:
– Reverse skip/forward skip if pressed briefly.
– Reverse search/forward search if pressed and
held.
• iPod:
– Reverse skip/forward skip if pressed briefly.
– Reverse search/forward search if pressed and
held.
In menu selecting mode:
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
∞ to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
• Bluetooth AUDIO:
– Reverse skip/forward skip if pressed briefly.

3 VOL (volume) + / – buttons

• Adjusts the volume level.
• Bluetooth PHONE:
– Adjusts the volume of the incoming calls.
2nd VOL (volume) buttons
• Not applicable for this unit.
4 * ASPECT button

• Changes the aspect ratio of the playback
pictures.
5

PHONE button
Applicable only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected.
• Displays <Dial Menu> screen.
• Displays <Redial> menu if pressed and held.
• Answers incoming calls.

6 * SETUP button

• Not applicable for this unit.
7 * TOP M (menu) button

• DVD-Video: Shows the disc menu.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Original Program screen.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
8 OSD (on-screen display) button

• Shows the on-screen bar.
• Does not function as “*.”
9 SHIFT button

• Functions with other buttons.
p DISP (display) button

• Changes the display information.
q 1 / ¡ buttons

• DISC/USB/ iPod: Reverse search/forward
search.

10
EN02-11_KW-AVX726_005A_4.indd 10

12/15/08 11:43:25 AM

• Selects the source.
e 3 (play) / 8 (pause) button

• DISC/USB/ iPod : Starts playback/pauses.
• Bluetooth PHONE: Answers incoming calls.
• Bluetooth AUDIO: Starts playback.
r

(end call) button
• Bluetooth PHONE: Ends the call.
BAND button
• TUNER/DAB: Selects the bands.
7 (stop) button

• DISC/USB/ iPod : Stops playback.
• Bluetooth AUDIO: Pauses.
t * RETURN button

• VCD: Returns to the PBC menu.

o DIRECT button

• DISC/USB: Enters direct search mode for
chapter/title/program/playlist/folder/track
when pressed with SHIFT button (
36).
CLR (clear) button
• DISC/USB: Erases the misentry when pressed
with SHIFT button.

ENGLISH

w SOURCE button

SURROUND button
• Not applicable for this unit.
* Functions as number buttons when pressed with SHIFT
button.
– DISC/USB : Enters chapter/title/program/playlist/
folder/track number after entering search mode by
36)
pressing SHIFT and DIRECT. (
– TUNER/DAB : (Number 1 to 6) : Enters preset
station/service number.

y * MENU button

• DVD-Video: Shows the disc menu.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Playlist screen.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
u * % / ﬁ buttons

• DVD-Video: Makes selection/settings.
• CD-CH: Changes discs in the magazine.
@ / # buttons

• DVD-Video: Makes selection/settings.
• DivX/MPEG Video: Skips back or forward by
about 5 minutes.
ENT (enter) button
• Confirms selection.
i DUAL button

• Not applicable for this unit.
• Does not function as “#.”

INTRODUCTIONS 11
EN02-11_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 11

12/11/08 3:41:57 PM

ENGLISH

Preparation
Canceling the display demonstration and setting the clock

~ Turn on the power.

@ Set the clock.
Setup
Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer

Ÿ Display <AV Menu> screen.

Bright
Blue
Once
Auto
6 PM

Dimmer Time Set

(For KW-AVX626/
KW-AVX625)

Auto
7 AM

Back

Setup

or
BAND

Time Set
Time Format
OSD Clock
Clock Adjust

1
12Hours
Off
Off

00 AM
24Hours
Auto

Back

! Display <Setup> screen.
Setup
AV Menu

Time Set
Time Format
OSD Clock
Clock Adjust

45 PM

Back

¤ Finish the procedure.

⁄ Cancel the demonstration.
Select [Off].

Back

Setup
Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer
Dimmer Time Set

Metal
Blue
Once
Auto
18

Auto
7

Back

12 INTRODUCTIONS
EN12-21_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 12

12/19/08 10:57:55 AM

You can use the <AV Menu> for most of the
operations and settings. The available menu items
shown on the touch panel, depends on the selected
source.
• Non-available items will be shaded.

! Press the desired icon/item to perform
the desired operations/settings.
Moves to the preceding
menu page

ENGLISH

AV Menu operations

Indicates the next hierarchy
level/setting item exists

Setup

The following steps are one of the fundamental
procedures.
• You can perform the operations/change the settings
by following these steps unless mentioned otherwise.

~ Turn on the power.

Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer
Dimmer Time Set

Bright
Blue
Once
Auto
18

Auto
7

Back

Returns to the previous
screen.

Ÿ Display <AV Menu> screen.

Indicates the remaining
time before the current
screen exit automatically.

Moves to the succeeding
menu page

(For KW-AVX626/
KW-AVX625)
or

• Some of the settings do not open the sub-setting
screen, but just selecting an option will change the
setting.
• To exit from the setting, press [Exit].

BAND

AV Menu

Setup
:
Equalizer :
Sound
:
Mode
:
List
:
Bluetooth :

14 – 19
20
21
22 – 25
25 – 26
27 – 29

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX726_005A_6.indd 13

12/17/08 9:32:40 AM

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

Menu item
Demonstration

Wall Paper

Selectable setting/item
♦ Off
♦ On

: Cancels.
: Activates the demonstration on the screen. To stop it
temporarily, touch the screen. (
12)

You can select the background picture of the screen.

Display

♦ Bright, Future, Horizon, Plain

Color

You can select the color of the background picture.
♦ Blue, Light-Blue, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Purple, Dark-Blue,
Dark-Green, Brown, Light-Brown, Black

Scroll

♦ Off
♦ Once
♦ Auto

: Cancels.
: Scrolls the displayed information once.
: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
• Touching the information bar scrolls the text regardless of the setting.

Dimmer

♦ Off
♦ On
♦ Auto
♦ Dimmer Time Set

Dimmer Time Set

Sets the Dimmer On (

Dimmer Level

:
:
:
:

Cancels.
Activates dimmer.
Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights. *1
Activates the Dimmer Time setting (see below).
)/Off (

) times.

You can select the brightness for dimmer.
♦ 01 (bright), 02 (middle), 03 (dark)

Bright

You can adjust the brightness of the screen.
♦ –15 to +15; Initial 00

Picture Adjust *2

:
:
:
:

14
EN12-21_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 14

12/26/08 5:06:01 PM

Menu item

You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.

ENGLISH

Aspect *3

Selectable setting/item

Aspect ratio of the incoming signal
4:3

16:9

Regular:
For 4:3 original pictures
Full:
For 16:9 original pictures

Display

Panorama:
For viewing 4:3 pictures
naturally on the wide screen
Auto:

• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is automatically
selected to match the incoming signals.
• For the other video sources: Aspect ratio is
fixed to <Regular>.

Language *4

NTSC/PAL *4, *5

Select the color system of the external monitor connected.
♦ NTSC, PAL

Time Set

Initial 0:00 ( for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725), 1:00AM ( for KW-AVX626/
KW-AVX625)

Time Format

Select either 12-hour system or 24-hour system. (

12)

Clock

♦ 12 Hours, 24 Hours; Initial 24 Hours ( for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725),

12 Hours ( for KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625)
OSD Clock

♦ Off
♦ On

: Cancels.
: The clock time is displayed on the playback picture.

Clock Adjust *6

♦ Auto

: The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT
(clock time) data in the Radio Data System signal.
: Cancels.

♦ Off

*3
*4
*5
*6

Not adjustable when no picture is shown.
Turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.
For KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625.
For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.
Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 15

12/19/08 2:16:34 PM

ENGLISH

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

Menu Language *7

Select the menu language; Initial English (

57)

Select the audio language; Initial English (

57)

Audio Language *
Subtitle *7

Select the subtitle language or erase the subtitle <Off>.;
Initial English (
57)

Monitor Type *7
16:9

4:3LB

Disc

4:3PS

Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture on the external
monitor.
♦ 16:9
: Select when the aspect ratio of the external
monitor is 16:9.
♦ 4:3LB (Letterbox)/ : Select when the aspect ratio of the external
4:3PS (Pan Scan)
monitor is 4:3.

OSD Position *7

Select the position of the on-screen bar. (
♦1
: Higher position.
♦2
: Lower position.

File Type *7

Select the playback file type when a disc/USB contains different types of
files. You can store this setting separately for each source—
“DISC/USB.” *8
♦ Audio
: Plays back audio files.
♦ Still Picture
: Plays back JPEG files.
♦ Video
: Plays back DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.
♦ Audio&Video
: Plays back audio files and DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
files.

DivX Regist.
(Registration) *7

This unit has its own Registration Code. Once you have played back a file
with which the Registration Code recorded, this unit’s Registration Code
is overwritten for copyright protection.

iPod Artwork *8, *9

While playing back a track (in “HEAD MODE”), Artwork recorded for the
track is displayed on the monitor.
♦ Off
: Cancels.
♦ On
: Activates Artwork display. To display the
artwork, press DISP repeatedly.
• It takes 5 seconds or more to display an
Artwork and no operations are available
while loading it.

38)

*7 Selectable only for “DISC/USB.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
*8 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.
*9 Skip the track so that your setting takes effect.

16
EN12-21_KW-AVX726_005A_6.indd 16

12/16/08 4:27:34 PM

Disc

Selectable setting/item

D. (Digital) Audio
Output *10

Select the signal format emitted through the DIGITAL OUT (optical) terminal.
(
55)
♦ PCM
: Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
incompatible with Dolby Digital or MPEG Audio, or when
connecting to a recording device.
♦ Dolby D
: Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital.
♦ Stream
: Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital or MPEG Audio.

Down Mix *10

When playing back a multi-channel disc, this setting affects the signals
reproduced through the LINE OUT jacks.
♦ Dolby Surr.
: Select this to enjoy multi-channel surround audio
by connecting an amplifier compatible with Dolby
Surround.
♦ Stereo
: Normally select this.

D. (Dynamic)
Range Compres.
(Compression) *10

You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing Dolby
Digital software.
♦ Auto
: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded
software.
♦ On
: Select to always use this function.

IF Band Width

♦ Auto

Tuner

♦ Wide

AF Regional *11

ENGLISH

Menu item

When the received signals from the current station become weak, you can
change the Network-Tracking Reception. (
50)
• When the DAB tuner is connected, refer also to <DAB AF>,
18.
♦ Off
: Cancels—not selectable when <DAB AF> is set to
<On>.
♦ AF Reg.
: Switches to another station broadcasting the same
(Regional)
programme. The REG indicator lights up.
♦ AF
: Switches to another station. The programme may differ
from the one currently received (the AF indicator lights
up).

*10 Selectable only for “DISC/USB.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
*11 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 17

12/19/08 10:58:56 AM

Selectable setting/item

TA Volume *12

When you activate TA Standby Reception ( 6), the unit will temporarily
switch to Traffic Announcement (TA) if available, from any source other than AM.
You can preset the TA volume level.
• The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the current volume level is
lower than the preset level.
♦ VOL 00 to 30 (or 50) *13; Initial VOL 15

Program
Search *12, *14

Usually when you select preset stations, the preset station is tuned in.
If the signals from the FM Radio Data System preset station are not strong
enough, this unit uses the AF data to tune in to another station of the same
network, possibly broadcasting the same programme with stronger signals.
♦ On
: Select to activate.
♦ Off
: Cancels.

DAB AF *12, *15

While receiving a DAB service:
When driving in an area where a service cannot be received, this unit
automatically tunes in to another ensemble or FM Radio Data System station
broadcasting the same programme.
While receiving an FM Radio Data System station:
When driving in an area where a DAB service is broadcasting the same
programme as the FM Radio Data System station, this unit automatically tunes in
to the DAB service.
♦On
: Select to activate.
♦ Off
: Cancels.

AV Input *16

You can determine the use of LINE IN and VIDEO IN jacks. (
47)
♦ Off
: Select when no component is connected (“AV-IN” is
skipped while selecting the source).
♦ iPod (Off) *12 : Select when connecting the iPod/iPhone using the USB
Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone. (
45)
♦ Audio&Video : Select when connecting an AV component such as a VCR.
♦ Audio
: Select when connecting an audio component such as a
portable audio player.
♦ Camera *17
: Select when connecting a rear view camera to display the
picture (as it is taken).
♦ Navigation
48)
: Select when connecting a Navigation System. (

Input

Tuner

ENGLISH

Menu item

*12 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.
*13 Depends on the amplifier gain control settings.
*14 The unit takes some time to tune in to another station using programme search.
*15 Appears only when DAB tuner is connected.
*16 Not selectable when “AV-IN” is selected as the source.
*17 The REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual. The rear view through
the camera appears on the screen in <Full> aspect ratio (regardless of the aspect ratio setting) when you shift the
gear to the reverse (R) position. When you press DISP on the monitor panel, or when you shift the gear to another
position other than the reverse (R) position, the rear view screen is cleared.

18
EN12-21_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 18

12/19/08 10:58:58 AM

Menu item

Selectable setting/item
♦ Changer/iPod *20

ENGLISH

External Input *18, *19 For connecting an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear.
43), iPod, (
45).
: CD changer, (
: Any other than the above, (
47).

Beep

♦ Off
♦ On

: Cancels.
: Activates the key-touch tone.

Telephone Muting *21

♦ Off
♦ Muting1,

: Cancels.
: Select either one which mutes the sounds while
using the cellular phone.

Illumination

You can turn off the screen and the light of the buttons on the monitor panel
while turning on the unit. (
7)

Input

♦ External

Muting2

Others

Buttons on the
monitor panel

Motion Sensitiv.

Screen

Normal:

Always lights.

Proximity/Motion:

Lights up when your
hand moves close to
the buttons.

Always lights.

Proxi/Motion-LCD:

Lights up when your
hand moves close to
the buttons.

Touch Panel:

Lights up when your
Always lights.
finger touches the
buttons or touch panel.

Touch Panel-LCD:

Lights up when your
Lights up when your
finger touches the
finger touches the
buttons or touch panel. buttons or touch panel.

Change the sensitivity of the sensor for <Illumination> above.
♦ Low, Mid, High

Initialize

Initialize all settings you have made in <AV Menu>. Press and hold [Enter]
to initialize the settings, then reset the unit. (
3)

*18 Not required for Bluetooth adapter and DAB tuner. They are automatically detected.
*19 Not selectable when the component connected to the CD changer jack is selected as the source.
*20 The name of the component detected through the CD changer jack is shown.
*21 The TEL MUTING lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual.

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 19

12/19/08 10:58:59 AM

ENGLISH

Selects a preset sound mode suitable to the music
genre.
♦ Flat (Initial), Hard Rock, R&B, Pop, Jazz, Dance,
Country, Reggae, Classic, User1, User2, User3

Adjust the settings, then store.
Equalizer

Display <AV Menu> screen.
(For KW-AVX626/
KW-AVX625)

Back

Edit

or
Make adjustments by moving each bar directly.

BAND

User Store

User1
User2
User3

Display <Equalizer> screen.
AV Menu

Back

Ex.: When storing into <User2>.

Preset equalizing values

Flat
Back

Edit

Moves to the other 6 sound modes.
Ex.: When <Hard Rock> is selected

Storing your own adjustments
You can store your adjustments into <User1>,
<User2>, and <User3>.

Perform steps 1 and 2 above to enter the
<Equalizer> screen.

15 kHz

6.3 kHz

2.5 kHz

1 kHz

400 Hz

Sound
mode

Equalizer

150 Hz

Select a sound mode.
60 Hz

00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Hard Rock

+03 +03 +01 00 00 +02 +01

R&B

+03 +02 +02 00 +01 +01 +03

Pop

00 +02 00 00 +01 +01 +02

Jazz

+03 +02 +01 +01 +01 +03 +02

Dance

+04 +02 00 –02 –01 +01 +01

Country

+02 +01 00 00 00 +01 +02

Reggae

+03 00 00 +01 +02 +02 +03

Classic

+02 +03 +01 00 00 +02 00

User1/2/3

00 00 00 00 00 00 00

20
EN12-21_KW-AVX726_005A_6.indd 20

12/17/08 9:33:01 AM

Menu item
Fader/Balance

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

Reset
Fader
0
Balance 0

Back

Volume Adjust *1

Adjust and store the auto-adjustment volume level for each source, comparing
to the FM volume level. The volume level will automatically increase or decrease
when you change the source.
• <Fix> appears if “ TUNER/Bluetooth PHONE” is selected as the source.
♦ –12 to +12; Initial 00

Subwoofer Level *2

Adjust the subwoofer output level.
♦ –06 to +08; Initial 00

High Pass Filter *2

♦ Through
♦ On

Crossover *2

Select the crossover frequency between the front/rear speakers and the
subwoofer.
♦ 80Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz

Amplifier Gain *3

: Select when the subwoofer is not connected.
: Select when the subwoofer is connected.

*1 For “ DISC/USB”: You can make the adjustments separately depending on the audio format—Dolby digital/MPEG
Audio and the others.
*2 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.
*3 The volume level automatically changes to “VOL 30” if you change to <Low> with the volume level set higher than
“VOL 30.”

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 21

12/19/08 10:59:11 AM

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined
Selectable items when the source is:
• TUNER
: Mono, SSM, Title Entry, PTy Standby *2, PTy Code *2
• DAB *2
: D. (Dynamic) Range Control, Announce Standby, Announce Code,
PTy Standby, PTy Code
• DISC, USB *2, CD-CH, iPod : Repeat, Random
• iPod *2, *3
: Repeat, Random, Audiobooks
• AV-IN, EXT-IN
: Title Entry

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

Mono

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive, activate monaural mode for better
reception.
♦ ON
: Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo effect
will be lost. The MONO indicator lights up.
♦ OFF
: Restore the stereo effect.

SSM (Strong-station
Sequential Memory)

You can automatically preset 6 stations for each FM band.
• Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the
FM band.
Mode
Mono
SSM
PTy Standby
PTy Code

Start
News

Back

Title Entry

You can assign titles (up to 16 characters) to 30 station frequencies *1 (FM and AM),
AV-IN, and EXT-IN. (For available characters,
56.)
Press [Enter] to show the <Title Entry> screen.
[Store]
: Confirm the entry.
[2/3]
: Move the cursor.
[BS]
: Erase the character before
@
the cursor.
;
[Del]
: Erase the character on the
/
cursor.
Back
[Cap]
: Change the letter case
(upper/lower).
[A = 0 = Ä] : Change the character set.
[Space]
: Enter a space.

*1 For KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625.
*2 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.
*3 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” (

45)

22
EN22-29_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 22

1/7/09 12:54:48 PM

Selectable setting/item

PTy Standby *4, *5

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to your favorite PTY
programme from any source other than AM.
♦ ON
: Activate PTY Standby Reception. (The PTY indicator lights up; flashes
when the unit tune in to another station providing the Radio Data
System signals.)
♦ OFF
: Cancels.

PTy Code *4

You can change the PTY code (

ENGLISH

Menu item

50) for PTY Standby Reception.

Mode

Back

D. (Dynamic) Range Some DAB services provide Dynamic Range Control (DRC) signals together with their
regular programme signals. DRC will reinforce the low level sounds to improve your
Control *4
listening when the surrounding sounds are noisy.
• The DRC indicator will light up while tuning in to a service with the DRC signals.
As the number increases, the effect becomes stronger.
♦ OFF/DRC 1/DRC 2/DRC 3
Announce
Standby *4

Announcement Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to your favorite
DAB service (announcement type) from any source other than FM/AM.
♦ ON
: Activate Announce Standby Reception. (The ANN indicator lights up;
flashes when the unit tune in to another service providing the related
signals.)
♦ OFF
: Cancels.

Announce Code *4

You can change the announcement type for Announcement Standby Reception.
♦ Transport News, Warning, News, Weather, Event, Special Event, Radio Info,
Sports News, Financial News
Mode

Back

*4 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.
*5 When a DAB tuner is connected, PTY Standby Reception also searches for DAB services.
Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN22-29_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 23

12/19/08 12:08:16 PM

Available items depend on the loaded disc type and playback file.
iPod *7

—

iPod

MP3

JPEG

VCD/CD

JPEG

DVD-VR

Repeat

CD-CH

—

USB *7

DISC
Disc/file type

MPEG/MP3/
WMA/WAV

Source

DivX/MPEG/
MP3/WMA/
WAV

Repeat*6

Selectable setting/item

DVD-Video

ENGLISH

Menu item

Chapter
Title
Program
Disc
Folder
Track
One
All
Off

♦ Chapter
♦ Title
♦ Program
♦ Disc
♦ Folder
♦ Track
♦ One
♦ All
♦ Off

Available items depend on the loaded disc type and playback file.
iPod *7, *8

—

iPod

MP3

VCD/CD

Random

CD-CH

—

USB *7

DISC
Disc/file type

MPEG/MP3/
WMA/WAV

Source

DivX/MPEG/
MP3/WMA/
WAV

Random*6

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Folder
Disc/USB (All)
All
Song
Album
Off

♦ Folder
♦ Disc/USB

: Randomly plays all tracks of the current folder, then tracks of the next folders.
: Randomly plays all tracks. (For VCD: When PBC is not in used.)

(All)
♦ All
♦ Song
♦ Albums
♦ Off

*6
*7
*8
*9

:
:
:
:

Randomly plays all tracks of all loaded discs.
Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” *9 of the iPod.
Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of the iPod.
Cancels.

Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” ( 45)
For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.
Not applicable for video file.
You can activate <Shuffle Songs> in <Search Mode> menu. (

26)

24
EN22-29_KW-AVX726_005A_5.indd 24

12/16/08 12:21:32 PM

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

*10 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.
*11 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” (

45)

Source
TUNER/DAB*

ENGLISH

Audiobooks*10, *11 You can select the playback speed of the “Audiobook” audio file in your iPod.
♦ Normal
: Plays at normal speed.
♦ Faster
: Plays faster.
♦ Slower
: Plays slower.

Operation/setting
1

• Storing a preset station/service manually
1 Press [BAND], then [ / ] to tune in to the station you want to preset.
2 Select <List> from the <AV Menu>.
3 Press and hold a preset number.
List
FM1
FM2
FM3

Ex.:
Storing FM station in to preset
number 4

Back

The station selected in step 1 is now stored in preset number 4.
• Selecting a preset station/service on the list
List
FM1
FM2
FM3

Ex.:
Selecting a preset FM station

Back

DISC/USB*1

Selecting a track on the list
If a device contains folders, you can display the Folder/Track (File) Lists, then start playback.
1 Current folder list number/
List
Folder 01
Folder 02
Folder 03
Folder 04
Folder 05
Folder 06
Back

*1 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.

0005/0035

0003/0099
Track001.mp3
Track002.mp3
Track003.mp3
Track004.mp3
Track005.mp3
Track006.mp3

total folder list number
2 Current track list number/total

track list number of the
current folder
* Press: Skips the list up or down.
Drag: Scrolls the list up or down.
Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN22-29_KW-AVX726_005A_6.indd 25

12/16/08 4:28:37 PM

ENGLISH

Source
Bluetooth PHONE

Operation/setting
Selecting a preset phone number on the list to make a call
List
Phone Number

Back

CD-CH

Selecting a disc on the list
Disc List
Disc 01

Disc 04

Disc 02

MP3 Disc

Disc 03

Disc 06

If an MP3 disc is selected, Folder/
Track List appear. Select a track to
start playback.

Back

To go to the other list

iPod *2, *3

Selecting a track/video from <Search Mode>
♦ Music : Playlists, Artists, Albums,

Search Mode
Music
Videos
Shuffle Songs

Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres

Songs, Podcasts, Genres, Composers,
Audiobooks
♦ Videos : Video Playlists, Movies,
Music Videos, TV shows, Video
Podcasts
♦ Shuffle Songs : Playback starts if
this is selected.

0003/0099

Current track (video) number/total track
(video) number

Back

List
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres

Track 01
Track 02
Track 03
Track 04
Track 05
Track 06

Back

*2 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.
*3 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” (

45)

26
EN22-29_KW-AVX726_005A_5.indd 26

12/16/08 12:21:33 PM

ENGLISH

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO” as the source for operations.
• Firstly, use <Open> or <Search> to register and establish the connection with a device.

Menu item
Dial Menu *1

Back

♦ Voice Dialing

Message *2

If <Message Info> is set to <Manual>... (
29)
Access the message list to read messages.
♦ Unread
: Messages you have not read.
♦ Read
: Messages you have read.
♦ Unsent
: Messages you have not sent.
♦ Sent
: Messages you have sent.
• The number of messages in each history is also shown.

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN22-29_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 27

12/10/08 1:50:05 PM

ENGLISH

Menu item
Open

• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to 16-digit number).
PIN Code

Back

You can enter [0] – [9] only.
[BS] : Erases the character
before the cursor.
[Del] : Erases the character on
the cursor.
[Enter] : Confirms the entry.

3 Operate the Bluetooth device to connect while “Open...” is displayed on the screen.

Preparation:
• Make sure “NEW DEVICE” is selected. If not, press [ 5 ] or [ ∞ ] to select it.
1 Press <Search> on the <Bluetooth> menu.

28
EN22-29_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 28

12/10/08 1:50:05 PM

Selectable setting/item

Special Device

Connect

Only for the registered devices.
Select a device from the list of registered devices, establish the connection with it.

Disconnect

Only for the connected devices.
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device.

Delete Pairing

Only for the registered devices.
Press <Yes> to confirm delete the registered devices.

Settings
Initial: Underlined

Auto Connect *4

Auto Answer *5

♦ Off
♦ On
♦ Reject

Message Info *

♦ Auto

♦ Manual

ENGLISH

Menu item

: The unit does not answer the calls automatically.
Answer the calls manually.
: The unit answers the incoming calls
automatically.
: The unit rejects all incoming calls.
: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message
by ringing and displaying “Receiving Message.”
To read the message,
42.
: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a
message.

MIC Setting *5

Adjust the volume of the microphone connected to the Bluetooth
adapter.
♦ 01/02/03

Version

The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are shown.

*4 Selectable only for “ Bluetooth PHONE.”
*5 Only for the cellular phone connected for “ Bluetooth PHONE.” Not selectable when “NEW DEVICE” is selected.

AV MENU
EN22-29_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 29

12/10/08 1:50:05 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the radio
Preset number
SOURCE

TUNER

Band
Sound mode

FM1

KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725:
PS (station name) for
FM Radio Data System. *
KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625:
Assigned station name
(
22) *

87. 5 MHz

Bayern Radio

FLAT
ST

Pop Music

Tuner/Standby
Reception indicator

3:00

PTY code for FM Radio
Data System

BAND

Selecting a preset station

• The ST indicator lights up when receiving an
FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal
strength.
* If no PS signal comes in/no name is assigned,
“No Name” appears.

Changing the display information

• Directly from the touch panel

(

56)

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

3:00

87. 5 MHz

ABC Radio

FLAT
ST

AM
BAND

You can also select a preset station using the remote
controller (
9) and from the Preset List (
25).

You can display the Preset List by pressing [
holding [5/∞].

• To improve the FM reception,
22.
• To automatically preset stations into memory,
22.
• To manually preset stations into memory,
25.
• KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625: To assign titles to
stations,
22.

] or

30
EN30-37_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 30

1/7/09 12:55:12 PM

The following features are available only for FM
Radio Data System stations.

Searching for FM Radio Data
System programme—PTY Search

Storing your favorite programme types
You can store your favorite PTY codes into the PTY
Preset List.
Ex.: Storing <Drama> into <Preset 1>

You can search for your favorite programmes being
broadcast by selecting the PTY code of your favorite
programmes.

ENGLISH

For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725:

PTy Search
Preset
PTy Code

Enter
Enter

Display <PTy Search> menu.
Back

PTy Search
Preset
PTy Code

PTy Memory
Enter
Enter

Preset1
Preset2
Preset3
Preset4
Preset5
Preset6

Back

Select a PTY code.

PTy Memory

In the example below, a PTY code is selected from
the Preset List.
If you enter <PTy Code> menu below, you can
select one from 29 PTY codes. (
50)

Preset1
Preset2
Preset3
Preset4
Preset5
Preset6

PTy Search
Preset
PTy Code

Pop Music
Rock Music
Easy Listening
Serious
Classics
Enter
Current
Affairs
Enter
Varied Speech

News
Current Affairs
Information
Sports
Enter
Education
Enter
Drama
Enter

Back

Enter
Enter

2
Back

PTy Search
Preset
PTy Code

Back

PTY Search starts.
If there is a station broadcasting a programme
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that
station is tuned in.

• To activate/deactivate PTY Standby Reception,
23.
• To change the PTY code for PTY Standby
Reception,
23.
• To trace the same programme—NetworkTracking Reception,
17.
• To automatically select station—Programme
Search,
18.

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 31

12/19/08 11:10:15 AM

ENGLISH

~ Open the monitor panel.

! Insert a disc.
Label side

<Open/Tilt> menu is displayed.
• By pressing and holding the button, you can
open the monitor panel and eject the disc.

Open/Tilt

Monitor panel closes automatically.
If not, press [Close].

Caution:
Do not place your finger behind the monitor panel.

Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

• To select the playback mode,
24.
25.
• To select tracks on the list,

Back

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure to select <EJECT OK?>.
• Discs can be forcibly ejected. (
3)

32
EN30-37_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 32

12/10/08 2:03:01 PM

Changing the display information

ENGLISH

Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different
information. (
56)

Ex.: While playing a DVD Video

SOURCE

DVD
FLAT
CHAP. RPT

3:00

1 Audio format—Dolby Digital, MP3, WMA, WAV
2 Disc type—DVD, DVD-VR, VCD, CD
3 Video format—DivX, MPEG, VR-PRG (program),

VR-PLAY (playlist), PBC
4 [5 / ∞]

6
7
8
9

• DVD Video/DVD-VR: Selects title/program/
playlist.
• DivX/MPEG/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV:
– Selects folder
– Displays Folder/Track List (Hold)
• DVD Video: Title no./Chapter no./Playing time
• DVD-VR: Program no. (or Playlist no.)/Chapter
no./Playing time
• DivX/MPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV: Folder no./Track
no./Playing time
• JPEG: Folder no./Track no.
• VCD/CD: Track no./Playing time
[6 ]
Starts playback/pauses
Indicates the button pressed ( / 8 / 7 )
Sound mode (
21)
Playback mode (
24)

p Disc/track information

Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 33

12/10/08 2:03:02 PM

ENGLISH

[SOURCE]
[5 ∞]
[3 / 8]
[4 ¢]
Touch the screen (center portion).

Displays <Source Menu> screen
33
Starts playback/pause
• Selects tracks
• Reverse/forward search (Hold)
[
]
Displays <AV Menu> screen
[7]
Stops playback
• The above buttons also work when they are not
shown on the screen (while watching the playback
picture).
B

Touch [KEY].

To end the operations, touch the screen again.

34
EN30-37_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 34

1/9/09 10:16:13 AM

Operations using the remote controller (RM-RK252)

Stop play

ENGLISH

Button

Stop play

Start play/Pause (if pressed during play)

• DivX/MPEG: Start play/Pause (if pressed
during play)
• JPEG: • Start play (Slide show: Each file is
shown for a few seconds.)
• Pause (if pressed during play).
• Reverse/forward chapter search *1 (No sound can • DivX/MPEG: Reverse/forward track
be heard.)
search *4 (No sound can be heard.)
• Slow motion *2 during pause (No sound can be
heard.)
– DVD-VR: Reverse slow motion does not work.
• DivX/MPEG: • Select track
• Select chapter (during play or pause)
• Reverse/fast-forward track
• Reverse/fast-forward chapter search *3 (No
sound can be heard.) (Hold)
search *5 (No sound can be
heard.) (Hold)
• JPEG:
Select file
• DVD-Video: Select title (during play or pause)
Select folder
• DVD-VR: • Select program
• Select playlist (during play or pause)
• DivX/MPEG: Skip back or forward the
scenes by about 5 minutes
Select aspect ratio

—
Select aspect ratio
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5

Search speed:
Slow motion speed:
Search speed:
Search speed:
Search speed:

Using menu driven features... (DVD Video)

Canceling the PBC playback... (VCD)

1 Enter the menu screen.

During stop...

2 Select an item you want to start play.
2

Number buttons
(0 – 9)

• To resume PBC, press TOP M/MENU.
Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-AVX726_005A_4.indd 35

12/15/08 11:49:07 AM

ENGLISH

Button
Stop play

Stop play

Start play/Pause (if pressed
Start play/Pause (if pressed
during play)
during play)
Reverse/forward track search *6 Reverse/forward track search *6

• Select track
• Reverse/fast-forward track
search *8 (Hold)

Select folder
—
Select aspect ratio

—

* Search speed:
*7 Slow motion speed:
*8 Search speed:

Searching for an item directly
1 While holding SHIFT, press DIRECT repeatedly to

select the desired search mode.
DVD-Video:
DVD-VR:
DivX/MPEG:
JPEG:
MP3/WMA/
WAV:

2 While holding SHIFT, press the number buttons (0

– 9) to enter the desired number.
3 Press ENT (enter) to confirm.

VCD/CD:

36
EN30-37_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 36

12/10/08 2:03:05 PM

Operations using the
on-screen bar

1 Display the Original Program screen.

Display the Playlist screen.

2 Select an item you want to start play.

(DVD/DVD-VR/DivX/MPEG/JPEG/VCD)
These operations are possible on the monitor using the
remote controller.

Show the on-screen bar (

ENGLISH

Using the list screens... (DVD-VR)

38).

(twice)

Select an item.

Make a selection.

Original Program/Playlist screen
• Original Program

If pop-up menu appears...

• To cancel pop-up menu, press RETURN.
• For entering time/numbers, see the following.
• Playlist

1 Original Program/Playlist number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of
4
5
6
7
8
9

* The title of the original program or playlist may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.

Removing the on-screen bar

Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 37

12/10/08 2:03:06 PM

ENGLISH

On-screen bar
Ex.: DVD-Video

Information
Operation

1 Disc type
2 • DVD-Video: Audio signal format type and

24.

38
EN38-49_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 38

12/10/08 2:40:04 PM

ENGLISH

USB operations (for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725)

USB cable from the rear of the unit

Changing the display information
(

56)

OPERATIONS
EN38-49_KW-AVX726_005A_5.indd 39

12/16/08 12:22:09 PM

ENGLISH

Make the unit ready to establish a new Bluetooth connection. The connection is established by
operating the Bluetooth device.

Make the unit ready to establish a new Bluetooth connection. The connection is established by
operating this unit.

• To register a device using <Open> or <Search>,
• To connect a special device,
29.
• To connect/disconnect/delete a device,
29.

28.

Changing the display information
(

56)

Bluetooth Information:
If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/> (English website only).

40
EN38-49_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 40

12/10/08 2:40:08 PM

Status of the device
• Signal strength/Battery remainder (only when
the information comes from the device).

[5 / ∞]: Selects the
other registered device.

Connected device name
• When a cellular phone with audio function is
registered/connected, appears.

SOURCE

Connected Device Name

FLAT

3:00

ENGLISH

Using the Bluetooth cellular phone

Activates <Voice Dialing> Display <Dial Menu> screen.
function. (Hold)
• Appears on any source information screen
when the Bluetooth adapter is connected.

Bluetooth icon
• Lights up when the Bluetooth adapter
is connected.

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth PHONE].
Ÿ Press [ ].
! Press [Bluetooth].
⁄ Establish the connection with a device, then make a call (or settings using <Bluetooth>
menu). (

27 – 29)

When a call comes in...
The source is changed to “ Bluetooth PHONE”
automatically.

To end the call
• Hold the message displayed on the touch panel.
• Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or VOL +/–).
• You can adjust the microphone volume,

29.

Name and phone number (if acquired)

When <Auto Answer> is activated...
The unit answers the incoming call automatically.
(
29)

To make a call, use <Dial Menu>. (

27)

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 41

12/10/08 2:40:09 PM

ENGLISH

When an SMS comes in...
If the cellular phone is compatible with SMS (Short
Message Service), you can read the messages on the
screen.
• You cannot edit or send a message through the unit.

Presetting the phone
numbers
You can preset up to 6 phone numbers.

When <Message Info> is set to <Auto>...
The unit rings and the following screen is displayed to
inform you of a message arrival. (
29)

Select the phone number you want to
preset from <Phonebook>, <Redial>,
<Received Calls>, or <Missed Calls>.
(

2
Device Name
Receiving Message
Jack

27)

Select a telephone number to store.
Dial Menu

Read ?
Yes

No
Back

To read the message, press [Yes].
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE.”
To read the message later, press [No].
• The message is stored into <Message> =
<Unread>. (
27)
When <Message Info> is set to <Manual>...
Access the message list to read messages,
27.

Select a preset number.
Dial Menu

Back

Now “Tom” is stored into preset no. 1.

To stop ringing (canceling the outgoing call)

To call a preset number,

26.

Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or VOL +/–).

42
EN38-49_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 42

12/10/08 2:40:09 PM

Using the Bluetooth audio player
ENGLISH

Indicates the button pressed.
• It may be different from the operation status.

Starts playback/pause
SOURCE

Connected Device Name

FLAT

3:00

[5 / ∞]: Selects the
other registered device.

[4 / ¢]: Reverse/
forward search

Stops playback

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth AUDIO].
Ÿ Start playback.
If playback does not start automatically, operate the Bluetooth audio player to start playback.

19)

Ex.: While playing an MP3 disc
• [4 / ¢]: Selects track
• [4 / ¢]: Reverse/forward search (Hold) [5 / ∞]: Displays Disc List.
DISC 1

SOURCE

CD-CH
FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

Current Folder Name
Current File Name.mp3
Current Track Title
Artist Name
Album Title

Tag data (if it is recorded)

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [CD-CH].
Ÿ Press [ ].
! Press [List].

Folder no./Track no./Playing time

⁄ Select a disc to start playing.
To select the playback mode,

24.

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 43

12/11/08 3:50:12 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the DAB tuner (for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725)
Preset number
SOURCE

Band

DAB

Sound mode
DAB indicators */
Standby Reception
indicator

DAB1 1 1475.216MHz LN
Service Label

FLAT

If no signal is received,
“No DAB Signal”
appears.

DRC

3:00

AM
BAND

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [DAB].
Ÿ Press [BAND].
! Press [ ] or [ ] to search for an ensemble—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [
repeatedly.

]or [

] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it

⁄ Press [5 SERVICE] or [SERVICE ∞] to select a service (either primary or secondary) to
listen to.
* While tuning in a service with DLS (Dynamic Label Segment), the TEXT indicator lights up.

23.
To improve your listening when the surrounding sounds are noisy,
To manually preset services into memory,
25.
To select a preset service,
25.
To activate/deactivate TA/PTY Standby Reception,
6, 23.
(You cannot store PTY codes separately for the DAB tuner and the FM tuner.)
• To activate/deactivate Announcement Standby Reception,
23.
• To change the announcement type for Announcement Standby Reception,
• To trace the same programme—Alternative Frequency Reception (DAB AF),

•
•
•
•

23.
18.

44
EN38-49_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 44

12/19/08 11:14:44 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the iPod/iPhone
You can connect the iPod/iPhone using the following cable or adapter:

To
Listen to the
music

Cable/adapter

To operate

KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725:
USB 2.0 cable (accessory of the iPod/iPhone) to the
USB cable from the rear of the unit.

See “When connected with the USB
cable” below.

Interface Adapter for iPod, KS-PD100 (not supplied)
to the CD changer jack on the rear of the unit.

See “When connected with the interface
adapter” on page 46.

Watch the video KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725:
USB Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone, KS-U30
(not supplied) to the USB cable from the rear of the
unit.

See “When connected with the USB
cable” below.
• Make sure <iPod (Off)> is selected
for <AV Input>,
18.

18)

Starts playback/pause

SOURCE

Indicates the controlling
unit for playback

HEAD MODE

iPod

FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

Current Track Title
Artist Name
Album Title

• [4 / ¢]: Selects a track/video
• [4 / ¢]:Reverse/forward search (Hold)

Track no./Playing time Stops playback

*1 [5 / ∞] may not function depending on how you select the current track/video.
*2 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.”

Continued on the next page

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 45

12/26/08 5:09:45 PM

ENGLISH

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod

The following operations/settings are only
available in “HEAD MODE.”
• To display the <iPod Artwork>,
16.
• To select track/video from <Search Mode>,
26.
• To select the playback mode,
24.
• To change the play speed of the audio books,
25.

Playback starts automatically.
• When you connect the iPod to the USB
terminal, “ iPod” is selected as the source
and playback starts automatically.

Ÿ Press [4] or [¢] to select a track/
video.
You cannot resume playback for video sources.

When connected with the interface adapter
Enters main menu

Track no./Playing time

SOURCE

iPod
FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

• [4 / ¢]: Selects tracks
• [4 / ¢]: Reverse/forward search (Hold)

Song Name
Artist Name
Album Title

Starts playback/pause

Preparation:
Make sure <iPod> is selected for <External Input>. (

19)

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod].
Playback starts automatically.

Press [4] or [¢] to select a track.

46
EN38-49_KW-AVX726_005A_4.indd 46

12/15/08 11:49:52 AM

Press [4] or [¢] to select the desired
item.

Press [3 / 8] to confirm the selection.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a track.
• When a track is selected finally, playback starts.
• To return to the previous menu, press [SEARCH].

Press [SEARCH] to enter the main menu.
“SEARCH” flashes on the screen during menu
operations.
• This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about 5 seconds.

3
4

ENGLISH

Selecting a track from the main
menu

24.

To select the playback mode,

Changing the display information

• Skips 10 items at a time if there are more than
10 items. (Hold)

(

56)

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs
Ô Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the
beginning)

Using other external components
AV-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN/VIDEO IN jacks.
Assigned title (

22)

SOURCE

AV-IN
FLAT

3:00

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN].
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
To display the operation buttons while watching the playback picture,

34.

Continued on the next page

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 47

12/19/08 11:15:16 AM

ENGLISH

Navigation screen
You can also connect a Navigation System to the VIDEO IN jack so that you can watch the navigation screen.
Preparation:
Make sure <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>. (

18)

To view the navigation screen
Press DISP on the monitor panel repeatedly. (

56)

• The aspect ratio of the navigation screen is fixed to <Full> regardless of the <Aspect> setting. (

15)

When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input> (
18)
• You can use the source “AV-IN” for listening to an audio source connected to the LINE IN jacks.

EXT-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter, KS-U57 (not
supplied) or AUX Input Adapter, KS-U58 (not supplied).
Assigned title (

22)

Preparation:
Make sure <External> is selected for <External Input>. (

19)

SOURCE

EXT-IN
FLAT

3:00

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [EXT-IN].
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
Changing the display information
(

56)

EXTERNAL DEVICES

EN38-49_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 48

12/19/08 11:15:18 AM

Caution on cleaning the unit
Do not use any solvent (for example, thinner, benzine,
etc.), detergent, or insecticide. This may damage the
monitor or the unit.

ENGLISH

Maintenance

To play new discs
Recommended cleaning method:
Gently wipe the panel with a soft, dry cloth.

Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)

Warped disc

Sticker and sticker residue

Stick-on label

Unusual shape

C-thru Disc (semitransparent disc)

Transparent or semitransparent parts on its
recording area

REFERENCES 49
EN38-49_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 49

12/10/08 2:40:14 PM

ENGLISH

More about this unit
General
Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the monitor panel, you
can also turn on the power. If the source is ready,
playback starts.

Tuner (FM only)
Storing stations in memory
• When SSM is over, received stations are preset in no.
1 (lowest frequency) to no. 6 (highest frequency).

FM Radio Data System operations
(for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725)
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types
of Radio Data System signals—PI (Programme
Identification) and AF (Alternative Frequency)
to work correctly. Without receiving these data
correctly, Network-Tracking Reception will not
operate correctly.
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby
Reception, the volume level automatically changes
to the preset level (TA Volume) if the current level is
lower than the preset level.
• Tracing the same programme—NetworkTracking Reception:
When driving in an area where FM reception is not
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to
another FM Radio Data System station of the same
network, possibly broadcasting the same programme
with stronger signals.
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas
(01 – 05)

• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is
also activated automatically. On the other hand,
Network-Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated
without deactivating Alternative Frequency
Reception. ( 18)
• Available PTY codes:
News, Current Affairs, Information, Sport, Education,
Drama, Cultures, Science, Varied Speech, Pop Music,
Rock Music, Easy Listening, Light Classics M, Serious
Classics, Other Music, Weather & Metr, Finance,
Children’s Progs, Social Affairs, Religion, Phone
In, Travel & Touring, Leisure & Hobby, Jazz Music,
Country Music, National Music, Oldies Music, Folk
Music, Documentary

Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down or has no
playable files, “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen. Eject the disc.

50
EN50-57_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 50

12/19/08 11:19:45 AM

Playing JPEG files

• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files and 250
folders (a maximum of 999 files per folder).
• Use only “finalized” discs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• This unit can recognize a total of 25 characters for
file/folder names.
• Some discs or files may not be played back due to
their characteristics or recording conditions.

• This unit can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg>, or <.jpeg>.
• This unit can play back JPEG files that are at 32 × 32
to 8 192 × 7 680 resolution.
It may take time to display the file depending on its
resolution.
• This unit can play back baseline JPEG files.
Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be
played.

Playing DVD-VR

Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files

• For details about DVD-VR format and playlist, refer
to the instructions supplied with the recording
equipment.

• This unit can play back files with the extension code
<.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.wav> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can play back the files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate:
MP3/WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG2)
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 22.05 kHz (for WMA)
44.1 kHz (for WAV)
• This unit can show ID3 Tag Version
1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4 (for MP3).
• This unit can also show WAV/WMA Tag.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
• Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time indication.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,
etc.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN50-57_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 51

ENGLISH

Playing Recordable/Rewritable discs

12/19/08 11:19:47 AM

ENGLISH

Disc/file information shown on the
external monitor

• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV

The following screens appear only on the external
monitor.
• CD
TIME

T. RPT

Track Information
Album
Four seasons
Artist
Robert M. Smith
Title
Rain

00:14

Track : 6 / 14
Cloudy
Fair
Fog
Hail
Indian summer
Rain
Shower
Snow
Thunder
Typhoon
Wind
Winter sky

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
p

* If tag data includes “Jacket Picture” (baseline JPEG), it
will be displayed.

52
EN50-57_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 52

12/10/08 2:22:30 PM

•
•

•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ENGLISH

USB operations
(for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725)
If “No USB Device“ appears after removing a device,
reattach a device or select another playback source.
When the USB device has no playable files, or has not
been formatted correctly, “Cannot play this device
Check the device” appears on the screen.
This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating
is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.
While playing from a USB device, the playback order
may differ from other players.
This unit may be unable to play back some USB
devices or some files due to their characteristics or
recording conditions.
USB devices equipped with special functions such as
data security functions cannot be used with the unit.
Do not use a USB device with two or more partitions.
Depending on the shape of the USB devices and
connection ports, some USB devices may not be
attached properly or the connection might be loose.
When connecting a USB device, refer also to its
instructions.
Connect only one USB device to the unit at a time. Do
not use a USB hub.
This unit may not recognize a USB device connected
through a USB card reader.
When connecting with a USB cable, use the USB 2.0
cable.
This unit may not play back files in a USB device
properly when using a USB extension cord.
This unit cannot assure proper functions or supply
power to all types of the devices.
This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files and 250
folders (a maximum of 999 files per folder).
This unit can recognize a total of 25 characters for
file/folder names.
For MPEG1/2 files: The maximum bit rate for video
signals (average) is 2 Mbps.

Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• Connection Error:
The device is registered but the connection has failed.
Use <Connect> to connect the device again.
( 29)
• Error:
Try the operation again. If “Error” appears again,
check if the device supports the function you have
tried.
• Device Unfound:
No available Bluetooth device is detected by
<Search>.
• Loading:
The unit is updating the phone book or SMS.
• Please Wait...:
The unit is preparing to use the Bluetooth function. If
the message does not disappear, turn off and turn on
the unit, then connect the device again (or reset the
unit).
• Reset08:
Check the connection between the adapter and this
unit.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN50-57_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 53

12/10/08 2:22:30 PM

ENGLISH

Icons for phone types
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the device.
: Cellular phone
: Household phone
: Office
: General
: Other than above

CD changer
• If you select a folder, which does not include any
music files, on the list (
26), you will hear a beep.
Select another folder including music files.

DAB (for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725)
• Only the primary DAB service can be preset even
when you store a secondary service.
iPod/iPhone operations
• You can control the following types of iPod/iPhone:
(A) Connected with the USB cable:
(for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725)
– iPod with video (5th Generation) *1, *2, *3
– iPod classic *1, *2
– iPod nano *2, *3
– iPod nano (2nd Generation) *2
– iPod nano (3rd Generation) *1, *2
– iPod nano (4th Generation) *1, *2
– iPod Touch *1, *2
– iPod Touch (2nd Generation) *1, *2
– iPhone/iPhone 3G *1, *2
(B) Connected with the interface adapter:
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
– iPod photo
– iPod with video (5th Generation)
– iPod classic
– iPod nano
– iPod nano (2nd Generation)
– iPod nano (3rd Generation)
– iPod nano (4th Generation) *4

*1 To watch the video with its audio, connect the iPod/
iPhone using USB Audio and Video cable (KS-U30, not
supplied).
45.
*2 “iPod MODE” is available,
*3 To listen to the sound in “iPod MODE,” connect
the iPod/iPhone using USB Audio and Video cable
(KS-U30, not supplied).
*4 It is not possible to charge the battery through this
unit.
• If the iPod does not play correctly, update your iPod
software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through the unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• The text information scrolls on the monitor. This
unit can display up to 40 characters when using the
interface adapter and up to 128 characters when
using the USB 2.0 cable or USB Audio and Video cable
(KS-U30).

For the USB connection:
When <iPod Artwork> is set to <On>:
Do not press any keys during the first 5 seconds
or more of playing back any track containing an
Artwork*. It takes 5 seconds or more to display
an Artwork and no operations are available while
loading it.
* The picture displayed on the iPod’s/iPhone’s screen
while playing back a track.

54
EN50-57_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 54

12/26/08 5:12:02 PM

ENGLISH

Menu settings
• If you change the <Amplifier Gain> setting from <High> to <Low> while the volume level is set higher than
“30,” the unit automatically changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
• After you change any of <Menu Language/Audio Language/Subtitle> settings, turn off then on the power,
and re-insert the disc (or insert another disc) so that your setting takes effect.
• When you select <16:9> for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the process for
converting the picture width.
• Even if <4:3PS> is selected, the screen size may become <4:3LB> for some discs.

Output signals

<D. Audio Output>

Playback disc

DVD

<PCM>

48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*

96 kHz, Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

with Dolby Digital
with MPEG Audio

Audio CD, Video CD
DivX/ with Dolby Digital
MPEG
with MPEG Audio
MP3/WMA
WAV

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream
MPEG bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM /
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

* Digital signals may be emitted at 20 or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs
are not copy-protected.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN50-57_KW-AVX726_005A_6.indd 55

12/16/08 4:34:36 PM

ENGLISH

Display information
• Available display information varies among the playback sources.
Each time you press DISP, the display changes to show the various information.

Ex.: When the playback source is a DVD video disc
SOURCE

SOURCE

DVD

DVD
FLAT

FLAT

CHAP. RPT

3:00

Playback picture screen
(only for video sources)

Source information screen

3:00

Playback picture and source
information screen *1

Navigation screen *2

*1 When the source is “ iPod,” the Artwork of the song is shown if the song has an Artwork data. (
16)
While MP3/WMA file is played, “Jacket picture” is shown if the file has the tag data including “Jacket picture.”
18)
*2 When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>. (

Characters you can enter for titles
In addition to the roman alphabet (A – Z, a – z), you can use the following characters to assign titles. (
• When <Руccĸий> is selected for <Language>. (
15)

22)

Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

• When any language other than <Руccĸий> is selected for <Language>. (

15)

Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

56
EN50-57_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 56

12/26/08 5:13:12 PM

Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU

FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA

KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE

NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
QU
RM
RN
RO
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS

Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu

ENGLISH

Language codes (for DVD/DivX language selection)

JVC bears no responsibility for any loss of data in an iPod/iPhone and/or USB mass storage class
device while using this unit.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN50-57_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 57

12/26/08 5:13:14 PM

ENGLISH

58
EN58-65_KW-AVX726_005A_6.indd 58

12/16/08 4:37:18 PM

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
• For operations with the external components, refer also to the instructions supplied for the adapters used with the
connections (as well as the instructions supplied with the external components).
• Messages (enclosed in “ ”) in the tables below are shown in the language selected on <Language>. (
15)
Messages described here are in the language of this manual.

TUNER

General

Symptom

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting

Remedy/Cause

• No sound comes out of the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The screen is not clear and legible.
Sunshine from the windshield may cause this symptom.
14)
Adjust <Bright>. (
• “Position Error Push Open Key”
The monitor panel angle has been forcibly adjusted, or its
appears on the screen.
adjustment has been interrupted while opening or closing.
Press [OPEN/TILT].
• “Mecha Error Push Reset” appears on Reset the unit. (
3)
the screen, and the panel does not
move.
• “No Signal” appears.
• Change the source.
• Start the playback on the external component connected to
VIDEO IN jack.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Signal input is too weak.
• The buttons on the monitor panel do When the monitor panel is open, only VOL +/– and
work. The other buttons do not function.
not work.
• The unit does not work at all.
3)
Reset the unit. (
• The touch panel does not respond
• Keep your hands and the touch panel clean and dry.
properly.
• Eliminate static electricity and do not place magnetic items
• <Illumination> function does not
near the unit.
work properly.
• Leave the unit until the temperature becomes stable in the
car.
• A rubber mat on the floor may cause this symptom. In this
case, do not use the rubber mat.
• SSM automatic presetting does not Store stations manually. (
25)
work.
• Static noise while listening to the
Connect the aerial firmly.
radio.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN58-65_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 59

12/19/08 12:29:40 PM

Symptom

ENGLISH

• Disc can be neither recognized nor
played back.
• Disc cannot be ejected.
•
•

Disc in general

•
•
•
•

•
•
•

DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/MP3/WMA/WAV

•

•
•
•
•

Remedy/Cause
Eject the disc forcibly. (

Unlock the disc. (
32)
Recordable/Rewritable discs cannot • Insert a finalized disc.
be played back.
• Finalize the discs with the component which you used for
Tracks on the Recordable/Rewritable
recording.
discs cannot be skipped.
Playback does not start.
• Insert the disc correctly again.
• The format of files is not supported by the unit.
The playback picture is not clear and Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (
14)
legible.
Sound and pictures are sometimes
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
interrupted or distorted.
• Change the disc.
No playback picture is shown and
Parking brake lead is not connected properly.
“Parking Brake” appears on the
See Installation/Connection Manual.
screen, even when the parking brake
is engaged.
No picture appears on the external • Connect the video cord correctly.
monitor.
• Select the correct input on the external monitor.
“Eject Error” or “Loading Error”
Change the source by pressing SOURCE.
appears on the screen.
“Region code error” appears on the Region code is not correct. (
4)
screen when you insert a DVD Video.
Disc cannot be played back.
• Change the disc.
• Record the tracks using a compliant application on the
appropriate discs. (
4)
• Add appropriate extension codes to the file names.
Noise is generated.
The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to
another file.
Tracks are not played back as you
Playback order may differ from the one played back using other
have intended them to play.
players.
Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how
the tracks are recorded.
“Not Support” appears on the screen The track is unplayable.
and track skips.

60
EN58-65_KW-AVX726_005A_3.indd 60

12/10/08 2:40:51 PM

USB (for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725)

• Noise is generated.
• Tracks cannot play back as you
have intended them to play.
• “Now Reading...” keeps flashing
on the screen.

The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to another
file.
Playback order may differ from the one played back using other
players.
• Readout time varies depending on the USB device.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.

• “Cannot play this device Check the No tracks are stored. Copy tracks to the USB device.
device” appears on the screen.
• Correct characters are not
displayed (e.g. album name).
• While playing a track, sound is
sometimes interrupted.
• Bluetooth device does not detect
the unit.

•
•

Bluetooth

Remedy/Cause

ENGLISH

Symptom

•
•

•

•
•

For available characters,

56.

The tracks are not properly copied into the USB device. Copy tracks
again, and try again.
This unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular phone and
one Bluetooth audio player at a time.
While connected to a device, this unit cannot be detected from
another device. Disconnect currently connected device and search
again.
The unit does not detect the
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
Bluetooth device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device.
The unit does not make pairing
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target device. If
with the Bluetooth device.
the PIN code of the device is not indicated on its instructions, try
“0000” or “1234.”
• Select the device name from <Special Device>, then try to
29)
connect again. (
Echo or noise occurs.
Adjust the microphone unit (supplied with Bluetooth Adapter)
position.
Phone sound quality is poor.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth cellular
phone.
• Move the car to place where you can get a better signal reception.
The sound is interrupted or
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth audio
skipped while using a Bluetooth
player.
audio player.
• Disconnect the device connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the player again.
“NEW DEVICE” cannot be selected Bluetooth audio player is already connected. To select “NEW
for “Bluetooth AUDIO.”
DEVICE,” disconnect it. (
29)
The connected audio player
Check whether the connected audio player supports AVRCP (Audio
cannot be controlled.
Video Remote Control Profile).
Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN58-65_KW-AVX726_005A_5.indd 61

12/16/08 12:27:36 PM

DAB tuner (for
KW-AVX726/
KW-AVX725)

CD changer

ENGLISH

Symptom
• “No Disc” appears on the screen.
• “No Magazine” appears on the screen.
• “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen.
• “Reset08” appears on the screen.

iPod /iPhone

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AV-IN

Remedy/Cause

•
•

Move to an area with stronger signals.
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly, then
3)
reset the unit. (
The DAB tuner does not work at all.
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly, then
reset the unit.(
3)
“Antenna Power NG” appears on the screen. Check the cords and connections.
The iPod/iPhone does not turn on or does
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
not work.
• Update the firmware version of the iPod/iPhone.
• Charge the battery of the iPod/iPhone.
• Check whether “HEAD MODE” or “iPod MODE” is
correctly selected. (
45)
• Reset the iPod/iPhone.
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.
Sound is distorted.
“Disconnect” appears on the screen.
Check the connection.
Playback stops.
The headphones are disconnected during playback.
Restart playback.
“Cannot play this device Check the device” No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
appears on the screen.
No operations are available when playing
Operate the unit after the Artwork is loaded. (
16)
back a track containing Artwork.
“Reset01” – “Reset07” appears on the
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod.
screen.
Then, connect them again.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
“Reset08” appears on the screen.
The iPod’s controls do not work after
Reset the iPod.
disconnecting from this unit.
“Restricted Device” appears on the screen. Check whether the connected iPod is compatible with
54)
this unit. (
No picture appears on the screen.
• Turn on the video component if it is not on.
• Connect the video component correctly.
Playback picture is not clear and legible.
14)
Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (

62
EN58-65_KW-AVX726_005A_5.indd 62

12/16/08 12:27:37 PM

Maximum Power Output:
Continuous Power Output
(RMS):

FM/AM TUNER

AMPLIFIER

Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control Range:

Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:

Frequencies:

Level:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Audio Output Level:
• LINE OUT (REAR)
• SUBWOOFER (for KW-AVX726/
KW-AVX725):
Color System:

Line-Out Level/
Impedance:
Output Impedance:

50 W per channel
20 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to
20 000 Hz at no more than 1.0% total
harmonic distortion
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz,
6.3 kHz, 15 kHz
±10 dB
70 dB
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

ENGLISH

Specifications

1 kΩ

• KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725: NTSC/PAL
• KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625: PAL
Video Output (composite):
1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Other Terminals:
Input:
• LINE IN, VIDEO IN, Aerial input
• USB input (for KW-AVX726/
KW-AVX725)
Output:
VIDEO OUT
Others:
CD changer, DIGITAL OUT (optical),
POSITION OUT
Frequency Range:
FM:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
AM:
• KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725: (MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz
• KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
FM Tuner:
Usable Sensitivity:
9.3 dBf (0.8 μV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity
65 dB
(400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
40 dB
AM/MW Tuner:
Sensitivity/Selectivity:
20 μV/40 dB
LW Tuner:
Sensitivity:
50 μV

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN58-65_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 63

1/6/09 11:39:53 AM

DVD/CD
KW AVX725)

GENERAL

MONITOR

USB (for KW-AVX726/

ENGLISH

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)
Frequency Response:
DVD, fs=48 kHz/96 kHz:
16 Hz to 22 000 Hz
VCD/CD:
16 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Dynamic Range:
96 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
98 dB
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
USB Standards:
USB 2.0 Full Speed
Data Transfer Rate
Full Speed:
Maximum 12 Mbps
Low Speed:
Maximum 1.5 Mbps
Compatible Device:
Mass storage class
Compatible File System: FAT 32/16/12
Max. Current:
DC 5 V 500 mA
Screen Size:
7 inch wide liquid crystal display
Number of Pixel:
336 960 pixels: 480 × 3 (horizontal) × 234 (vertical)
Drive Method:
TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix format
Color System:
NTSC/PAL
Aspect Ratio:
16:9 (wide)
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Grounding System:
Negative ground
Allowable Storage Temperature:
–10°C to +60°C
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C
182 mm × 111 mm × 161 mm
Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):
• With trim plate and
Panel Size (approx.):
188 mm × 117 mm × 22 mm
sleeve attached
Mass (approx.):
3.3 kg (including trim plate and sleeve)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Required space for installation and the monitor ejection
Dashboard

111

CAUTION: When ejecting the monitor, leave an
open space for the monitor to come out. If you do
not, the monitor may obstruct the steering wheel
and gearshift lever operations, and this may result
in a traffic accident.
Unit: mm

161

91.3

64
EN58-65_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 64

1/6/09 11:39:55 AM

General
Reset ..................................................................3, 6
Volume ..............................................................6, 7
AV Menu ........................................................ 6, 13
Source................................................................6, 8
Short Cut .............................................................. 8
RM-RK252 ................................. 9, 10, 11, 35, 36
Clock .............................................................12, 15
Display demonstration ...........................12, 14

Tuner
Listening to the radio (FM/AM) ...... 6, 11, 30
Auto/manual search................................10, 22
Select preset station .................................. 9, 25
Store station
(automatically/manually) ...................22, 25
Improve FM reception ...................................22
Assign title .........................................................22
PTY Search .........................................................31
Store programme type..................................31
PTY Standby Reception.................................23
PTY codes ....................................................23, 50
Network-Tracking Reception ......................17
Programme Search .........................................18

USB
Attach/detach...................................................39
Start/pause playback ..............................11, 39
Repeat/random play ......................................24

ENGLISH

Operation index

Bluetooth
Connect/disconnect/delete ..........28, 29, 40
Make a call ...........................................27, 41, 42
Answer/end call ..........................10, 11, 29, 41
Read SMS .....................................................29, 42
Microphone volume.......................................29
Preset phone number....................................42

CD changer
Start playback ............................................26, 43
Repeat/random play ......................................24

DAB
Listening to the DAB service .......................44
Improve listening ............................................23
Preset service ....................................................25
TA/PTY Standby Reception..................... 6, 23
Announcement Standby Reception.........23
DAB AF ................................................................18

Disc
Open/close ................................................... 7, 32
Eject ....................................................................3, 7
Lock/unlock disc ..............................................32
Playable disc type ............................................. 4
Display information ........................................33
Repeat/random play ......................................24
Select track/folder ......................10, 25, 35, 36
Select title/program/playlist ................10, 35
Start/stop/pause/resume
playback ............................................11, 35, 36
Search/skip ...................................10, 11, 35, 36
OSD ...............................................................37, 38
PBC playback .............................................11, 35

iPod
Connect .......................................................45, 46
Start/pause playback ..............................11, 45
Head Mode/iPod Mode............................ 7, 45
Repeat/random play ......................................24
Audiobooks .......................................................25
Select track ..........................................10, 26, 46

External component
AV-INPUT ............................................................47
EXT-INPUT ..........................................................48

REFERENCES
EN58-65_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 65

12/19/08 12:35:29 PM

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de
fonctionnement?
Réinitialisez votre appareil
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil

EN, FR, RU
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

CoverRear_KW-AVX726_005A_f.indd 1

0109DTSMDTJEIN

KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625

Затруднения при эксплуатации?

ENGLISH
FRANÇAIS

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

Please reset your unit

KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/
KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625

РУCCKИЙ

Instructions

Having TROUBLE with operation?

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR
RÉCEPTEUR DVD ET MONITEUR
ПРИЙМАЧ ТА ПРОГРАВАЧ DVD-ДИСКІВ ІЗ МОНІТОРОМ

INSTRUCTIONS
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

GET0605-005A
[EU]

12/30/08 9:31:20 AM

KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725/
KW-AVX626/KW-AVX625
GET0605-011A

Installation/Connection Manual
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
Руководство по установке/подключению

0109DTSMDTJEIN

EN, FR, RU
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

[EU]

ENGLISH

FRANÇAIS

РУССКИЙ

Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant
continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas
ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que
vous pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.

Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В
постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш
автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор
напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера
автомобилнего специалиста JVC.

WARNINGS

AVERTISSEMENTS

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ

• N’INSTALLEZ aucun appareil ni aucun câble dans un endroit où:
– où il peut gêner l’accès au volant ou au levier de vitesse car cela
peut entraîner un accident de la circulation.
– où il peut gêner la manipulation de dispositifs de sécurité tels
que les airbags car cela peut entraîner un accident fatal.
– où il peut gêner la visibilité.
• NE COMMANDEZ pas l’appareil lors de la manipulation du volant
car cela peut entraîner un accident de la circulation.
• Le conducteur ne doit pas regarder le moniteur lorsqu’il conduit.
Cela peut lui faire perdre sa concentration et causer un accident.
• Si vous souhaitez opérer l’appareil pendant que vous conduisez,
assurez-vous de bien regarder autour de vous afin de ne pas
causer un accident de la circulation.
• Si le frein à main n’est pas engagé, “Parking Brake” (Frein à Main)
s’affiche sur le moniteur et aucune image de lecture n’apparaît.
– Cet avertissement apparaît uniquement quand le fil du
frein de stationnement est connecté au système de frein de
stationnement intégré à la voiture.

• НЕ устанавливайте устройства и не прокладывайте провода
в местах, где:
– возникает препятствие для функционирования руля и
рычага переключения скоростей, так как это может
привести к аварии;
– возникает препятствие срабатыванию устройств
безопасности, например, пневмоподушки, что может
привести к несчастному случаю со смертельным исходом;
– может ухудшиться обзор.
• НЕ используйте устройство, когда управляете рулем; это
может привести к аварии.
• Водителю не следует смотреть на монитор во время
вождения. Это может быть опасно и может стать причиной
аварии.
• Если данное устройство используется во время поездки на
автомобиле, следует, не отвлекаясь, следить за дорогой, иначе
может произойти дорожно-транспортное происшествие.
• Если стояночный тормоз не включен, на мониторе появляется
сообщение “Parking Brake” и изображение воспроизведения
отображаться не будет.
– Это предупреждение появляется только в том случае,
если провод стояночного тормоза подключен к стояночной
тормозной системе автомобиля.

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before
installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.
Notes on electrical connections:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows
frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with maximum power
of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change <Amplifier Gain>
setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 21 of
the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads
with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it
when removing this unit.

Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de
débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les
raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de
cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.
Remarques sur les connexions électriques:
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible
saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une
puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes
avant, avec une impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω).
Si la puissance maximum est inférieure à 50 W, changez
<Amplifier Gain> pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir
page 21 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont
PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire
attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.

Heat sink
Dissipateur de chaleur
Радиатор

Parts list for installation and connection
If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.

Main unit
Appareil principal
Главное устройство

Flat head screws *1 (M5 × 8 mm)
Vis à tête plate *1 (M5 × 8 mm)
Болты с плоской головкой *1 (M5 × 8 мм)

Примечания по электрическим подключениям:
• Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем
указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком
часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной мощностью
более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели устройства, с полным
сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω).
Если максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите
в режим <Amplifier Gain>, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение
(cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 21).
• Для предотвращения ороткого замыкания заклейте
НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей лентой.
• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.
Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.

Liste des pièces pour l’installation et
raccordement

Список деталей для установки и
подключения

Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio
JVC immédiatement.

При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь
с дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.

Trim plate
Plaque d’assemblage
Декоративную панель

Sleeve *1
Manchon *1
Муфта*1

Crimp connector
Raccord à sertir
Обжимной соединитель

Remote controller
Télécommande
диcтaнциoннoго yпpaвлeния

Brackets *1
Supports *1
Декоративную панель *1

Use these screws when installing the unit without the supplied sleeve.
Utilisez ces vis lors de l’installation de l’appareil sans le manchon
fourni.
Используйте эти болты при установке устройства без
поставляемой муфты.

Round head screws *1 (M2.6 × 3 mm)
Vis à tête ronde *1 (M2,6 × 3 mm)
Болты с круглой головкой *1 (M2,6 × 3 мм)

Power cord
Cordon d’alimentation
Кабель питания

Batteries
Piles
Бaтapeйкa

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)
Болты с плоской головкой (M5 × 8 мм)

Round head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Vis à tête ronde (M5 × 8 mm)
Болты с круглой головкой (M5 × 8 мм)

*1 Fitted to the main unit when shipped.

*1 Fixé à l’appareil lors de l’expédition.

*1 Закреплено на основном устройстве при поставке.

Install1_KW-AVX726_011A_f.indd 1

12/24/08 2:29:13 PM

INSTALLATION
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)

INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE
TABLEAU DE BORD)

УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В
ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. However, you
should make adjustments corresponding to your specific car. If you
have any questions or require information regarding installation kits,
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company
supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed
by a qualified technician.

L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique.
Cependant, vous devez faire les ajustements correspondant à votre
voiture. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information
sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios
JVC ou une compagnie d’approvisionnement.
• Si vous n’êtes pas sûr de pouvoir installer l’appareil correctement,
faite-le installer par un technicien qualifié.

На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка.
Однако необходимо выполнить настройки, соответствующие
конкретному автомобилю. Если у Вас есть какие-либо
вопросы, касающиеся установки, обратитесь к Вашему дилеру
автомобильных систем JVC или в компанию, поставляющую
соответствующие принадлежности.
• Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это
устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.

Before installing the unit

Avant d’installer l’appareil

• When mounting the unit, be sure to use the screws provided, as
instructed. If other screws are used, parts could become loose or
damaged.
• When tightening screws or bolts, be careful not to pinch any
connection cord.
• Make sure not to block the fan on the rear to maintain proper
ventilation when installing the unit.

• Lors du montage de l’appareil, assurez-vous d’utiliser les vis
fournies, de la façon indiquée. Si vous utilisez d’autres vis,
certaines pièces peuvent être perdues ou endommagées.
• Lorsque vous serrez des vis ou des boulons, faites attention de ne
pas pincer un cordon de connexion.
• Assurez-vous de ne pas bloquer le ventilateur sur le panneau
arrière lors de l’installation afin de permettre une ventilation
correcte.

Предостережение во время установки

Remove the audio system originally installed in the car, together
with its mounting brackets.
Note: Be sure to keep all the screws and parts removed from
your car for future use.

2
3

Install the sleeve in the dashboard of the car.

2
3

Do the required electrical connections.
• See pages 3 – 6.

5
6

Install the main unit in the sleeve.

Attach the brackets to the main unit.
• Make sure to use the supplied flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm). If
longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.

Attach the trim plate.

Retirez le système audio d’origine installé dans la voiture en
même temps que les supports de montage.
Remarque: Assurez-vous de conserver toutes les vis et pièces
détachées de votre voiture pour une utilisation dans le future.
Installez le manchon dans le tableau de bord de la voiture.
Attachez les supports à l’appareil principal.
• Assurez-vous d’utiliser les vis à tête plate fournis—
(M5 × 8 mm). Vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil si vous
utilisez des vis plus longues.

• При установке устройства используйте только прилагаемые
болты в соответствии с инструкцией. В случае использования
других болтов существует вероятность, что детали могут
быть ненадежно закреплены или повреждены.
• Аккуратно затягивайте болты,чтобы не пережать
соединительные кабели.
• При установке для обеспечения правильной вентиляции не
закрывайте вентилятор на задней панели.

Извлеките аудиосистему, изначально установленную в
автомобиле, вместе с монтажными кронштейнами.
Примечание: Не теряйте винты и детали, извлеченные
из автомобиля, поскольку они будут использоваться в
дальнейшем.

2
3

Вмонтируйте муфту в приборную панель автомобиля.

Réalisez les connexions électriques requises.
• Référez-vous aux pages 3 – 6.

Выполните необходимые электрические соединения.
• См. стр. 3 – 6.

5
6

Installez l’appareil principal dans le manchon.

5
6

Установите главное устройство в муфту.

Fixez la plaque d’assemblage.

Прикрепите кронштейны к главному устройству.
• Используйте болты с плоской головкой (M5 × 8 мм),
которые входят в комплект поставки. При использовании
более длинных болтов можно повредить устройство.

Прикрепите декоративную панель.
Sleeve
Manchon
Муфта

Brackets
Supports
Декоративную панель

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)
Болты с плоской головкой (M5 × 8 мм)

Trim plate
Plaque d’assemblage
Декоративную панель

Round head screws (M2.6 × 3 mm)
Vis à tête ronde (M2,6 × 3 mm)
Болты с круглой головкой (M2,6 × 3 мм)

Required space for installation and the monitor ejection
Espace nécessaire pour l’installation et l’éjection du moniteur
Необходимое пространство для установки и извлечения
монитора

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚, taking it into account that the monitor would eject
when in use.
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30°, en tenant compte du fait que le moniteur
doit être déployé lors de son utilisation.
Установите устройство под углом менее 30 °, принимая во внимание то,что при
использовании монитор будет выдвигаться.

Dashboard
Tableau de bord
Приборная панель

111

30˚

161

91.3

Unit: mm
Unité: mm
Единицы измерения: мм

Install1_KW-AVX726_011A_f.indd 2

2/4/09 2:42:57 PM

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES

ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ

PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des
enceintes:
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon
d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait
sérieusement endommagé.
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation
aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и подключению
громкоговорителей:
• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к
аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет
повреждено.
• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей к кабелю
питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему соединений
громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.

If your car is equipped with the ISO connector /
Si votre voiture est équippée d’un connecteur ISO /
Если автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobiles / Pour certaine voiture VW/Audi ou
Opel (Vauxhall) / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall)

• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.
• Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.
• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.
• Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.
Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.
• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.
Original wiring
Câblage original
Исходная схема
соединений

From the car body
De la carrosserie de la voiture
От корпуса автомобиля

ISO connector of the supplied power cord
Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation fourni
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в комплект
поставки

Y:
Yellow
Jaune
Желтый

Modified wiring 1
Câblage modifié 1
Преобразованная схема
соединений 1

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does
not turn on.
Utilisez le câblage modifié 2 si
l’appareil ne se met pas sous tension.
Если приемник не включается,
используйте преобразованную схему
соединений 2.

Modified wiring 2
Câblage modifié 2
Преобразованная схема
соединений 2

View from the lead side
Vue à partir du côté des fils
Вид со стороны выводов

R:
Red
Rouge
Красный

Connecting the parking brake lead / Connexion du fil de frein de stationnement / Подключение провода стояночного тормоза
Parking brake lead (light green)
Fil du frein de stationnement (vert clair)
Провод стояночного тормоза (зеленого цвета)

Crimp connector
Raccord à sertir
Обжимной соединитель

Parking brake
Frein de stationnement
Стояночный тормоз

To metallic body or chassis of the car
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля

Parking brake switch (inside the car)
Commutateur de frein de
stationnement (intérieur de la voiture)
Переключатель стояночного тормоза
(внутри автомобиля)

Connecting the reverse gear signal lead (for rear view camera) / Connexion du fil de signal de marche arrière (pour la caméra de recul) /
Подключение провода сигнала заднего хода (для камеры заднего вида)
Locate the reverse lamp lead in the trunk.

Localisez le fil des feux de recul dans le coffre.

Найдите лампу заднего хода в ящике.

Extension lead *2
Fil prolongateur *2
Удлинитель *2
Purple with white stripe
Violet avec bande blanche
Фиолетовый с белой полосой

REVERSE
GEAR
SIGNAL

Crimp connector *2
Raccord à sertir *2
Обжимной соединитель *2
To car battery
À la batterie de la voiture
К аккумулятору автомобиля

Reverse lamp lead
Fil des feux de recul
Провод задней фары

*2 Not supplied for this unit.

To reverse lamp
Aux feux de recul
К задней фаре

Reverse lamps
Feux de recul
Задние фары

*2 Не входит в комплект.

*2 Non fourni avec cet autoradio.
3

Install1_KW-AVX726_011A_f.indd 3

2/4/09 2:43:00 PM

ENGLISH

FRANÇAIS

РУССКИЙ

Connections without using the ISO connector / Connexions sans utiliser le connecteur ISO / Подключение без использования разъемов ISO
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car
body may be different in color.
1 Cut the ISO connector.
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order
specified in the illustration below.
3 Connect the aerial cord.
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

DIGITAL OUT
(see diagram / voir le
diagramme / см. схему

Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le
câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager
sérieusement l’appareil. Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des
connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.
1 Coupez le connecteur ISO.
2 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre
spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.
3 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
4 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.

Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте
проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может
привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.
Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова
автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.
1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.
2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в
указанном ниже порядке.
3 Подключите кабель антенны.
4 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к устройству.

This terminal is used for controlling an external device by using the touch panel of this unit. This unit outputs the
positional information detected on the touch panel through the POSITION OUT terminal. Refer to the instruction
manual of the external device for details. JVC does not guarantee proper operations for the external device connected
to the POSITION OUT terminal.
Cette prise est utilisée pour la commande d’un périphérique extérieur en utilisant le panneau tactile de cet
appareil. Cet appareil sort l’information de la position détectée par le panneau tactile par la prise POSITION
OUT. Référez-vous au mode d’emploi du périphérique extérieur pour les détails. JVC ne garantie pas un
fonctionnement correct pour le périphérique extérieur connecté à la prise POSITION OUT.
Этот разъем используется для управления внешним устройством с помощью сенсорной панели данного
устройства. Данное устройство передает информацию о местонахождении с сенсорной панели через разъем
POSITION OUT. Подробные сведения см. в руководстве по работе с внешним устройством. Компания JVC не
гарантирует надлежащей работы внешнего устройства, подключенного к разъему POSITION OUT.

)

Rear ground terminal / Borne arrière de
masse / Задний разъем заземления
Only for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725 / Seulement
pour le KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725 / Только для
KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725 (see diagram /
voir le diagramme / см. схему )

Position data output / Sortie des données de position / Положение выхода данных

Power cord
Cordon d’alimentation
Кабель питания

(see page 3 / voir page 3 / см. стр. 3)
SUBWOOFER—Only for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725 / Seulement pour le KW-AVX726/
KW-AVX725 / Только для KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725
(see diagram / voir le diagramme /см. схему )

Fan / Ventilateur / Вентилятор

15 A fuse
Fusible 15 A
Предохранитель
15 A

Black
Noir
Черный

To external components
(see diagram )
Aux appareíls extérieurs
(voir le diagramme )
К внешним устройствам
(см. схему )
VIDEO OUT
(see diagram
diagramme

VIDEO IN
(see diagram
diagramme
LINE IN
(see diagram
diagramme

REAR OUT
(see diagram
diagramme

Red
/ voir le
/ см. схему

/ voir le
/ см. схему

Yellow *2
Jaune *2
Желтый *2

ISO connector
Connecteur ISO
Разъем ISO

Ignition switch
Interrupteur d’allumage
Переключатель зажигания
To metallic body or chassis of the car
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the
ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la
voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)
(постоянный 12 В)

Rouge
Красный

)

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя

Orange with white stripe
Orange avec bande blanche
Оранжевый с белой полосой

To car light control switch
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture
К контрольному переключателю освещения автомобиля

)

Brown
Marron
Коричневый

)

Fuse block
Porte-fusible
Блок предохранителя

To cellular phone system
À un système de téléphone cellulaire
К системе сотового телефона

Aerial terminal / Borne de
l’antenne / Разъем антенны
Light green
Vert clair
Зеленого цвета

To parking brake (see page 3)
Au frein de stationnement (voir page 3)
К стояночному тормозу (см. стр. 3)
Crimp connector
Raccord à sertir
Обжимной соединитель

Blue with white stripe
Bleu avec bande blanche
Синий с белой полосой

White with black stripe
Blanc avec bande noire
Белый с черной полосой

White
Blanc
Белый

Gray with black stripe
Gris avec bande noire
Серый с черной полосой

Left speaker (front)
Enceinte gauche (avant)
Левый громкоговоритель (передний)

*1 Not supplied for this unit.
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead
must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.

Gray
Gris
Серый

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
Au fil de télécommande d’un autre appareil (200 mA max.)
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования (макс. 200 мА)

Green with black stripe
Vert avec bande noire
Зеленый с черной полосой

Green
Vert
Зеленый

Right speaker (front)
Enceinte droit (avant)
Правый громкоговоритель (передний)

*1 Non fourni avec cet autoradio.
*2 Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation,
ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut pas être mis sous
tension.

Purple with black stripe
Violet avec bande noire
Пурпурный с черной полосой

Left speaker (rear)
Enceinte gauche (arrière)
Левый громкоговоритель (задний)

Purple
Violet
Пурпурный
Right speaker (rear)
Enceinte droit (arrière)
Правый громкоговоритель
(задний)

*1 Не входит в комплект.
*2 Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот провод,
иначе питание не включится.

Install2_KW-AVX726_011A_f.indd 4

2/6/09 5:21:01 PM

Connecting the external amplifier and/or subwoofer / Connexion d’amplificateurs extérieurs et/ou d’un caisson de grave / Подключение
внешних усилителей и/или низкочастотного динамика

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through
this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to
the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.
• You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio
signals only to the external amplifier(s) to get clear sounds and to
prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit. See page 21 of the
INSTRUCTIONS (separate volume).

Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre
système autoradio.
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande
blanche) au fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de
façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.
• Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à
l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.
• Vous pouvez mettre hors service l’amplificateur intégré et
envoyer les signaux audio uniquement sur un ou plusieurs
amplificateurs extérieurs afin d’obtenir un son clair et d’éviter
tout échauffement interne de l’autoradio. Voir page 21 du
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS (volume séparé).

Remote lead *3 / Fil d’alimentation à distance *3 /
Провод внешнего устройства *3

Можно подключить усилители для обновления автомобильной
стереосистемы.
• Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с белой
полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого оборудования
так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого устройства.
• Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного устройства,
подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте провода
громкоговорителей данного устройства неиспользованными.
• Для получения более чистого звука и предотвращения
внутреннего перегрева устройства можно отключить
встроенный усилитель и использовать для усиления
аудиосигнала только внешние усилители. См. стр. 21
ИНСТРУКЦИЙ (отдельный документ).

Y-connector *3 / Connecteur Y *3 / Разъем Y *3
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique
s’il y en a une
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)
Провод внешнего устройства (cиний с белой полосой)

Only for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725 / Seulement pour le KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725 /
Только для KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725
JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplificateur
JVC-усилитель

Rear speakers
Enceintes arrière
Задние громкоговорители

Subwoofer
Caisson de grave
Низкочастотный динамик

JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplificateur
JVC-усилитель

Rear speakers
Enceintes arrière
Задние громкоговорители
Front speakers
Enceintes avant
Передние громкоговорители

Connecting the external components / Connexion des appareils extérieurs / Подключение внешних устройств

AV amplifier or decoder
Amplificateur AV ou décodeur
Усилитель или декодер AV

Video cord *3
Cordon vidéo *3
Видеокабели *3

Digital optical cable *3
Câble optique numérique *3
Цифровой оптический кабель *3

External monitor
Moniteur extérieur
Внешний монитор

KV-CM1 *3

External component
Appareil extérieur
Внешнее устройство

Rear view camera
Caméra de recul
Камера заднего вида

Only for KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725 / Seulement pour le KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725 / Только для KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725
Connecting the iPod/iPhone to the USB terminal / Connexion du iPod/
USB devices / Périphériques USB / Устройства USB
iPhone à la prise USB / Подключение iPod/iPhone к разъему USB

USB cable (approx. 1.2 m)
Câble USB (environ 1,2 m)
Кабель USB (прибл. 1,2 м)

USB device
Périphérique USB
Устройство USB

You can connect the iPod/iPhone to the USB terminal using the following cables:
• To listen to the music: USB 2.0 cable (supplied for the iPod/iPhone)
• To watch the video: USB Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (not supplied) *8
Vous pouvez connecter le iPod/iPhone à la prise USB en utilisant les câbles suivants:
• Pour écouter la musique: Câble USB 2.0 (fourni pour le iPod/iPhone)
• Pour regarder une séquence vidéo: Câble USB Audio et Vidéo pour iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (non fourni) *8
Можно подключить iPod/iPhone к разъему USB с помощью следующих кабелей:
• для прослушивания музыки: кабель USB 2.0 (поставляется с iPod/iPhone)
• для просмотра видеозаписей: кабель USB Audio и Video для iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (не входит в
комплект поставки) *8
USB 2.0 cable
Câble USB 2.0
Кабель USB 2.0

Apple iPod/iPhone
iPod Apple/iPhone
Apple iPod/iPhone

You cannot connect a computer to the USB (
) terminal of the unit.
Vous ne pouvez pas connecter un ordinateur à la prise USB (
) de l’appareil.
Вы не можете подключить компьютер к терминалу USB (
) устройства.

KS-U30
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone est une marque de commerce de Apple Inc.
iPhone является товарным знаком корпорации Apple Inc.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans les autres pays.
iPod является торговой маркой Apple Inc., зарегистрированной в США и других странах.

*3
*4
*5
*6

Not supplied for this unit.
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).
Audio cord (not supplied for this unit).
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of
the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove
the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage
to the unit.
*7 Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them
to the amplifier.
*8 When using the cable, make sure <iPod (Off)> is selected for
<AV Input> (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

*3
*4
*5
*6

Non fourni avec cet appareil.
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil).
Cordon audio (non fourni avec cet appareil).
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique
de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture
(s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant
d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait
correctement.
*7 Coupez les fils des enceintes arrière du connecteur ISO de la voiture
et connectez-les à l’amplificateur.
*8 Lors de l’utilisation de ce câble, assurez-vous que <iPod (Off)> est
choisi pour <AV Input> (voir page 18 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).

*3
*4
*5
*6

Не входит в комплект.
Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект).
Аудиокабель (не входит в комплект).
Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому кузову
или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской (если оно
покрыто краской, удалите краску перед тем, как прикреплять
провод). Невыполнение этого требования может привести к
повреждению данного устройства.
7
* Обрежьте выводы задних динамиков для разъема ISO автомобиля
и подсоедините их к усилителю.
*8 При использовании кабеля убедитесь в том, что выбрано значение
<iPod (Off)> для настройки <AV Input> (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО
ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 18).

Install2_KW-AVX726_011A_f.indd 5

2/25/09 12:16:19 PM

Connecting the external components to the CD changer jack / Connexion des appareils extérieurs au changeur de CD / Подключение
внешних устройств к разъему устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков
Lors de la connexion des appareils extérieurs, référez-vous aussi aux При подключении внешних устройств см. также руководства,
поставляемые для устройств и адаптера.
manuels fournis avec les appareils et les adaptateurs.

When connecting the external components, refer also to the
manuals supplied for the components and adapter.
CAUTION:
Before connecting the external components, make sure that the
unit is turned off.
You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer
jack.

PRECAUTION:
Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs, assurez-vous que
l’appareil est hors tension.
Vous pouvez connecter les appareils JVC suivants à la prise de
changeur de CD.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ:
Перед подключением внешних компонентов убедитесь в том,
что устройство выключено.
К разъему устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков
можно подключать указанные ниже устройства JVC.

JVC component

Model name

Appareil JVC

Nom du
modèle

Устройство JVC

Название
модели

CD changer (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

Changeur de CD (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

Устройство автоматической смены
компакт-дисков (CD-CH)

CH-X1500 и
т. д.

JVC DAB tuner

KT-DB1000*9

Tuner JVC DAB

KT-DB1000*9

Тюнер DAB JVC

KT-DB1000*9

You can also connect the following components through the various
JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.

Component

Adapter

Vous pouvez aussi connecter les appareils suivants en utilisant
divers adaptateurs JVC.
• Vous pouvez avoir besoin d’acheter certains cordons de
connexion séparément.

Model
name

Appareil

Adaptateur

Указанные ниже устройства можно также подключать с
помощью различных адаптеров JVC.
• Кабели подключения могут быть приобретены отдельно.

Nom du
modèle

Компонентный

Адаптер

Название
модели
KS-BTA200

Bluetooth device

Bluetooth adapter

KS-BTA200

Périphérique Bluetooth Adaptateur Bluetooth

KS-BTA200

Устройство Bluetooth

Адаптер Bluetooth

iPod

Interface adapter for iPod

KS-PD100

iPod

KS-PD100

iPod

Интерфейсный адаптер KS-PD100
для проигрывателя iPod

Portable audio player
with line output jacks

Line input adapter

KS-U57

Lecteur audio portable Adaptateur d’entrée de
avec prises de sortie
ligne
de ligne

KS-U57

Портативный
Адаптер линейного
аудиопроигрыватель с
входа
разъемами линейного выхода

Portable audio player
with 3.5 mm stereo
mini jack

AUX input adapter

KS-U58

Lecteur audio portable Adaptateur d’entrée
avec mini fiche stéréo auxiliaire
de 3,5 mm

KS-U58

Портативный
Адаптер входа AUX KS-U58
аудиопроигрыватель со
стерео мини-разъемом 3,5 мм

When connecting more than one component (maximum: three),
it is recommended that you connect the components in series as
explained below.

Adaptateur d’interface
pour iPod

Lors de la connexion de plus d’un appareil (maximum: trois), il est
recommandé que vous connectiez les appareils en série comme
nous l’expliquons ci-dessous.

When connecting two components in series / Lors de la connexion de deux appareils en série /
Последовательное подключение двух устройств

KS-U57

При подключении нескольких устройств (максимум: трех)
рекомендуется подключить устройства последовательно, как
описано ниже.

To disconnect the connector / Pour déconnecter le
connecteur / Отключение разъема

*10

CD changer jack / Konector CD changer / Разъем
устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков

Hold the connector tightly ( 1 ), then pull it out ( 2 ).

A
KS-BTA200 / KT-DB1000 *9
B*10 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

Tenez fermement le connecteur par-dessus ( 1 ) et tirez vers l’extérieur
( 2 ).
Крепко удерживая разъем ( 1 ), извлеките его ( 2 ).

When connecting three components in series / Lors de la connexion de trois appareils en série /
При подключении трех устройств последовательно

*10

CD changer jack / Konector CD changer / Разъем
устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков

A
KS-BTA200
B
KT-DB1000
C*10 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

*9 For KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.

*9 Pour le KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.

*9 Для KW-AVX726/KW-AVX725.

If KS-BTA200 is available, connect it to position A and connect
KT-DB1000 to position B.
*10 To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see
page 19 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

Si vous disposez du KS-BTA200, connectez-le à la position A et
connectez le KT-DB1000 à la position B.
*10 Pour utiliser ces appareils, réglez l’entrée extérieure correctement
(voir page 19 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).

Если устройство KS-BTA200 доступно, подключите его к A, а
устройство KT-DB1000 — к B.
*10 Чтобы использовать данные устройства, необходима
правильная настройка внешнего входа (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО
ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 19).

TROUBLESHOOTING

EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES

BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ

• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• Le fusible saute.
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?

• Сработал предохранитель.
* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?

• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?

• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?

• Питание не включается.
* Подключен ли желтый провод?

• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• Pas de son des enceintes.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?

• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.
* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода
громкоговорителей?

• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• Le son est déformé.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises
ensemble à la masse?

• Звук искажен.
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)
громкоговорителей?

• Interférence avec les sons.
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de
la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?

• Шум мешает звучанию.
* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси
автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?

• L’appareil devient chaud.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises
ensemble à la masse?

• Устройство нагревается.
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)
громкоговорителей?

• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?

• Приемник не работает.
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?

Install2_KW-AVX726_011A_f.indd 6

2/25/09 12:16:25 PM

ENGLISH

Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit

Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts

Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?
Réinitialisez votre appareil

Hebt u PROBLEMEN met de bediening?
Stel het apparaat terug
Zie de pagina met de paragraaf Het apparaat terugstellen
Dear Customer,
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic
compatibility and electrical safety.
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited
is:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
Germany

Cher(e) client(e),
Cet appareil est conforme aux directives et normes
européennes en vigueur concernant la compatibilité
électromagnétique et à la sécurité électrique.
Représentant européen de la société Victor Company of Japan,
Limited :
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
Allemagne

Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte Kundin,
dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen europäischen Richtlinien
und Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit
und elektrischer Sicherheit überein.
Die europäische Vertretung für die Victor Company of Japan,
Limited ist:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
Deutschland

Geachte klant,
Dit apparaat voldoet aan de geldende Europese normen en
richtlijnen inzake elektromagnetische compatibiliteit en
elektrische veiligheid.
De Europese vertegenwoordiger van Victor Company of Japan,
Limited is:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
Duitsland

CoverRear_KW-AVX720_001A_f.indd 1

0209DTSMDTJEIN

DVD-RECEIVER MIT MONITOR
RÉCEPTEUR DVD ET MONITEUR
DVD-RECEIVER MET MONITOR

KW-AVX720

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 12.
Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 12.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 12.
Zie bladzijde 12 voor het annuleren van de displaydemonstratie.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.
Bijzonderheden over de installatie en aansluiting van het apparaat vindt u in de desbetreffende handleiding.
KW-AVX720

EN, GE, FR, NL
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

DEUTSCH

Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück

NEDERLANDS FRANÇAIS

Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?

Instructions

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

INSTRUCTIONS
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

GET0603-001A
[E]

2/11/09 12:02:22 PM

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

WARNINGS:
(To prevent accidents and damage)
Battery
Products
Information for Users on Disposal of Old
Equipment and Batteries
[European Union only]
These symbols indicate that the product and the
battery with this symbol should not be disposed as
general household waste at its end-of-life.
If you wish to dispose of this product and the
battery, please do so in accordance with applicable
national legislation or other rules in your country
and municipality.
By disposing of this product correctly, you will help
to conserve natural resources and will help prevent
potential negative effects on the environment and
human health.
Notice:
The sign Pb below the symbol for batteries indicates
that this battery contains lead.

For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.

Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.

2
EN02-11_KW-AVX720_001A_2.indd 2

1/2/09 1:00:53 PM

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased (except the
registered Bluetooth device). (
28, 40)

How to forcibly eject a disc

ENGLISH

How to reset your unit

How to read this manual
Back

• You can forcibly eject the loaded disc even if the disc is
locked. To lock/unlock the disc,
32.
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.

• < > is used to indicate the variable screens/
menus/operations/settings that appear on the
touch panel.
• [ ] is used to indicate the buttons on the touch
panel.
•(
page number) is used to indicate the
reference page number of the related topics/
operations/settings.
• Operation index: To locate easily the desired
operations/functions. (
65)
• Indication language: English indications
are used for the purpose of explanation. You
can select the indication language from the
15)
<AV Menu>. (

For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided
with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on
the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will
help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.

3
EN02-11_KW-AVX720_001A_2.indd 3

1/2/09 1:00:54 PM

ENGLISH

Playable disc type
Disc type
DVD
• DTS sound cannot be
reproduced.

Recording format, file type, etc

Playable

DVD-Video (Region Code: 2) *

DVD-Audio/DVD-ROM
DVD Recordable/Rewritable
(DVD-R/-RW *2, +R/+RW *3)
• DVD Video: UDF bridge
• DVD-VR
• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/
MP3/WMA/WAV: ISO 9660 level
1, level 2, Romeo, Joliet

DVD-Video
DVD-VR
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
JPEG
MP3/WMA/WAV
AAC/MPEG4/DVD+VR/DVD-RAM

Dual Disc

DVD side

CD/VCD

Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA)

Caution for DualDisc playback

Caution on volume setting:

The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product
may not be recommended.

4
EN02-11_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 4

12/19/08 3:51:58 PM

3
3
3
4

INTRODUCTIONS
Basic operations .................................................................................................................................

6
9

ENGLISH

CONTENTS

USB operations .................................................................................................................................. 39
EXTERNAL DEVICES
Using the Bluetooth® devices............................................................................................................. 40
• Connecting a new Bluetooth device .......................................................................................................... 40
• Using the Bluetooth cellular phone ........................................................................................................... 41
• Using the Bluetooth audio player .............................................................................................................. 43

Listening to the CD changer ............................................................................................................... 43
Listening to the DAB tuner ................................................................................................................. 44
Listening to the iPod/iPhone ............................................................................................................. 45
• When connected with the USB cable ......................................................................................................... 45
• When connected with the interface adapter ............................................................................................. 46

49
50
59
63
65

5
EN02-11_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 5

12/19/08 5:50:13 PM

ENGLISH

Basic operations
Using the monitor panel/touch panel
Display <AV Menu> screen, (

USB cable from the rear of the unit, (

13)

Display the <Source Menu> screen, (

39)

Display/exit the Short Cut icons, (

SOURCE

MP3
FLAT

3:00

5
6

0:02:26

Folder Name
File Name
Track Title
Artist Name
Disc Title

1 Resets the unit (
3).
2 • Turns on the power.

3
4

• Attenuates the sound (if the power is on).
• Turns off the power. (Hold)
Changes the display information. *1
• Adjusts the volume.
• Bluetooth PHONE : Adjusts the volume of
the incoming calls. *2
Remote sensor
Touch panel (see the following pages).
• Most of the touch panel operations are explained
unless mentioned otherwise.
• The screen will turn off if no operation is
done for about 10 seconds (depends on the
<Illumination> setting). (
19)

7 Motion sensor
8 • Activates/deactivates TA Standby Reception. *3

• Displays <PTy Search> menu. (Hold)
9 • Selects the source. *4
TUNER = DAB = DISC (DVD/VCD/CD)
= USB/ iPod = CD-CH/iPod/EXT-IN
= Bluetooth PHONE = Bluetooth
AUDIO = AV-IN = (back to the beginning)

• Bluetooth PHONE : Displays the
<Dial Menu> screen. *5 (Hold)
*1 – *5 :

6
EN02-11_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 6

12/19/08 3:51:59 PM

• Switches the setting between “HEAD MODE” and
“iPod MODE” (Hold)
q • Displays <Open/Tilt> screen. *6
[Open] : Opens the monitor panel.
[Eject] : Ejects the disc.
[Close] : Closes the monitor panel.
[Tilt +] : Tilts open the monitor panel.
[Tilt –] : Tilts close the monitor panel.
• Ejects the disc and display <Open/Tilt>
screen. (Hold)
• Closes the monitor panel if the panel is opened.
w Monitor panel
*1 Available display information varies among the
playback sources. (
56)
*2 This adjustment does not affect the volume level of
other sources.
*3 The TP indicator lights up when activated; flashes
when the unit tune into another station providing
Radio Data System signals.
When a DAB tuner is connected, TA Standby Reception
also searches for DAB services.
*4 Available sources depend on the external components
you have connected, media you have attached, and
the <Input> settings you have made. ( 18)
*5 Only when Bluetooth phone is connected.
*6 Shaded items cannot be used.

You can also adjust the
volume by moving your
finger on the touch panel
as illustrated.

ENGLISH

p • Selects “USB/ iPod” as the source.

Continued on the next page

INTRODUCTIONS
EN02-11_KW-AVX720_001A_2.indd 7

12/30/08 11:51:01 AM

ENGLISH

<Source Menu> screen
You can also select the source using the touch panel.
SOURCE

Source Menu

TUNER

FM1

87. 5 MHz

Bayern Radio

FLAT
ST

Pop Music

3:00

AM
BAND

Current source

Exit

Short Cut icons
You can easily access some frequently used functions by using the Short Cut icons.
Available icons vary among the sources.

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

87. 5 MHz

Displays <Illumination> menu.

Bayern Radio

FLAT
ST

(

Pop Music

3:00

19)

Changes the sound mode. (

20)

AM
BAND

Short Cut window appears.
• To exit from the window, press the button again.

Turns on or off Track/Chapter Repeat.
(

23)

Displays <Aspect> menu. (

15)

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

Activates PTY Standby Reception.

87. 5 MHz

(

FLAT
ST

3:00

22)

Activates Announcement Standby
Reception. ( 23)
AM
BAND

Displays <PTy Search> menu.
(

Press a Short Cut icon.

31)

Activates <Voice Dialing> function.
(

Setup
Beep
Telephone Muting
Illumination
Motion Sensitiv.
Initialize

Normal
Proximity/Motion
Proxi/Motion-LCD
Touch Panel
Touch Panel - LCD

27)

Displays <Redial> menu. (

27)

Back

The corresponding screen is displayed.

8
EN02-11_KW-AVX720_001A_f.indd 8

2/4/09 9:13:45 AM

Using the remote controller (RM-RK252)
ENGLISH

Installing the batteries

R03/LR03/AAA

Insert the batteries into the remote controller by
matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

The following describes all the available operations
for all the sources.
• To easily locate the available operations between
different type of files,
35, 36.

button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 5/∞ buttons

• TUNER/DAB: Selects the preset stations/
services.

Continued on the next page

INTRODUCTIONS
EN02-11_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 9

12/19/08 3:52:01 PM

ENGLISH

3 VOL (volume) + / – buttons

• Adjusts the volume level.
• Bluetooth PHONE:
– Adjusts the volume of the incoming calls.
2nd VOL (volume) buttons
• Not applicable for this unit.
4 * ASPECT button

• Changes the aspect ratio of the playback
pictures.
5

PHONE button
Applicable only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected.
• Displays <Dial Menu> screen.
• Displays <Redial> menu if pressed and held.
• Answers incoming calls.

6 * SETUP button

• Not applicable for this unit.
7 * TOP M (menu) button

• DVD-Video: Shows the disc menu.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Original Program screen.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
8 OSD (on-screen display) button

• Shows the on-screen bar.
• Does not function as “*.”
9 SHIFT button

• Functions with other buttons.
p DISP (display) button

• Changes the display information.
q 1 / ¡ buttons

• DISC/USB/ iPod: Reverse search/forward
search.

10
EN02-11_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 10

12/19/08 3:52:01 PM

• Selects the source.
e 3 (play) / 8 (pause) button

• DISC/USB/ iPod : Starts playback/pauses.
• Bluetooth PHONE: Answers incoming calls.
• Bluetooth AUDIO: Starts playback.
r

(end call) button
• Bluetooth PHONE: Ends the call.
BAND button
• TUNER/DAB: Selects the bands.
7 (stop) button

• DISC/USB/ iPod : Stops playback.
• Bluetooth AUDIO: Pauses.
t * RETURN button

• VCD: Returns to the PBC menu.

o DIRECT button

ENGLISH

w SOURCE button

SURROUND button
• Not applicable for this unit.
* Functions as number buttons when pressed with SHIFT
button.
– DISC/USB : Enters chapter/title/program/playlist/
folder/track number after entering search mode by
36)
pressing SHIFT and DIRECT. (
– TUNER/DAB : (Number 1 to 6) : Enters preset
station/service number.

y * MENU button

• DVD-Video: Shows the disc menu.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Playlist screen.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
u * % / ﬁ buttons

• DVD-Video: Makes selection/settings.
• CD-CH: Changes discs in the magazine.
@ / # buttons

• DVD-Video: Makes selection/settings.
• DivX/MPEG Video: Skips back or forward by
about 5 minutes.
ENT (enter) button
• Confirms selection.
i DUAL button

• Not applicable for this unit.
• Does not function as “#.”

INTRODUCTIONS 11
EN02-11_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 11

12/19/08 3:52:02 PM

ENGLISH

Preparation
Canceling the display demonstration and setting the clock

~ Turn on the power.

@ Set the clock.
Setup
Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer

Ÿ Display <AV Menu> screen.

Bright
Blue
Once
Auto
6 PM

Dimmer Time Set

Auto
7 AM

Back
BAND

Setup

! Display <Setup> screen.

Time Set
Time Format
OSD Clock
Clock Adjust

AV Menu

1
12Hours
Off
Off

00 AM
24Hours
Auto

Back

Setup
Time Set
Time Format
OSD Clock
Clock Adjust

⁄ Cancel the demonstration.

45 PM

Select [Off].
Setup
Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer
Dimmer Time Set

Back
Metal
Blue
Once
Auto
18

Auto
7

¤ Finish the procedure.
Back

Back

12 INTRODUCTIONS
EN12-21_KW-AVX720_001A_3.indd 12

1/16/09 2:29:21 PM

You can use the <AV Menu> for most of the
operations and settings. The available menu items
shown on the touch panel, depends on the selected
source.
• Non-available items will be shaded.

! Press the desired icon/item to perform
the desired operations/settings.
Moves to the preceding
menu page

ENGLISH

AV Menu operations

Indicates the next hierarchy
level/setting item exists

Setup

The following steps are one of the fundamental
procedures.
• You can perform the operations/change the settings
by following these steps unless mentioned otherwise.

~ Turn on the power.

Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer
Dimmer Time Set

Bright
Blue
Once
Auto
18

Auto
7

Back

Returns to the previous
screen.

Ÿ Display <AV Menu> screen.

Indicates the remaining
time before the current
screen exit automatically.

Moves to the succeeding
menu page
BAND

• Some of the settings do not open the sub-setting
screen, but just selecting an option will change the
setting.
• To exit from the setting, press [Exit].

AV Menu

Setup
:
Equalizer :
Sound
:
Mode
:
List
:
Bluetooth :

14 – 19
20
21
22 – 24
25 – 26
27 – 29

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX720_001A_3.indd 13

1/16/09 2:29:23 PM

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

Menu item
Demonstration

Wall Paper

Selectable setting/item
♦ Off
♦ On

: Cancels.
: Activates the demonstration on the screen. To stop it
temporarily, touch the screen. (
12)

You can select the background picture of the screen.
♦ Bright, Future, Horizon, Plain

You can select the color of the background picture.
♦ Blue, Light-Blue, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Purple, Dark-Blue,
Dark-Green, Brown, Light-Brown, Black

Scroll

♦ Off
♦ Once
♦ Auto

: Cancels.
: Scrolls the displayed information once.
: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
• Touching the information bar scrolls the text regardless of the setting.

Dimmer

♦ Off
♦ On
♦ Auto
♦ Dimmer Time Set

Dimmer Time Set

Sets the Dimmer On (

Dimmer Level

You can select the brightness for dimmer.
♦ 01 (bright), 02 (middle), 03 (dark)

Bright

You can adjust the brightness of the screen.
♦ –15 to +15; Initial 00

Picture Adjust *2

Display

Color

♦ Bright
♦ Contrast
♦ Color
♦ Tint

:
:
:
:

Cancels.
Activates dimmer.
Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights. *1
Activates the Dimmer Time setting (see below).
)/Off (

:
:
:
:

) times.

14
EN12-21_KW-AVX720_001A_f.indd 14

2/11/09 2:07:41 PM

Menu item

You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.

ENGLISH

Aspect *3

Selectable setting/item

Aspect ratio of the incoming signal
4:3

16:9

Regular:
For 4:3 original pictures
Full:
For 16:9 original pictures

Display

Panorama:
For viewing 4:3 pictures
naturally on the wide screen

Clock

Auto:

• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is automatically
selected to match the incoming signals.
• For the other video sources: Aspect ratio is
fixed to <Regular>.

Language *4

Time Set

Initial 0:00

Time Format

Select either 12-hour system or 24-hour system. (
♦ 12 Hours, 24 Hours; Initial 24 Hours

OSD Clock

♦ Off
♦ On

: Cancels.
: The clock time is displayed on the playback picture.

Clock Adjust

♦ Auto

: The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT
(clock time) data in the Radio Data System signal.
: Cancels.

♦ Off

12)

*3 Not adjustable when no picture is shown.
*4 Turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX720_001A_f.indd 15

15
2/4/09 9:15:08 AM

ENGLISH

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

Menu Language *5

Select the menu language; Initial English (

57)

Select the audio language; Initial English (

57)

Audio Language *
Subtitle *5

Select the subtitle language or erase the subtitle <Off>.;
Initial English (
57)

Monitor Type *5
16:9

4:3LB

Disc

4:3PS

OSD Position *5

Select the position of the on-screen bar. (
♦1
: Higher position.
♦2
: Lower position.

File Type *5

Select the playback file type when a disc/USB contains different types of
files. You can store this setting separately for each source—
“DISC/USB.”
♦ Audio
: Plays back audio files.
♦ Still Picture
: Plays back JPEG files.
♦ Video
: Plays back DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.
♦ Audio&Video
: Plays back audio files and DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
files.

DivX Regist.
(Registration) *5

This unit has its own Registration Code. Once you have played back a file
with which the Registration Code recorded, this unit’s Registration Code
is overwritten for copyright protection.

iPod Artwork *6

While playing back a track (in “HEAD MODE”), Artwork recorded for the
track is displayed on the monitor.
♦ Off
: Cancels.
♦ On
: Activates Artwork display. To display the
artwork, press DISP repeatedly.
• It takes 5 seconds or more to display an
Artwork and no operations are available
while loading it.

38)

*5 Selectable only for “DISC/USB.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
*6 Skip the track so that your setting takes effect.

16
EN12-21_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 16

12/19/08 3:49:09 PM

Disc

Selectable setting/item

D. (Digital) Audio
Output *7

Down Mix *7

When playing back a multi-channel disc, this setting affects the signals
reproduced through the LINE OUT jacks.
♦ Dolby Surr.
: Select this to enjoy multi-channel surround audio
by connecting an amplifier compatible with Dolby
Surround.
♦ Stereo
: Normally select this.

D. (Dynamic)
Range Compres.
(Compression) *7

You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing Dolby
Digital software.
♦ Auto
: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded
software.
♦ On
: Select to always use this function.

IF Band Width

♦ Auto

Tuner

♦ Wide

AF Regional

ENGLISH

Menu item

*7 Selectable only for “DISC/USB.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 17

12/19/08 3:49:10 PM

Selectable setting/item

TA Volume

Program
Search *9

DAB AF *10

AV Input *11

You can determine the use of LINE IN and VIDEO IN jacks. (
47)
♦ Off
: Select when no component is connected (“AV-IN” is
skipped while selecting the source).
♦ iPod (Off)
: Select when connecting the iPod/iPhone using the USB
Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone. (
45)
♦ Audio&Video : Select when connecting an AV component such as a VCR.
♦ Audio
: Select when connecting an audio component such as a
portable audio player.
♦ Camera *12
: Select when connecting a rear view camera to display the
picture (as it is taken).
♦ Navigation
48)
: Select when connecting a Navigation System. (

Input

Tuner

ENGLISH

Menu item

*8 Depends on the amplifier gain control settings.
*9 The unit takes some time to tune in to another station using programme search.
*10 Appears only when DAB tuner is connected.
*11 Not selectable when “AV-IN” is selected as the source.
*12 The REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual. The rear view through
the camera appears on the screen in <Full> aspect ratio (regardless of the aspect ratio setting) when you shift the
gear to the reverse (R) position. When you press DISP on the monitor panel, or when you shift the gear to another
position other than the reverse (R) position, the rear view screen is cleared.

18
EN12-21_KW-AVX720_001A_3.indd 18

1/16/09 2:31:10 PM

Menu item

Selectable setting/item
♦ Changer/iPod *15

ENGLISH

External Input *13, *14 For connecting an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear.
43), iPod, (
46).
: CD changer, (
: Any other than the above, (
48).

Beep

♦ Off
♦ On

: Cancels.
: Activates the key-touch tone.

Telephone Muting *16

♦ Off
♦ Muting1,

: Cancels.
: Select either one which mutes the sounds while
using the cellular phone.

Illumination

You can turn off the screen and the light of the buttons on the monitor panel
while turning on the unit. (
7)

Input

♦ External

Muting2

Others

Buttons on the
monitor panel

Motion Sensitiv.

Screen

Normal:

Always lights.

Proximity/Motion:

Lights up when your
hand moves close to
the buttons.

Always lights.

Proxi/Motion-LCD:

Lights up when your
hand moves close to
the buttons.

Touch Panel:

Lights up when your
Always lights.
finger touches the
buttons or touch panel.

Touch Panel-LCD:

Lights up when your
Lights up when your
finger touches the
finger touches the
buttons or touch panel. buttons or touch panel.

Change the sensitivity of the sensor for <Illumination> above.
♦ Low, Mid, High

Initialize

Initialize all settings you have made in <AV Menu>. Press and hold [Enter]
to initialize the settings, then reset the unit. (
3)

*13 Not required for Bluetooth adapter and DAB tuner. They are automatically detected.
*14 Not selectable when the component connected to the CD changer jack is selected as the source.
*15 The name of the component detected through the CD changer jack is shown.
*16 The TEL MUTING lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual.

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX720_001A_f.indd 19

2/11/09 11:51:48 AM

ENGLISH

Selects a preset sound mode suitable to the music
genre.
♦ Flat (Initial), Hard Rock, R&B, Pop, Jazz, Dance,
Country, Reggae, Classic, User1, User2, User3

Adjust the settings, then store.
Equalizer

Display <AV Menu> screen.
BAND

Back

Display <Equalizer> screen.

Edit

Make adjustments by moving each bar directly.

AV Menu
User Store
User1
User2
User3

Back

Select a sound mode.

Ex.: When storing into <User2>.

Equalizer

Moves to the other 6 sound modes.
Ex.: When <Hard Rock> is selected

Storing your own adjustments
You can store your adjustments into <User1>,
<User2>, and <User3>.

Perform steps 1 and 2 above to enter the
<Equalizer> screen.

Flat

15 kHz

6.3 kHz

2.5 kHz

1 kHz

Sound
mode

400 Hz

Edit

150 Hz

Back

60 Hz

Preset equalizing values

00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Hard Rock

+03 +03 +01 00 00 +02 +01

R&B

+03 +02 +02 00 +01 +01 +03

Pop

00 +02 00 00 +01 +01 +02

Jazz

+03 +02 +01 +01 +01 +03 +02

Dance

+04 +02 00 –02 –01 +01 +01

Country

+02 +01 00 00 00 +01 +02

Reggae

+03 00 00 +01 +02 +02 +03

Classic

+02 +03 +01 00 00 +02 00

User1/2/3

00 00 00 00 00 00 00

20
EN12-21_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 20

12/19/08 3:49:12 PM

Menu item
Fader/Balance

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

Reset
Fader
0
Balance 0

Back

Volume Adjust *1

Subwoofer Level

Adjust and store the auto-adjustment volume level for each source, comparing
to the FM volume level. The volume level will automatically increase or decrease
when you change the source.
• <Fix> appears if “ TUNER/Bluetooth PHONE” is selected as the source.
♦ –12 to +12; Initial 00
Adjust the subwoofer output level.
♦ –06 to +08; Initial 00

High Pass Filter

♦ Through
♦ On

Crossover

Select the crossover frequency between the front/rear speakers and the
subwoofer.
♦ 80Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz

Amplifier Gain *2

: Select when the subwoofer is not connected.
: Select when the subwoofer is connected.

*1 For “ DISC/USB”: You can make the adjustments separately depending on the audio format—Dolby digital/MPEG
Audio and the others.
*2 The volume level automatically changes to “VOL 30” if you change to <Low> with the volume level set higher than
“VOL 30.”

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 21

12/19/08 3:49:12 PM

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined
Selectable items when the source is:
• TUNER
: Mono, SSM, PTy Standby, PTy Code
• DAB
: D. (Dynamic) Range Control, Announce Standby, Announce Code,
PTy Standby, PTy Code
• DISC, USB, CD-CH, iPod : Repeat, Random
• iPod *1
: Repeat, Random, Audiobooks
• AV-IN, EXT-IN
: Title Entry

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

Mono

SSM (Strong-station
Sequential Memory)

You can automatically preset 6 stations for each FM band.
• Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the
FM band.
Mode
Mono
SSM
PTy Standby
PTy Code

Start
News

Back

PTy Standby

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to your favorite PTY
programme from any source other than AM.
When a DAB tuner is connected, PTY Standby Reception also searches for DAB services.
♦ ON
: Activate PTY Standby Reception. (The PTY indicator lights up; flashes
when the unit tune in to another station providing the Radio Data
System signals.)
♦ OFF
: Cancels.

PTy Code

You can change the PTY code (

50) for PTY Standby Reception.

Mode

Back

*1 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” (

45)

22
EN22-29_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 22

12/19/08 3:49:27 PM

Selectable setting/item

D. (Dynamic)
Some DAB services provide Dynamic Range Control (DRC) signals together with their regular
Range Control programme signals. DRC will reinforce the low level sounds to improve your listening when the
surrounding sounds are noisy.
• The DRC indicator will light up while tuning in to a service with the DRC signals.
As the number increases, the effect becomes stronger.
♦ OFF/DRC 1/DRC 2/DRC 3
Announce
Standby

Announcement Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to your favorite DAB
service (announcement type) from any source other than FM/AM.
♦ ON
: Activate Announce Standby Reception. (The ANN indicator lights up; flashes
when the unit tune in to another service providing the related signals.)
♦ OFF
: Cancels.

Announce
Code

You can change the announcement type for Announcement Standby Reception.

ENGLISH

Menu item

Mode

♦ Transport News, Warning,

News, Weather, Event, Special
Event, Radio Info, Sports
News, Financial News
Back

Available items depend on the loaded disc type and playback file.
iPod

—

iPod

—

MP3

CD-CH

JPEG

VCD/CD

USB

JPEG

DVD-VR

Repeat

DVD-Video

DISC
Disc/file type

MPEG/MP3/
WMA/WAV

Source

DivX/MPEG/
MP3/WMA/
WAV

Repeat*2

Chapter
Title
Program
Disc
Folder
Track
One
All
Off

♦ Chapter
♦ Title
♦ Program
♦ Disc
♦ Folder
♦ Track
♦ One
♦ All
♦ Off

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

*2 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” (

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN22-29_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 23

12/19/08 3:49:29 PM

Available items depend on the loaded disc type and playback file.
iPod *4

—

iPod

—

CD-CH

MP3

Random

USB

DISC
Disc/file type

MPEG/MP3/
WMA/WAV

Source

VCD/CD

Random*3

Selectable setting/item

DivX/MPEG/
MP3/WMA/
WAV

ENGLISH

Menu item

Folder
Disc/USB (All)
All
Song
Album
Off

♦ Folder
♦ Disc/USB

: Randomly plays all tracks of the current folder, then tracks of the next folders.
: Randomly plays all tracks. (For VCD: When PBC is not in used.)

(All)
♦ All
♦ Song
♦ Album
♦ Off

:
:
:
:

Randomly plays all tracks of all loaded discs.
Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” *5 of the iPod.
Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of the iPod.
Cancels.

Audiobooks*3 You can select the playback speed of the “Audiobook” audio file in your iPod.
♦ Normal
: Plays at normal speed.
♦ Faster
: Plays faster.
♦ Slower
: Plays slower.
Title Entry

You can assign titles (up to 16 characters) to AV-IN and EXT-IN. (For available characters,
56.)
Press [Enter] to show the <Title Entry> screen.
[Store]
: Confirm the entry.
: Move the cursor.
[2/3]
[BS]
: Erase the character before
@
the cursor.
;
[Del]
: Erase the character on the
/
cursor.
Back
[Cap]
: Change the letter case
(upper/lower).
[A = 0 = Ä] : Change the character set.
[Space]
: Enter a space.

*3 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” ( 45)
*4 Not applicable for video file.
*5 You can activate <Shuffle Songs> in <Search Mode> menu. (

26)

24
EN22-29_KW-AVX720_001A_3.indd 24

1/16/09 2:31:33 PM

TUNER/DAB

ENGLISH

Source

Operation/setting
• Storing a preset station/service manually
1 Press [BAND], then [ / ] to tune in to the station you want to preset.
2 Select <List> from the <AV Menu>.
3 Press and hold a preset number.
List
FM1
FM2
FM3

Ex.:
Storing FM station in to preset
number 4

Back

The station selected in step 1 is now stored in preset number 4.
• Selecting a preset station/service on the list
List
FM1
FM2
FM3

Ex.:
Selecting a preset FM station

Back

DISC/USB

0005/0035

0003/0099
Track001.mp3
Track002.mp3
Track003.mp3
Track004.mp3
Track005.mp3
Track006.mp3

total folder list number
2 Current track list number/total

track list number of the
current folder
* Press: Skips the list up or down.
Drag: Scrolls the list up or down.

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN22-29_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 25

12/19/08 3:49:30 PM

ENGLISH

Source
Bluetooth PHONE

Operation/setting
Selecting a preset phone number on the list to make a call
List
Phone Number

Back

CD-CH

Selecting a disc on the list
Disc List
Disc 01

Disc 04

Disc 02

MP3 Disc

Disc 03

Disc 06

If an MP3 disc is selected, Folder/
Track List appear. Select a track to
start playback.

Back

To go to the other list

iPod *

Selecting a track/video from <Search Mode>
♦ Music : Playlists, Artists, Albums,

Search Mode
Music
Videos
Shuffle Songs

Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres

Songs, Podcasts, Genres, Composers,
Audiobooks
♦ Videos : Video Playlists, Movies,
Music Videos, TV shows, Video
Podcasts
♦ Shuffle Songs : Playback starts if
this is selected.

0003/0099

Current track (video) number/total track
(video) number

Back

List
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres

Track 01
Track 02
Track 03
Track 04
Track 05
Track 06

Back

* Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” (

45)

26
EN22-29_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 26

12/19/08 3:49:31 PM

ENGLISH

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO” as the source for operations.
• Firstly, use <Open> or <Search> to register and establish the connection with a device.

Menu item
Dial Menu *1

Back

♦ Voice Dialing

Message *2

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN22-29_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 27

12/19/08 3:49:31 PM

ENGLISH

Menu item
Open

• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to 16-digit number).
PIN Code

Back

You can enter [0] – [9] only.
[BS] : Erases the character
before the cursor.
[Del] : Erases the character on
the cursor.
[Enter] : Confirms the entry.

3 Operate the Bluetooth device to connect while “Open...” is displayed on the screen.

Preparation:
• Make sure “NEW DEVICE” is selected. If not, press [ 5 ] or [ ∞ ] to select it.
1 Press <Search> on the <Bluetooth> menu.

28
EN22-29_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 28

12/19/08 3:49:32 PM

Selectable setting/item

Special Device

Connect

Only for the registered devices.
Select a device from the list of registered devices, establish the connection with it.

Disconnect

Only for the connected devices.
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device.

Delete Pairing

Only for the registered devices.
Press <Yes> to confirm delete the registered devices.

Settings
Initial: Underlined

Auto Connect *4

Auto Answer *5

♦ Off
♦ On
♦ Reject

Message Info *

♦ Auto

♦ Manual

ENGLISH

Menu item

: The unit does not answer the calls automatically.
Answer the calls manually.
: The unit answers the incoming calls
automatically.
: The unit rejects all incoming calls.
: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message
by ringing and displaying “Receiving Message.”
To read the message,
42.
: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a
message.

MIC Setting *5

Adjust the volume of the microphone connected to the Bluetooth
adapter.
♦ 01/02/03

Version

The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are shown.

*4 Selectable only for “ Bluetooth PHONE.”
*5 Only for the cellular phone connected for “ Bluetooth PHONE.” Not selectable when “NEW DEVICE” is selected.

AV MENU
EN22-29_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 29

12/19/08 3:49:32 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the radio
Preset number
SOURCE

TUNER

Band
Sound mode

FM1

87. 5 MHz

PS (station name) for
FM Radio Data System. *

Bayern Radio

FLAT
ST

Pop Music

Tuner/Standby
Reception indicator

3:00

PTY code for FM Radio
Data System

BAND

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [TUNER].
Ÿ Press [BAND].
! Press [ ] or [ ] to search for a
station—Auto Search.

• The ST indicator lights up when receiving an
FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal
strength.
* If no PS signal comes in, “No Name” appears.

• Manual Search: Hold either [ ]or [ ] until
“Manual Search” appears on the screen, then
press it repeatedly.

Selecting a preset station

Changing the display information

• Directly from the touch panel

(

56)

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

3:00

87. 5 MHz

ABC Radio

FLAT
ST

• To improve the FM reception,
22.
• To automatically preset stations into memory,
22.
• To manually preset stations into memory,
25.

AM
BAND

You can also select a preset station using the remote
controller (
9) and from the Preset List (
25).

You can display the Preset List by pressing [
holding [5/∞].

] or

30
EN30-37_KW-AVX720_001A_f.indd 30

2/12/09 5:40:18 PM

Searching for FM Radio Data
System programme—PTY Search

Storing your favorite programme types
You can store your favorite PTY codes into the PTY
Preset List.
Ex.: Storing <Drama> into <Preset 1>

You can search for your favorite programmes being
broadcast by selecting the PTY code of your favorite
programmes.

ENGLISH

The following features are available only for FM
Radio Data System stations.

PTy Search
Preset
PTy Code

Display <PTy Search> menu.

Enter
Enter

Back
PTy Search
Preset
PTy Code

Enter
Enter

PTy Memory
Preset1
Preset2
Preset3
Preset4
Preset5
Preset6

Back

Select a PTY code.
In the example below, a PTY code is selected from
the Preset List.
If you enter <PTy Code> menu below, you can
select one from 29 PTY codes. (
50)

PTy Memory
Preset1
Preset2
Preset3
Preset4
Preset5
Preset6

PTy Search
Preset
PTy Code

Pop Music
Rock Music
Easy Listening
Serious
Classics
Enter
Current
Affairs
Enter
Varied Speech

Enter
Enter

News
Current Affairs
Information
Sports
Enter
Education
Enter
Drama
Enter

Back

2
Back

PTy Search
Preset
PTy Code

Back

PTY Search starts.
If there is a station broadcasting a programme
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that
station is tuned in.

• To activate/deactivate PTY Standby Reception,
22.
• To change the PTY code for PTY Standby
Reception,
22.
• To trace the same programme—NetworkTracking Reception,
17.
• To automatically select station—Programme
Search,
18.

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 31

12/19/08 3:48:14 PM

ENGLISH

~ Open the monitor panel.

! Insert a disc.
Label side

<Open/Tilt> menu is displayed.
• By pressing and holding the button, you can
open the monitor panel and eject the disc.

Open/Tilt

Monitor panel closes automatically.
If not, press [Close].

Caution:
Do not place your finger behind the monitor panel.

Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

• To select the playback mode,
23, 24.
25.
• To select tracks on the list,

Back

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure to select <EJECT OK?>.
• Discs can be forcibly ejected. (
3)

32
EN30-37_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 32

12/19/08 3:48:14 PM

Changing the display information

ENGLISH

Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different
information. (
56)

Ex.: While playing a DVD Video

SOURCE

DVD
FLAT
CHAP. RPT

3:00

1 Audio format—Dolby Digital, MP3, WMA, WAV
2 Disc type—DVD, DVD-VR, VCD, CD
3 Video format—DivX, MPEG, VR-PRG (program),

VR-PLAY (playlist), PBC
4 [5 / ∞]

6
7
8
9

• DVD Video/DVD-VR: Selects title/program/
playlist.
• DivX/MPEG/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV:
– Selects folder
– Displays Folder/Track List (Hold)
• DVD Video: Title no./Chapter no./Playing time
• DVD-VR: Program no. (or Playlist no.)/Chapter
no./Playing time
• DivX/MPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV: Folder no./Track
no./Playing time
• JPEG: Folder no./Track no.
• VCD/CD: Track no./Playing time
[6 ]
Starts playback/pauses
Indicates the button pressed ( / 8 / 7 )
Sound mode (
20)
Playback mode (
23, 24)

p Disc/track information

Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-AVX720_001A_f.indd 33

33
2/4/09 9:16:10 AM

ENGLISH

[SOURCE]
[5 ∞]
[3 / 8]
[4 ¢]
Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch [KEY].

To end the operations, touch the screen again.

34
EN30-37_KW-AVX720_001A_3.indd 34

1/16/09 2:32:11 PM

Operations using the remote controller (RM-RK252)

Stop play

ENGLISH

Button

Stop play

Start play/Pause (if pressed during play)

• DivX/MPEG: Start play/Pause (if pressed
during play)
• JPEG: • Start play (Slide show: Each file is
shown for a few seconds.)
• Pause (if pressed during play).
• Reverse/forward chapter search *1 (No sound can • DivX/MPEG: Reverse/forward track
be heard.)
search *4 (No sound can be heard.)
• Slow motion *2 during pause (No sound can be
heard.)
– DVD-VR: Reverse slow motion does not work.
• DivX/MPEG: • Select track
• Select chapter (during play or pause)
• Reverse/fast-forward track
• Reverse/fast-forward chapter search *3 (No
sound can be heard.) (Hold)
search *5 (No sound can be
heard.) (Hold)
• JPEG:
Select file
• DVD-Video: Select title (during play or pause)
Select folder
• DVD-VR: • Select program
• Select playlist (during play or pause)
• DivX/MPEG: Skip back or forward the
scenes by about 5 minutes
Select aspect ratio

—
Select aspect ratio
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5

Search speed:
Slow motion speed:
Search speed:
Search speed:
Search speed:

Using menu driven features... (DVD Video)

Canceling the PBC playback... (VCD)

1 Enter the menu screen.

During stop...

2 Select an item you want to start play.
2

Number buttons
(0 – 9)

• To resume PBC, press TOP M/MENU.
Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 35

12/19/08 3:48:17 PM

ENGLISH

Button
Stop play

Stop play

Start play/Pause (if pressed
Start play/Pause (if pressed
during play)
during play)
Reverse/forward track search *6 Reverse/forward track search *6

• Select track
• Reverse/fast-forward track
search *8 (Hold)

Select folder
—
Select aspect ratio

—

* Search speed:
*7 Slow motion speed:
*8 Search speed:

Searching for an item directly
1 While holding SHIFT, press DIRECT repeatedly to

select the desired search mode.
DVD-Video:
DVD-VR:
DivX/MPEG:
JPEG:
MP3/WMA/
WAV:

2 While holding SHIFT, press the number buttons (0

– 9) to enter the desired number.
3 Press ENT (enter) to confirm.

VCD/CD:

36
EN30-37_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 36

12/19/08 3:48:18 PM

Operations using the
on-screen bar

1 Display the Original Program screen.

Display the Playlist screen.

2 Select an item you want to start play.

(DVD/DVD-VR/DivX/MPEG/JPEG/VCD)
These operations are possible on the monitor using the
remote controller.

Show the on-screen bar (

ENGLISH

Using the list screens... (DVD-VR)

38).

(twice)

Select an item.

Make a selection.

Original Program/Playlist screen
• Original Program

If pop-up menu appears...

• To cancel pop-up menu, press RETURN.
• For entering time/numbers, see the following.
• Playlist

1 Original Program/Playlist number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of
4
5
6
7
8
9

* The title of the original program or playlist may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.

Removing the on-screen bar

Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 37

12/19/08 3:48:19 PM

ENGLISH

On-screen bar
Ex.: DVD-Video

Information
Operation

1 Disc type
2 • DVD-Video: Audio signal format type and

23, 24.

38
EN38-49_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 38

12/19/08 3:48:37 PM

ENGLISH

USB operations

USB cable from the rear of the unit

Changing the display information
(

56)

OPERATIONS
EN38-49_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 39

12/19/08 3:48:40 PM

ENGLISH

Make the unit ready to establish a new Bluetooth connection. The connection is established by
operating the Bluetooth device.

Make the unit ready to establish a new Bluetooth connection. The connection is established by
operating this unit.

• To register a device using <Open> or <Search>,
• To connect a special device,
29.
• To connect/disconnect/delete a device,
29.

28.

Changing the display information
(

56)

Bluetooth Information:
If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/> (English website only).

40
EN38-49_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 40

12/19/08 3:48:41 PM

Status of the device
• Signal strength/Battery remainder (only when
the information comes from the device).

[5 / ∞]: Selects the
other registered device.

Connected device name
• When a cellular phone with audio function is
registered/connected, appears.

SOURCE

Connected Device Name

FLAT

3:00

ENGLISH

Using the Bluetooth cellular phone

Activates <Voice Dialing> Display <Dial Menu> screen.
function. (Hold)
• Appears on any source information screen
when the Bluetooth adapter is connected.

Bluetooth icon
• Lights up when the Bluetooth adapter
is connected.

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth PHONE].
Ÿ Press [ ].
! Press [Bluetooth].
⁄ Establish the connection with a device, then make a call (or settings using <Bluetooth>
menu). (

27 – 29)

When a call comes in...
The source is changed to “ Bluetooth PHONE”
automatically.

To end the call
• Hold the message displayed on the touch panel.
• Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or VOL +/–).
• You can adjust the microphone volume,

29.

Name and phone number (if acquired)

When <Auto Answer> is activated...
The unit answers the incoming call automatically.
(
29)

To make a call, use <Dial Menu>. (

27)

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 41

12/19/08 3:48:42 PM

ENGLISH

When an SMS comes in...
If the cellular phone is compatible with SMS (Short
Message Service), you can read the messages on the
screen.
• You cannot edit or send a message through the unit.

Presetting the phone
numbers
You can preset up to 6 phone numbers.

When <Message Info> is set to <Auto>...
The unit rings and the following screen is displayed to
inform you of a message arrival. (
29)

Select the phone number you want to
preset from <Phonebook>, <Redial>,
<Received Calls>, or <Missed Calls>.
(

2
Device Name
Receiving Message
Jack

27)

Select a telephone number to store.
Dial Menu

Read ?
Yes

No
Back

Select a preset number.
Dial Menu

Back

Now “Tom” is stored into preset no. 1.

To stop ringing (canceling the outgoing call)

To call a preset number,

26.

Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or VOL +/–).

42
EN38-49_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 42

12/19/08 3:48:43 PM

Using the Bluetooth audio player
ENGLISH

Indicates the button pressed.
• It may be different from the operation status.

Starts playback/pause
SOURCE

Connected Device Name

FLAT

3:00

[5 / ∞]: Selects the
other registered device.

[4 / ¢]: Reverse/
forward search

Stops playback

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth AUDIO].
Ÿ Start playback.
If playback does not start automatically, operate the Bluetooth audio player to start playback.

19)

Ex.: While playing an MP3 disc
• [4 / ¢]: Selects track
• [4 / ¢]: Reverse/forward search (Hold) [5 / ∞]: Displays Disc List.
DISC 1

SOURCE

CD-CH
FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

Current Folder Name
Current File Name.mp3
Current Track Title
Artist Name
Album Title

Tag data (if it is recorded)

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [CD-CH].
Ÿ Press [ ].
! Press [List].

Folder no./Track no./Playing time

⁄ Select a disc to start playing.
To select the playback mode,

23, 24.

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 43

12/19/08 3:48:43 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the DAB tuner
Preset number
SOURCE

Band

DAB

Sound mode
DAB indicators */
Standby Reception
indicator

DAB1 1 1475.216MHz LN
Service Label

FLAT

If no signal is received,
“No DAB Signal”
appears.

DRC

3:00

AM
BAND

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [DAB].
Ÿ Press [BAND].
! Press [ ] or [ ] to search for an ensemble—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [
repeatedly.

]or [

] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it

⁄ Press [5 SERVICE] or [SERVICE ∞] to select a service (either primary or secondary) to
listen to.
* While tuning in a service with DLS (Dynamic Label Segment), the TEXT indicator lights up.

23.
To improve your listening when the surrounding sounds are noisy,
To manually preset services into memory,
25.
To select a preset service,
25.
To activate/deactivate TA/PTY Standby Reception,
6, 22.
(You cannot store PTY codes separately for the DAB tuner and the FM tuner.)
• To activate/deactivate Announcement Standby Reception,
23.
• To change the announcement type for Announcement Standby Reception,
• To trace the same programme—Alternative Frequency Reception (DAB AF),

•
•
•
•

23.
18.

44
EN38-49_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 44

12/19/08 3:48:44 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the iPod/iPhone
You can connect the iPod/iPhone using the following cable or adapter:

To
Listen to the
music

Cable/adapter

To operate

USB 2.0 cable (accessory of the iPod/iPhone) to the
USB cable from the rear of the unit.

See “When connected with the USB
cable” below.

Interface Adapter for iPod, KS-PD100 (not supplied)
to the CD changer jack on the rear of the unit.

See “When connected with the interface
adapter” on page 46.

Watch the video USB Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone, KS-U30
(not supplied) to the USB cable from the rear of the
unit.

See “When connected with the USB
cable” below.
• Make sure <iPod (Off)> is selected
18.
for <AV Input>,

18)

Starts playback/pause

SOURCE

Indicates the controlling
unit for playback

HEAD MODE

iPod

FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

Current Track Title
Artist Name
Album Title

• [4 / ¢]: Selects a track/video
• [4 / ¢]:Reverse/forward search (Hold)

Track no./Playing time Stops playback

*1 [5 / ∞] may not function depending on how you select the current track/video.
*2 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.”

Continued on the next page

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-AVX720_001A_2.indd 45

1/2/09 10:11:41 AM

ENGLISH

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod

The following operations/settings are only
available in “HEAD MODE.”
• To display the <iPod Artwork>,
16.
• To select track/video from <Search Mode>,
26.
• To select the playback mode,
23, 24.
• To change the play speed of the audio books,
24.

Playback starts automatically.
• When you connect the iPod to the USB
terminal, “ iPod” is selected as the source
and playback starts automatically.

Ÿ Press [4] or [¢] to select a track/
video.
You cannot resume playback for video sources.

When connected with the interface adapter
Enters main menu

Track no./Playing time

SOURCE

iPod
FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

• [4 / ¢]: Selects tracks
• [4 / ¢]: Reverse/forward search (Hold)

Song Name
Artist Name
Album Title

Starts playback/pause

Preparation:
Make sure <iPod> is selected for <External Input>. (

19)

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod].
Playback starts automatically.

Press [4] or [¢] to select a track.

46
EN38-49_KW-AVX720_001A_f.indd 46

2/4/09 9:16:52 AM

Press [4] or [¢] to select the desired
item.

Press [3 / 8] to confirm the selection.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a track.
• When a track is selected finally, playback starts.
• To return to the previous menu, press [SEARCH].

Press [SEARCH] to enter the main menu.
“SEARCH” flashes on the screen during menu
operations.
• This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about 5 seconds.

3
4

ENGLISH

Selecting a track from the main
menu

23, 24.

To select the playback mode,

Changing the display information

• Skips 10 items at a time if there are more than
10 items. (Hold)

(

56)

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs
Ô Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the
beginning)

Using other external components
AV-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN/VIDEO IN jacks.
Assigned title (

24)

SOURCE

AV-IN
FLAT

3:00

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN].
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
To display the operation buttons while watching the playback picture,

34.

Continued on the next page

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 47

12/19/08 3:48:46 PM

ENGLISH

Navigation screen
You can also connect a Navigation System to the VIDEO IN jack so that you can watch the navigation screen.
Preparation:
Make sure <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>. (

18)

To view the navigation screen
Press DISP on the monitor panel repeatedly. (

56)

• The aspect ratio of the navigation screen is fixed to <Full> regardless of the <Aspect> setting. (

15)

When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input> (
18)
• You can use the source “AV-IN” for listening to an audio source connected to the LINE IN jacks.

EXT-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter, KS-U57 (not
supplied) or AUX Input Adapter, KS-U58 (not supplied).
Assigned title (

24)

Preparation:
Make sure <External> is selected for <External Input>. (

19)

SOURCE

EXT-IN
FLAT

3:00

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [EXT-IN].
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
Changing the display information
(

56)

EXTERNAL DEVICES

EN38-49_KW-AVX720_001A_3.indd 48

1/16/09 2:37:08 PM

Caution on cleaning the unit
Do not use any solvent (for example, thinner, benzine,
etc.), detergent, or insecticide. This may damage the
monitor or the unit.

ENGLISH

Maintenance

To play new discs
Recommended cleaning method:
Gently wipe the panel with a soft, dry cloth.

Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)

Warped disc

Sticker and sticker residue

Stick-on label

Unusual shape

C-thru Disc (semitransparent disc)

Transparent or semitransparent parts on its
recording area

REFERENCES 49
EN38-49_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 49

12/19/08 3:48:46 PM

ENGLISH

More about this unit
General
Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the monitor panel, you
can also turn on the power. If the source is ready,
playback starts.

Tuner (FM only)
Storing stations in memory
• When SSM is over, received stations are preset in no.
1 (lowest frequency) to no. 6 (highest frequency).

FM Radio Data System operations
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types
of Radio Data System signals—PI (Programme
Identification) and AF (Alternative Frequency)
to work correctly. Without receiving these data
correctly, Network-Tracking Reception will not
operate correctly.
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby
Reception, the volume level automatically changes
to the preset level (TA Volume) if the current level is
lower than the preset level.
• Tracing the same programme—NetworkTracking Reception:
When driving in an area where FM reception is not
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to
another FM Radio Data System station of the same
network, possibly broadcasting the same programme
with stronger signals.
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas
(01 – 05)

Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down or has no
playable files, “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen. Eject the disc.

50
EN50-57_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 50

12/19/08 3:51:39 PM

Playing JPEG files

Playing DVD-VR

Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files

• For details about DVD-VR format and playlist, refer
to the instructions supplied with the recording
equipment.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN50-57_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 51

ENGLISH

Playing Recordable/Rewritable discs

12/19/08 3:51:40 PM

ENGLISH

Disc/file information shown on the
external monitor

• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV

The following screens appear only on the external
monitor.
• CD
TIME

T. RPT

Track Information
Album
Four seasons
Artist
Robert M. Smith
Title
Rain

00:14

Track : 6 / 14
Cloudy
Fair
Fog
Hail
Indian summer
Rain
Shower
Snow
Thunder
Typhoon
Wind
Winter sky

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
p

* If tag data includes “Jacket Picture” (baseline JPEG), it
will be displayed.

52
EN50-57_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 52

12/19/08 3:51:41 PM

ENGLISH

USB operations
• If “No USB Device“ appears after removing a device,
reattach a device or select another playback source.
• When the USB device has no playable files, or has not
been formatted correctly, “Cannot play this device
Check the device” appears on the screen.
• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating
is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.
• While playing from a USB device, the playback order
may differ from other players.
• This unit may be unable to play back some USB
devices or some files due to their characteristics or
recording conditions.
• USB devices equipped with special functions such as
data security functions cannot be used with the unit.
• Do not use a USB device with two or more partitions.
• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and
connection ports, some USB devices may not be
attached properly or the connection might be loose.
• When connecting a USB device, refer also to its
instructions.
• Connect only one USB device to the unit at a time. Do
not use a USB hub.
• This unit may not recognize a USB device connected
through a USB card reader.
• When connecting with a USB cable, use the USB 2.0
cable.
• This unit may not play back files in a USB device
properly when using a USB extension cord.
• This unit cannot assure proper functions or supply
power to all types of the devices.
• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files and 250
folders (a maximum of 999 files per folder).
• This unit can recognize a total of 25 characters for
file/folder names.
• For MPEG1/2 files: The maximum bit rate for video
signals (average) is 2 Mbps.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN50-57_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 53

12/19/08 3:51:41 PM

ENGLISH

Icons for phone types
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the device.
: Cellular phone
: Household phone
: Office
: General
: Other than above

CD changer
• If you select a folder, which does not include any
music files, on the list (
26), you will hear a beep.
Select another folder including music files.

DAB
• Only the primary DAB service can be preset even
when you store a secondary service.

Notice:
When operating an iPod, some operations may not
be performed correctly or as intended. In this case,
visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/> (English
website only)

54
EN50-57_KW-AVX720_001A_2.indd 54

12/30/08 11:59:02 AM

ENGLISH

Menu settings
• If you change the <Amplifier Gain> setting from <High> to <Low> while the volume level is set higher than
“30,” the unit automatically changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
• After you change any of <Menu Language/Audio Language/Subtitle> settings, turn off then on the power,
and re-insert the disc (or insert another disc) so that your setting takes effect.
• When you select <16:9> for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the process for
converting the picture width.
• Even if <4:3PS> is selected, the screen size may become <4:3LB> for some discs.

Output signals

<D. Audio Output>

Playback disc

DVD

<PCM>

48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*

96 kHz, Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

with Dolby Digital
with MPEG Audio

Audio CD, Video CD
DivX/ with Dolby Digital
MPEG
with MPEG Audio
MP3/WMA
WAV

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream
MPEG bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM /
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

* Digital signals may be emitted at 20 or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs
are not copy-protected.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN50-57_KW-AVX720_001A_3.indd 55

1/16/09 2:40:19 PM

ENGLISH

Display information
• Available display information varies among the playback sources.
Each time you press DISP, the display changes to show the various information.

Ex.: When the playback source is a DVD video disc
SOURCE

SOURCE

DVD

DVD
FLAT

FLAT

CHAP. RPT

3:00

Playback picture screen
(only for video sources)

Source information screen

3:00

Playback picture and source
information screen *1

Navigation screen *2

24)

Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

• When any language other than <Руccĸий> is selected for <Language>. (

15)

Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

56
EN50-57_KW-AVX720_001A_3.indd 56

1/16/09 2:47:19 PM

Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU

FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA

KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE

NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
QU
RM
RN
RO
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS

Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu

ENGLISH

Language codes (for DVD/DivX language selection)

JVC bears no responsibility for any loss of data in an iPod/iPhone and/or USB mass storage class
device while using this unit.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN50-57_KW-AVX720_001A_2.indd 57

12/30/08 12:00:38 PM

ENGLISH

58
EN58-65_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 58

12/19/08 3:47:34 PM

TUNER

General

Symptom

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting

Remedy/Cause

• No sound comes out of the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The screen is not clear and legible.
Sunshine from the windshield may cause this symptom.
14)
Adjust <Bright>. (
• “Position Error Push Open Key”
The monitor panel angle has been forcibly adjusted, or its
appears on the screen.
adjustment has been interrupted while opening or closing.
Press [OPEN/TILT].
• “Mecha Error Push Reset” appears on Reset the unit. (
3)
the screen, and the panel does not
move.
• “No Signal” appears.
• Change the source.
• Start the playback on the external component connected to
VIDEO IN jack.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Signal input is too weak.
• The buttons on the monitor panel do When the monitor panel is open, only VOL +/– and
work. The other buttons do not function.
not work.
• The unit does not work at all.
3)
Reset the unit. (
• The touch panel does not respond
• Keep your hands and the touch panel clean and dry.
properly.
• Eliminate static electricity and do not place magnetic items
• <Illumination> function does not
near the unit.
work properly.
• Leave the unit until the temperature becomes stable in the
car.
• A rubber mat on the floor may cause this symptom. In this
case, do not use the rubber mat.
• SSM automatic presetting does not Store stations manually. (
25)
work.
• Static noise while listening to the
Connect the aerial firmly.
radio.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN58-65_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 59

12/19/08 3:47:36 PM

Symptom

ENGLISH

• Disc can be neither recognized nor
played back.
• Disc cannot be ejected.
•
•

Disc in general

•
•
•
•

•
•
•

DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/MP3/WMA/WAV

•

•
•
•
•

Remedy/Cause
Eject the disc forcibly. (

60
EN58-65_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 60

12/19/08 3:47:36 PM

• Noise is generated.

USB

• Tracks cannot play back as you
have intended them to play.
• “Now Reading...” keeps flashing
on the screen.

Remedy/Cause
The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to another
file.
Playback order may differ from the one played back using other
players.
• Readout time varies depending on the USB device.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.

ENGLISH

Symptom

•

Bluetooth

•

•
•

•

•
•

For available characters,

56.

The tracks are not properly copied into the USB device. Copy tracks
again, and try again.
This unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular phone and
one Bluetooth audio player at a time.
While connected to a device, this unit cannot be detected from
another device. Disconnect currently connected device and search
again.
The unit does not detect the
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
Bluetooth device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device.
The unit does not make pairing
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target device. If
with the Bluetooth device.
the PIN code of the device is not indicated on its instructions, try
“0000” or “1234.”
• Select the device name from <Special Device>, then try to
29)
connect again. (
Echo or noise occurs.
Adjust the microphone unit (supplied with Bluetooth Adapter)
position.
Phone sound quality is poor.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth cellular
phone.
• Move the car to place where you can get a better signal reception.
The sound is interrupted or
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth audio
skipped while using a Bluetooth
player.
audio player.
• Disconnect the device connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the player again.
“NEW DEVICE” cannot be selected Bluetooth audio player is already connected. To select “NEW
for “Bluetooth AUDIO.”
DEVICE,” disconnect it. (
29)
The connected audio player
Check whether the connected audio player supports AVRCP (Audio
cannot be controlled.
Video Remote Control Profile).
Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN58-65_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 61

12/19/08 3:47:36 PM

CD changer

ENGLISH

DAB tuner

• “Reset01” – “Reset07” appears on the screen.
• The CD changer does not work at all.
• “No DAB Signal” appears on the screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.
• The DAB tuner does not work at all.
• “Antenna Power NG” appears on the screen.
• The iPod/iPhone does not turn on or does not
work.

AV-IN

iPod /iPhone

• Sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the screen.
• Playback stops.

Remedy/Cause
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
Current disc does not include playable files. Replace
the disc with one including playable files.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and
press the reset button of the CD changer.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
3)
Reset the unit. (
Move to an area with stronger signals.
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly, then
3)
reset the unit. (
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly, then
reset the unit.(
3)
Check the cords and connections.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Update the firmware version of the iPod/iPhone.
• Charge the battery of the iPod/iPhone.
• Check whether “HEAD MODE” or “iPod MODE” is
correctly selected. (
45)
• Reset the iPod/iPhone.
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.
Check the connection.
The headphones are disconnected during playback.
Restart playback.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.

• “Cannot play this device Check the device”
appears on the screen.
• No operations are available when playing back Operate the unit after the Artwork is loaded. (
16)
a track containing Artwork.
• “Reset01” – “Reset07” appears on the screen. Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod.
Then, connect them again.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
• “Reset08” appears on the screen.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
Reset the iPod.
disconnecting from this unit.
• “Restricted Device” appears on the screen.
Check whether the connected iPod is compatible with
54)
this unit. (
• No picture appears on the screen.
• Turn on the video component if it is not on.
• Connect the video component correctly.
• Playback picture is not clear and legible.
14)
Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (

62
EN58-65_KW-AVX720_001A_1.indd 62

12/19/08 3:47:36 PM

Maximum Power Output:
Continuous Power Output
(RMS):

AMPLIFIER

Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control Range:

Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:

Frequencies:
Level:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Audio Output Level:
• LINE OUT (REAR)
• SUBWOOFER

Line-Out Level/
Impedance:
Output Impedance:

Color System:
Video Output (composite):
Other Terminals:
Input:

FM/AM TUNER

Frequency Range:

FM Tuner:

MW Tuner:
LW Tuner:

Output:
Others:
FM:
AM:
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel Selectivity
(400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity/Selectivity:
Sensitivity:

ENGLISH

Specifications

1 kΩ
PAL
1 Vp-p/75 Ω
LINE IN, VIDEO IN, Aerial input, USB
input, Steering wheel remote input
VIDEO OUT
CD changer, DIGITAL OUT (optical)
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
(MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz
9.3 dBf (0.8 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
65 dB
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
40 dB
20 μV/40 dB
50 μV

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN58-65_KW-AVX720_001A_f.indd 63

2/10/09 6:02:24 PM

DVD/CD
GENERAL

MONITOR

USB

ENGLISH

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Required space for installation and the monitor ejection
Dashboard

111

CAUTION: When ejecting the monitor, leave an
open space for the monitor to come out. If you do
not, the monitor may obstruct the steering wheel
and gearshift lever operations, and this may result
in a traffic accident.
Unit: mm

161

91.3

64
EN58-65_KW-AVX720_001A_2.indd 64

1/2/09 10:17:38 AM

General
Reset ..................................................................3, 6
Volume ................................................6, 7, 10, 21
AV Menu ........................................................ 6, 13
Source..................................................6, 8, 11, 34
Short Cut ...................................................6, 8, 34
RM-RK252 ................................... 9 – 11, 35 – 38
Clock .............................................................12, 15
Display demonstration ...........................12, 14

Tuner
Listening to the radio (FM/AM)...6, 9, 10, 30
Auto/manual search................................10, 30
Select preset station ........................... 9, 25, 30
Store station
(automatically/manually) ...................22, 25
Improve FM reception ...................................22
PTY Search .........................................................31
Store programme type..................................31
PTY Standby Reception.................................22
PTY codes ....................................................22, 50
Network-Tracking Reception ...............17, 50
Programme Search .........................................18

Disc
Open/close ................................................... 7, 32
Eject ....................................................................3, 7
Lock/unlock disc ..............................................32
Playable disc type ............................................. 4
Display information ........................................33
Repeat/random play ........................23, 24, 38
Select track/folder ................... 10, 25, 33 – 36
Select title/program/
playlist ...................................... 10, 11, 33 – 35
Start/stop/pause/resume
playback ......................................... 11, 34 – 36
Search/skip ....................................... 10, 34 – 36
OSD .................................................10, 16, 37, 38
PBC playback ......................................10, 11, 35

USB
Attach/detach...................................................39
Start/pause playback ..............................11, 39
Repeat/random play ...............................23, 24

Bluetooth
Connect/disconnect/delete ..........28, 29, 40
Make a call ..................................................27, 41
Answer/end call ........................................29, 41
Read SMS .....................................................27, 42
Microphone volume.......................................29
Preset phone number....................................42

CD changer
Start playback ............................................26, 43
Repeat/random play ...............................23, 24

DAB
Listening to the DAB service .......................44
Improve listening ............................................23
Preset service ....................................................25
TA/PTY Standby Reception..................... 6, 22
Announcement Standby Reception.........23
DAB AF ................................................................18

iPod
Connect .......................................................45, 46
Start/pause playback ..............................45, 46
Head Mode/iPod Mode.................................45
Repeat/random play ...............................23, 24
Audiobooks .......................................................24
Select track ..........................................26, 45, 46

External component
AV-INPUT ............................................................47
EXT-INPUT ..........................................................48

REFERENCES
EN58-65_KW-AVX720_001A_f.indd 65

ENGLISH

Operation index

2/10/09 6:03:02 PM

ENGLISH

Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit

Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts

Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?
Réinitialisez votre appareil

CoverRear_KW-AVX720_001A_f.indd 1

0209DTSMDTJEIN

DVD-RECEIVER MIT MONITOR
RÉCEPTEUR DVD ET MONITEUR
DVD-RECEIVER MET MONITOR

KW-AVX720

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

DEUTSCH

Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück

NEDERLANDS FRANÇAIS

Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?

Instructions

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

INSTRUCTIONS
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

GET0603-001A
[E]

2/11/09 12:02:22 PM

KW-AVX720
Installation/Connection Manual
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
Handleiding voor installatie/aansluiting
GET0603-003A

0209DTSMDTJEIN

[E]

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

FRANÇAIS

NEDERLANDS

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC,
NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your
vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter
is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.

Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen
Anlagen mit 12 V Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung
ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht über diese
Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der
bei JVC Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.

Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des
sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse
NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type
d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur
de tension, que vous pouvez acheter chez un
revendeur d’autoradios JVC.

Dit apparaat mag worden gebruikt bij elektrische
systemen die werken op 12 V gelijkstroom met
negatieve aarding. Als uw auto niet is uitgerust
met een dergelijk systeem, is een spanningsomzetter
vereist. Dit instrument kan worden aangeschaft bij
JVC car audio dealers.

WARNINGS

WARNHINWEISE

AVERTISSEMENTS

WAARSCHUWING

• N’INSTALLEZ aucun appareil ni aucun câble
dans un endroit où:
– où il peut gêner l’accès au volant ou au levier
de vitesse car cela peut entraîner un accident
de la circulation.
– où il peut gêner la manipulation de dispositifs
de sécurité tels que les airbags car cela peut
entraîner un accident fatal.
– où il peut gêner la visibilité.
• NE COMMANDEZ pas l’appareil lors de la
manipulation du volant car cela peut entraîner
un accident de la circulation.
• Le conducteur ne doit pas regarder le moniteur
lorsqu’il conduit. Cela peut lui faire perdre sa
concentration et causer un accident.
• Si vous souhaitez opérer l’appareil pendant
que vous conduisez, assurez-vous de bien
regarder autour de vous afin de ne pas causer
un accident de la circulation.
• Si le frein à main n’est pas engagé, “Parking
Brake (Frein à Main)” s’affiche sur le moniteur et
aucune image de lecture n’apparaît.
– Cet avertissement apparaît uniquement
quand le fil du frein de stationnement
est connecté au système de frein de
stationnement intégré à la voiture.

• Installeer toestellen en aansluitkabels NIET op
plaatsen waar;
– dit een gevaar vormt voor het bedienen van
het stuur of de versnelling, aangezien elke
belemmering van de juiste werking van het stuur
en de versnelling tot een ongeluk kan lijden.
– dit een gevaar vormt voor de airbag, aangezien
elke belemmering van de werking van de airbag
tot een dodelijk ongeluk kan lijden.
– dit het uitzicht belemmert.
• Bedien GEEN enkele eenheid terwijl u uw handen
aan het stuur nodig hebt, aangezien dit anders tot
een ongeluk kan lijden.
• De bestuurder dient tijdens het rijden niet naar
de monitor te kijken. De aandacht wordt anders
afgeleid met mogelijk ongelukken als gevolg.
• Voorkom ongelukken en kijk derhalve uitermate
goed uit indien u het toestel tijdens het besturen
van de auto wilt bedienen.
• Als de handrem niet is aangehaald, verschijnt
“Parking Brake (Handrem)” op de monitor en is
afspelen onmogelijk.
– Deze waarschuwing verschijnt uitsluitend
indien het handremdraad met het in de auto
ingebouwde handremsysteem is verbonden.

• Installieren Sie keine Komponenten und
verdrahten Sie Kabel NICHT an den folgenden
Orten;
– an denen sie die Bewegungen des Lenkrads und
des Ganghebels behindern könnten. Anderenfalls
führt diese Behinderung möglicherweise zu
ernsten Verkehrsunfällen.
– an denen sie den Betrieb von Sicherheit
seinrichtungen, z.B. Airbags, behindern
könnten. Anderenfalls führt diese Behinderung
möglicherweise zu ernsten Verkehrsunfällen.
– an denen sie die Sicht behindern.
• Betätigen Sie beim Fahren KEINE Geräte.
Anderenfalls führt dies möglicherweise zu einem
ernste Verkehrsunfall.
• Der Fahrer darf während der Fahrt auf keinen Fall
auf den Monitor sehen. Dies könnte den Fahrer
ablenken und zu Unfällen führen.
• Wenn Sie das Gerät beim Fahren bedienen müssen,
dürfen Sie nicht den Blick von der Straße nehmen,
da sonst die Gefahr von Verkehrsunfällen besteht.
• Wenn die Feststellbremse nicht verriegelt ist,
erscheint „Parking Brake (Feststellbremse)“ auf dem
Monitor und es wird kein Wiedergabebild angezeigt.
– Diese Warnung wird nur angezeigt, wenn das
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you
Feststellbremskabel an das in das Fahrzeug
disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make
eingebaute Feststellbremssystem angeschlossen ist.
all electrical connections before installing the unit.
Zur
Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir,
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s
daß Sie den negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen
chassis again after installation.
und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse herstellen, bevor das
Notes on electrical connections:
Gerät eingebaut wird.
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating.
• Sicherstellen erneut, daß das Gerät nach dem
If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC
Einbau Chassis des Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a
location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift
lever operations, as this may result in a traffic
accident.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices
such as air bags, as this may result in a fatal
accident.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate any unit while manipulating
the steering wheel, as this may result in a traffic
accident.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while
driving. It may lead to carelessness and cause an
accident.
• If you need to operate the unit while driving,
be sure to look around carefully or you may be
involved in a traffic accident.
• If the parking brake is not engaged, “Parking
Brake” appears on the monitor, and no playback
picture will be shown.
– This warning appears only when the parking
brake lead is connected to the parking brake
system built in the car.

Hinweise zu elektrischen Anschlüssen:
• It is recommended to connect speakers with
maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the • Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden
Nennleistung ersetzen. Brennt die Sicherung
rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to
häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC
8 Ω).
Autoradiohändler.
If the maximum power is less than 50 W,
• Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit
change <Amplifier Gain> setting to prevent the
einer Maximalleistung von mehr als 50 W
speakers from being damaged (see page 21 of the
anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit
INSTRUCTIONS).
einer Impedanz von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of
Wenn die Maximalleistung weniger als 50 W
the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
beträgt, stellen Sie <Amplifier Gain> anders ein,
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be
um Schäden an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden
careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
(siehe Seite 21 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).
• Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die
Heat sink
Anschlußklemmen der NICHT VERWENDETEN
Abstrahlblech
Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband umwickeln.
Dissipateur de
• Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr
chaleur
heiß. Beim Ausbau des Geräts darauf achten, das
Warmte-opnemer
Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.

Parts list for installation and
connection

Teileliste für den Einbau und
Anschluß

If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.

Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich sofort an
Ihren JVC-Autoradiohändler.

Main unit
Hauptgerät
Appareil principal
Hoofdtoestel

Flat head screws *1 (M5 × 8 mm)
Flachkopfschrauben *1 (M5 × 8 mm)
Vis à tête plate *1 (M5 × 8 mm)
Schroeven met platte kop *1 (M5 × 8 mm)

Remarques sur les connexions électriques:
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur
précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter
votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes
avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les
enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant, avec
une impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω).
Si la puissance maximum est inférieure à
50 W, changez <Amplifier Gain> pour éviter
d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 21 du
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes
des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS avec de la
bande isolante.
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud
après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le
toucher en retirant cet appareil.

Liste des pièces pour l’installation
et raccordement
Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre
revendeur autoradio JVC immédiatement.

Sleeve*1
Halterung*1
Manchon*1
Huls*1

*1 Fitted to the main unit when shipped.

Lijst van onderdelen die u bij
installatie en aansluiting nodig
hebt
Raadpleeg direct uw JVC auto-audiohandelaar
indien er iets ontbreekt.

Use these screws when installing the unit without the supplied sleeve.
Verwenden Sie diese Schrauben, wenn Sie das Gerät ohne die mitgelieferte Halterung
einbauen.
Utilisez ces vis lors de l’installation de l’appareil sans le manchon fourni.
Gebruik deze schroeven wanneer u het toestel zonder de bijgeleverde huls installeert.

Round head screws *1 (M2.6 × 3 mm)
Rundkopfschrauben *1 (M2,6 × 3 mm)
Vis à tête ronde *1 (M2,6 × 3 mm)
Schroeven met ronde kop *1 (M2,6 × 3 mm)

Power cord
Stromkabel
Cordon d’alimentation
Stroomkabel

Opmerkingen voor de elektrische
verbindinge:
• Vervang de zekering door een exemplaar met
het aangegeven vermogen. Als de zekering
vaak doorslaat, moet u uw JVC car audio dealer
raadplegen.
• Sluit bij voorkeur luidsprekers met een hoger
maximaal vermogen dan 50 W (zowel achter als
voor, met een impedantie van 4 Ω t/m 8 Ω) aan.
Indien het maximale vermogen lager dan
50 W is, moet u <Amplifier Gain> in de andere
stand stellen zodat de luidsprekers niet kunnen
worden beschadigd (zie bladzijde 21 van de
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING).
• Om kortsluiting te voorkomen, moet u de
aansluitklemmen van ONGEBRUIKTE gekleurde
draden met isolatieband bedekken.
• De warmte-opnemer kan na gebruik erg heet
worden. Raak de warmte-opnemer niet aan
wanneer u dit apparaat van zijn plaats haalt.

Brackets*1
Konsolen*1
Supports*1
Beugels*1

Trim plate
Frontrahmen
Plaque d’assemblage
Sierplaat

Crimp connector
Crimpanschlüsse
Raccord à sertir
Krimpaansluiting

Om kortsluiting te voorkomen adviseren wij u om de
minpool van de accu los te maken en alle elektrische
verbindingen tot stand te brengen voordat u het
apparaat in de auto installeert.
• Aard dit toestel beslist weer op het chassis
van de auto na het installeren.

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Flachkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)
Schroeven met platte kop (M5 × 8 mm)
Remote controller
Fernbedienung
Télécommande
Afstandsbediening

Batteries
Batterien
Piles
Batterijen

*1 Werkseitig am Hauptgerät angebracht.

Round head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Rundkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)
Vis à tête ronde (M5 × 8 mm)
Schroeven met ronde kop (M5 × 8 mm)

*1 Fixé à l’appareil lors de l’expédition.

*1 Bij het verlaten van de fabriek aan het hoofdtoestel
bevestigd.

Install1_KW-AVX720_003A_f.indd 1

1/16/09 3:41:28 PM

INSTALLATION
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)

EINBAU
(IM ARMATURENBRETT)

INSTALLATION (MONTAGE INSTALLEREN (MONTEREN
DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD) IN DASHBOARD)

The following illustration shows a typical
installation. However, you should make
adjustments corresponding to your specific car.
If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company
supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit
correctly, have it installed by a qualified
technician.

Die folgende Abbildung zeigt die typische
Installation. Sie müssen aber Justierungen
entsprechend des vorliegenden Fahrzeugs
vornehmen. Wenn Sie Fragen haben oder weitere
Informationen zu Einbausätzen benötigen,
wenden Sie sich an Ihren Fachhändler für JVC
Autoradiohändler oder einen Fachhändler für die
Einbausätze.
• Wenn bezüglich des richtigen Einbaus
dieses Geräts Zweifel bestehen, immer einen
qualifizierten Techniker um Rat fragen.

L’illustration suivante est un exemple
d’installation typique. Cependant, vous devez
faire les ajustements correspondant à votre
voiture. Si vous avez des questions ou avez
besoin d’information sur des kits d’installation,
consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou
une compagnie d’approvisionnement.
• Si vous n’êtes pas sûr de pouvoir installer
l’appareil correctement, faite-le installer par un
technicien qualifié.

De volgende afbeelding toont een
standaardinstallatie. Afhankelijk van uw
auto moet het toestel mogelijk wat anders
worden geïnstalleerd. Raadpleeg uw JVC autoaudiohandelaar handelaar of een leverancier van
installatiekits indien u vragen heeft of informatie
over installatiekits wilt.
• Raadpleeg een erkend technicus indien u twijfels
heeft over het juist installeren van dit toestel.

Before installing the unit

Vor dem Einbau des Geräts

Avant d’installer l’appareil

Alvorens het toestel te installeren

• When mounting the unit, be sure to use the
screws provided, as instructed. If other screws are
used, parts could become loose or damaged.
• When tightening screws or bolts, be careful not to
pinch any connection cord.
• Make sure not to block the fan on the rear to
maintain proper ventilation when installing the
unit.

• Bei der Montage dieses Gerätssollen immer
die mitgelieferten Schrauben wie beschrieben
verwendet werden. Wenn andere Schrauben
verwendet werden, besteht die Gefahr, dass sich
Teile lockern oder beschädigt werden könnten.
• Beim Festziehen von Schrauben oder
Steckschrauben immer darauf achten, keine Kabel
einzuklemmen.
• Sicherstellen, dass nicht das Gebläse an der
Rückseite verdeckt wird, um richtige Ventilation
beim Einbau zu gewährleisten.

• Lors du montage de l’appareil, assurez-vous
d’utiliser les vis fournies, de la façon indiquée.
Si vous utilisez d’autres vis, certaines pièces
peuvent être perdues ou endommagées.
• Lorsque vous serrez des vis ou des boulons,
faites attention de ne pas pincer un cordon de
connexion.
• Assurez-vous de ne pas bloquer le ventilateur
sur le panneau arrière lors de l’installation afin
de permettre une ventilation correcte.

• Gebruik beslist de bijgeleverde schroeven als
aangegeven voor het bevestigen van dit toestel.
Door het gebruik van andere schroeven, kunnen
onderdelen worden beschadigd of wordt het
toestel mogelijk niet correct bevestigd.
• Let bij het vastdraaien van schroeven en bouten
goed op zodat er geen snoeren, etc. worden
vastgekneld.
• Let goed op dat bij het installeren de ventilator op
het achterpaneel niet wordt gebokkeerd zodat het
toestel goed geventileerd kan worden.

1
2
3
4
5
6

Remove the audio system originally installed in
the car, together with its mounting brackets.
Note: Be sure to keep all the screws and parts
removed from your car for future use.
Install the sleeve in the dashboard of the car.
Attach the brackets to the main unit.
• Make sure to use the supplied flat head
screws (M5 × 8 mm). If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
Do the required electrical connections.
• See pages 3 – 6.
Install the main unit in the sleeve.
Attach the trim plate.

2
3

4
5
6

Bauen Sie die ursprünglich im Fahrzeug
vorhandene Audioanlage zusammen mit ihren
Befestigungsteilen aus.
Hinweis: Alle aus dem Fahrzeug ausgebauten
Schrauben und anderen Teile müssen zur
Wiederverwendung aufbewahrt werden.
Die Halterung im Armaturenbrett des Fahrzeugs
einbauen.
Die Konsolen am Hauptgerät anbringen.
• Stellen Sie sicher, nur die mitgelieferten
Flachkopfschrauben zu verwenden (M5 ×
8 mm). Wenn längere Schrauben verwendet
werden, kann dann das Gerät dadurch
beschädigt werden.
Erfordert keine elektrischen Verbindungen.
• Siehe Seite 3 – 6.
Das Hauptgerät in der Halterung einbauen.
Den Frontrahmen anbringen.

2
3

4
5
6

Retirez le système audio d’origine installé dans
la voiture en même temps que les supports de
montage.
Remarque: Assurez-vous de conserver toutes
les vis et pièces détachées de votre voiture
pour une utilisation dans le future.
Installez le manchon dans le tableau de bord
de la voiture.
Attachez les supports à l’appareil principal.
• Assurez-vous d’utiliser les vis à tête plate
fournis—(M5 × 8 mm). Vous risquez
d’endommager l’appareil si vous utilisez des
vis plus longues.
Réalisez les connexions électriques requises.
• Référez-vous aux pages 3 – 6.
Installez l’appareil principal dans le manchon.
Fixez la plaque d’assemblage.

2
3

4
5
6

Verwijder het oorspronkelijk geplaatste
audiosysteem, met de daarbij behorende
bevestigingsbeugels, uit de auto.
Opmerking: Bewaar alle uit de auto
verwijderde schroeven en onderdelen voor later
gebruik.
Plaats de huls in het dashboard van de auto.
Bevestig de beugels aan het hoofdtoestel.
• Gebruik beslist de bijgeleverde schroeven met
platte kop (M5 × 8 mm). Langere schroeven
kunnen het toestel namelijk beschadigen.
Maak de vereiste elektrische verbindingen.
• Zie bladzijden 3 – 6.
Installeer het hoofdtoestel in de huls.
Bevestig de sierplaat.

Sleeve
Halterung
Manchon
Huls

Brackets
Konsolen
Supports
Beugels

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Flachkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)
Schroeven met platte kop (M5 × 8 mm)

Trim plate
Frontrahmen
Plaque d’assemblage
Sierplaat

Round head screws (M2.6 × 3 mm)
Rundkopfschrauben (M2,6 × 3 mm)
Vis à tête ronde (M2,6 × 3 mm)
Schroeven met ronde kop (M2,6 × 3 mm)

Unit: mm / Einheit: mm
Unité: mm / Eenheid: mm

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚, taking it
into account that the monitor would eject when in use.
Bauen Sie das Gerät ein einem Winkel von weniger als
30˚ ein, wobei Sie darauf achten, dass der Monitor bei
Gebrauch ausfährt.
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30°,
en tenant compte du fait que le moniteur doit être
déployé lors de son utilisation.
Installeer het toestel met een kleinere hoek dan 30˚, en
controleer dat de monitor kan worden uitgeworpen
voor gebruik.

Dashboard
Armaturenbrett
Tableau de bord
Dashboard

111

Required space for installation
and the monitor ejection
Erforderlicher Platz für Einbau
und Monitorausschub
Espace nécessaire pour
l’installation et l’éjection du
moniteur
Vereiste ruimte voor het
installeren en uitklappen van
de monitor

161

30˚

91.3

Install1_KW-AVX720_003A_f.indd 2

2/6/09 11:53:42 AM

ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES ELEKTRISCHE VERBINDINGEN

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker
connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the
power cord to the car battery; otherwise,
the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the
power cord to the speakers, check the speaker
wiring in your car.

VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim Anschließen
der Stromversorgung und Lautsprecher:
• Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels
NICHT an der Autobatterie anschließen, da
sonst das Gerät schwer beschädigt wird.
• VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen
des Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die
Lautsprecher, die Lautsprecherverdrahtung in
Ihrem Auto überprüfen.

If your car is equipped with the ISO
connector / Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem ISOSteckverbinder ausgestattet ist / Si votre
voiture est équippée d’un connecteur ISO /
Indien uw auto een ISO-aansluiting heeft
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.
• Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung
gezeigt.
• Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.
• Verbind de ISO-stekkers zoals afgebeeld.
From the car body
Von der Fahrzeugkarosserie
De la carrosserie de la voiture
Van het chassis van de auto

ISO connector of the supplied power cord
ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels
Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation fourni
ISO-stekker van het bijgeleverde spanningssnoer

PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la
connexion des enceintes:
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du
cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon,
l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du
cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le
câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- order Opel(Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen / Pour certaine voiture VW/Audi ou Opel (Vauxhall) / Voor bepaalde
VW/Audi en Opel (Vauxhall) auto’s
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
Es kann erforderlich sein, die Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.
• Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau dieses Receivers an Ihre Auto-Fachwerkstatt.
Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.
• Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.
U moet mogelijk de bedrading van het bijgeleverde spanningssnoer als afgebeeld veranderen.
• Raadpleeg een erkend autogarage alvorens deze receiver te installeren.
Original wiring /
Originalverdrahtung / Câblage
original / Oorspronkelijke
bedrading

Y: Yellow
Gelb
Jaune
Geel

Modified wiring 1 /
Modifizierte Verdrahtung
1 / Câblage modifié 1 /
Veranderde bedrading 1

R: Red
Rot
Rouge
Rood

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.
Verwenden Sie die modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 wenn
der Receiver nicht einschaltet.
Utilisez le câblage modifié 2 si l’appareil ne se met
pas sous tension.
Gebruik methode 2 voor het veranderen van de
bedrading indien de receiver niet wordt ingeschakeld.

Modified wiring 2 /
Modifizierte Verdrahtung
2 / Câblage modiﬁé 2 /
Veranderde bedrading 2

View from the lead side
Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen
Vue à partir du côté des fils
Gezien vanaf de spanningstoevoerkant

VOORZORGSMAATREGELEN bij het verbinden
van de stroomkabeldraad met de speakers:
• Verbind de speakerdraden van de
stroomkabel NIET met de accu van de auto;
als u dit wel doet, zal het apparaat ernstige
schade oplopen.
• VOORDAT u de speakerdraden van de
stroomkabel met de speakers verbindt, moet
u de bedrading van de speakers in uw auto
controleren.

Connecting the parking brake lead / Anschluss des Handbremsenkabels / Connexion du fil de frein de stationnement / De parkeerremdraad
aansluiten
Parking brake lead (light green)
Handbremsenkabel (hellgrün)
Fil du frein de stationnement (vert clair)
Parkeerremdraad (lichtgroen)

Crimp connector
Crimpanschlüsse
Raccord à sertir
Krimpaansluiting

Parking brake
Handbremse
Frein de stationnement
Parkeerrem

To metallic body or chassis of the car
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
Naar metalen ondergrond of chassis van de auto

Parking brake switch (inside the car)
Handbremsenschalter (Fahrzeuginneres)
Commutateur de frein de stationnement
(intérieur de la voiture)
Parkeerremschakelaar (in de auto)

Connecting the reverse gear signal lead (for rear view camera) / Anschließen der Rückwärtsgangsignalleitung (für die Rückfahrkamera) /
Connexion du fil de signal de marche arrière (pour la caméra de recul) / Aansluiten van het achteruitrij-signaaldraad (voor achteruitkijkcamera)
Locate the reverse lamp lead in the trunk.

Suchen Sie die Rückfahrleuchtenleitung im
Kofferraum.

Localisez le fil des feux de recul dans le coffre.

Zoek het draad van het achterlicht in de kofferbak.

Extension lead (not supplied for this unit)
Rückwärtsgangsignal-skabel (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
Fil prolongateur (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
Verlengsnoer (niet bij het apparaat inbegrepen)
Purple with white stripe
Lila mit weißem Streifen
Violet avec bande blanche
Paars met witte strepen

Crimp connector (not supplied for this unit)
Crimpanschlüsse (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
Raccord à sertir (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
Krimpaansluiting (niet bij het apparaat inbegrepen)

REVERSE
GEAR
SIGNAL

To car battery
An Autobatterie
À la batterie de la voiture
Naar auto-accu
Reverse lamp lead
Rückfahrleuchtenleitung
Fil des feux de recul
Achterlichtdraad

To reverse lamp
An Rückfahrleuchte
Aux feux de recul
Naar achterlicht
Reverse lamps
Rückfahrleuchte
Feux de recul
Achterlichten

Install1_KW-AVX720_003A_f.indd 3

1/16/09 3:41:40 PM

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

FRANÇAIS

NEDERLANDS

Connections without using the ISO connectors / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung der ISO-Steckverbinder / Connexions sans l’utilisation des
connecteurs ISO / Verbinden zonder gebruik van ISO-stekkers
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the
vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause
serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the
connector from the car body may be different in
color.
1 Cut the ISO connector.
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in
the order specified in the illustration below.
3 Connect the aerial cord.
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

DIGITAL OUT
(see diagram

/ siehe Schaltplan

Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im
Fahrzeug sorgfältig überprüfen.
Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des
Anschlusses im Fahrzeug können sich farblich
unterscheiden.
1 Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.
2 Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der
Reihenfolge anschließen, wie in der Abbildung
unten gezeigt.
3 Das Antennenkabel anschließen.
4 Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.

/ voir le diagramme

/ zie schema

Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez
attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une
connexion incorrecte peut endommager
sérieusement l’appareil. Le fil du cordon
d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis
de la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.
1 Coupez le connecteur ISO.
2 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon
d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur
l’illustration ci-dessous.
3 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
4 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.

Alvorens de verbindingen tot stand te brengen:
Moet u de bedrading in de auto zorgvuldig.
De draden van het stroomsnoer verschillen
mogelijk van kleur metde aansluitingen op het
chassis van de auto.
1 Knip de ISO-stekker af.
2 Verbind de gekleurde draden van het
stroomsnoer in de afbeelding hieronder
aangegeven volgorde.
3 Sluit de antenne aan.
4 Verbind de draadbundel daarna met het
apparaat.

)

Rear ground terminal / Hintere Erdungscan-schlußklemme / Borne arrière de masse / Massaklem aan de achterkant
(see diagram

/ siehe Schaltplan

/ voir le diagramme

/ zie schema

)
Power cord
Stromkabel
Cordon d’alimentation
Stroomkabel

(see page 3 / siehe Seite 3 / voir page 3 / zie bladzijde 3)
To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram ) / An Lenkradfernbedienung (siehe Schaltplan
télécommande de volant (voir le diagramme ) / Naar stuurwiel-afstandsbediening (zie schema
SUBWOOFER
(see diagram / siehe Schaltplan / voir le diagramme / zie schema )

) / Pour la
)

ISO connector
ISO-Steckverbinder
Connecteur ISO
ISO-aansluiting

Fan / Teil / Ventilateur / Ventilator

15 A fuse
15 A Sicherung
Fusible 15 A
Zekering 15 A
To external components
(see diagram )
An externe Komponenten
(siehe Schaltplan )
Aux appareíls extérieurs
(voir le diagramme )
Naar externe componenten
(zie schema )
VIDEO OUT
(see diagram / siehe Schaltplan /
voir le diagramme / zie schema )
VIDEO IN
(see diagram / siehe Schaltplan /
voir le diagramme / zie schema )

Black
Schwarz
Noir
Zwart
Yellow *2
Gelb *2
Jaune *2
Geel *2

Red
Rot
Rouge
Rood

To metallic body or chassis of the car
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
Naar metalen ondergrond of chassis van de auto
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum
Anschließen an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture
(en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)
Naar een onder spanning staande aansluitklem in het zekeringblok die is aangesloten
op de accu van de auto (u passeert de ontstekingsschakelaar) (constant 12 V)
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible
Naar een aansluitklem in het zekeringblok

Orange with white stripe
Orange mit weißem Streifen
Orange avec bande blanche
Oranje met witte streep

LINE IN
(see diagram / siehe Schaltplan /
voir le diagramme / zie schema )

Fuse block
Sicherungsblock
Porte-fusible
Zekeringblok

To car light control switch
Zum Autobeleuchtungssteuerung-Schalter
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture
Naar schakelaar van autoverlichting

Brown
Braun
Marron
Bruin

REAR OUT
(see diagram / siehe Schaltplan /
voir le diagramme / zie schema )

Ignition switch
Zündschalter
Interrupteur d’allumage
Ontstekingsschakelaar

To cellular phone system
An Mobiltelefonsystem
À un système de téléphone cellulaire
Naar het mobiele-telefoonsysteem

Aerial terminal / Antennen-anschlußklemme /
Borne de l’antenne / Aansluitpunt antenne
Light green
Hellgrün
Vert clair
Lichtgroen

To parking brake (see page 3)
An Feststellbremse (siehe Seite 3)
Au frein de stationnement (voir page 3)
Naar handrem (zie bladzijde 3)
Crimp connector
Crimpanschlüsse
Raccord à sertir
Krimpaansluiting

Blue with white stripe
Blau mit weißem Streifen
Bleu avec bande blanche
Blauw met witte streep

White with black stripe
Weiß mit schwarzem Streifen
Blanc avec bande noire
Wit met zwarte streep

White
Weiß
Blanc
Wit

Gray with black stripe
Grau mit schwarzem Streifen
Gris avec bande noire
Grijs met zwarte streep

Left speaker (front)
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)
Enceinte gauche (avant)
Linkerspeaker (voorin)

*1 Not supplied for this unit.
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise
power cannot be turned on.

Gray
Grau
Gris
Grijs

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden
(max. 200 mA)
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y
en a une (200 mA max.)
Naar afstandsdraad van andere apparatuur of antenne met circuit indien
aanwezig (200 mA max.)

Green with black stripe
Grün mit schwarzem Streifen
Vert avec bande noire
Groen met zwarte streep

Right speaker (front)
Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)
Enceinte droit (avant)
Rechterspeaker (voorin)

*1 Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.
*2 Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit

Green
Grün
Vert
Groen

Purple with black stripe
Lila mit schwarzem Streifen
Violet avec bande noire
Paars met zwarte streep

Left speaker (rear)
Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)
Enceinte gauche (arrière)
Linkerspeaker (achterin)

*1 Non fourni avec cet autoradio.
*2 Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil

des Geräts vor dem Einbau, muß diese Leitung
angeschlossen werden, da sonst die Stromversorgung
nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.

avant installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon
l’appareil ne peut pas être mis sous tension.

Purple
Lila
Violet
Paars
Right speaker (rear)
Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)
Enceinte droit (arrière)
Rechterspeaker (achterin)

*1 Niet bij het apparaat inbegrepen.
*2 Voordat u controleert of het apparaat werkt
(alvorens het te installeren), moet deze draad
aangesloten zijn. Als dit niet het geval is, kan de
stroom niet worden ingeschakeld.

Install2_KW-AVX720_003A_f.indd 4

2/6/09 12:05:05 PM

Connecting the external amplifier and subwoofer / Anschließen des externen Verstärkers und Subwoofers / Connexion d’amplificateurs
extérieurs et d’un caisson de grave / Verbinden van een externe versterker en subwoofer

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car
stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe)
to the remote lead of the other equipment so
that it can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit,
connect them to the amplifier. Leave the
speaker leads of this unit unused.
• You can switch off the built-in amplifier and
send the audio signals only to the external
amplifier(s) to get clear sounds and to prevent
internal heat built-up inside the unit. See page
21 of the INSTRUCTIONS (separate volume).

Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour
améliorer votre système autoradio.
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu
avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à
distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse
être commandé via cet appareil.
• Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et
connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les
fils d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.
• Vous pouvez mettre hors service l’amplificateur
intégré et envoyer les signaux audio
uniquement sur un ou plusieurs amplificateurs
extérieurs afin d’obtenir un son clair et d’éviter
tout échauffement interne de l’autoradio. Voir
page 21 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS (volume
séparé).

Sie können Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre
Autostereoanlage zu erweitern.
• Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit
weißem Streifen) an das Fernbedienungskabel des
anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses Gerät
gesteuert werden kann.
• Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät
abtrennen und am Verstärker anschließen.
Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses Geräts
unbenutzt lassen.
• Sie können den eingebauten Verstärker abschalten
und die Audiosignale nur zu dem(n) externen
Verstärker(n) ausgeben, um scharfen
Ton zu erhalten und Hitzestau in der
Einheit zu vermeiden. Siehe Seite 21 der
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG (separate
Druckschrift).

Remote lead *3 / Fernbedienungsleitung *3 / Fil
d’alimentation à distance *3 / Afstandbedieningsdraad *3

Y-connector *3 / Y-Anschluß *3 /
Connecteur Y *3 / Y-connector *3

Remote lead (blue with white stripe) / Fernbedienungsleitung (blau mit
weißem Streifen) / Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) /
Afstandbedieningsdraad (blauw met witte streep)

U kunt uw auto-audiosysteem uitbreiden door
extra versterkers aan te sluiten.
• Verbind de externe kabel (blauw met witte
streep) met de externe kabel van het andere
apparatuur zodat deze op afstand vanaf deze
apparaat kan worden bediend.
• Koppel de speakers van dit apparaat los en
verbind ze aan de versterker. Gebruik de
speakerdraden van dit apparaat niet.
• U kunt de ingebouwde versterker uitschakelen
en uitsluitend de audiosignalen naar de externe
versterker(s) sturen voor een helderder geluid en
te voorkomen dat dit toestel oververhit raakt.
Zie bladzijde 21 van de GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
(afzonderlijk boekje).

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern
vorhanden
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne
automatique s’il y en a une
Naar afstandsdraad van andere apparatuur of antenne met circuit
indien aanwezig

Rear speakers
Hintere Lautsprecher
Enceintes arrière
Achterspeakers

JVC Amplifier
JVC Verstärker
JVC Amplificateur
JVC Versterker

Subwoofer / Subwoofer /
Caisson de grave / Subwoofer
Rear speakers / Hintere Lautsprecher /
Enceintes arrière / Achterspeakers
Front speakers / Vordere Lautsprecher /
Enceintes avant / Voorspeakers

Connecting the external components / Anschließen der externen Komponenten / Connexion des appareils extérieurs / Verbinden van externe
componenten
Video cord *3
Videokabel *3
Cordon vidéo *3
Videosnoer *3

AV amplifier or decoder
AV-Verstärker oder -Decoder
Amplificateur AV ou décodeur
AV-versterker of decoder

External monitor
Externer Monitor
Moniteur extérieur
Externe monitor

Digital optical cable *3
Optisches Digitalkabel *3
Câble optique numérique *3
Digitale optische kabel *3

KV-CM1 *3
Rear view camera
Rückfahrkamera
Caméra de recul
Achteruitkijkcamera

External component
Externe Komponente
Appareil extérieur
Extern component

USB devices / USB-Geräte / Périphériques USB / USB-apparatuur
USB cable (approx. 1.2 m)
USB-Kabel (ca. 1,2 m)
Câble USB (environ 1,2 m)
USB-kabel (ongeveer 1,2 meter)

USB device
USB-Gerät
Périphérique USB
USB-apparatuur

Connecting the iPod/iPhone to the USB terminal / Anschluss des iPods/
iPhones am USB-Anschluss / Connexion du iPod/iPhone à la prise USB /
Verbinden van de iPod/iPhone met de USB aansluiting
You can connect the iPod/iPhone to the USB terminal using the following cables:
• To listen to the music: USB 2.0 cable (supplied for the iPod/iPhone)
• To watch the video: USB Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (not supplied) *8
Sie können den iPod/iPhone am USB-Anschluss mit den folgenden Kabeln anschließen:
• Zum Musikhören: USB-2.0-Kabel (für den iPod/iPhone mitgeliefert)
• Zum Betrachten von Video: USB-Audio- und Videokabel für iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (nicht mitgeliefert) *8
Vous pouvez connecter le iPod/iPhone à la prise USB en utilisant les câbles suivants:
• Pour écouter la musique: Câble USB 2.0 (fourni pour le iPod/iPhone)
• Pour regarder une séquence vidéo: Câble USB Audio et Vidéo pour iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (non fourni) *8
U kunt een iPod/iPhone met de USB aansluiting verbinden met gebruik van de volgende kabels.
• Luisteren naar muziek: USB 2.0 kabel (bijgeleverd bij de iPod/iPhone)
• Bekijken van video: USB audio- en videokabel voor iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (niet bijgeleverd) *8
USB 2.0 cable
USB-2.0-Kabel
Câble USB 2.0
USB-2.0-Kabel

You cannot connect a computer to the USB (
) terminal of the unit.
Sie können keinen Computer an den USB (
) Anschluss des Geräts anschließen.
) de l’appareil.
Vous ne pouvez pas connecter un ordinateur à la prise USB (
U kunt geen computer aansluiten op de USB (
)-aansluiting van het apparaat.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod ist ein Warenzeichen von Apple Inc., eingetragen in den USA und anderen Ländern.
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans les autres pays.
iPod is een handelsmerk van Apple Inc., geregistreerd in de V.S. en andere landen.

Apple iPod/iPhone
Apple iPod/iPhone
iPod Apple/iPhone
Apple iPod/iPhone

iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone ist ein Warenzeichen der Apple Inc.
iPhone est une marque de commerce de Apple Inc.
iPhone is een handelsmerk van Apple Inc.

Not supplied for this unit.

*4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).
*5 Audio cord (not supplied for this unit).
*6 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body
or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated
with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint
before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may
cause damage to the unit.
7
* Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector
and connect them to the amplifier.
*8 When using the cable, make sure <iPod (Off)>
is selected for <AV Input> (see page 18 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).

Apple iPod/iPhone
Apple iPod/iPhone
iPod Apple/iPhone
Apple iPod/iPhone

KS-U30
*3
*4
*5
*6

*7
*8

Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.
Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert).
Audiokabel (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert).
Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie
oder dem Rahmen des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle
darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die Kontaktstelle lackiert
sein, entfernen Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle, bevor Sie
den Leiter befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht
ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen wird, kann dieses Gerät
beschädigt werden.
Schneiden Sie die hinteren Lautsprecherkabel des ISOSteckverbinders des Fahrzeugs ab, und schließen diese
an den Verstärker an.
Bei Verwendung des Kabels stellen Sie sicher, dass
<iPod (Off)> für <AV Input> gewählt ist (siehe Seite
18 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).

Non fourni avec cet appareil.

*4 Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil).
*5 Cordon audio (non fourni avec cet appareil).
*6 Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au
châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui
n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert
de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant
d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut être endommagé
si cela n’est pas fait correctement.
7
* Coupez les fils des enceintes arrière du connecteur
ISO de la voiture et connectez-les à l’amplificateur.
*8 Lors de l’utilisation de ce câble, assurez-vous que
<iPod (Off)> est choisi pour <AV Input> (voir page
18 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).

*3
*4
*5
*6

Niet bij het apparaat inbegrepen.
Signaalkabel (niet bij het apparaat inbegrepen).
Audiosnoer (niet bij het apparaat inbegrepen).
Bevestig de aardedraad goed met een metalen
onderdeel of het chassis van de auto—bevestig op
een niet-gelakt gedeelte (indien gelakt, schuur dan
af alvorens de draad te bevestigen). Het toestel kan
worden beschadigd indien de aardedraad niet goed
is aangesloten.
Knip de achterluidsprekerdraden van de ISO-stekker
van de auto en verbind de draden met de versterker.
Bij gebruik van deze kabel, moet <iPod (Off)> voor
<AV Input> worden gekozen (zie bladzijde 18 van
de GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING).

Install2_KW-AVX720_003A_f.indd 5

1/30/09 4:55:34 PM

Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Anschluß an die Lenkradfernbedienung / Connexion de la télécommande de volant /
Verbinden met de stuurwiel-afstandsbediening

If your car is equipped with the steering wheel
remote controller, you can operate this unit
using the controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote
adapter (not supplied) which matches with
your car is required. Consult your JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.

Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit einer Lenkradferndienung
ausgestattet ist, können Sie damit diesen Receiver steuern.
Hierfür ist ein für Ihr Fahrzeug passender Radio-LenkradFernbedienungsadaption von JVC (nicht mitgeliefert)
erforderlich. Für weitere Einzelheiten wenden Sie sich an
Ihren JVC Autoradiohändler.

Steering wheel remote input
Eingang für Lenkradfernbedienung
Entrée de la télécommande de volant
Ingang stuurwiel-afstandsbediening

Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de
volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en
utilisant la télécommande. Pour le faire, un adaptateur
pour télécommande au volant JVC (non fourni)
correspondant à votre voiture est nécessaire. Consultez
votre revendeur d’autoradio JVC pour les détails.

Indien uw auto een stuurwiel-afstandsbediening
heeft, kunt u deze receiver met die afstandsbediening
bedienen. Hiervoor heeft u echter een JVC adapter (niet
bijgeleverd) nodig die geschikt is voor de stuurwielafstandsbediening van uw auto. Raadpleeg uw JVC car
audio dealer voor details.

Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Lenkradfernbedienung (im Fahrzeug installiert)
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)
Stuurwiel-afstandsbediening (in de auto)
OE remote adapter (not supplied for this unit)
Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Adapter voor stuurwiel-afstandsbediening (niet bij het apparaat inbegrepen)

Connecting the external components to the CD changer jack / Anschluss der externen Komponenten an der CD-Wechslerbuchse / Connexion
des appareils extérieurs au changeur de CD / Verbinden van externe componenten met de CD-wisselaaraansluiting

When connecting the external components, refer
also to the manuals supplied for the components
and adapter.
CAUTION:
Before connecting the external components,
make sure that the unit is turned off.
You can connect the following JVC components
to the CD changer jack.
JVC component
CD changer (CD-CH)
JVC DAB tuner

Model name
CH-X1500, etc.
KT-DB1000

You can also connect the following components
through the various JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased
separately.
Component

Adapter

Bluetooth device Bluetooth
adapter
iPod
Interface
adapter for
iPod
Portable audio
Line input
player with line adapter
output jacks
Portable audio
AUX input
player with 3.5 mm adapter
stereo mini jack

Model
name
KS-BTA200

Beim Anschließen der externen Komponenten siehe auch
für die Komponenten und den Adapter mitgelieferte
Anleitungen.
ACHTUNG:
Vor dem Anschließen der externen Komponenten
sicherstellen, dass das Gerät ausgeschaltet ist.
Sie können die folgenden JVC-Komponenten an die CDWechslerbuchse anschließen.
JVC-Komponente
CD-Wechsler (CD-CH)
DAB-Tuner von JVC

Lors de la connexion des appareils extérieurs,
référez-vous aussi aux manuels fournis avec les
appareils et les adaptateurs.

Zie tevens de gebruiksaanwijzingen van de andere componenten en adapter voor het verbinden van externe
componenten.

PRECAUTION:
Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs,
assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension.

WAARSCHUWING:
Controleer alvorens de externe componenten aan te
sluiten dat dit toestel beslist is uitgeschakeld.

Vous pouvez connecter les appareils JVC suivants
à la prise de changeur de CD.

Modellname
CH-X1500 usw.
KT-DB1000

Appareil JVC
Changeur de CD (CD-CH)
Tuner JVC DAB

Sie können auch die folgenden externen Komponenten
über die verschiedenen JVC-Adapter anschließen.
• Es kann erforderlich sein, Verbindungskabel getrennt zu
kaufen.
Adapter

Modellname

Appareil

Bluetooth-Gerät

Bluetooth-Adapter

KS-BTA200

KS-PD100

iPod

Schnittstellenadapter KS-PD100
für iPod

Périphérique
Bluetooth
iPod

KS-U57

Tragbarer AudioPlayer mit LineAusgangsbuchsen
Tragbarer AudioPlayer mit 3,5-mmStereo-Minibuchse

LineEingangsadapter

KS-U57

AUXEingangsadapter

KS-U58

When connecting more than one component
(maximum: three), it is recommended that you
connect the components in series as explained below.

CH-X1500, etc.

KT-DB1000

Vous pouvez aussi connecter les appareils
suivants en utilisant divers adaptateurs JVC.
• Vous pouvez avoir besoin d’acheter certains
cordons de connexion séparément.

Komponente

KS-U58

Nom du modèle

Adaptateur

Adaptateur
Bluetooth
Adaptateur
d’interface
pour iPod
Lecteur audio
Adaptateur
portable avec prises d’entrée de
de sortie de ligne
ligne
Lecteur audio portable Adaptateur
avec mini fiche stéréo d’entrée
de 3,5 mm
auxiliaire

Nom du
modèle
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100

KS-U57

KS-U58

JVC component
CD-wisselaar (CD-CH)
JVC DAB tuner

Modelnaam
CH-X1500, etc.
KT-DB1000

U kunt tevens de volgende componenten via diverse
JVC adapter verbinden.
• U moet mogelijk aansluitsnoeren aanschaffen.
Component
Bluetooth apparatuur

Adapter

Bluetooth
adapter
iPod
Interfaceadapter voor
iPod
Draagbare audiospeler Lijningangsmet
adapter
lijnuitgangsaansluitingen
Draagbare audiospeler AUXmet 3,5 mm stereo
ingangsadapter
mini-aansluiting

Modelnaam
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100

KS-U57

KS-U58

Lors de la connexion de plus d’un appareil (maximum: Indien u meer dan een component aansluit (maximaal:
drie), dient u bij voorkeur de componenten in-serie te
trois), il est recommandé que vous connectiez les
appareils en série comme nous l’expliquons ci-dessous. verbinden zoals hieronder wordt uitgelegd.

Beim Anschließen von mehr als einer Komponente
(Maximum: drei) wird empfohlen, dass Sie die
Komponenten in Serie anschließen, wie unten beschrieben.

When connecting two components in series / Beim Anschließen von zwei Komponenten in Serie / Lors de la
connexion de deux appareils en série / Indien u twee componenten in-serie verbindt
*9

U kunt de volgende JVC componenten met de CD-wisselaaraansluiting verbinden.

To disconnect the connector / Zum Abtrennen
des Steckers / Pour déconnecter le connecteur /
Ontkoppelen van de stekker

A KS-BTA200 / KT-DB1000 *10
B*9 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

CD changer jack / Buchse für CD-Wechsler / Prise
du changeur CD / Aansluiting voor CD-wisselaar

When connecting three components in series / Beim Anschließen von drei Komponenten in Serie / Lors de la
connexion de trois appareils en série / Indien u drie componenten in-serie verbindt
*9

A KS-BTA200
B KT-DB1000
C*9 CD-CH / KS-PD100 /

KS-U57 / KS-U58

Hold the connector tightly ( 1 ), then pull it out
( 2 ).
Halten Sie den Steckverbinder fest (1) und
ziehen Sie ihn heraus (2).
Tenez le connecteur solidement (1), puis
tirez-le vers l’extérieur (2 ).
Houd de stekker stevig ingedrukt (1) en trek
vervolgens naar u toe ( 2 ).

CD changer jack / Buchse für CD-Wechsler / Prise
du changeur CD / Aansluiting voor CD-wisselaar

*9 To use these components, set the external
input setting correctly (see page 19 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
*10 If KS-BTA200 is available, connect it to position A
and connect KT-DB1000 to position B.

*9 Pour utiliser ces appareils, réglez l’entrée

*9 Zur Verwendung dieser Komponenten stellen Sie die
*10

extérieure correctement (voir page 19 du MANUEL
D’INSTRUCTIONS).
*10 Si vous disposez du KS-BTA200, connectez-le à la
position A et connectez le KT-DB1000 à la
position B.

externe Eingangseinstellung richtig ein (siehe Seite 19
der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).
Falls KS-BTA200 zur Verfügung steht, an Position
A anschließen und KT-DB1000 an Position B
anschließen.

*9 Voor het gebruik van deze componenten moet de
*10

juiste externe ingangsinstelling zijn gekozen (zie
bladzijde 19 van de GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING).
Indien u een KS-BTA200 heeft, moet u deze
met positie A en de KT-DB1000 met positie B
verbinden.

TROUBLESHOOTING

FEHLERSUCHE

EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES

PROBLEMEN OPLOSSEN

•
*
•
*
•
*
•
*
*

• Die Sicherung brennt durch.
* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig
angeschlossen?
• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet
werden.
* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?
• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?
• Ton verzerrt.
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und
rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?
• Störgeräusche im Klang.
* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren
und dickeren Kabeln an das Fahrzeugchassis
angeschlossen?
• Gerät wird heiß.
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und
rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?
• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt nicht.
* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?

• Le fusible saute.
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés
correctement?
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous
tension.
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?
• Pas de son des enceintes.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?
• Le son est déformé.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit
sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
• Interférence avec les sons.
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle
connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un
cordon court et épais?
• L’appareil devient chaud.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit
sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?

• De zekering slaat door.
* Zijn de rode en de zwarte draden op de juiste
manier aangesloten?
• De stroom kan niet worden ingeschakeld.
* Is de gele draad aangesloten?
• Er komt geen geluid uit de speakers.
* Is de uitgaande speakerdraad kortgesloten?
• Het geluid wordt vervormd.
* Is de uitgaande speakerdraad geaard?
* Zijn de “–” polen van de linker- en de
rechterspeakers gemeenschappelijk geaard?
• Geluid wordt door ruis gestoord.
* Is de aarde-aansluiting achter met gebruik van
kortere en dikkere snoeren met het chassis van de
auto verbonden?
• Het apparaat raakt verhit.
* Is de uitgaande speakerdraad geaard?
* Zijn de “–” polen van de linker- en de
rechterspeakers gemeenschappelijk geaard?
• Receiver werkt helemaal niet.
* Heeft u de receiver teruggesteld?

•
*
•
*
*
•
*

The fuse blows.
Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
Power cannot be turned on.
Is the yellow lead connected?
No sound from the speakers.
Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
Sound is distorted.
Is the speaker output lead grounded?
Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers
grounded in common?
Noise interfere with sounds.
Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s
chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
This unit becomes hot.
Is the speaker output lead grounded?
Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers
grounded in common?
This unit does not work at all.
Have you reset your unit?

Install2_KW-AVX720_003A_f.indd 6

1/16/09 3:35:03 PM

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Затруднения при эксплуатации?
Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства
обратитесь на соответствующую страницу

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

Please reset your unit

Маєте ПРОБЛЕМУ з функціонуванням?

ENGLISH
РУCCKИЙ

DVD-ПРИЕМНИК С МОНИТОРОМ
ПРИЙМАЧ ТА ПРОГРАВАЧ DVD-ДИСКІВ ІЗ МОНІТОРОМ

KW-AVX720

УКРАЇНА

Instructions

Having TROUBLE with operation?

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 12.
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 12.
Інформацію щодо відміни демонстрації функцій дисплею див. на стор. 12.

Повторно налаштуйте систему
Див. сторінку “Як повторно налаштувати пристрій”

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.
Вказівки по встановленню та виконанню підключень наведені у окремій інструкції.

CoverRear_KW-AVX720[EE]_f.indd 1

0109DTSMDTJEIN

KW-AVX720

Bіктор Компані оф Джепен Лімітед
12, 3-чоме, Морійя-чо, Канагава-ку, Йокогама, Канагава 221-8520, Японія

INSTRUCTIONS
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
ІНСТРУКЦІЇ

GET0604-001A
[EE]

18/2/09 11:02:04 AM

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

[European Union only]

2
EN02-11_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 2

19/1/09 9:37:35 AM

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased (except the
registered Bluetooth device). (
28, 40)

How to forcibly eject a disc

ENGLISH

How to reset your unit

How to read this manual
Back

• You can forcibly eject the loaded disc even if the disc is
locked. To lock/unlock the disc,
32.
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.

For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.

Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.

3
EN02-11_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 3

19/1/09 9:37:40 AM

ENGLISH

Playable disc type
Disc type
DVD
• DTS sound cannot be
reproduced.

Recording format, file type, etc

Playable

DVD-Video (Region Code: 5) *

DVD-Audio/DVD-ROM
DVD Recordable/Rewritable
(DVD-R/-RW *2, +R/+RW *3)
• DVD Video: UDF bridge
• DVD-VR
• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/
MP3/WMA/WAV: ISO 9660 level
1, level 2, Romeo, Joliet

DVD-Video
DVD-VR
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
JPEG
MP3/WMA/WAV
AAC/MPEG4/DVD+VR/DVD-RAM

Dual Disc

DVD side

CD/VCD

Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA)

Caution for DualDisc playback

Caution on volume setting:

The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product
may not be recommended.

4
EN02-11_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 4

19/1/09 9:37:41 AM

3
3
3
4

INTRODUCTIONS
Basic operations .................................................................................................................................

6
9

ENGLISH

CONTENTS

Listening to the CD changer ............................................................................................................... 43
Listening to the DAB tuner ................................................................................................................. 44
Listening to the iPod/iPhone ............................................................................................................. 45
• When connected with the USB cable ......................................................................................................... 45
• When connected with the interface adapter ............................................................................................. 46

49
50
59
63
65

5
EN02-11_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 5

19/1/09 9:37:42 AM

ENGLISH

Basic operations
Using the monitor panel/touch panel
Display <AV Menu> screen, (

USB cable from the rear of the unit, (

13)

Display the <Source Menu> screen, (

39)

Display/exit the Short Cut icons, (

SOURCE

MP3
FLAT

3:00

5
6

0:02:26

Folder Name
File Name
Track Title
Artist Name
Disc Title

1 Resets the unit (
3).
2 • Turns on the power.

3
4

• Attenuates the sound (if the power is on).
• Turns off the power. (Hold)
Changes the display information. *1
• Adjusts the volume.
• Bluetooth PHONE : Adjusts the volume of
the incoming calls. *2
Remote sensor
Touch panel (see the following pages).
• Most of the touch panel operations are explained
unless mentioned otherwise.
• The screen will turn off if no operation is
done for about 10 seconds (depends on the
<Illumination> setting). (
19)

7 Motion sensor
8 • Activates/deactivates TA Standby Reception. *3

• Bluetooth PHONE : Displays the
<Dial Menu> screen. *5 (Hold)
*1 – *5 :

6
EN02-11_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 6

19/1/09 9:37:42 AM

You can also adjust the
volume by moving your
finger on the touch panel
as illustrated.

ENGLISH

p • Selects “USB/ iPod” as the source.

Continued on the next page

INTRODUCTIONS
EN02-11_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 7

19/1/09 9:37:43 AM

ENGLISH

<Source Menu> screen
You can also select the source using the touch panel.
SOURCE

Source Menu

TUNER

FM1

87. 5 MHz

Bayern Radio

FLAT
ST

Pop Music

3:00

AM
BAND

Current source

Exit

Short Cut icons
You can easily access some frequently used functions by using the Short Cut icons.
Available icons vary among the sources.

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

87. 5 MHz

Displays <Illumination> menu.

Bayern Radio

FLAT
ST

(

Pop Music

3:00

19)

Changes the sound mode. (

20)

AM
BAND

Short Cut window appears.
• To exit from the window, press the button again.

Turns on or off Track/Chapter Repeat.
(

23)

Displays <Aspect> menu. (

15)

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

Activates PTY Standby Reception.

87. 5 MHz

(

FLAT
ST

3:00

22)

Activates Announcement Standby
Reception. ( 23)
AM
BAND

Displays <PTy Search> menu.
(

Press a Short Cut icon.

31)

Activates <Voice Dialing> function.
(

Setup
Beep
Telephone Muting
Illumination
Motion Sensitiv.
Initialize

Normal
Proximity/Motion
Proxi/Motion-LCD
Touch Panel
Touch Panel - LCD

27)

Displays <Redial> menu. (

27)

Back

The corresponding screen is displayed.

8
EN02-11_KW-AVX720[EE]_2.indd 8

4/2/09 9:52:54 AM

Using the remote controller (RM-RK252)
ENGLISH

Installing the batteries

R03/LR03/AAA

Insert the batteries into the remote controller by
matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

The following describes all the available operations
for all the sources.
• To easily locate the available operations between
different type of files,
35, 36.

button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 5/∞ buttons

• TUNER/DAB: Selects the preset stations/
services.

Continued on the next page

INTRODUCTIONS
EN02-11_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 9

19/1/09 9:37:48 AM

ENGLISH

3 VOL (volume) + / – buttons

• Adjusts the volume level.
• Bluetooth PHONE:
– Adjusts the volume of the incoming calls.
2nd VOL (volume) buttons
• Not applicable for this unit.
4 * ASPECT button

• Changes the aspect ratio of the playback
pictures.
5

PHONE button
Applicable only when a Bluetooth phone is
connected.
• Displays <Dial Menu> screen.
• Displays <Redial> menu if pressed and held.
• Answers incoming calls.

6 * SETUP button

• Not applicable for this unit.
7 * TOP M (menu) button

• DVD-Video: Shows the disc menu.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Original Program screen.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
8 OSD (on-screen display) button

• Shows the on-screen bar.
• Does not function as “*.”
9 SHIFT button

• Functions with other buttons.
p DISP (display) button

• Changes the display information.
q 1 / ¡ buttons

• DISC/USB/ iPod: Reverse search/forward
search.

10
EN02-11_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 10

19/1/09 9:37:50 AM

• Selects the source.
e 3 (play) / 8 (pause) button

• DISC/USB/ iPod : Starts playback/pauses.
• Bluetooth PHONE: Answers incoming calls.
• Bluetooth AUDIO: Starts playback.
r

(end call) button
• Bluetooth PHONE: Ends the call.
BAND button
• TUNER/DAB: Selects the bands.
7 (stop) button

• DISC/USB/ iPod : Stops playback.
• Bluetooth AUDIO: Pauses.
t * RETURN button

• VCD: Returns to the PBC menu.

o DIRECT button

ENGLISH

w SOURCE button

SURROUND button
• Not applicable for this unit.
* Functions as number buttons when pressed with SHIFT
button.
– DISC/USB : Enters chapter/title/program/playlist/
folder/track number after entering search mode by
36)
pressing SHIFT and DIRECT. (
– TUNER/DAB : (Number 1 to 6) : Enters preset
station/service number.

y * MENU button

• DVD-Video: Shows the disc menu.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Playlist screen.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
u * % / ﬁ buttons

• DVD-Video: Makes selection/settings.
• CD-CH: Changes discs in the magazine.

@ / # buttons

• DVD-Video: Makes selection/settings.
• DivX/MPEG Video: Skips back or forward by
about 5 minutes.
ENT (enter) button
• Confirms selection.
i DUAL button

• Not applicable for this unit.
• Does not function as “#.”

INTRODUCTIONS 11
EN02-11_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 11

19/1/09 9:37:52 AM

ENGLISH

Preparation
Canceling the display demonstration and setting the clock

~ Turn on the power.

@ Set the clock.
Setup
Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer

Ÿ Display <AV Menu> screen.

Bright
Blue
Once
Auto
6 PM

Dimmer Time Set

Auto
7 AM

Back
BAND

Setup

! Display <Setup> screen.

Time Set
Time Format
OSD Clock
Clock Adjust

AV Menu

1
12Hours
Off
Off

00 AM
24Hours
Auto

Back

Setup
Time Set
Time Format
OSD Clock
Clock Adjust

⁄ Cancel the demonstration.

45 PM

Select [Off].
Setup
Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer
Dimmer Time Set

Back
Metal
Blue
Once
Auto
18

Auto
7

¤ Finish the procedure.
Back

Back

12 INTRODUCTIONS
EN12-21_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 12

19/1/09 9:40:32 AM

You can use the <AV Menu> for most of the
operations and settings. The available menu items
shown on the touch panel, depends on the selected
source.
• Non-available items will be shaded.

! Press the desired icon/item to perform
the desired operations/settings.
Moves to the preceding
menu page

ENGLISH

AV Menu operations

Indicates the next hierarchy
level/setting item exists

Setup

The following steps are one of the fundamental
procedures.
• You can perform the operations/change the settings
by following these steps unless mentioned otherwise.

~ Turn on the power.

Demonstration
Wall Paper
Color
Scroll
Dimmer
Dimmer Time Set

Bright
Blue
Once
Auto
18

Auto
7

Back

Returns to the previous
screen.

Ÿ Display <AV Menu> screen.

Indicates the remaining
time before the current
screen exit automatically.

Moves to the succeeding
menu page
BAND

• Some of the settings do not open the sub-setting
screen, but just selecting an option will change the
setting.
• To exit from the setting, press [Exit].

AV Menu

Setup
:
Equalizer :
Sound
:
Mode
:
List
:
Bluetooth :

14 – 19
20
21
22 – 24
25 – 26
27 – 29

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 13

19/1/09 9:40:35 AM

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

Menu item
Demonstration

Wall Paper

Selectable setting/item
♦ Off
♦ On

: Cancels.
: Activates the demonstration on the screen. To stop it
temporarily, touch the screen. (
12)

You can select the background picture of the screen.
♦ Bright, Future, Horizon, Plain

You can select the color of the background picture.
♦ Blue, Light-Blue, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Purple, Dark-Blue,
Dark-Green, Brown, Light-Brown, Black

Scroll

♦ Off
♦ Once
♦ Auto

: Cancels.
: Scrolls the displayed information once.
: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
• Touching the information bar scrolls the text regardless of the setting.

Dimmer

♦ Off
♦ On
♦ Auto
♦ Dimmer Time Set

Dimmer Time Set

Sets the Dimmer On (

Dimmer Level

You can select the brightness for dimmer.
♦ 01 (bright), 02 (middle), 03 (dark)

Bright

You can adjust the brightness of the screen.
♦ –15 to +15; Initial 00

Picture Adjust *2

Display

Color

♦ Bright
♦ Contrast
♦ Color
♦ Tint

:
:
:
:

Cancels.
Activates dimmer.
Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights. *1
Activates the Dimmer Time setting (see below).
)/Off (

:
:
:
:

) times.

14
EN12-21_KW-AVX720[EE]_4.indd 14

13/2/09 10:28:41 AM

Menu item

You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.

ENGLISH

Aspect *3

Selectable setting/item

Aspect ratio of the incoming signal
4:3

16:9

Regular:
For 4:3 original pictures
Full:
For 16:9 original pictures

Display

Panorama:
For viewing 4:3 pictures
naturally on the wide screen

Clock

Auto:

• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is automatically
selected to match the incoming signals.
• For the other video sources: Aspect ratio is
fixed to <Regular>.

Language *4

Time Set

Initial 0:00

Time Format

Select either 12-hour system or 24-hour system. (
♦ 12 Hours, 24 Hours; Initial 24 Hours

OSD Clock

♦ Off
♦ On

: Cancels.
: The clock time is displayed on the playback picture.

Clock Adjust

♦ Auto

: The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT
(clock time) data in the Radio Data System signal.
: Cancels.

♦ Off

12)

*3 Not adjustable when no picture is shown.
*4 Turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX720[EE]_4.indd 15

13/2/09 10:28:43 AM

ENGLISH

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

Menu Language *5

Select the menu language; Initial Руccĸий (

57)

Select the audio language; Initial Руccĸий (

57)

Audio Language *
Subtitle *5

Select the subtitle language or erase the subtitle <Off>.;
Initial Руccĸий (
57)

Monitor Type *5
16:9

Disc

4:3PS

4:3LB

OSD Position *5

Select the position of the on-screen bar. (
♦1
: Higher position.
♦2
: Lower position.

File Type *5

Select the playback file type when a disc/USB contains different types of
files. You can store this setting separately for each source—
“DISC/USB.”
♦ Audio
: Plays back audio files.
♦ Still Picture
: Plays back JPEG files.
♦ Video
: Plays back DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.
♦ Audio&Video
: Plays back audio files and DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
files.

DivX Regist.
(Registration) *5

This unit has its own Registration Code. Once you have played back a file
with which the Registration Code recorded, this unit’s Registration Code
is overwritten for copyright protection.

iPod Artwork *6

While playing back a track (in “HEAD MODE”), Artwork recorded for the
track is displayed on the monitor.
♦ Off
: Cancels.
♦ On
: Activates Artwork display. To display the
artwork, press DISP repeatedly.
• It takes 5 seconds or more to display an
Artwork and no operations are available
while loading it.

38)

*5 Selectable only for “DISC/USB.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
*6 Skip the track so that your setting takes effect.

16
EN12-21_KW-AVX720[EE]_f.indd 16

13/2/09 10:48:30 AM

Disc

Selectable setting/item

D. (Digital) Audio
Output *7

Down Mix *7

When playing back a multi-channel disc, this setting affects the signals
reproduced through the LINE OUT jacks.
♦ Dolby Surr.
: Select this to enjoy multi-channel surround audio
by connecting an amplifier compatible with Dolby
Surround.
♦ Stereo
: Normally select this.

D. (Dynamic)
Range Compres.
(Compression) *7

You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing Dolby
Digital software.
♦ Auto
: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded
software.
♦ On
: Select to always use this function.

IF Band Width

♦ Auto

Tuner

♦ Wide

AF Regional

ENGLISH

Menu item

*7 Selectable only for “DISC/USB.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 17

19/1/09 9:40:40 AM

Selectable setting/item

TA Volume

Program
Search *9

DAB AF *10

AV Input *11

You can determine the use of LINE IN and VIDEO IN jacks. (
47)
♦ Off
: Select when no component is connected (“AV-IN” is
skipped while selecting the source).
♦ iPod (Off)
: Select when connecting the iPod/iPhone using the USB
Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone. (
45)
♦ Audio&Video : Select when connecting an AV component such as a VCR.
♦ Audio
: Select when connecting an audio component such as a
portable audio player.
♦ Camera *12
: Select when connecting a rear view camera to display the
picture (as it is taken).
♦ Navigation
48)
: Select when connecting a Navigation System. (

Input

Tuner

ENGLISH

Menu item

18
EN12-21_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 18

19/1/09 9:40:42 AM

Menu item

Selectable setting/item
♦ Changer/iPod *15

ENGLISH

External Input *13, *14 For connecting an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear.
43), iPod, (
46).
: CD changer, (
: Any other than the above, (
48).

Beep

♦ Off
♦ On

: Cancels.
: Activates the key-touch tone.

Telephone Muting *16

♦ Off
♦ Muting1,

: Cancels.
: Select either one which mutes the sounds while
using the cellular phone.

Illumination

You can turn off the screen and the light of the buttons on the monitor panel
while turning on the unit. (
7)

Input

♦ External

Muting2

Others

Buttons on the
monitor panel

Motion Sensitiv.

Screen

Normal:

Always lights.

Proximity/Motion:

Lights up when your
hand moves close to
the buttons.

Always lights.

Proxi/Motion-LCD:

Lights up when your
hand moves close to
the buttons.

Touch Panel:

Lights up when your
Always lights.
finger touches the
buttons or touch panel.

Touch Panel-LCD:

Lights up when your
Lights up when your
finger touches the
finger touches the
buttons or touch panel. buttons or touch panel.

Change the sensitivity of the sensor for <Illumination> above.
♦ Low, Mid, High

Initialize

Initialize all settings you have made in <AV Menu>. Press and hold [Enter]
to initialize the settings, then reset the unit. (
3)

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX720[EE]_4.indd 19

11/2/09 10:12:47 AM

ENGLISH

Selects a preset sound mode suitable to the music
genre.
♦ Flat (Initial), Hard Rock, R&B, Pop, Jazz, Dance,
Country, Reggae, Classic, User1, User2, User3

Adjust the settings, then store.
Equalizer

Display <AV Menu> screen.
BAND

Back

Display <Equalizer> screen.

Edit

Make adjustments by moving each bar directly.

AV Menu
User Store
User1
User2
User3

Back

Select a sound mode.

Ex.: When storing into <User2>.

Equalizer

Moves to the other 6 sound modes.
Ex.: When <Hard Rock> is selected

Storing your own adjustments
You can store your adjustments into <User1>,
<User2>, and <User3>.

Perform steps 1 and 2 above to enter the
<Equalizer> screen.

Flat

15 kHz

6.3 kHz

2.5 kHz

1 kHz

Sound
mode

400 Hz

Edit

150 Hz

Back

60 Hz

Preset equalizing values

00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Hard Rock

+03 +03 +01 00 00 +02 +01

R&B

+03 +02 +02 00 +01 +01 +03

Pop

00 +02 00 00 +01 +01 +02

Jazz

+03 +02 +01 +01 +01 +03 +02

Dance

+04 +02 00 –02 –01 +01 +01

Country

+02 +01 00 00 00 +01 +02

Reggae

+03 00 00 +01 +02 +02 +03

Classic

+02 +03 +01 00 00 +02 00

User1/2/3

00 00 00 00 00 00 00

20
EN12-21_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 20

19/1/09 9:40:44 AM

Menu item
Fader/Balance

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

Reset
Fader
0
Balance 0

Back

Volume Adjust *1

Subwoofer Level

Adjust and store the auto-adjustment volume level for each source, comparing
to the FM volume level. The volume level will automatically increase or decrease
when you change the source.
• <Fix> appears if “ TUNER/Bluetooth PHONE” is selected as the source.
♦ –12 to +12; Initial 00
Adjust the subwoofer output level.
♦ –06 to +08; Initial 00

High Pass Filter

♦ Through
♦ On

Crossover

Select the crossover frequency between the front/rear speakers and the
subwoofer.
♦ 80Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz

Amplifier Gain *2

: Select when the subwoofer is not connected.
: Select when the subwoofer is connected.

AV MENU
EN12-21_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 21

19/1/09 9:40:45 AM

ENGLISH

Menu item

Selectable setting/item

Mono

SSM (Strong-station
Sequential Memory)

You can automatically preset 6 stations for each FM band.
• Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the
FM band.
Mode
Mono
SSM
PTy Standby
PTy Code

Start
News

Back

PTy Standby

PTy Code

You can change the PTY code (

50) for PTY Standby Reception.

Mode

Back

*1 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” (

45)

22
EN22-29_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 22

19/1/09 9:43:37 AM

Selectable setting/item

Announcement Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to your favorite DAB
service (announcement type) from any source other than FM/AM.
♦ ON
: Activate Announce Standby Reception. (The ANN indicator lights up; flashes
when the unit tune in to another service providing the related signals.)
♦ OFF
: Cancels.

Announce
Code

You can change the announcement type for Announcement Standby Reception.

ENGLISH

Menu item

Mode

♦ Transport News, Warning,

News, Weather, Event, Special
Event, Radio Info, Sports
News, Financial News
Back

Available items depend on the loaded disc type and playback file.
iPod

—

iPod

—

MP3

CD-CH

JPEG

VCD/CD

USB

JPEG

DVD-VR

Repeat

DVD-Video

DISC
Disc/file type

MPEG/MP3/
WMA/WAV

Source

DivX/MPEG/
MP3/WMA/
WAV

Repeat*2

Chapter
Title
Program
Disc
Folder
Track
One
All
Off

♦ Chapter
♦ Title
♦ Program
♦ Disc
♦ Folder
♦ Track
♦ One
♦ All
♦ Off

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

*2 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” (

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN22-29_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 23

19/1/09 9:43:40 AM

Available items depend on the loaded disc type and playback file.
iPod *4

—

iPod

—

CD-CH

MP3

Random

USB

DISC
Disc/file type

MPEG/MP3/
WMA/WAV

Source

VCD/CD

Random*3

Selectable setting/item

DivX/MPEG/
MP3/WMA/
WAV

ENGLISH

Menu item

Folder
Disc/USB (All)
All
Song
Album
Off

♦ Folder
♦ Disc/USB

: Randomly plays all tracks of the current folder, then tracks of the next folders.
: Randomly plays all tracks. (For VCD: When PBC is not in used.)

(All)
♦ All
♦ Song
♦ Album
♦ Off

:
:
:
:

Randomly plays all tracks of all loaded discs.
Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” *5 of the iPod.
Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of the iPod.
Cancels.

Audiobooks*3 You can select the playback speed of the “Audiobook” audio file in your iPod.
♦ Normal
: Plays at normal speed.
♦ Faster
: Plays faster.
♦ Slower
: Plays slower.
Title Entry

*3 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” ( 45)
*4 Not applicable for video file.
*5 You can activate <Shuffle Songs> in <Search Mode> menu. (

26)

24
EN22-29_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 24

19/1/09 9:43:42 AM

TUNER/DAB

ENGLISH

Source

Ex.:
Storing FM station in to preset
number 4

Back

The station selected in step 1 is now stored in preset number 4.
• Selecting a preset station/service on the list
List
FM1
FM2

Ex.:
Selecting a preset FM station

Back

DISC/USB

0005/0035

0003/0099
Track001.mp3
Track002.mp3
Track003.mp3
Track004.mp3
Track005.mp3
Track006.mp3

total folder list number
2 Current track list number/total

track list number of the
current folder
* Press: Skips the list up or down.
Drag: Scrolls the list up or down.

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN22-29_KW-AVX720[EE]_4.indd 25

11/2/09 10:24:55 AM

ENGLISH

Source
Bluetooth PHONE

Operation/setting
Selecting a preset phone number on the list to make a call
List
Phone Number

Back

CD-CH

Selecting a disc on the list
Disc List
Disc 01

Disc 04

Disc 02

MP3 Disc

Disc 03

Disc 06

If an MP3 disc is selected, Folder/
Track List appear. Select a track to
start playback.

Back

To go to the other list

iPod *

Selecting a track/video from <Search Mode>
♦ Music : Playlists, Artists, Albums,

Search Mode
Music
Videos
Shuffle Songs

Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres

Songs, Podcasts, Genres, Composers,
Audiobooks
♦ Videos : Video Playlists, Movies,
Music Videos, TV shows, Video
Podcasts
♦ Shuffle Songs : Playback starts if
this is selected.

0003/0099

Current track (video) number/total track
(video) number

Back

List
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres

Track 01
Track 02
Track 03
Track 04
Track 05
Track 06

Back

* Not applicable in “iPod MODE.” (

45)

26
EN22-29_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 26

19/1/09 9:43:44 AM

ENGLISH

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO” as the source for operations.
• Firstly, use <Open> or <Search> to register and establish the connection with a device.

Menu item
Dial Menu *1

Back

♦ Voice Dialing

Message *2

Continued on the next page

AV MENU
EN22-29_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 27

19/1/09 9:43:44 AM

ENGLISH

Menu item
Open

• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to 16-digit number).
PIN Code

Back

You can enter [0] – [9] only.
[BS] : Erases the character
before the cursor.
[Del] : Erases the character on
the cursor.
[Enter] : Confirms the entry.

3 Operate the Bluetooth device to connect while “Open...” is displayed on the screen.

Preparation:
• Make sure “NEW DEVICE” is selected. If not, press [ 5 ] or [ ∞ ] to select it.
1 Press <Search> on the <Bluetooth> menu.

28
EN22-29_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 28

19/1/09 9:43:46 AM

Selectable setting/item

Special Device

Connect

Only for the registered devices.
Select a device from the list of registered devices, establish the connection with it.

Disconnect

Only for the connected devices.
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device.

Delete Pairing

Only for the registered devices.
Press <Yes> to confirm delete the registered devices.

Settings
Initial: Underlined

Auto Connect *4

Auto Answer *5

♦ Off
♦ On
♦ Reject

Message Info *

♦ Auto

♦ Manual

ENGLISH

Menu item

: The unit does not answer the calls automatically.
Answer the calls manually.
: The unit answers the incoming calls
automatically.
: The unit rejects all incoming calls.
: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message
by ringing and displaying “Receiving Message.”
To read the message,
42.
: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a
message.

MIC Setting *5

Adjust the volume of the microphone connected to the Bluetooth
adapter.
♦ 01/02/03

Version

The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are shown.

*4 Selectable only for “ Bluetooth PHONE.”
*5 Only for the cellular phone connected for “ Bluetooth PHONE.” Not selectable when “NEW DEVICE” is selected.

AV MENU
EN22-29_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 29

19/1/09 9:43:46 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the radio
Preset number
SOURCE

TUNER

Band
Sound mode

FM1

87. 5 MHz

PS (station name) for
FM Radio Data System. *

Bayern Radio

FLAT
ST

Pop Music

Tuner/Standby
Reception indicator

3:00

PTY code for FM Radio
Data System

BAND

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [TUNER].
Ÿ Press [BAND].
! Press [ ] or [ ] to search for a
station—Auto Search.

• The ST indicator lights up when receiving an
FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal
strength.
* If no PS signal comes in, “No Name” appears.

• Manual Search: Hold either [ ]or [ ] until
“Manual Search” appears on the screen, then
press it repeatedly.

Selecting a preset station

Changing the display information

• Directly from the touch panel

(

56)

SOURCE

TUNER

FM1

3:00

87. 5 MHz

ABC Radio

FLAT
ST

• To improve the FM reception,
22.
• To automatically preset stations into memory,
22.
• To manually preset stations into memory,
25.

AM
BAND

You can also select a preset station using the remote
controller (
9) and from the Preset List (
25).

You can display the Preset List by pressing [
holding [5/∞].

] or

30
EN30-37_KW-AVX720[EE]_4.indd 30

13/2/09 10:30:18 AM

Searching for FM Radio Data
System programme—PTY Search

Storing your favorite programme types
You can store your favorite PTY codes into the PTY
Preset List.
Ex.: Storing <Drama> into <Preset 1>

You can search for your favorite programmes being
broadcast by selecting the PTY code of your favorite
programmes.

ENGLISH

The following features are available only for FM
Radio Data System stations.

PTy Search
Preset
PTy Code

Display <PTy Search> menu.

Enter
Enter

Back
PTy Search
Preset
PTy Code

Enter
Enter

PTy Memory
Preset1
Preset2
Preset3
Preset4
Preset5
Preset6

Back

Select a PTY code.
In the example below, a PTY code is selected from
the Preset List.
If you enter <PTy Code> menu below, you can
select one from 29 PTY codes. (
50)

PTy Memory
Preset1
Preset2
Preset3
Preset4
Preset5
Preset6

PTy Search
Preset
PTy Code

Pop Music
Rock Music
Easy Listening
Serious
Classics
Enter
Current
Affairs
Enter
Varied Speech

Enter
Enter

News
Current Affairs
Information
Sports
Enter
Education
Enter
Drama
Enter

Back

2
Back

PTy Search
Preset
PTy Code

Back

PTY Search starts.
If there is a station broadcasting a programme
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that
station is tuned in.

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 31

19/1/09 9:44:39 AM

ENGLISH

~ Open the monitor panel.

! Insert a disc.
Label side

<Open/Tilt> menu is displayed.
• By pressing and holding the button, you can
open the monitor panel and eject the disc.

Open/Tilt

Monitor panel closes automatically.
If not, press [Close].

Caution:
Do not place your finger behind the monitor panel.

Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

• To select the playback mode,
23, 24.
25.
• To select tracks on the list,

Back

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure to select <EJECT OK?>.
• Discs can be forcibly ejected. (
3)

32
EN30-37_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 32

19/1/09 9:44:40 AM

Changing the display information

ENGLISH

Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different
information. (
56)

Ex.: While playing a DVD Video

SOURCE

DVD
FLAT
CHAP. RPT

3:00

1 Audio format—Dolby Digital, MP3, WMA, WAV
2 Disc type—DVD, DVD-VR, VCD, CD
3 Video format—DivX, MPEG, VR-PRG (program),

VR-PLAY (playlist), PBC
4 [5 / ∞]

6
7
8
9

• DVD Video/DVD-VR: Selects title/program/
playlist.
• DivX/MPEG/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV:
– Selects folder
– Displays Folder/Track List (Hold)
• DVD Video: Title no./Chapter no./Playing time
• DVD-VR: Program no. (or Playlist no.)/Chapter
no./Playing time
• DivX/MPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV: Folder no./Track
no./Playing time
• JPEG: Folder no./Track no.
• VCD/CD: Track no./Playing time
[6 ]
Starts playback/pauses
Indicates the button pressed ( / 8 / 7 )
Sound mode (
20)
Playback mode (
23, 24)

p Disc/track information

Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-AVX720[EE]_2.indd 33

4/2/09 10:11:48 AM

ENGLISH

[SOURCE]
[5 ∞]
[3 / 8]
[4 ¢]
Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch [KEY].

To end the operations, touch the screen again.

34
EN30-37_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 34

19/1/09 9:44:42 AM

Operations using the remote controller (RM-RK252)

Stop play

ENGLISH

Button

Stop play

Start play/Pause (if pressed during play)

• DivX/MPEG: Start play/Pause (if pressed
during play)
• JPEG: • Start play (Slide show: Each file is
shown for a few seconds.)
• Pause (if pressed during play).
• Reverse/forward chapter search *1 (No sound can • DivX/MPEG: Reverse/forward track
be heard.)
search *4 (No sound can be heard.)
• Slow motion *2 during pause (No sound can be
heard.)
– DVD-VR: Reverse slow motion does not work.
• DivX/MPEG: • Select track
• Select chapter (during play or pause)
• Reverse/fast-forward track
• Reverse/fast-forward chapter search *3 (No
sound can be heard.) (Hold)
search *5 (No sound can be
heard.) (Hold)
• JPEG:
Select file
• DVD-Video: Select title (during play or pause)
Select folder
• DVD-VR: • Select program
• Select playlist (during play or pause)
• DivX/MPEG: Skip back or forward the
scenes by about 5 minutes
Select aspect ratio

—
Select aspect ratio
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5

Search speed:
Slow motion speed:
Search speed:
Search speed:
Search speed:

Using menu driven features... (DVD Video)

Canceling the PBC playback... (VCD)

1 Enter the menu screen.

During stop...

2 Select an item you want to start play.
2

Number buttons
(0 – 9)

• To resume PBC, press TOP M/MENU.
Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 35

19/1/09 9:44:42 AM

ENGLISH

Button
Stop play

Stop play

Start play/Pause (if pressed
Start play/Pause (if pressed
during play)
during play)
Reverse/forward track search *6 Reverse/forward track search *6

• Select track
• Reverse/fast-forward track
search *8 (Hold)

Select folder
—
Select aspect ratio

—

* Search speed:
*7 Slow motion speed:
*8 Search speed:

Searching for an item directly
1 While holding SHIFT, press DIRECT repeatedly to

select the desired search mode.
DVD-Video:
DVD-VR:
DivX/MPEG:
JPEG:
MP3/WMA/
WAV:

2 While holding SHIFT, press the number buttons (0

– 9) to enter the desired number.
3 Press ENT (enter) to confirm.

VCD/CD:

36
EN30-37_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 36

19/1/09 9:44:44 AM

Operations using the
on-screen bar

1 Display the Original Program screen.

Display the Playlist screen.

2 Select an item you want to start play.

(DVD/DVD-VR/DivX/MPEG/JPEG/VCD)
These operations are possible on the monitor using the
remote controller.

Show the on-screen bar (

ENGLISH

Using the list screens... (DVD-VR)

38).

(twice)

Select an item.

Make a selection.

Original Program/Playlist screen
• Original Program

If pop-up menu appears...

• To cancel pop-up menu, press RETURN.
• For entering time/numbers, see the following.
• Playlist

1 Original Program/Playlist number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of
4
5
6
7
8
9

* The title of the original program or playlist may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.

Removing the on-screen bar

Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS
EN30-37_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 37

19/1/09 9:44:45 AM

ENGLISH

On-screen bar
Ex.: DVD-Video

Information
Operation

1 Disc type
2 • DVD-Video: Audio signal format type and

23, 24.

38
EN38-49_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 38

19/1/09 9:47:02 AM

ENGLISH

USB operations

USB cable from the rear of the unit

Changing the display information
(

56)

OPERATIONS
EN38-49_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 39

19/1/09 9:47:08 AM

ENGLISH

Make the unit ready to establish a new Bluetooth connection. The connection is established by
operating the Bluetooth device.

Make the unit ready to establish a new Bluetooth connection. The connection is established by
operating this unit.

• To register a device using <Open> or <Search>,
• To connect a special device,
29.
• To connect/disconnect/delete a device,
29.

28.

Changing the display information
(

56)

Bluetooth Information:
If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/> (English website only).

40
EN38-49_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 40

19/1/09 9:47:09 AM

Status of the device
• Signal strength/Battery remainder (only when
the information comes from the device).

[5 / ∞]: Selects the
other registered device.

Connected device name
• When a cellular phone with audio function is
registered/connected, appears.

SOURCE

Connected Device Name

FLAT

3:00

ENGLISH

Using the Bluetooth cellular phone

Activates <Voice Dialing> Display <Dial Menu> screen.
function. (Hold)
• Appears on any source information screen
when the Bluetooth adapter is connected.

Bluetooth icon
• Lights up when the Bluetooth adapter
is connected.

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth PHONE].
Ÿ Press [ ].
! Press [Bluetooth].
⁄ Establish the connection with a device, then make a call (or settings using <Bluetooth>
menu). (

27 – 29)

When a call comes in...
The source is changed to “ Bluetooth PHONE”
automatically.

To end the call
• Hold the message displayed on the touch panel.
• Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or VOL +/–).
• You can adjust the microphone volume,

29.

Name and phone number (if acquired)

When <Auto Answer> is activated...
The unit answers the incoming call automatically.
(
29)

To make a call, use <Dial Menu>. (

27)

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 41

19/1/09 9:47:10 AM

ENGLISH

When an SMS comes in...
If the cellular phone is compatible with SMS (Short
Message Service), you can read the messages on the
screen.
• You cannot edit or send a message through the unit.

Presetting the phone
numbers
You can preset up to 6 phone numbers.

When <Message Info> is set to <Auto>...
The unit rings and the following screen is displayed to
inform you of a message arrival. (
29)

Select the phone number you want to
preset from <Phonebook>, <Redial>,
<Received Calls>, or <Missed Calls>.
(

2
Device Name
Receiving Message
Jack

27)

Select a telephone number to store.
Dial Menu

Read ?
Yes

No
Back

Select a preset number.
Dial Menu

Back

Now “Tom” is stored into preset no. 1.

To stop ringing (canceling the outgoing call)

To call a preset number,

26.

Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or VOL +/–).

42
EN38-49_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 42

19/1/09 9:47:11 AM

Using the Bluetooth audio player
ENGLISH

Indicates the button pressed.
• It may be different from the operation status.

Starts playback/pause
SOURCE

Connected Device Name

FLAT

3:00

[5 / ∞]: Selects the
other registered device.

[4 / ¢]: Reverse/
forward search

Stops playback

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth AUDIO].
Ÿ Start playback.
If playback does not start automatically, operate the Bluetooth audio player to start playback.

19)

Ex.: While playing an MP3 disc
• [4 / ¢]: Selects track
• [4 / ¢]: Reverse/forward search (Hold) [5 / ∞]: Displays Disc List.
DISC 1

SOURCE

CD-CH
FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

Current Folder Name
Current File Name.mp3
Current Track Title
Artist Name
Album Title

Tag data (if it is recorded)

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [CD-CH].
Ÿ Press [ ].
! Press [List].

Folder no./Track no./Playing time

⁄ Select a disc to start playing.
To select the playback mode,

23, 24.

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 43

19/1/09 9:47:12 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the DAB tuner
Preset number
SOURCE

Band

DAB

Sound mode
DAB indicators */
Standby Reception
indicator

DAB1 1 1475.216MHz LN
Service Label

FLAT

If no signal is received,
“No DAB Signal”
appears.

DRC

3:00

AM
BAND

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [DAB].
Ÿ Press [BAND].
! Press [ ] or [ ] to search for an ensemble—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [
repeatedly.

]or [

] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it

⁄ Press [5 SERVICE] or [SERVICE ∞] to select a service (either primary or secondary) to
listen to.
* While tuning in a service with DLS (Dynamic Label Segment), the TEXT indicator lights up.

23.
To improve your listening when the surrounding sounds are noisy,
To manually preset services into memory,
25.
To select a preset service,
25.
To activate/deactivate TA/PTY Standby Reception,
6, 22.
(You cannot store PTY codes separately for the DAB tuner and the FM tuner.)
• To activate/deactivate Announcement Standby Reception,
23.
• To change the announcement type for Announcement Standby Reception,
• To trace the same programme—Alternative Frequency Reception (DAB AF),

•
•
•
•

23.
18.

44
EN38-49_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 44

19/1/09 9:47:13 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the iPod/iPhone
You can connect the iPod/iPhone using the following cable or adapter:

To
Listen to the
music

Cable/adapter

To operate

USB 2.0 cable (accessory of the iPod/iPhone) to the
USB cable from the rear of the unit.

See “When connected with the USB
cable” below.

Interface Adapter for iPod, KS-PD100 (not supplied)
to the CD changer jack on the rear of the unit.

See “When connected with the interface
adapter” on page 46.

Watch the video USB Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone, KS-U30
(not supplied) to the USB cable from the rear of the
unit.

See “When connected with the USB
cable” below.
• Make sure <iPod (Off)> is selected
18.
for <AV Input>,

18)

Starts playback/pause

SOURCE

Indicates the controlling
unit for playback

HEAD MODE

iPod

FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

Current Track Title
Artist Name
Album Title

• [4 / ¢]: Selects a track/video
• [4 / ¢]:Reverse/forward search (Hold)

Track no./Playing time Stops playback

*1 [5 / ∞] may not function depending on how you select the current track/video.
*2 Not applicable in “iPod MODE.”

Continued on the next page

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 45

19/1/09 9:47:14 AM

ENGLISH

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod

The following operations/settings are only
available in “HEAD MODE.”
• To display the <iPod Artwork>,
16.
• To select track/video from <Search Mode>,
26.
• To select the playback mode,
23, 24.
• To change the play speed of the audio books,
24.

Playback starts automatically.
• When you connect the iPod to the USB
terminal, “ iPod” is selected as the source
and playback starts automatically.

Ÿ Press [4] or [¢] to select a track/
video.
You cannot resume playback for video sources.

When connected with the interface adapter
Enters main menu

Track no./Playing time

SOURCE

iPod
FLAT
REPEAT

3:00

• [4 / ¢]: Selects tracks
• [4 / ¢]: Reverse/forward search (Hold)

Song Name
Artist Name
Album Title

Starts playback/pause

Preparation:
Make sure <iPod> is selected for <External Input>. (

19)

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod].
Playback starts automatically.

Press [4] or [¢] to select a track.

46
EN38-49_KW-AVX720[EE]_2.indd 46

4/2/09 10:12:06 AM

Press [4] or [¢] to select the desired
item.

Press [3 / 8] to confirm the selection.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a track.
• When a track is selected finally, playback starts.
• To return to the previous menu, press [SEARCH].

Press [SEARCH] to enter the main menu.
“SEARCH” flashes on the screen during menu
operations.
• This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about 5 seconds.

3
4

ENGLISH

Selecting a track from the main
menu

23, 24.

To select the playback mode,

Changing the display information

• Skips 10 items at a time if there are more than
10 items. (Hold)

(

56)

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs
Ô Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the
beginning)

Using other external components
AV-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN/VIDEO IN jacks.
Assigned title (

24)

SOURCE

AV-IN
FLAT

3:00

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN].
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
To display the operation buttons while watching the playback picture,

34.

Continued on the next page

EXTERNAL DEVICES
EN38-49_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 47

19/1/09 9:47:16 AM

ENGLISH

Navigation screen
You can also connect a Navigation System to the VIDEO IN jack so that you can watch the navigation screen.
Preparation:
Make sure <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>. (

18)

To view the navigation screen
Press DISP on the monitor panel repeatedly. (

56)

• The aspect ratio of the navigation screen is fixed to <Full> regardless of the <Aspect> setting. (

15)

When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input> (
18)
• You can use the source “AV-IN” for listening to an audio source connected to the LINE IN jacks.

EXT-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter, KS-U57 (not
supplied) or AUX Input Adapter, KS-U58 (not supplied).
Assigned title (

24)

Preparation:
Make sure <External> is selected for <External Input>. (

19)

SOURCE

EXT-IN
FLAT

3:00

~ Press [SOURCE], then press [EXT-IN].
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
Changing the display information
(

56)

EXTERNAL DEVICES

EN38-49_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 48

19/1/09 9:47:17 AM

Caution on cleaning the unit
Do not use any solvent (for example, thinner, benzine,
etc.), detergent, or insecticide. This may damage the
monitor or the unit.

ENGLISH

Maintenance

To play new discs
Recommended cleaning method:
Gently wipe the panel with a soft, dry cloth.

Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)

Warped disc

Sticker and sticker residue

Stick-on label

Unusual shape

C-thru Disc (semitransparent disc)

Transparent or semitransparent parts on its
recording area

REFERENCES 49
EN38-49_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 49

19/1/09 9:47:18 AM

ENGLISH

More about this unit
General
Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the monitor panel, you
can also turn on the power. If the source is ready,
playback starts.

Tuner (FM only)
Storing stations in memory
• When SSM is over, received stations are preset in no.
1 (lowest frequency) to no. 6 (highest frequency).

Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down or has no
playable files, “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen. Eject the disc.

50
EN50-57_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 50

19/1/09 9:48:21 AM

Playing JPEG files

Playing DVD-VR

Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files

• For details about DVD-VR format and playlist, refer
to the instructions supplied with the recording
equipment.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN50-57_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 51

ENGLISH

Playing Recordable/Rewritable discs

19/1/09 9:48:24 AM

ENGLISH

Disc/file information shown on the
external monitor

• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV

The following screens appear only on the external
monitor.
• CD
TIME

T. RPT

Track Information
Album
Four seasons
Artist
Robert M. Smith
Title
Rain

00:14

Track : 6 / 14
Cloudy
Fair
Fog
Hail
Indian summer
Rain
Shower
Snow
Thunder
Typhoon
Wind
Winter sky

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
p

* If tag data includes “Jacket Picture” (baseline JPEG), it
will be displayed.

52
EN50-57_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 52

19/1/09 9:48:24 AM

ENGLISH

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN50-57_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 53

19/1/09 9:48:25 AM

ENGLISH

Icons for phone types
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the device.
: Cellular phone
: Household phone
: Office
: General
: Other than above

CD changer
• If you select a folder, which does not include any
music files, on the list (
26), you will hear a beep.
Select another folder including music files.

DAB
• Only the primary DAB service can be preset even
when you store a secondary service.

54
EN50-57_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 54

19/1/09 9:48:25 AM

ENGLISH

Menu settings
• If you change the <Amplifier Gain> setting from <High> to <Low> while the volume level is set higher than
“30,” the unit automatically changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
• After you change any of <Menu Language/Audio Language/Subtitle> settings, turn off then on the power,
and re-insert the disc (or insert another disc) so that your setting takes effect.
• When you select <16:9> for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the process for
converting the picture width.
• Even if <4:3PS> is selected, the screen size may become <4:3LB> for some discs.

Output signals

<D. Audio Output>

Playback disc

DVD

<PCM>

48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*

96 kHz, Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

with Dolby Digital
with MPEG Audio

Audio CD, Video CD
DivX/ with Dolby Digital
MPEG
with MPEG Audio
MP3/WMA
WAV

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream
MPEG bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM /
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

* Digital signals may be emitted at 20 or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs
are not copy-protected.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN50-57_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 55

19/1/09 9:48:26 AM

ENGLISH

Display information
• Available display information varies among the playback sources.
Each time you press DISP, the display changes to show the various information.

Ex.: When the playback source is a DVD video disc
SOURCE

SOURCE

DVD

DVD
FLAT

FLAT

CHAP. RPT

3:00

Playback picture screen
(only for video sources)

Source information screen

3:00

Playback picture and source
information screen *1

Navigation screen *2

24)

Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

• When any language other than <Руccĸий> is selected for <Language>. (

15)

Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

56
EN50-57_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 56

19/1/09 9:48:27 AM

Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU

FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA

KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE

NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
QU
RM
RN
RO
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS

Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu

ENGLISH

Language codes (for DVD/DivX language selection)

JVC bears no responsibility for any loss of data in an iPod/iPhone and/or USB mass storage class
device while using this unit.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN50-57_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 57

19/1/09 9:48:27 AM

ENGLISH

58
EN58-65_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 58

19/1/09 9:49:31 AM

TUNER

General

Symptom

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting

Remedy/Cause

• No sound comes out of the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The screen is not clear and legible.
Sunshine from the windshield may cause this symptom.
14)
Adjust <Bright>. (
• “Position Error Push Open Key”
The monitor panel angle has been forcibly adjusted, or its
appears on the screen.
adjustment has been interrupted while opening or closing.
Press [OPEN/TILT].
• “Mecha Error Push Reset” appears on Reset the unit. (
3)
the screen, and the panel does not
move.
• “No Signal” appears.
• Change the source.
• Start the playback on the external component connected to
VIDEO IN jack.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Signal input is too weak.
• The buttons on the monitor panel do When the monitor panel is open, only VOL +/– and
work. The other buttons do not function.
not work.
• The unit does not work at all.
3)
Reset the unit. (
• The touch panel does not respond
• Keep your hands and the touch panel clean and dry.
properly.
• Eliminate static electricity and do not place magnetic items
• <Illumination> function does not
near the unit.
work properly.
• Leave the unit until the temperature becomes stable in the
car.
• A rubber mat on the floor may cause this symptom. In this
case, do not use the rubber mat.
• SSM automatic presetting does not Store stations manually. (
25)
work.
• Static noise while listening to the
Connect the aerial firmly.
radio.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN58-65_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 59

19/1/09 9:49:35 AM

Symptom

ENGLISH

• Disc can be neither recognized nor
played back.
• Disc cannot be ejected.
•
•

Disc in general

•
•
•
•

•
•
•

DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/MP3/WMA/WAV

•

•
•
•
•

Remedy/Cause
Eject the disc forcibly. (

60
EN58-65_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 60

19/1/09 9:49:36 AM

• Noise is generated.

USB

• Tracks cannot play back as you
have intended them to play.
• “Now Reading...” keeps flashing
on the screen.

Remedy/Cause
The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to another
file.
Playback order may differ from the one played back using other
players.
• Readout time varies depending on the USB device.
• Do not use too many hierarchy and folders.
• Turn off the power then on again.

ENGLISH

Symptom

•

Bluetooth

•

•
•

•

•
•

For available characters,

56.

The tracks are not properly copied into the USB device. Copy tracks
again, and try again.
This unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular phone and
one Bluetooth audio player at a time.
While connected to a device, this unit cannot be detected from
another device. Disconnect currently connected device and search
again.
The unit does not detect the
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
Bluetooth device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device.
The unit does not make pairing
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target device. If
with the Bluetooth device.
the PIN code of the device is not indicated on its instructions, try
“0000” or “1234.”
• Select the device name from <Special Device>, then try to
29)
connect again. (
Echo or noise occurs.
Adjust the microphone unit (supplied with Bluetooth Adapter)
position.
Phone sound quality is poor.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth cellular
phone.
• Move the car to place where you can get a better signal reception.
The sound is interrupted or
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth audio
skipped while using a Bluetooth
player.
audio player.
• Disconnect the device connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the player again.
“NEW DEVICE” cannot be selected Bluetooth audio player is already connected. To select “NEW
for “Bluetooth AUDIO.”
DEVICE,” disconnect it. (
29)
The connected audio player
Check whether the connected audio player supports AVRCP (Audio
cannot be controlled.
Video Remote Control Profile).
Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN58-65_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 61

19/1/09 9:49:37 AM

CD changer

ENGLISH

DAB tuner

AV-IN

iPod /iPhone

• Sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the screen.
• Playback stops.

62
EN58-65_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 62

19/1/09 9:49:38 AM

Maximum Power Output:
Continuous Power Output
(RMS):

AMPLIFIER

Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control Range:

Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:

Frequencies:
Level:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Audio Output Level:
• LINE OUT (REAR)
• SUBWOOFER

Line-Out Level/
Impedance:
Output Impedance:

Color System:
Video Output (composite):
Other Terminals:
Input:

FM/AM TUNER

Frequency Range:

FM Tuner:

MW Tuner:
LW Tuner:

Output:
Others:
FM1/FM2:
FM3:
AM:
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel Selectivity
(400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity/Selectivity:
Sensitivity:

ENGLISH

Specifications

1 kΩ
PAL
1 Vp-p/75 Ω
LINE IN, VIDEO IN, Aerial input, USB
input, Steering wheel remote input
VIDEO OUT
CD changer, DIGITAL OUT (optical)
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
65.0 MHz to 74.0 MHz
(MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz
9.3 dBf (0.8 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
65 dB
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
40 dB
20 μV/40 dB
50 μV

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES
EN58-65_KW-AVX720[EE]_f.indd 63

13/2/09 2:02:46 PM

DVD/CD
GENERAL

MONITOR

USB

ENGLISH

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Required space for installation and the monitor ejection
Dashboard

111

CAUTION: When ejecting the monitor, leave an
open space for the monitor to come out. If you do
not, the monitor may obstruct the steering wheel
and gearshift lever operations, and this may result
in a traffic accident.
Unit: mm

161

91.3

64
EN58-65_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 64

19/1/09 9:49:40 AM

General
Reset ..................................................................3, 6
Volume ................................................6, 7, 10, 21
AV Menu ........................................................ 6, 13
Source..................................................6, 8, 11, 34
Short Cut ...................................................6, 8, 34
RM-RK252 ........................................9–11, 35–38
Clock .............................................................12, 15
Display demonstration ...........................12, 14

Tuner
Listening to the radio (FM/AM) ..6, 9, 10, 30
Auto/manual search................................10, 30
Select preset station ........................... 9, 25, 30
Store station
(automatically/manually) ...................22, 25
Improve FM reception ...................................22
PTY Search .........................................................31
Store programme type..................................31
PTY Standby Reception.................................22
PTY codes ....................................................22, 50
Network-Tracking Reception ...............17, 50
Programme Search .........................................18

Disc
Open/close ................................................... 7, 32
Eject ....................................................................3, 7
Lock/unlock disc ..............................................32
Playable disc type ............................................. 4
Display information ........................................33
Repeat/random play ........................23, 24, 38
Select track/folder ......................10, 25, 33–36
Select title/program/playlist ..10, 11, 33–35
Start/stop/pause/resume
playback ........................................... 11, 34–36
Search/skip ......................................... 10, 34–36
OSD .................................................10, 16, 37, 38
PBC playback ......................................10, 11, 35

USB
Attach/detach...................................................39
Start/pause playback ..............................11, 39
Repeat/random play ...............................23, 24

CD changer
Start playback ............................................26, 43
Repeat/random play ...............................23, 24

DAB
Listening to the DAB service .......................44
Improve listening ............................................23
Preset service ....................................................25
TA/PTY Standby Reception..................... 6, 22
Announcement Standby Reception.........23
DAB AF ................................................................18

iPod
Connect .......................................................45, 46
Start/pause playback ..............................45, 46
Head Mode/iPod Mode.................................45
Repeat/random play ...............................23, 24
Audiobooks .......................................................24
Select track ..........................................26, 45, 46

External component
AV-INPUT ............................................................47
EXT-INPUT ..........................................................48

REFERENCES
EN58-65_KW-AVX720[EE]_f.indd 65

ENGLISH

Operation index

13/2/09 11:35:57 AM

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

Please reset your unit

Маєте ПРОБЛЕМУ з функціонуванням?

ENGLISH
РУCCKИЙ

DVD-ПРИЕМНИК С МОНИТОРОМ
ПРИЙМАЧ ТА ПРОГРАВАЧ DVD-ДИСКІВ ІЗ МОНІТОРОМ

KW-AVX720

УКРАЇНА

Instructions

Having TROUBLE with operation?

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

Повторно налаштуйте систему
Див. сторінку “Як повторно налаштувати пристрій”

CoverRear_KW-AVX720[EE]_f.indd 1

0109DTSMDTJEIN

KW-AVX720

Bіктор Компані оф Джепен Лімітед
12, 3-чоме, Морійя-чо, Канагава-ку, Йокогама, Канагава 221-8520, Японія

INSTRUCTIONS
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
ІНСТРУКЦІЇ

GET0604-001A
[EE]

18/2/09 11:02:04 AM

KW-AVX720
Installation/Connection Manual
Руководство по установке/подключению
Керівництво зі встановлення та з’єднання
GET0604-002A

0109DTSMDTJEIN

[EE]

ENGLISH

УКРАЇНА

РУCCKИЙ

Цей пристрій призначений для роботи під напругою 12 В
постійного струму; з електричними системами, що мають
заземлення ВІД’ЄМНОГО полюсу. Якщо ваше авто не оснащене
такою системою, потрібно використовувати інвертор напруги,
який можна придбати у дилерів устаткування JVC для автомобілів.

WARNINGS

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ

ПОПЕРЕДЖЕННЯ

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift lever operations,
as this may result in a traffic accident.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices such as air bags, as
this may result in a fatal accident.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate any unit while manipulating the steering wheel, as
this may result in a traffic accident.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while driving. It may lead to
carelessness and cause an accident.
• If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look around
carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.
• If the parking brake is not engaged, “Parking Brake” appears on the
monitor, and no playback picture will be shown.
– This warning appears only when the parking brake lead is
connected to the parking brake system built in the car.

• НЕ устанавливайте устройства и не прокладывайте провода в
местах, где:
– возникает препятствие для функционирования руля
и рычага переключения скоростей, так как это может
привести к аварии;
– возникает препятствие срабатыванию устройств
безопасности, например, пневмоподушки, что может
привести к несчастному случаю со смертельным исходом;
– может ухудшиться обзор.
• НЕ используйте устройство, когда управляете рулем; это
может привести к аварии.
• Водителю не следует смотреть на монитор во время
вождения. Это может быть опасно и может стать причиной
аварии.
• Если данное устройство используется во время поездки
на автомобиле, следует, не отвлекаясь, следить за
дорогой, иначе может произойти дорожно-транспортное
происшествие.
• Если стояночный тормоз не включен, на мониторе появляется
сообщение “Parking Brake” и изображение воспроизведения
отображаться не будет.
– Это предупреждение появляется только в том случае, если
провод стояночного тормоза подключен к стояночной
тормозной системе автомобиля.

• НЕ встановлюйте ніяких пристроїв і не приєднуйте жодних
кабелів у місцях, де:
– вони можуть перешкоджати вправлятися з кермом і важелем
перемикання передач, тому що це може призвести до аварії
на дорозі;
– вони можуть перешкоджати роботі таких пристроїв
безпеки, як подушки безпеки, тому що це може призвести до
смертельного випадку.
– затуляти огляд.
• НЕ виконуйте ніяких операцій з пристроєм під час керування,
тому що це може призвести до аварії на дорозі.
• Під час руху водій не повинен відволікатися й дивитись на
монітор. Це може призвести до необачності та аварії.
• Якщо вам потрібно скористатися пристроєм підчас руху,
уважно стежте за дорогою, щоб не потрапити в аварію.
• Якщо автомобіль не на ручному гальмі, на екрані монітора
з’являється напис “Parking Brake”, і зображення не буде
виводитися.
– Це попередження з’являється тільки тоді, коли провід
ручного гальма з’єднаний з ручним гальмом автомобіля.

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before
installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.
Notes on electrical connections:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows
frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with maximum power
of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change <Amplifier Gain>
setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 21 of
the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads
with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it
when removing this unit.

Heat sink
Радиатор
Радіатор

Parts list for installation and connection
If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.

Main unit
Главное устройство
Головний пристрій

Flat head screws*1 (M5 × 8 mm)
Болты с плоской головкой*1 (M5 × 8 мм)
Гвинти з пласкими голівками*1
(M5 × 8 мм)

Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем
Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и
осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.
• После установки обязательно заземлите данное
устройство на шасси автомобиля.
Примечания по электрическим подключениям:
• Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем
указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком
часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной
мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели
устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω).
Если максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт,
перейдите в режим <Amplifier Gain>, чтобы предотвратить их
повреждение (cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр.
21).
• Для предотвращения ороткого замыкания заклейте
НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей лентой.
• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.
Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.

Зауваження щодо електричних з’єднань:
• Заміняти запобіжник можна тільки запобіжником із вказаними
у специфікації номінальними характеристиками. Якщо
запобіжники часто виходять з ладу, проконсультуйтеся з
дилером устаткування JVC для автомобілів.
• Рекомендується підключати гучномовці з максимальною
потужністю, що перевищує 50 Вт (як для розташованих
спереду, так і для тих, що розміщуються позаду.
Рекомендований діапазон опору: від 4 до 8 Ом).
У разі, якщо потужність є меншою чим 50 Вт, змініть
налаштування <Amplifier Gain> (коефіцієнт підсилення)
задля запобігання пошкодженню гучномовців (див. стор. 21
ІНСТРУКЦІЇ).
• Для запобігання короткому замиканню, заізолюйте клеми
провідника, ЩО НЕ ВИКОРИСТОВУЄТЬСЯ, ізоляційною
стрічкою.
• По закінчені роботи радіатор стає надто гарячим. Будьте
обережні, не торкайтесь його при видалені цього пристрою.

Список деталей для установки и
подключения

Перелік деталей для встановлення та
з’єднання

При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с
дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.

Якщо будь-яка з цих деталей відсутня, негайно зверніться до
дилера устаткування JVC для автомобілів.

Trim plate
Декоративную панель
Знімна пластина

Sleeve*1
Муфта*1
Екран*1

Crimp connector
Обжимные разъемы
Обтиснене рознімання

*1 Fitted to the main unit when shipped.

Brackets*1
Декоративную
панель*1
Кронштейны*1

Use these screws when installing the unit without the supplied sleeve.
Используйте эти болты при установке устройства без поставляемой муфты.
Використовуйте ці гвинти для встановлення пристрою без монтажного короба,
що постачається в комплекті.

Round head screws*1 (M2.6 × 3 mm)
Болты с круглой головкой*1 (M2,6 × 3 мм)
Гвинти з напівкруглими голівками*1
(M2,6 × 3 мм)

Power cord
Кабель питания
Шнур живлення

Для запобігання коротким замиканням рекомендується
перед встановленням пристрою відключити від’ємну клему
акумулятора та виконати усі електричні з’єднання.
• Переконайтеся у тому, що після закінчення встановлення
пристрою, виконано його заземлення на шасі авто.

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Болты с плоской головкой (M5 × 8 мм)
Гвинти з пласкими голівками
(M5 × 8 мм)
Remote controller
Диcтaнциoннoго
yпpaвлeния
Пульт дистанційного
керування

Batteries
Батареи
Батареї

*1 Закреплено на основном устройстве при поставке.

Round head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Болты с круглой головкой (M5 × 8 мм)
Гвинти з напівкруглими голівками
(M5 × 8 мм)

*1 приєднаний до головного пристрою під час транспортування.

Install1_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 1

19/1/09 11:22:05 AM

INSTALLATION
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)

УСТАНОВКА
ВСТАНОВЛЕННЯ
(УСТАНОВКА В ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ) (МОНТАЖ НА ПРИЛАДОВУ ПАНЕЛЬ)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. However, you
should make adjustments corresponding to your specific car. If you
have any questions or require information regarding installation kits,
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company
supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed
by a qualified technician.

Remove the audio system originally installed in the car, together
with its mounting brackets.
Note: Be sure to keep all the screws and parts removed from
your car for future use.

2
3

Install the sleeve in the dashboard of the car.
Attach the brackets to the main unit.
• Make sure to use the supplied flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm). If
longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.

Do the required electrical connections.
• See pages 3 – 6.

5
6

Install the main unit in the sleeve.
Attach the trim plate.

Предостережение во время установки
• При установке устройства используйте только прилагаемые
болты в соответствии с инструкцией. В случае использования
других болтов существует вероятность, что детали могут быть
ненадежно закреплены или повреждены.
• Аккуратно затягивайте болты,чтобы не пережать
соединительные кабели.
• При установке для обеспечения правильной вентиляции не
закрывайте вентилятор на задней панели.

2
3

Выполните необходимые электрические соединения.
• См. стр. 3 – 6.

5
6

Установите главное устройство в муфту.

Перед встановленням пристрою
• При встановленні пристрою, використовуйте тільки гвинти
з комплекту постачання, відповідно до інструкцій. Якщо
використовуються інші гвинти, кріплення окремих частин
пристрою може ослабнути або пошкодитись.
• При затягуванні гвинтів чи болтів будьте обережні, щоб не
затиснути жоден з’єднувальний шнур.
• При встановленні переконайтеся, що вентилятор задньої
панелі не заблокований для забезпечення належної вентиляції.

Вийміть аудіосистему, встановлену в автомобілі
виробником, разом з монтажними кронштейнами.
Примітка: Зберігайте усі гвинти та деталі, видалені з
автомобіля, для подальшого використання.

2
3

Встановіть екран у приладову панель автомобіля.

Вмонтируйте муфту в приборную панель автомобиля.
Прикрепите кронштейны к главному устройству.
• Используйте болты с плоской головкой (M5 × 8 мм),
которые входят в комплект поставки. При использовании
более длинных болтов можно повредить устройство.

Виконайте необхідні електричні з’єднання.
• Див. стор. 3 – 6.

5
6

Встановіть головний пристрій всередину екрану.

Приєднайте кронштейни до головного пристрою.
• Використовуйте лише гвинти із пласкими голівками (M5
× 8 мм), що входять до комплекту поставки. Якщо гвинти
довші, вони можуть пошкодити пристрій.

Приєднайте знімну пластину.

Прикрепите декоративную панель.

Наведена нижче ілюстрація демонструє типовий процес
встановлення. Проте необхідно виконати регулювання у
відповідності до типу автомобіля. У разі будь яких запитань
або потреби у інформації щодо набору інструментів та
спорядження, проконсультуйтеся з дилером устаткування JVC
для автомобілів або з компанією, що постачає набір інструментів
та спорядження.
• Якщо ви не впевнені щодо правильності встановлення цього
пристрою, залучіть до його встановлення кваліфікованого
спеціаліста.

Sleeve
Муфта
Екран

Brackets
Декоративную панель
Кронштейны

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Болты с плоской головкой
(M5 × 8 мм)
Гвинти з пласкими голівками
(M5 × 8 мм)

Trim plate
Декоративную панель
Знімна пластина

Round head screws (M2.6 × 3 mm)
Болты с круглой головкой (M2,6 × 3 мм)
Гвинти з напівкруглими голівками
(M2,6 × 3 мм)

Unit: mm
Единицы измерения: мм
Пристрій: мм

Dashboard
Приборная
панель
Приладова
панель

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚, taking it
into account that the monitor would eject when in use.
Установите устройство под углом менее 30°,
принимая во внимание то,что при использовании
монитор будет выдвигаться.
Встановіть пристрій під кутом, меншим ніж
30˚, зважаючи на те, що монітор під час його
використання буде знаходитися у висунутому стані.

111

Required space for installation
and the monitor ejection
Необходимое пространство
для установки и извлечения
монитора
Місце, потрібне для
встановлення та висування
монітора

161

30˚

91.3

Install1_KW-AVX720[EE]_3.indd 2

10/2/09 11:10:33 AM

ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ

ЕЛЕКТРИЧНІ З’ЄДНАННЯ

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker
connections:

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и
подключению громкоговорителей:

ЗАСТЕРЕЖЕННЯ щодо приєднання джерела
живлення та гучномовців:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к
аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет
повреждено.
• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей к кабелю
питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему соединений
громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.

• НЕ з’єднуйте провідники живлення гучномовців з
акумулятором. Невиконання такої вимоги призведе до
тяжкого ушкодження пристрою.
• ПЕРЕД тим, як з’єднати провідники живлення з
гучномовцями, перевірте схему з’єднання гучномовців вашого
авто.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

If your car is equipped with the ISO connector
Если автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO
Якщо ваше авто оснащене розніманням за
стандартом ISO
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.
• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.
• Приєднайте рознімання ISO, як рекомендовано на ілюстрації.

From the car body
От корпуса автомобиля
Від корпусу авто

ISO connector of the supplied power cord
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в комплект
поставки
Рознімання ISO шнура живлення, що входить до
комплекту постачання
View from the lead side
Вид со стороны выводов
Вид зі сторони електричних виводів

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobiles
Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall)
Для деяких авто марки VW/Audi або Opel (Vauxhall)
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.
• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.
Вам, можливо, прийдеться внести зміни до з’єднання провідників шнура живлення згідно з ілюстрацією.
• Перед тим, як встановлювати цей пристрій, зв’яжіться з уповноваженим дилером вашого авто.
Original wiring
Исходная схема
соединений
Початкова схема
з’єднання рознімань

Y: Yellow
Желтый
Жовтий

Modified wiring 1
Преобразованная схема
соединений 1
Змінена схема з’єднання
рознімань 1

R: Red
Красный
Червоний

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.
Если приемник не включается, используйте
преобразованную схему соединений 2.
Якщо пристрій не включається, скористуйтеся
зміненою схемою з’єднання рознімань 2.

Modified wiring 2
Преобразованная схема
соединений 2
Змінена схема з’єднання
рознімань 2

Connecting the parking brake lead / Подключение провода стояночного тормоза / З’єднання проводу ручного гальма
Parking brake lead (light green)
Провод стояночного тормоза (зеленого цвета)
Провід ручного гальма (ясно-зеленого кольору)

Crimp connector
Обжимные
разъемы
Обтиснене
рознімання

Parking brake
Стояночный тормоз
Ручне гальмо

To metallic body or chassis of the car
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля
На металічний корпус або на шасі авто

Parking brake switch (inside the car)
Переключатель стояночного тормоза
(внутри автомобиля)
Перемикач ручного гальма (всередині
автомобіля)

Connecting the reverse gear signal lead (for rear view camera) / Подсоединение провода сигнал включения задней скорости (для
видеокамеры заднего вида) / З’єднання з провідником сигналу заднього ходу (для камери заднього виду)
Locate the reverse lamp lead in the trunk.

Знайдіть у багажнику провід ліхтаря задньої ходи.

Найдите в багажнике провод задней фары.
Extension lead (not supplied for this unit)
Удлинитель (не входит в комплект поставки)
Подовжувач (не входить до комплекту постачання даного пристрою)

Purple with white stripe
Пурпурный с белой полосой
Пурпурний з білою смужкою

REVERSE
GEAR
SIGNAL

Crimp connector (not supplied for this unit)
Обжимные разъемы (не входит в комплект поставки)
Обтиснуте рознімання (не входить до комплекту постачання даного пристрою)
To car battery
К аккумулятору автомобиля
До акумулятору

To reverse lamp
К задней фаре
До ліхтаря задньої ходи

Reverse lamp lead
Провод задней фары
Провід ліхтаря задньої
ходи

Reverse lamps
Задние фары
Ліхтарі задньої
ходи

Install1_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 3

19/1/09 12:03:26 PM

ENGLISH

РУCCKИЙ

УКРАЇНА

Connections without using the ISO connector / Подключение без использования разъема ISO / З’єднання без допомоги з’єднувача ISO
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car
body may be different in color.

1
2
3
4

Cut the ISO connector.
Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order
specified in the illustration below.

Перед тим, як з’єднати: Уважно перевірте електричну
схему з’єднання вашого авто. Неправильне з’єднання може
спричинити тяжке пошкодження вашого пристрою.
Контакти шнура живлення та рознімання, яке йде від корпуса
авто можуть мати різні кольори.

1
2

Обрежьте разъем ISO.

1
2

Від’єднайте рознімання ISO.

3
4

Подключите кабель антенны.

3
4

Приєднайте провід антени.

Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в указанном
ниже порядке.

Connect the aerial cord.
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

DIGITAL OUT
(see diagram

/ см. схему

/ див. схему

В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к
устройству.

З’єднайте кольорові провідники шнура живлення у порядку,
що наведений нижче на ілюстрації.

Виконайте кінцеве приєднання джгута провідників до
пристрою.

)

Rear ground terminal / Задний разъем заземления / Тильна клема заземлення
(see diagram

/ см. схему

/ див. схему

)
Power cord
Кабель питания
Шнур живлення

(see page 3 / см. стр. 3 / див. стор. 3)
To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram ) / К рулевому пульту дистанционного управления
(см. схему ) / Для блоку дистанційного керування (див. схему )
SUBWOOFER
(see diagram

/ см. схему

/ див. схему

)
ISO connector
Разъем ISO

Fan / Вентилятор / Вентилятор

15 A fuse
Предохранитель
15 A
Запобіжник 15 А

Black
Черный
Чорний

To external components
(see diagram )
К внешним устройствам
(см. схему )
До зовнішніх компонентів
(див. схему )
VIDEO OUT
(see diagram / см. схему
див. схему )

VIDEO IN
(see diagram / см. схему
див. схему )
LINE IN
(see diagram / см. схему
див. схему )

REAR OUT
(see diagram / см. схему
див. схему )

Yellow *2
Желтый *2
Жовтий *2

Red
Красный
Червоний

Рознімання ISO

Ignition switch
Переключатель зажигания
Перемикач запалювання

To metallic body or chassis of the car
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля
На металічний корпус або на шасі авто
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the
ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)
(постоянный 12 В)
На клему фази у блоці запобіжників для з’єднання з акумулятором авто
(обминаючи перемикач запалення) (постійний струм 12 В)
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке
предохранителя
На допоміжну клему у блоці запобіжників

Fuse block
Блок
предохранителя
Блок запобіжників

/
Orange with white stripe
Оранжевый с белой полосой
Помаранчевий із білою смужкою

Brown
Коричневый
Коричневий

To car light control switch
К контрольному переключателю освещения автомобиля
До реле управління освітленням автомобіля

To cellular phone system
К системе сотового телефона
На систему стільникового телефону

Aerial terminal / Разъем антенны / Рознімання антени
Light green
Зеленого цвета
Ясно-зелений

To parking brake (see page 3)
К стояночному тормозу (см. стр. 3)
До ручного гальма (див. стор 3)
Crimp connector
Обжимные разъемы
Обтиснене рознімання

Blue with white stripe
Синий с белой полосой
Синій з білою смужкою

White with black stripe
Белый с черной полосой
Білий з чорною смужкою

White
Белый
Білий

Gray with black stripe
Серый с черной полосой
Сірий з чорною смужкою

Left speaker (front)
Левый громкоговоритель (передний)
Лівий гучномовець (передній)

*1 Not supplied for this unit.
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead
must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.

Gray
Серый
Сірий

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
(200 mA max.)
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны
(макс. 200 мА)
На провідник зовнішнього пристрою іншого обладнання або на
антену (якщо встановлена) (максимальний струм 200 мА)

Green with black stripe
Зеленый с черной полосой
Зелений з чорною смужкою

Right speaker (front)
Правый громкоговоритель
(передний)
Правий гучномовець (передній)

Purple with black stripe
Пурпурный с черной
полосой
Пурпурний з чорною
смужкою
Left speaker (rear)
Левый громкоговоритель
(задний)
Лівий гучномовець (задній)

Green
Зеленый
Зелений

*1 Не входит в комплект.
*2 Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот провод,

Purple
Пурпурный
Пурпурний
Right speaker (rear)
Правый громкоговоритель
(задний)
Правий гучномовець
(задній)

*1 Не входить до комплекту постачання цього пристрою.
*2 Перед тим, як перевірити працездатність цього виробу до його
встановлення, цей контакт необхідно приєднати, інакше живлення
на прилад подаватися не буде.

иначе питание не включится.

Install2_KW-AVX720[EE]_3.indd 4

10/2/09 11:32:52 AM

Connecting the external amplifier and subwoofer / Подключение внешнего усилителя и низкочастотного динамика / Приєднання
зовнішнього підсилювача та низькочастотного динаміка

Можно подключить усилители для обновления автомобильной
стереосистемы.
• Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с белой
полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого оборудования
так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого устройства.
Только для усилителя:
– Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного
устройства, подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте
провода громкоговорителей данного устройства
неиспользованными.
– Для получения более чистого звука и предотвращения
внутреннего перегрева устройства можно отключить
встроенный усилитель и использовать для усиления
аудиосигнала только внешние усилители. См. стр. 21
ИНСТРУКЦИЙ (отдельный документ).

Remote lead *3 / Провод внешнего устройства *3 /
Провідник зовнішнього пристрою *3

Для покращення характеристик стереосистеми, до неї можна
підключити підсилювач.
• Підключіть провідник зовнішнього пристрою (синій з білою
смужкою) до провідника зовнішнього пристрою іншого
обладнання. Таким чином, ним можна буде керувати з цього
пристрою.
Тільки для підсилювача:
– Відключіть гучномовці від цього пристрою,
приєднайте їх до підсилювача. Залиште провідники
гучномовців такими, що не використовуються.
– Можна вимкнути вбудований підсилювач і спрямувати
звукові сигнали тільки на зовнішній(ні) підсилювач(і), щоб
отримати якісний звук і запобігти збільшенню температури
всередині пристрою. Див. стор. 21 ІНСТРУКЦІЇ (окрема книга).

Y-connector *3 / Разъем Y *3 /
Y-рознімання (двійник) *3

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Провод внешнего устройства (синий с белой полосой)
Провідник зовнішнього пристрою (синій із білою смужкою)

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны
На провідник зовнішнього пристрою іншого обладнання або на
антену (якщо встановлена)

JVC Amplifier
JVC-усилитель
Підсилювач JVC

Rear speakers
Задние
громкоговорители
Задні гучномовці

JVC Amplifier
JVC-усилитель
Підсилювач JVC

Subwoofer
Низкочастотный динамик
Низькочастотний динамік

Rear speakers
Задние громкоговорители
Задні гучномовці
Front speakers
Передние громкоговорители
Передні гучномовці

Connecting the external components / Подключение внешних устройств / З’єднує зовнішні компоненти
Video cord *3
Видеошнур *3
Відеошнур *3

AV amplifier or decoder
Усилитель или декодер AV
Підсилювач AV або декодер

External monitor

Внешний монитор
Зовнішній монітор
Digital optical cable *3
Цифровой оптический кабель *3
Цифровий оптичний кабель *3

KV-CM1 *3
Rear view camera
Камера заднего вида
Камера заднього виду

External component
Внешнее устройство
Зовнішній компонент

USB devices / Устройства USB / USB-пристрої

Connecting the iPod/iPhone to the USB terminal / Подключение iPod/
iPhone к разъему USB /Підключення iPod/iPhone до рознімання USB

USB cable (approx. 1.2 m)
Кабель USB (прибл. 1,2 м)
Кабель USB
(приблизно 1,2 м)

You can connect the iPod/iPhone to the USB terminal using the following cables:
• To listen to the music: USB 2.0 cable (supplied for the iPod/iPhone)
• To watch the video: USB Audio and Video cable for iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (not supplied)*8
Можно подключить iPod/iPhone к разъему USB с помощью следующих кабелей:
• для прослушивания музыки: кабель USB 2.0 (поставляется с iPod/iPhone)
• для просмотра видеозаписей: кабель USB Audio и Video для iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (не входит в
комплект поставки)*8
Можна підключити iPod/iPhone до рознімання USB за допомогою наступних кабелів:
• Для прослуховування музики: Кабель USB 2.0 (постачається для iPod/iPhone)
• Для перегляду відео: Кабель аудіо-відео USB для iPod/iPhone—KS-U30 (в комплекті не
постачається)*8

USB device
Устройство USB
USB-пристрій

USB 2.0 cable
Кабель USB 2.0
Кабель USB 2.0

You cannot connect a computer to the USB (
) terminal of the unit.
Вы не можете подключить компьютер к терминалу USB (
) устройства.
Підключити комп’ютер до входу пристрою (
), який використовується для підключення
USB-пристроїв, неможливо.

Apple iPod/iPhone
Apple iPod/iPhone
Програвач Apple
iPod/iPhone

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod является торговой маркой Apple Inc., зарегистрированной в США и других странах.
iPod є торговою маркою Apple Inc., зареєстрованою у Сполучених Штатах та інших країнах.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone является товарным знаком корпорации Apple Inc.
iPhone є торговим знаком Apple Inc.
*3
*4
*5
*6

Not supplied for this unit.
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).
Audio cord (not supplied for this unit).
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of
the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove
the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage
to the unit.
7
* Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them
to the amplifier.
*8 When using the cable, make sure <iPod (Off)> is selected for
<AV Input> (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

Apple iPod/iPhone
Apple iPod/iPhone
Програвач Apple
iPod/iPhone

KS-U30
*3
*4
*5
*6

Не входит в комплект.
Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки).
Аудиошнур (не входит в комплект поставки).
Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому
кузову или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской
(если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску перед тем, как
прикреплять провод). Невыполнение этого требования может
привести к повреждению данного устройства.
7
* Обрежьте выводы задних динамиков для разъема ISO автомобиля
и подсоедините их к усилителю.
*8 При использовании кабеля убедитесь в том, что выбрано
значение <iPod (Off)> для настройки <AV Input> (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ
ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 18).

*3 Не входить до комплекту постачання цього пристрою.
*4 Сигнальний шнур (не входить до комплекту постачання даного
пристрою).

*5 Аудіошнур (не входить до комплекту постачання даного пристрою).
*6 Надійно прикрутіть провідник заземлення до металічного корпусу
або до шасі авто у місці, яке не має фарбового покриття (якщо
воно є, видаліть фарбу до підключення провідника). Невиконання
цієї вимоги може призвести до пошкодження пристрою.
7
* Відключіть провідники задніх гучномовців від рознімання ISO, що
належить до авто, та з’єднайте їх із підсилювачем.
*8 При використанні кабелю переконайтеся, що для рознімання <AV
Input> обрано режим <iPod (Off)> (див. стор. 18 ІНСТРУКЦІЇ).

Install2_KW-AVX720[EE]_3.indd 5

4/2/09 10:42:52 AM

Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Подключение к рулевому пульту дистанционного управления / З’єднання з
блоком дистанційного керування, що встановлений на кермі

If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller,
you can operate this unit using the controller. To do it, a JVC’s
OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is
required. Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for
details.

Если автомобиль оборудован рулевым пультом дистанционного
управления, его можно использовать для управления данным
устройством. Для этого необходим адаптер рулевого пульта
дистанционного управления JVC OE (не поставляется),
подходящий для Вашего автомобиля. За более подробной
информацией обратитесь к поставщику автомобильных
аудиосистем компании JVC.

Якщо авто оснащене блоком дистанційного керування,
який встановлюється на кермі, можна керувати пристроєм
за його допомогою. Щоб зробити це, потрібен адаптер OE
блоку дистанційного керування компанії JVC (не входить до
комплекту), що підходить до даного типу авто. За додатковою
інформацією зверніться до свого регіонального дилера JVC.

Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Рулевой пульт дистанционного управления (устанавливаемый в автомобиле)
Блок дистанційного керування, встановлений на кермі (оснащення у авто)
Steering wheel remote input
Вход рулевого пульта
дистанционного управления
До зовнішнього компоненту

OE remote adapter (not supplied)
Aдаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления OE (не поставляется)
Адаптер OE блоку дистанційного керування OE (не входить до комплекту)

Connecting the external components to the CD changer jack / Подключение внешних устройств к разъему устройства автоматической
смены компакт-дисков / Приєднання зовнішніх компонентів до гнізда пристрою зміни CD-дисків

Model name
CH-X1500, etc.
KT-DB1000

You can also connect the following components through the various
JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.
Component
Bluetooth device
iPod
Portable audio player
with line output jacks
Portable audio player with
3.5 mm stereo mini jack

Model
name
Bluetooth adapter
KS-BTA200
Interface adapter for iPod KS-PD100

Adapter

Line input adapter

KS-U57

AUX input adapter

KS-U58

When connecting more than one component (maximum: three), it is
recommended that you connect the components in series as explained
below.

При подключении внешних устройств см. также руководства,
поставляемые для устройств и адаптера.

У разі приєднання зовнішніх компонентів, також зверніться
до посібника, що входить до комплекту постачання вказаних
компонентів та адаптера.

УВАГА:
Перед тим як приєднати зовнішній компонент,
переконайтеся утому, що ваш пристрій вимкнений.
Наведені нижче компоненти виробництва компанії JVC можна
приєднати через гніздо пристрою для зміни компакт-дисків.

Название модели
CH-X1500 и т. д.

Компонент виробництва JVC
Пристрій для зміни компактдисків (CD-CH)
Тюнер цифрового
радіомовлення JVC

KT-DB1000

Указанные ниже устройства можно также подключать с
помощью различных адаптеров JVC.
• Кабели подключения могут быть приобретены отдельно.
Название
модели
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100

Компонентный

Адаптер

Устройство Bluetooth
iPod

Адаптер Bluetooth
Интерфейсный адаптер
для проигрывателя iPod
Адаптер линейного
KS-U57
входа

Портативный
аудиопроигрыватель с
разъемами линейного
выхода
Адаптер входа AUX
Портативный
аудиопроигрыватель со
стерео мини-разъемом
3,5 мм

Компонент

Адаптер

Пристрій Bluetooth
iPod

Адаптер Bluetooth
Інтерфейсний
адаптер для iPod
Портативний аудіопрогравач Адаптер лінійного
із гніздами лінійних виходів входу
Портативний аудіопрогравач Адаптер вхідного
зі стереофонічним
сигналу від
мініатюрним штекером 3,5 мм зовнішнього
пристрою

Назва
моделі
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100
KS-U57
KS-U58

У разі приєднання більш ніж одного компонента (не більше
трьох) рекомендується приєднувати їх послідовно, згідно з
наведеними нижче поясненнями.

When connecting two components in series / Последовательное подключение двух устройств /
У разі послідовного приєднання двох компонентів
*9

KT-DB1000

За допомогою різних адаптерів виробництва JVC можна також
приєднувати такі компоненти.
• Можливо, з’єднувальні кабелі вам доведеться придбати
окремо.

KS-U58

Назва моделі
CH-X1500 та ін.

To disconnect the connector / Отключение
от разъема / Відключення з’єднувача

A KS-BTA200 / KT-DB1000 *10
B*9 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

CD changer jack / Разъем устройства автоматической
смены компакт-дисков / Гніздо пристрою зміни CD-дисків

When connecting three components in series / При подключении трех устройств последовательно / У
разі послідовного приєднання дрьох компонентів
*9

A KS-BTA200
B KT-DB1000
C*9 CD-CH / KS-PD100 /

Hold the connector top tightly (1), then pull it out
(2).

Крепко возьмитесь за верхнюю часть
разъема (1), затем выдерните его (2).
Візьміться за верхню частину (1)
з’єднувача, потім витягніть його (2).

KS-U57 / KS-U58
CD changer jack / Разъем устройства автоматической
смены компакт-дисков / Гніздо пристрою зміни CD-дисків

*9 To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see

*9 Чтобы использовать данные устройства, необходима правильная

page 19 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
*10 If KS-BTA200 is available, connect it to position A and connect
KT-DB1000 to position B.

настройка внешнего входа (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
на стр. 19).
*10 Если устройство KS-BTA200 доступно, подключите его к A, а
устройство KT-DB1000 к B.

*9 Для використання цих компонентів правильно налаштуйте
параметри зовнішнього входу (див. стор. 19 ІНСТРУКЦІЇ).

*10 Якщо присутній KS-BTA200, приєднайте його до деталі поз. A та
приєднайте KT-DB1000 до деталі поз. B.

TROUBLESHOOTING

BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ

НЕСПРАВНОСТІ

•
*
•
*
•
*
•
*
*
•
*

•
*
•
*
•
*

•
*
•
*
•
*
•
*
*

•
*
*
•
*

The fuse blows.
Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
Power cannot be turned on.
Is the yellow lead connected?
No sound from the speakers.
Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
Sound is distorted.
Is the speaker output lead grounded?
Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
Noise interfere with sounds.
Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using
shorter and thicker cords?
Unit becomes hot.
Is the speaker output lead grounded?
Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
This unit does not work at all.
Have you reset your unit?

•
*
*
•
*
•
*
*
•
*

Install2_KW-AVX720[EE]_1.indd 6

Сработал предохранитель.
Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?
Питание не включается.
Подключен ли желтый провод?
Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.
Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода
громкоговорителей?
Звук искажен.
Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)
громкоговорителей?
Шум мешает звучанию.
Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси
автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?
Устройство нагревается.
Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)
громкоговорителей?
Приемник не работает.
Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?
6

•
*
•
*
*
•
*

Вийшов з ладу запобіжник.
Чи правильно приєднані червоний та чорний провідники?
Не можна включити живлення.
Чи приєднаний жовтий провідник?
Звук з гучномовців відсутній.
Чи не замкнуто “на коротко” вихідні провідники гучномовця?
Звук спотворений.
Чи не заземлені вихідні провідники гучномовця?
Чи заземлені разом провідники “–” лівого та правого
гучномовця?
Звук чути з перешкодами.
Чи приєднано тильну клему заземлення до шасі авто за
допомогою коротших та товстіших шнурів?
Пристрій нагрівається.
Чи не заземлені вихідні провідники гучномовця?
Чи заземлені разом провідники “–” лівого та правого
гучномовця?
Цей пристрій не працює взагалі.
Чи ви переналаштовували пристрій?

19/1/09 11:21:43 AM

</pre><hr>Source Exif Data: <br /><pre>File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.4
Linearized : Yes
Modify Date : 2009:03:27 11:42:45+09:00
Create Date : 2009:01:06 01:40:39Z
Page Count : 362
Has XFA : No
Page Layout : SinglePage
About : uuid:7709cb74-b7ec-459a-ad1c-445fd442667e
Producer : Acrobat Distiller 5.00 for Macintosh
Creation Date : 2009:01:06 01:40:39Z
Mod Date : 2009:03:27 11:42:45+09:00
Author : annielim
Metadata Date : 2009:03:27 11:42:45+09:00
Creator Tool : Adobe InDesign CS (3.0.1)
Document ID : uuid:1a7e4177-f1ec-4ace-b05f-0662dba43b51
Format : application/pdf
Creator : annielim
Title : CoverRear_KW-ADV792[J]f.indd
Page Mode : UseOutlines
</pre>
<small>EXIF Metadata provided by <a href="https://exif.tools/">EXIF.tools</a></small>

<div id="ezoic-pub-ad-placeholder-110">
<script async src="//pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/js/adsbygoogle.js"></script>

<ins class="adsbygoogle"
style="display:block"
data-ad-client="ca-pub-0545639743190253"
data-ad-slot="6172135303"
data-ad-format="link"></ins>
<script>
(adsbygoogle = window.adsbygoogle || []).push({});
</script>
</div>
</div>
<div id="catlinks" class="catlinks catlinks-allhidden" data-mw="interface"></div> <div class="visualClear"></div>
</div>
</div>
<div id="mw-navigation">
<h2>Navigation menu</h2>

<form action="https://usermanual.wiki/search.php" id="searchform">
<div id="simpleSearch">
<input type="search" name="search" placeholder="Search UserManual.wiki" title="Search UserManual.wiki [ctrl-option-f]" accesskey="f" id="searchInput" tabindex="1" autocomplete="off"><input type="hidden" value="Special:Search" name="title"><input type="submit" name="go" value="Go" title="Find a User Manual" id="searchButton" class="searchButton"> </div>
</form>
</div>-->
<ul>
<li id="pt-mycontris"><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/upload" title="Upload User Manual" accesskey="y">Upload a User Manual</a></li>
</ul>
</div>
<div id="left-navigation">
<div id="p-namespaces" role="navigation" class="vectorTabs" aria-labelledby="p-namespaces-label">
<h3 id="p-namespaces-label">Versions of this User Manual:</h3>
<ul>
<li id="ca-nstab-main"><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Jvc/JvcGet0602001AUsersManual320825.1455977929" title="User Manual Wiki" accesskey="c">Wiki Guide</a></span></li> <li id="ca-nstab-main"><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Jvc/JvcGet0602001AUsersManual320825.1455977929/html" title="HTML" accesskey="c">HTML</a></span></li> <li id="ca-nstab-main"><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Jvc/JvcGet0602001AUsersManual320825.1455977929/amp" title="Mobile AMP" accesskey="c">Mobile</a></span></li> <li id="ca-nstab-main" class="selected" ><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Jvc/JvcGet0602001AUsersManual320825.1455977929/help" title="Discussion / FAQ / Help" accesskey="c">Download & Help</a></span></li>
</ul>
</div>
</div>
<div id="right-navigation">
<div id="p-views" role="navigation" class="vectorTabs" aria-labelledby="p-views-label">
<h3 id="p-views-label">Views</h3>
<ul>

<li id="ca-view"><span><a href="#">User Manual</a></span></li>

<li class="selected" id="ca-edit"><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Jvc/JvcGet0602001AUsersManual320825.1455977929/help" title="Ask a question" accesskey="e">Discussion / Help</a></span></li>

</ul>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div id="mw-panel">
<div id="p-logo" role="banner"><a class="mw-wiki-logo" href="https://usermanual.wiki/Main_Page" title="Visit the main page"></a></div>
<div class="portal" role="navigation" id="p-navigation" aria-labelledby="p-navigation-label">
<h3 id="p-navigation-label">Navigation</h3>

</div>
<div class="portal" role="navigation" id="p-tb" aria-labelledby="p-tb-label">

</div>
</div>
</div>
<div id="footer" role="contentinfo">
<ul id="footer-info">
<li id="footer-info-lastmod">© 2025 UserManual.wiki</li>
</ul>
<ul id="footer-places">
<li id="footer-places-privacy"><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/ContactUs" title="UserManual.wiki:Contact Us">Contact Us</a></li>
<li id="footer-places-about"><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/DMCA" title="UserManual.wiki:DMCA">DMCA</a></li>
</ul>
<ul id="footer-icons" class="noprint">
<li id="footer-poweredbyico">

</li>
</ul>

</div>

</div></body></html>
<script src="/cdn-cgi/scripts/7d0fa10a/cloudflare-static/rocket-loader.min.js" data-cf-settings="48846ccc01599aca37e6010f-|49" defer></script>